801 3659 10A_Solaris_2.2_Users_Guide_199305 10A Solaris 2.2 Users Guide 199305
801-3659-10A_Solaris_2.2_Users_Guide_199305 801-3659-10A_Solaris_2.2_Users_Guide_199305
User Manual: 801-3659-10A_Solaris_2.2_Users_Guide_199305
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 632
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide
2550 Garcia Avenue
Mountain View, CA 94043
U.S.A.
Part No: 801-3659-10
Revision A, May 1993
.SunSoft
A Sun Microsystems, Inc. Business
© 1993 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
2550 Garcia Avenue, Mountain View, California 94043-1100 U.s.A.
All rights reserved. This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and distributed under licenses
restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this product or related documentation may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors, if any.
Portions of this product may be derived from the UNIX® and Berkeley 4.3 BSD systems, licensed from UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. and the University of California, respectively. Third-party font software in this product is protected by
copyright and licensed from Sun's Font Suppliers.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the restrictions
set forth in DFARS 252.227-7013 (c)(l)(ii) and FAR 52.227-19.
The product described in this manual may be protected by one or more u.s. patents, foreign patents, or pending applications.
TRADEMARKS
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Sun Microsystems Computer Corporation, the SMCC logo, SunSoft, the SunSoft logo,
Solaris, SunOS, OpenWindows, DeskSet, ONC, Magnify Help, NFS and ToolTalk are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. UNIX and OPEN LOOK are registered trademarks of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All other
product names mentioned herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.
All SPARC trademarks, including the SCD Compliant Logo, are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International,
Inc. SPARCstation, SPARCserver, SPARCengine, SPARCworks, and SPARCompiler are licensed exclusively to Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
The OPEN LOOK® and Sun™ Graphical User Interfaces were developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees.
Sun acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user
interfaces for the computer industry. Sun holds a non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface,
which license also covers Sun's licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs and otherwise comply with Sun's written license
agreements.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Corporation.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
X Window System is a trademark and product of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
/I
THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES ARE
PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN; THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED IN NEW
EDITIONS OF THE PUBLICATION. SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS AND/OR CHANGES IN
THE PRODUCT(S) AND/OR THE PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED IN THIS PUBLICATION AT ANY TIME.
@
,
Please
Recycle
Contents
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. xxix
1. Introduction to the Solaris User Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Logging in and Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Logging In .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Logging Out.. . . . .. . . ... . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
4
Overview of the OpenWindows Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Windows and Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Closing a Window to an Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Opening an Icon to a Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Mouse and Pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Versions of the Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Using the Mouse Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Pointer and Input Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Pointer Jumping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Menus and Pushpins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
iii
iv
Using the Workspace Menu. .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. ..
10
Using Submenus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Pinning a Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Using Window Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .
12
Using Window Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Choosing Menu Defaults. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . ... ..
14
Changing the Menu Default. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . ..
14
Window Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Drag and Drop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
Positioning Windows and Pinned Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Moving Multiple Windows. .. .. . . .. . . . . .. ... . . . ... . .
23
Moving a Window Front or Back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
Moving Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Resizing Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
Closing and Quitting Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Starting an Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
Elements of an Application's Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Opening, Saving, Including and Attaching Files. . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Opening a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Saving a Document. . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . ... . .
31
Introduction to the DeskSet Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
Starting DeskSet Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Working with Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Managing Your Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Managing Your Time. . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
39
Printing Your Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
Communicating on the Network. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
41
Customizing the OpenWindows Environment. . . . . . . . . .
42
Hidden Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
Getting Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
Magnify Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
More Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
Dismissing a Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
No Help...........................................
45
Help Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Desktop Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Help on Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
Other Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
Quick Access to Help Handbooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
Navigating through Handbooks. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
Closing the Help Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Exiting the Help Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
On-line Documentation: AnswerBooks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
2. File Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
File Manager Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
File Manager Base Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
File Manager File Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
Selecting File Manager Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
vi
Control Area Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
61
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
Go To Menu and Text Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
Folder View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
Folder View Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
Path Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Parts of the Path and Folder View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Path that is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
File Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
File Pane Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
Alternative Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
Large Icon View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
Small Icon View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
Icon By Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
Icon By Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
List By Name. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. .. . . .
74
List By Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
List By Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Opening Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Creating New Files and Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
Naming a Document or Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Moving and Copying Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Using Cut, Copy, Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
U sing Drag and Drop in File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
Dragging and Dropping Between Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
Transferring Files From Your System to Another. . . . . . . . . . .
85
Printing Files ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Finding Files and Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
Using the Go To Text Field and Menu. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .
87
Using Pattern Matching to Find Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
Pattern Matching in the Go To Text Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
Pattern Matching in the File Pane. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Using the Find Pop-up Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
89
Finding Files With the Find Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
Using the Wastebasket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
Creating a New Wastebasket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
Linking Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Creating a Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Removing a Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
File and Folder Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
Changing Properties and Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
Customizing Your File Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
General Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
101
New Folder Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
102
Current Folder Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
110
Go To Menu Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Custom Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
Advanced Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
Customizing Your File Manager Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
Using Floppy and CD Media. . . . . . . .. . .. ... . .. .. . . . ... ..
118
Using a Floppy Disk with File Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
Checking for a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
Viewing a File from the Contents of a Floppy Disk or CD.
119
Removing a Floppy Disk or CD from the Disk Drive. . . ..
121
Reformatting a Floppy Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
Unformatted Floppy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
Unlabeled Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
Renaming a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
125
Dragging and Dropping Files from Floppy Disk or CD to File
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
viii
Copying Files from Floppy Disk or CD to Floppy Disk. ..
126
3. Text Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
Text Editor Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
Text Editor Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
Text Editor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
129
Text Pane Pop-Up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
Find Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Extras Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
136
Creating a New File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
137
Working with an Existing File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
138
Saving the Existing File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
138
Saving the Modified File as a New File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
139
Editing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
139
Adding and Deleting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
139
Copying and Moving Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
140
Tips on Cutting and Pasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
141
Printing Text Editor Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
141
Splitting Panes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
142
Drag and Drop Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
143
Dragging Selected Text from the Text Editor. . . . . . . . . . ..
143
Dragging Complete Text Editor Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
144
Customizing Your Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
145
The .text_extras_menu File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
145
The .textswrc File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
147
Format of the .textswrc File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
147
4. Mul timedia Mail Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
149
How Mail Tool Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
150
Header Window Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
150
Mail Tool Header Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
150
Mail Message Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
151
Message Header Status Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
152
Contents
ix
x
Selecting Message Headers ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
152
Mail Tool Controls and Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
152
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
153
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
154
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
154
Compose Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
155
Custom Mail Tool Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
155
Mail File Text Field and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
155
Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
156
Mail Tool View Message Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
156
Using the Pushpin in the View Message Window. . . . . . ..
158
Viewing the Next or Previous Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
158
Viewing Messages With a Full Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
158
Viewing Multiple Mail Messages ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
159
Mail Tool Compose Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
159
Reading Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
162
Printing Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
164
Printing Mail Messages Using Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
164
Printing Mail Messages Using Print Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
165
Composing Messages. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . ..
166
Composing a New Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
166
Replying to a Message ................... . . . . . . . . . ..
167
Forwarding Messages to Third-Parties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
168
Using Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
169
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Using the Vacation Notifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
170
Deleting Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
172
U ndeleting Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
172
Finding Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
173
Mail Tool Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
174
Opening Mail Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
175
Opening Ordinary Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
176
Viewing Special Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
177
Sending Mail Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
178
Adding Mail Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
180
Renaming Mail Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
182
Moving Mail Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
183
Deleting Mail Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
185
Saving Changes for Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
185
Organizing Your Mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
186
Mail File Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
188
Creating a New Mail File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
189
Adding Messages to an Existing Mail File. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
191
Viewing a Mail File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
192
Viewing a Mail File Using the Header Window Controls.
192
Viewing a Mail File Using the Mail Files Window . . . . . ..
192
Editing a Mail File (Emptying, Renaming, Deleting) . . . . . . ..
193
Sorting the Contents of a Mail File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
193
Loading Saved Messages Back into Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
194
Contents
xi
xii
Loading a Message from the Mail Files Directory. . . . . . ..
194
Loading a Message from Another Directory . . . . . . . . . . ..
194
Loading the In-Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
195
Using Drag and Drop with Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
195
Dragging Mail to Other Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
195
Dropping Files onto the Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
197
Customizing Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
197
Header Window Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
198
Message Window Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
201
Compose Window Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
203
Automatically Storing Copies of Messages You Send. . . ..
207
Mail Filing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
208
Saving Mail to Another Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
210
Template Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
213
Alias Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
215
ExpertProperties ...................................
217
5. Calendar Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
221
Calendar Manager Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
222
Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
222
Calendar Manager Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
222
Views by Day, Week, Month, and Year. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
222
Calendar Manager Controls and Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
223
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
224
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
224
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Browse Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
225
Print Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
225
Navigation Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
225
Resizing Your Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
225
Calendar Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
226
Day View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
226
Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
227
Month View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
228
Year View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
229
Appointment List and To Do List Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
229
Displaying an Appointment or To Do List. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
231
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
231
Appointment Editor Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
232
Scheduling Appointments and To Do Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
235
Deleting an Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
238
Editing an Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
239
Appointment Reminders ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
240
Finding a Calendar Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
241
Finding a Specific Calendar Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
242
Dragging an Appointment Message from Mail Tool. . . . . . . ..
242
Multiple Calendars Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
243
U sing Multiple Calendars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
244
Browsing a Single Remote Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
256
Browsing a Single Remote Calendar One-Time Only. . . . . . ..
257
Contents
xiii
xiv
Setting the Calendar Manager Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
258
Customizing Your Calendar Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
259
Editor Defaults Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
261
Display Settings Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
262
Access List and Permissions Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
264
Adding Users to the Access List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
266
Deleting Users from the Access List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
267
Changing the Access List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
267
Printer Settings Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
268
Date Format Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
269
Printing Calendar Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
271
Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
271
Day View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
271
Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
273
Month View. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ... . . . . ..
274
Year View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
275
Printing Appointment and To Do Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
276
Using Calendar Manager with Mail Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
276
Sending Appointment Mail from Calendar Manager. . . ..
277
Creating an Appointment Message from Mail Tool. . . . ..
277
Displaying the Calendar Manager Monthly Icon. . . . . . . . . ..
278
Accessing Your Calendar from a Shell Tool or Command Tool
279
6. Command Tool, Shell Tool, and Console Window. . . . . . . ..
281
Command Tool. . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ..
282
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Command Tool Term Pane Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
283
Shell Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
287
Shell Tool Term Pane Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
288
Console ........................................ '. . . . ..
290
7. Clock................................................
291
Clock Icon and Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
291
Customizing the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
292
Changing to a Digital-Style Clock Face. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
294
Changing to a Roman-Style Clock Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
294
12-Hour or 24-Hour Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
295
Displaying a Second Hand and the Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
295
Changing the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
296
Using the Stopwatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
298
Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
299
Clock Keyboard Accelerators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
299
8. Calculator............................................
301
Calculator Icon and Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
302
Modes of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
302
Numeric Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
302
Display Notation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
304
Major Calculator Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
305
Number Manipulation Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
306
Miscellaneous Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
307
Memory Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
308
xvi
User-Defined Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
309
Performing Simple Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
310
Creating and Saving a Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
311
Financial Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
312
Ctrm: Compounding Term. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
313
Ddb: Double-Declining Depreciation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
314
Fv: Future Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
314
Pmt: Periodic Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
315
Pv: Present Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
316
Rate: Periodic Interest Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
316
SIn: Straight-line Depreciation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
317
Syd: Sum-of-the-years'-digits Depreciation. . . . . . . . . . . ..
318
Term: Payment Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
319
Logical Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
319
Scientific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
320
Calculator Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
322
Customizing Your Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
326
9. Performance Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
329
Performance Meter Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
329
Performance Meter Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
331
Customizing Performance Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
332
Performance Meter Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
333
Performance Meter Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
334
Performance Meter Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
334
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Performance Meter Display and Sample Intervals. . . . . ..
335
Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
336
10. Print Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
Print Tool Icons ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
337
Print Tool Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
338
Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
339
Typing the Filename in the Print Window . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
340
Dragging and Dropping the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
340
Choosing Another Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
341
Checking the Print Queue Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
342
Stopping a Print Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
343
Changing Print Tool Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
344
Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
345
Changing the Print Method with the Binder. . . . . . . . . . ..
346
Starting Print Tool from the Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
346
11. Audio Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347
About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
347
Audio Tool Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
347
Required Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
348
Invoking Audio Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
348
About Audio Tool's Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
349
Loading and Playing an Audio File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
350
Recording Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
351
Saving an Audio File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
353
Contents
xvii
xviii
Editing an Audio File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
354
Undoing an Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
356
Tips for Editing Audio Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
356
Sending a Voice Mail Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
356
Listening to a Voice Mail Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
358
Audio Tool Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
359
Base Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
359
Audio Tool Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
360
Display Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
360
Cursor and Pointer Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
360
Drag and Drop Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
361
Level Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
361
Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
361
Rev (Reverse) Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
362
Play Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
362
Fwd (Fast Forward) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
363
Rec (Record)/Stop Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
363
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
364
New ..............................................
364
Open...............................................
367
Save. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . ..
369
Save As.......... ......... .. ... . . ... . ....... ........
370
Include... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
372
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
373
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
373
Undo.............................................
373
Redo.. .. .... ......... ... . . .. . ... .... .. .. .. . . .. . ...
374
Cut.. . .. . ... ......... ... . . .. . ... .... .. . . .. . . .. . ...
374
Copy.............................................
374
Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
374
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
374
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
375
Edit Pop-Up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
377
Reset Pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
377
Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
377
Delete Unselected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
377
Delete All Silence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
378
Delete Silent Ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
378
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
378
Volume Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
378
Play.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
378
Record... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
379
Using the Audio Control Status Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
382
12. Tape Tool ............................................
383
Tape Tool Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
383
Tape Tool Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
384
Editing the List of Files in the Tape Contents Window. . . . . ..
385
Reading Files from a Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
387
Contents
xix
Read Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
387
Read Entire List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
387
Read Entire Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
388
Copying (Writing) Files onto Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
388
Checking the Tape Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
389
Retrieving (Reading) Files from a Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
390
Customizing the Tape Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
392
13. Image Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
395
Image Tool Icon and Window ................... . . . . . . ..
396
Opening Image Files and Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
397
Viewing Single Page Images and Multiple Page Documents 397
xx
Formats that Image Tool Can Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
397
Opening Your File in a Specific Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
399
Getting Information About Your Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
401
Saving Image Files and Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
401
Saving an Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
401
Save As .. ........... ....... ......... ...... ........
403
Save Selection As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
404
Save Page As Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
404
Printing Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
405
U sing the Image Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
407
Panning an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
407
Selecting An Area to Be Saved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
408
Flipping an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
409
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Rotating an Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
410
Zooming an Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
411
Viewing Multiple Page Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
412
Page Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
412
Page Viewing Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
413
Setting Image Tool Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
415
Status Messages, Error Messages and Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
416
Dragging and Dropping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
416
Image Tool Controls and Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
417
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
417
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
418
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
419
Some Standard Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
419
14. Snapshot.............................................
421
Snapshot Icon and Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
422
Snapshot Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
422
Snap Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
422
Snap Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
423
Hiding the Snapshot Window During Capture. . . . . . . . ..
423
Creating a Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
423
Snapping a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
423
Snapping a Region. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
424
Snapping the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
425
Viewing a Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
426
Contents
xxi
xxii
Loading a Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
426
Saving a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
427
Printing a Snapshot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
427
15. Icon Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
429
Icon Editor Icon and Base Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
429
Icon Editor Drawing Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
431
Adding Text to the Canvas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
433
Editing Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
436
Filing Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
441
Loading and Saving a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
441
Saving a New Icon.. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..
441
Saving a Modified Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
442
Clearing the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
442
Printing an Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
442
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
443
Grid Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
444
Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
445
Undo and Redo........................ ..... .......
445
Clear. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
445
Cut, Copy, and Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
445
Invert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
446
Properties Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
446
Icon Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
446
Icon Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
447
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Icon Editor Color Chooser Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
448
16. Binder...............................................
451
Binder Icon and Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
452
Binder Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
452
Binder Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
453
Updating and Viewing Private Binder Entries. . . . . . . . . ..
453
Updating and Viewing System and Network Binder Entries 454
Binder Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
456
Icon Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
457
File Type Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
461
Creating a New Binding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
467
Deleting a Binder Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
471
Changing a Binding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
471
Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
473
17. Customizing the Solaris Environment. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
475
Viewing Information About Your Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . ..
475
Your Workstation Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
476
Networking Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
477
System Memory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
477
Solaris 2.2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
478
Using the Workspace Properties Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
478
Change Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
480
Workspace Properties Window Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
481
Setting Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
481
Contents
xxiii
xxiv
Customizing Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
485
Choosing a Font Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
485
Specifying the Font Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
486
Listing the Available Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
486
Previewing Selected Font Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
486
Keyboard Menu Equivalents ..................... ; . ..
487
Other Keyboard Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
489
Modified Use of the Keyboard and Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
489
Keyboard Accelerators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
489
Erase Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
490
Move Caret Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
490
Function Keys ......................................
491
Keyboard Mouse Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
491
Mouse...............................................
493
Multi-Click Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
494
Mouse Button Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
494
Mouse Pointer Jumping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
495
Menu................................................
496
Setting the Drag-Right Distance of Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . ..
496
Customizing Menu Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
497
Programs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
498
Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
498
Setting the Screensaver Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
499
Setting the System Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
500
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Setting the Active Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
500
Setting the Default Locations for Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
501
Changing Scrollbar Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
501
Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
502
18. Utilities..............................................
505
Refresh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
505
Reset Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
505
Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
506
International Keyboard Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
507
Switching Between Virtual Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
508
Window Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
509
Using Window Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
509
Save Workspace. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
511
Lock Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
511
Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
512
19. Using AnswerBooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
513
The Contents of Your On-Line Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
513
AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
514
Closing or Quitting the AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer 518
Finding and Displaying a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
518
Opening an AnswerBook. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... . . . . . . ..
518
Navigating Through Sets and Books in an AnswerBook ..
520
Following Hypertext Cross-Reference Links. . . . . . . . . . ..
522
Searching with the Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
523
Contents
xxv
xxvi
Reusing and Changing Search Phrases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
526
Customizing Searches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
526
Advanced Search Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
527
Scoping the Search by Modifying the Library Contents. ..
527
Titles Only Searches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
527
Using Special Characters in Search Phrases. . . . . . . . . . . ..
528
Using Bookmarks Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
529
Creating a New Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
529
Viewing and Editing Your Bookmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
530
Accessing a Bookmarked Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
531
Modifying Your Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
533
Customizing the Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
535
Full Page/Partial Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
535
Magnifying the Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
535
Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
536
A. Solaris Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
539
DeskSet Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
539
Binder Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
539
Calculator Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
540
Calendar Manager Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
540
Clock Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
546
Drag and Drop Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
546
File Manager Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
547
Image Tool Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
549
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mail Tool Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
549
Print Tool Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
552
SnapShot Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
552
Tape Tool Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
553
OpenWindows Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
554
core Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
555
Blank Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
555
Jumbled Text Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
555
Problems with .xinitrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
556
Window Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
556
Window Frozen when Opening an Application. . . . . . . ..
556
Window Does Not Accept Input. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . ..
557
Workspace Properties Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
557
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
559
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
577
Contents
xxvii
xxviii
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Preface
The Solaris ™ 2.2 user environment is based on the OPEN LOOK® Graphical
User Interface. This manual provides new and experienced users with the basic
information needed to get started with the Solaris user environment (using
OpenWindowsTM and DeskSet™ applications). Additional topics covered here
include how to modify the OpenWindows Workspace, how to access
AnswerBook™ to view documents on-line, and Troubleshooting.
Audience
This guide should help you become familiar with the basics of the
OpenWindows environment and user interface concepts. The information in
this guide should help you to perform basic OpenWindows tasks, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Displaying and choosing from the Workspace menu
Moving an application icon
Opening and closing an application icon
Pinning and unpinning a pinnable window
Displaying and choosing from an application's File menu
Choosing exclusive or non-exclusive choice items on a properties window
Selecting items in a scrolling list
Using scrollbars
Selecting multiple objects
xxix
If you are not familiar with these operations, read Chapter 1, UIntroduction to
the Solaris User Environment" for information on how to use the mouse, icons,
windows, and menus. The on-line tutorial Introducing Your Desktop also
provides information about these OpenWindows elements.
Note that context-sensitive help is available for each application. Position the
pointer over the item you want help with, and press the Help key. A pop-up
window is displayed giving detailed information.
How this Guide is Organized
This guide is divided into several major components:
• Introduction to OpenWindows, DeskSet, Workspace and on-line help
concepts.
• Descriptions of the DeskSet applications. Each tool in the DeskSet has a
separate chapter with descriptions of the tool's windows, icon(s), controls,
and special features, and step-by-step instructions for accomplishing various
tasks. Each chapter concludes with a description of that tool's properties
that allow you to customize special features to your own preference. The
more experienced you become, the more likely it is that you will want to
customize features.
• Description of the Workspace properties and how to use them.
• A Troubleshooting section on the Solaris environment-OpenWindows,
DeskSet, and the WorkSpace Properties.
• The AnswerBook appendix provides information on using AnswerBook.
• Glossary entries define concepts that you may need to know as you become
familiar with the Solaris user environment.
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this guide:
• Terms introduced for the first time, variables, and book titles are in italic
type.
• Names of buttons, menu items, and settings have initial capitals (for
example, Choose Print from the File menu).
• Text that you type is in Courier font.
• Text that appears on the screen, such as a file name, is in Courier font.
xxx
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals (for example, Press the
Return key).
• Names of mouse buttons are referred to by function, not by location, and are
capitalized. For example "Press SELECT" is used, not "Press left." This
convention is used because the mouse buttons are customizable, so the left
mouse button might not be the SELECT button for everyone. See
Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment" and Chapter 18,
"Utilities" to learn how to customize your mouse button function
assignments.
SELECT
ADJUST
MENU
Figure P-l
Default Functions of the Mouse Buttons
The default mouse button function assignments are:
SELECT = the left mouse button
ADJUST = the middle mouse button
MENU = the right mouse button.
• When the entire menu is discussed in the text, or when the default menu
item is discussed, a circle, or default ring, surrounds the default item of the
menu. When you click SELECT on the menu button (without displaying the
menu) the default menu item is chosen.
• Illustrations that depict screen images are meant to be representative. For
example software version numbers are not shown in window headers.
• Keystroke combinations for keyboard menu equivalents are represented in
the software with the meta <> key. In this document they are represented as
meta + keyboard character. Keyboard accelerators and function keys are
documented here as well. For information on these keys, refer to
Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment."
xxxi
• This guide uses the following notation to describe choosing a menu option.
For example: choose Workspace ~ Programs.
Other Books
For additional information, refer to the following Solaris 2.2 books:
• Solaris 2.2 Advanced User's Guide
• SunOS 5.2 Setting Up User Accounts, Printers, and Mail
• Solaris 2.2 Basic Installation Guide
xxxii
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Introduction to the Solaris User
Environment
This chapter provides an introduction to the Solaris™ User environment,
which consists of the OpenWindows environment, and the DeskSet
applications. The DeskSet is a set of default programs-such as an electronic
mail application and a text editor.
The first major section, "Overview of the OpenWindows Environment" on
page 5, describes the elements of your desktop environment (Workspace) and
how to use them. The second major section, "Introduction to the DeskSet
Applications" on page 34, describes how to choose the right application for the
task you need to accomplish. The third and forth major sections talk about
using on-line Help and AnswerBook. You can choose the method of learning
that is most comfortable for you.
Those who have had previous experience with OpenWindows may want to
skip this introductory chapter and move on to the rest of the book where a
chapter is devoted to each of the DeskSet applications and the Workspace
Properties.
Logging in and Logging Out
Before you start, your system must be ready to use. Your system is ready to use
when Solaris 2.2 is fully installed, and the login prompt is on the screen. If
Solaris 2.2 is not installed, refer to the Solaris 2.2 Basic Installation Guide.
1
When you begin working on your system, you will need to log in. Logging in
tells the system who you are and what you have permission to do. Likewise,
when you finish, you will log out so that no one else can access your files
without permission.
Logging In
Since more than one person can have an account on a single system, each user
must log in using his or her own unique user name and password. Logging in
indicates who is using the system and what files they can access.
To log in:
1. Type your user name at the login prompt and press Return.
The user name tells the system who you are. Your user name should have
been defined during installation. For more information, refer to the Solaris
2.2 Basic Installation Guide. The Solaris operating environment recognizes the
difference between uppercase and lowercase letters, so make sure you type
the user name using the correct case.
The login prompt usually consists of your machine name (assigned as the
Hostname during the installation) followed by the word login:, as shown
in the example in Figure 1-1.
( genius login: johndoe
J
~.-------~
Figure 1-1
2
The login: prompt
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
15
2. Type your password at the Password: prompt and press Return.
You do not see the characters on the screen as you type your password, as
shown in the example in Figure 1-2.
geniUS login: johndoe
( Password:
J
' - - - - - - - - - - - - "
Figure 1-2
The Password Prompt
If you mistype the user name or password and have already pressed Return,
the system asks you to start over with your user name. See the example in
Figure 1-3.
genius login: johndoe
Password:
Login incorrect.
login:
Figure 1-3
Log in again with your user name
After you type your password, OpenWindows launches automatically ( if a
full installation was performed.)
Note - If OpenWindows does not launch automatically (for example, you may
have OpenWindows configured differently), you can start OpenWindows
manually. If you are unsure, contact your system administrator.
3. To start OpenWindows manually after you login, type openwin and press
Return.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
3
51
Logging Out
When you are done working on the system, you will need to log out. If you are
sharing a system, this allows other people to log in to your computer under their
own accounts.
To log out:
1. You must exit OpenWindows to log out. Press the MENU button and select
Exit.
A Notice appears asking you to confirm that you want to exit from
OpenWindows.
2. SELECT Exit.
Normally, when you exit OpenWindows, the system automatically logs you
out. However, if it does not, go to Step 3.
3. Type exi t (or logout) and press Return.
The login: prompt appears, as shown in the example in Figure 1-4. Now
another user can log in under their own account and use the system.
gen~us% jo~ndoe
[ genlus logln:
J
~-----------
Figure 1-4
4
Type Exit to Log Out
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Overview of the Open Windows Environment
When you start the Solaris software, you see the Workspace background on
your screen, as well as the DeskTop Intro, described later in this chapter. The
Workspace is the display area for objects such as windows, icons, and menus.
Figure 1-5 shows a portion of the Workspace with several open application
windows. Notice that the windows can overlap each other.
Mail Tool -/var/mail/egret
~~~( Compose
'7) Mail File:@)....<10-_ _ __
~~~(
'7) ~~~
Repondre
25/560
35/872
18/496
Look
Retu rned mai 1 :
Fish
881 M bytes (99%) avai lab Ie
[J
Figure 1-5
Salmon
[j
SwordFish
[J
Tuna
Partial View of the Workspace with Three Open Windows
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
5
You interact with the applications using the keyboard, the mouse, and an
arrow on the Workspace, called a "pointer," that moves in correspondence with
the mouse.
Windows and Icons
Several default applications appear on the Workspace when you start the
Solaris software. Each application runs in its own window. When you use the
OpenWindows environment, you open the applications that you need. You can
use several applications simultaneously, such as electronic mail, your daily
calendar, and a text editor.
@)
Mai I Too I -/var/mai I!egret
~~~(compose 'V) Mail File: @)
~~~(RepIY
1
U+ 2
3
U
4
U
5
U
U+ 7
8
U
9
U
N 10
thi ef@ci ci
patten@newbi rth
bgahl@scuba
aye rs@outhouse
aye rs@outhouse
mari ac@cel ti c
hami 1 ton@artemi s
abel son@sharonol ds
aquab 1u@cowman
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
'V) ~~~
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
13
42
49
50
51
51
00
13
34
58
18/506
46/1282
32/1110
17/532
17/511
90/2531
22/611
32/1232
21/647
Your Move
Proj ect Status
Inbox status
SunU Trai ni ng Regi strati on
vi command summary
Proj ect Schedule
meeti ng remi nde r
You r positi on pape r
Summer Coll aborati on
=
~
=
11 ite ms, 1 new, 2 de lete d
Figure 1-6
Multimedia Mail Tool Header Window
Closing a Window to an Icon
When a window is not in use, you can close it and keep it on the Workspace for
further use. When closed, an application becomes an icon-a small symbol that
represents the application. If you will not be using that application for some
time, you can quit it entirely-which clears it from the Workspace-and start it
again later. Figure 1-7 shows the icon for the Text Editor application.
(Chapter 3, "Text Editor," discusses Text Editor in more detail.)
6
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
15
Figure 1-7
Text Editor Icon
Opening an Icon to a Window
You can open an application icon (into a window) from its closed icon by
positioning the mouse pointer over the icon and pressing the MENU button
and selecting Open from the Window menu, or by double-clicking SELECT.
With double-clicking, the first click highlights a border around the icon, and
the second click opens it into a window. For information on using the mouse,
refer to "Mouse and Pointer" on page 7.
Mouse and Pointer
The easiest way to access the windows in the Workspace is to use your
mouse-the small electronic device that sits on a pad next to your workstation.
Notice that when you move the mouse, the pointer on the Workspace moves
with you to a new location. Figure 1-8 shows the pointer moving across the
Workspace.
Figure 1-8
Movement of the Pointer by the Mouse
Versions of the Pointer
The pointer changes shape to reflect current position and system activity.
Figure 1-9 shows various pointer types.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
7
51
"
- - - - - Basic pointer: Appears on Workspace
G:1
Busy pOinter: System cannot accept input
~ - - - - - Duplicate pointer: When user copies an item by dragging
Move pointer: When user moves an item by dragging
.,.
"one" II
Figure 1-9
Text duplicate (or duplicate and move) pointer: When user
duplicates or moves a portion of text by dragging
Examples of Pointer Types
Using the Mouse Buttons
The mouse buttons enable you to control the windows, icons, and menus on
the Workspace. The terminology of the mouse and pointer is as follows:
• Mouse buttons are referred to by function. From left to right these are:
SELECT, ADJUST, and MENU. Figure 1-10 shows the function of each
mouse button. Note that you can change this default arrangement.
Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment", describes how to swap
SELECT and MENU for left-handed use.
SELECT
ADJUST
MENU
Figure 1-10 Functions of the Mouse Buttons
• You click a mouse button by pressing and releasing it quickly.
• You double-click a mouse button by clicking twice quickly (within
approximately half a second or less) without moving the pointer.
• You click SELECT to choose an item.
• You click ADJUST to make a secondary choice or modify what you have
chosen with SELECT.
8
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• You press MENU (and hold) to make a choice from a menu. Throughout this
text, "press" means to press and hold.
• You release the mouse button to initiate the action.
• You move the pointer by sliding the mouse with no buttons pressed.
• You drag the pointer by pressing a mouse button while sliding the mouse.
Pointer and Input Area
Because you can have several windows open on the Workspace at once, the
OpenWindows environment must track which window is currently active. You
can choose between two methods of notifying the window system of the
currently active window or input area: Move Pointer and Click SELECT.
In Move Pointer mode, the window is activated when you move the pointer
onto the window pane. In Click SELECT mode, you must also click SELECT in
the window to designate that window as the input area.
The default mode is Click SELECT. See the section "Setting the Active
Window" on page 500 for information on how to use the Workspace Properties
window to change to Move Pointer mode.
The insert point in a text window changes in appearance depending upon
whether that window is active or inactive. If the insert point is active it looks
like a triangle. If it is inactive, it looks like a dimmed diamond, and you must
move the pointer into the window, and, if in Click SELECT mode, click
SELECT in that window's work area to activate the insert point. When you
begin typing, the text appears at the insert point. Figure 1-11 shows an insert
point that is active, and one that is inactive.
Active
Inactive
Figure 1-11 Active and Inactive Insert Points
Pointer Jumping
In most cases, you move the pointer by moving the mouse. However, in some
cases, the pointer moves for you and jumps directly to a specific place on the
screen. This is called pointer jumping.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
9
For example, if you apply a change to the Workspace Properties window, a
pop-up window appears with a warning that this will change a file that you
may have manually customized. The pop-up window asks if you want to make
these changes, and the pointer jumps to the Yes button. You must click SELECT
on one of the choices in the pop-up window before you can do anything else
on the desktop.
Menus and Pushpins
A menu lists the choices you can make from the Workspace or window. For
instance, to start an application, you move the pointer to any location on the
Workspace background and press the MENU button. This displays the
Workspace menu, which includes Programs, Utilities, Properties, Workstation
Info, Help, and the option to Exit the OpenWindows environment.
Figure 1-12 shows the Workspace menu.
Pushpin - - - - - - I l:9
Workspace
( Programs
Uti Iities
[> )
[>
Properties .. ,
workstation Info.. ,
Help .. ,
Exit.. ,
Figure 1-12 Workspace Menu
Using the Workspace Menu
There are two ways to display the Workspace menu.
• You can click the MENU mouse button quickly in the Workspace. The
Workspace menu will pop up and stay up until you make a selection or
dismiss the menu by clicking SELECT elsewhere.
• You can press and hold MENU in the Workspace to display the Workspace
menu and then slide the pointer onto an item. With this method the
Workspace menu is dismissed when you release the mouse button.
10
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Using Submenus
When you display the Workspace menu, the first two items-Programs and
Utilities-each have a hollow triangle next to them, pointing to the right. This
means that there is a submenu of additional choices. To display a submenu,
keep pressing MENU as you drag the pointer to the right at one of the arrows.
Figure 1-13 shows the Programs submenu.
~
Workspace
~
Programs
( Programs
t
( File Manager",
Utilities
t
Text Editor",
Properties",
Workstation Info",
Help",
Exit",
)
Mail Tool",
Cale n dar Manager",
Command Tool..,
Shell Tool",
Clock",
Calcu lator",
Performance Meter",
Print Tool",
Audio Tool",
Tape Tool",
Image Tool",
Snapshot",
Icon Editor",
Binder",
AnswerBook",
Figure 1-13 Programs Submenu
If you continue to press MENU and drag to the right at Programs, the
Programs submenus is displayed containing a list of default applications
(called DeskSet) available for the OpenWindows environment. To choose an
item from the Programs submenu, press MENU and drag the pointer over to
your choice. When the choice is highlighted, release the mouse button. In a
moment, the application you chose appears on the Workspace. At some point
you may want to customize the order and entries on your programs menu. For
information on how to do this refer to Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris
Environment. "
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
11
Pinning a Menu
You can use the pushpin in the upper left corner of the menu to "pin" the
Workspace menu to the Workspace and keep it there indefinitely. Note that
these instructions apply to any menu or window with a pushpin.
Figure 1-14 shows the Workspace menu pinned to the Workspace.
Pushpi n ---r;!:9:::-~w:;:o::;rk;::s::pa::c:-e---,
pinning
the menu
( Programs
!;> )
Utilities
!;>
Properties .. ,
Workstation Info.. ,
Help .. ,
Exit.. ,
Figure 1-14 Menu Pinned to the Workspace
To pin the menu, press MENU to display the Workspace menu and keep the
button pressed down as you drag the pointer over the pushpin. The pushpin
moves into the hole and the menu stays up.
Choosing from a Pinned Menu
To choose an item from a pinned menu, you position the pointer on the item
and click SELECT.
Dismissing a Pinned Menu
To unpin a menu, just click SELECT on the pushpin again.
Using Window Menus
Windows can have three kinds of menus. Examples of each of the following
menu types are shown in Figure 1-15.
• The Window menu that you access from an abbreviated menu button in the
window header or from the window border.
12
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• A button menu that you access from a menu button in the window control
area-the portion of a window that contains menu buttons and other
controls.
• A pop-up menu available from the window pane (the bordered area where
window data are displayed).
Abbreviated
menu button
Text: Editor - (NONE} (edited), dir; /hightide/£:
This is a text file created with text editor.
s:9
Edit
Text: Pane
Button menu
Paste
File
[-,
View
[>
Edit
Find
Extras
[>
[>
[>
Window pane
pop-up menu
~----------------------------------------~~
Figure 1-15 Three Kinds of Window Menus
Using Window Menus
To choose a menu item:
1. Position the pointer on one of the three window areas:
• A window header's abbreviated menu button (or the header itself)
• A menu button
• A window pane
2. Press MENU, and drag the pointer down to the right to highlight the item
of your choice.
3. Release MENU.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
13
Choosing Menu Defaults
Most of the menus in the Workspace and windows have default choices. A
default menu item is usually the first item in the menu. It is encircled with a
small black line. The default choice on the Workspace menu, as shown in
Figure 1-16, is the Programs submenu.
Default
menu
selection __________
Workspace
( Programs
[:»
Utilities
Properties, ..
Workstation Info.. ,
Help .. ,
Exit.. ,
Figure 1-16 Default Choice on the Workspace Menu
All menus and submenus have default choices. The default choice under the
Programs submenu is the Command Tool-a UNIX command interpreter shell.
When you choose Programs from the Workspace menu, the Command Tool
appears. (Chapter 6, "Command Tool, Shell Tool, and Console Window,"
discusses Command Tool in more detail.)
Alternatively, if you have a menu pinned, you can click SELECT on the menu
choice to choose the default. For instance, with the Workspace menu pinned
you can click SELECT on Programs to choose the default application,
Command Tool.
Changing the Menu Default
If you find that you often make a menu choice other than the default, you
might want to define that item as the default choice. To change the default
choice:
1. Display the menu to be modified.
Press MENU, and drag the pointer to display that menu.
2. Position the pointer on the default choice and press MENU again.
14
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
3. Press the Control key on your keyboard while pressing MENU.
4. Drag the pointer up or down until the new default menu item is
highligh ted.
5. Release the Control key.
6. Release the mouse button.
When you click SELECT on that menu, your chosen application is the
default.
Window Controls
The basic controls for an application are displayed in control areas within the
base window. An application can have a single control area in a single base
window, or may have additional control areas elsewhere in the base window or
subwindows.
Figure 1-17 shows the variety of controls possible for window applications.
Base Window
Application title
listed in the header
Buttons
@
(Down)
Menu button
@)
Button choices
One item can be
chosen at a time
Multiple items can
be chosen at once
Check boxes
Excl us ive setti ngs
IChoice 1 I Choice2 I
Nonexclusive settings
Check boxes
D
IChoice1 I I Choice2 I I Choice3 I
Choice 1
Iif
C hoice2
Text Field: .Path/fil%.
Text field
Abbreviated
menu button
Slider control
Slider: ~ 0 0 ----G=== 0100
Scroll bar
and scrolling
window
Figure 1-17 Window Controls
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
15
Scrollbars
Some windows contain scrollbars that enable you to scroll though lists or see
previous commands. The Text Editor is an example of a scrolling window. By
default, most scrollbars appear on the right side of scrolling windows,
although you can move them to the left side. See Chapter 17, "Customizing the
Solaris Environment", for information.
You scroll up incrementally to view previous commands by placing the pointer
on an up arrow in the Scrollbar elevator and clicking SELECT. You can scroll
down again by placing the pointer on the down arrow and clicking SELECT.
You can also press SELECT on the drag area and slide the elevator up or down.
Figure 1-18 shows Command Tool's scrollbar and its elements.
1@)
Prompt
cmdtool -/bin/csh
exampl e %.
Elevator - - - {
l.
I~
Drag
area
t§
I_ _
S crollbar
C able
Cable
nchor
"TI------ a
Figure 1-18 Command Tool's Scrollbar
By contrast, the Shell Tool is a non scrolling window. If you type a long series of
command lines in a nonscrolling window, you cannot see lines that scroll
above the top of the window.
16
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Button Menus
Button Menus or Window buttons appear in the control areas of many
applications. Some window buttons provide a single option, and others
provide menus of choices. The Edit submenu in the Text Editor application, for
instance, provides editing options for cutting, copying, and pasting text, as
well as repeating or undoing an edit. Text Editor's abbreviated menu button, in
the upper left corner, displays options common to most DeskSet applications,
such as Open/Close, and Quit. The Text Editor menu buttons are shown in
Figure 1-19.
Abbreviated menu
button
..-
@)
Teld Editor - (NONE), dir
Menu
~CView\l)~~ --buttons
+
~
( Again
Edit
)
Undo
Copy
Button
menu
Paste
Cut
Figure 1-19 Text Editor's Menu Buttons
There are four buttons at the top of the Text Editor window, each with a hollow
triangle pointing down, indicating that there are further menu choices beneath
each button. You can see these choices by placing the pointer on one of the
buttons and pressing MENU. The window buttons for all of the applications
are discussed in their respective sections.
Drag and Drop
The OpenWindows drag and drop feature enables you to use your applications
together. To send a file from one application to another, you drag a file (in icon
form) from the first application and drop it on the second application icon or
its drag and drop target-a small rectangle in the application window. (In most
applications, the drag and drop target is in the upper right corner.)
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
17
An application's drag and drop target is an empty rectangle if the application
does not currently contain a file. When a file is opened from the application or
dropped onto the drag and drop target, the target changes in appearance.
Figure 1-20 shows an empty drag and drop target and one that contains a file.
Empty drag
and drop
target
Drag and
drop target
with loaded
-4----file
ke!Jayna
locke
0
l~
~
l~
Figure 1-20 Drag and Drop Targets
Follow the steps below for any drag and drop operations:
1. Select an object or objects to be dragged.
For example, you might want to select a set of files in the File Manager by
pointing at the first file and clicking SELECT, and then clicking ADJUST on
the additional files. Or you might want to select a section of text from the
Text Editor by pressing SELECT at the start of the desired text, dragging
through the text to be moved, and releasing SELECT.
If you want to drag just one file or the contents of a drag and drop target,
you can skip this first step.
2. Initiate a move by pointing at a file glyph, the shaded area in a drag and
drop target, or a selected object. Then press SELECT and drag the pointer.
If you want to copy the object instead of move it, you can do so by pressing
the Control key on the keyboard before pressing SELECT. Keep the Control
key held down until after the drag is initiated.
3. When the hot spot of the pointer (the tip of the pointer arrow) is at an
appropriate place, drop the selection by releasing SELECT.
The selection is "dropped" at the new location. Depending on the object
being dragged, the location can be an icon, a drag and drop target, the
window of an application, the workspace background, or a text pane.
In many cases you do not need to worry about whether you need to move an
object or copy it. Whenever you use drag and drop to move an object, the
DeskSet applications attempt to do the right thing based on the operation. For
example, if you move a file from the File Manager into the Wastebasket, it is
18
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
15
actually moved to the Wastebasket. (That is, the file is removed from the
original location.) On the other hand, if you move a file from the File Manager
onto the Print Tool, the file is only copied. The original file remains in its
original location.
If it is not obvious whether an object should be moved or copied, it is moved
unless the Control key is held down while the drag is initiated.
The following paragraphs list some typical drag and drop operations between
the DeskSet applications. See the chapter for each application for more
information about how the application supports drag and drop operations.
File Manager glyphs can be dropped onto the following DeskSet applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mail Tool
Wastebasket
Print Tool
Tape Tool
Text Editor
Icon Editor (if it is an icon file)
Snapshot (if it is a raster or GIF file)
Audio Tool (if it is an audio file)
Mail messages from the Mail Tool Header window can be dropped onto the
following DeskSet applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Text Editor
Print Tool
File Manager
Wastebasket
Calendar Manager (with specific format restrictions)
Mail Tool Attachments can be dropped onto these DeskSet applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
File Manager
Wastebasket
Print Tool
Text Editor
Image Tool
Icon Editor (if it is an icon file)
Snapshot (if it is a raster file)
Audio Tool (if it is an audio file)
Text selections from Text Editor files can be dropped onto these applications:
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
19
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mail Tool
Text Editor
Print Tool
Calendar Manager (with specific format restrictions)
Icon Editor (if it is an icon file)
File Manager
Wastebasket
Command Tool
Text files from the Text Editor drag and drop target can be dropped onto these
applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
File Manager
Wastebasket
Print Tool
Mail Tool
Calendar Manager (with specific format restrictions)
Command Tool
If an error occurs during a drag and drop sequence, refer to Appendix A,
"Solaris Troubleshooting."
Drag and Drop Examples
Sometimes an application has a drag and drop target, typically located in the
top right of an application's control area. The drag and drop target is shown in
Figure 1-21. Note that on a color workstation the drag and drop target will
appear lightly shaded.
o
Figure 1-21 Drag and Drop Target
When you drop an object onto a drag and drop target, the object is loaded into
the application, replacing whatever was currently loaded. For example, if you
drop a file or text selection onto the Text Editor's drag and drop target, the
entire contents of the Text Editor are replaced by the dropped file or text.
20
Safaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Some drag and drop targets contain lines to indicate that the entire contents of
the current application can be dragged out of the drop target. For example,
when you drag the lined area from the Text Editor drag and drop target, the
entire contents of the Text Editor are dragged.
Figure 1-22 Drag and Drop Target Containing a Draggable Object
You can sometimes drop an object directly into a pane that contains data in
order to add the object instead of loading it. For example, you might want to
drop text somewhere within a text pane to insert the dropped text into the
existing text of the pane (instead of replacing the existing text, which would
happen if you dropped the text on the drag and drop target). Another common
example is to drop a file onto a folder in the File Manager to add that file to the
folder.
There are many ways to drag and drop files among DeskSet Applications. The
following are several examples.
• You can print a file by dragging it and dropping it onto the Print Tool icon
or its drag and drop target. Figure 1-23 shows Print Tool's drag and drop
target. Chapter la, "Print Tool," discusses Print Tool in detail.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
21
51
~f~@~--------------p-r~in-t-To-o~I--------------~!
Filename: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Copies: _1_~
:~;:: ~mlm"
Job
mm j: Drag and Drop
lillJ -fTarget for Print
~ ;: Tool
1\; (~::::~i::~ I
Si ze(K)
~
Ti me
I
(';';;;';"';;;;;;',i)
_;::_:~~:"_~"W'W_~____~,,_~___
"w"mJ
wm,'w,w_ _ _
Figure 1-23 Print Tool's Drag and Drop Target
• You can delete a file you no longer need by pressing SELECT on the file icon
in File Manager or in the Attachments window of a Multimedia Mail Tool
message, dragging it to the wastebasket icon, and releasing the mouse
button.
• You can drag a text file, folder or other icons from File Manager and drop
them on the Workspace to view it.
• You can drag files attached to a Multimedia Mail Tool message window and
drop them onto the Workspace: the application with which the file was
created (such as File Manager, Text Editor, Audio Tool, or Icon Editor) is
invoked and the file is opened in the application window. Refer to
Chapter 2, "File Manager", or Chapter 4, "Multimedia Mail Tool" for more
information about dragging and dropping with these tools.
22
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Positioning Windows and Pinned Menus
You can position your windows and pinned menus anywhere on the
Workspace, and can move a window or menu in front of other windows. To
move a window to a new location on the Workspace:
1. Move the pointer to the black line that surrounds an open window or
pinned menu, and press SELECT.
Figure 1-24 shows the pointer on a window edge for repositioning.
Press SELECT
on the window
outline
_ _ _ _ _ _ _---'c::J "
Figure 1-24 Moving an Application Window
2. Drag the pointer across the Workspace to a new location.
A border box the size of the window moves with the pointer.
3. Release SELECT.
The window appears in the new location.
Moving Multiple Windows
You can group windows together so that they move as a unit. For instance, you
may want to arrange several windows on the Workspace in relationship to one
another, and then move the whole arrangement to a new location.
One way to group several windows is to click SELECT on one of the windows
and ADJUST on each additional window. Alternatively, you can drag the
pointer across the Workspace to form a box around the windows you want to
group. You can do this as follows:
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
23
1. Place the pointer in the Workspace at one corner of the set of windows
you want to group.
2. Press SELECT and drag the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner of
the group.
This forms a rectangle around any windows and icons that are fully
enclosed within the border box.
3. Release the mouse button.
The items are selected as a unit.
4. Place the pointer on the edge of one of the grouped windows as described
in the last section, "Positioning Windows and Pinned Menus," press
SELECT, and drag the pointer to a new location.
The group of windows moves to the new location.
5. To un-group the applications, press SELECT anywhere on the Workspace.
Moving a Window Front or Back
To move a window in back of another window:
1. Move the pointer onto the header of the window you wish to move in
back.
2. Press MENU, drag the pointer to highlight Back.
Figure 1-25 shows the Back button highlighted on a Window menu.
24
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Choose Back
from the
Window menu
---
~
Mail Tool -/var/mail/egret
~~~( Compose
~~~(
Repondre
'<7) Mail File:@)._---'<7) ~~~
25/560
35/872
1
Look
Returned mail:
96
hi~ Ihtide/e~retlFis h
Fish
881 M bytes (99%) avai lab Ie
[j
Cod
[j
Salmon
Cl
SwordFish
[j
Tuna
Figure 1-25 Moving a Window in Back of Another Window
3. Release MENU.
That window moves to the rear.
Alternatively, you can use the Front key on your keyboard, which toggles
back/ front depending on the location of the window. (If the window is in back
and you position the pointer in that window and press the Front key, that
window moves to the front. But if it is already in front, it moves in back.)
Moving Icons
You position icons in much the same way as you do windows and pinned
menus. To move an icon to a new location, just move the pointer onto an icon,
press SELECT, and drag the outline of the icon to a new location. When you
release the mouse button, the icon appears in the new place. Figure 1-26 shows
an icon and the outline that appears as it is moved.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
25
Icon border
moves with the
pointer _ _ _
r-..............................:
!~
~~Il
l~.:.~f:.~.~.~:.~:.!
r'
Figure 1-26 Moving an Icon to a New Location
When you first start an application and then close it to an icon the icon appears
in a default location. You can change the default locations by selecting Save
WorkSpace from Utilities or with the Workspace Properties window.
Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment," describes the Properties
window.
Resizing Windows
The corners of windows are the handles you use for resizing. To resize a
window:
1. Position the pointer on one of the window corners.
The pointer turns into a tiny bull's eye. This means that the pointer is in the
correct location for resizing.
2. Press SELECT and drag the pointer to the desired size.
An outline shows the size of the window.
3. Release SELECT.
Figure 1-27 shows the pointer positioned on a window's handle for resizing.
26
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1'''
12.1
",-
cmdtool -/bin/csh
%.
=
~
Window border
stretches as the
pointer is moved
------
,v
Resize corner
@
Pointer changes
appearance during
.window resizing
Figure 1-27 Stretching a Window by its Resize Corner
Closing and Quitting Windows
Each window has a Close option in its window menu. You can access this by
placing the pointer in the header or on the window border, holding down the
MENU mouse button, and highlighting Close, as shown in Figure 1-28.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
27
Choose Close
from the
Window menu
cmdtool-/bin/csh
Full Size
Move
Resize
Back
Refres h
Quit
"
Figure 1-28 Window Menu with Close Highlighted
When you release the mouse button, the window closes to its icon form.
Alternatively, because Close is the default choice in the window menu, you can
click SELECT on the abbreviated menu button in the window header.
The menu in the window header also includes a Quit option. To quit a window
from the Workspace, move the pointer onto the header or the abbreviated
menu button, press the MENU mouse button, and highlight Quit. When you
release the mouse button the window is dismissed from the Workspace and the
application quits.
Starting an Application
You start applications from the Workspace menu, which you display by placing
the pointer in the Workspace and holding down the MENU button. To start an
application of your choice, you drag the pointer to the right to display the
Programs submenu, and then to the name of the application. When the name is
highlighted, you release the mouse button. After a moment the application is
displayed on the Workspace.
28
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Elements of an Application's Base Window
Some applications have one window, and others have one or more
subwindows. The primary window that appears when you display an
application is called a base window. Figure 1-29 shows the visual elements of a
simple base window.
Heade r
Abbreviated~
menu bu tton
Menu butto
Button me n u - - -
TeKt Editor
l.U
~~~~
'9
--====-
I - - ( Again
Ed;'
[>
)
V
V
Window
menu
~
Thi' i, a t"t fil, ""tod ,ith t"t ,dit".
Undo
Window pane
(NONE) (edited), dir; Ihightide/E:
~
""
TeKt Pane
I'"
-"Scrollbar
. " , .
Copy
View
[>/
Paste
Edit
[>
Cut
Find
[>
Extras
[>
=
Figure 1-29 Base Window with Pop-Dp Menus
Opening, Saving, Including and Attaching Files
Once you begin working with the DeskSet applications, you will at sometime
need to open, save (or rename), include, or attach a file (or document). There is
a standard window that looks very similar from application to application for
performing these tasks throughout the DeskSet applications. Once you learn
the basic elements of this window, you can easily perform these tasks.
DeskSet applications that use this type of window include: Text Editor, Mail
Tool, Command Tool, Shell Tool, Audio Tool, Image Tool, Snapshot, and Icon
Editor.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
29
=1
Figure 1-30 shows an example of a standard Open window. This window looks
very similar from application to application, except the window header reflects
the current task. For example, you'll see a reference to the application, such as
Text: and the name of the task following it, like Open, Save, Save As, Include
or Attach.
Text:Open
o-();o
Allows you to move or go to
Type in the path
another location in you r filer-~.
system
-
,
!-
to the folder and press Return,
Current Folder:
Ihightide/egret!Fish -
r-
Select a file or folder and click Open,
If' ",Go up one fol der",
ClCod
Cl Des kSetDefau Its
I~
This menu bar title changes
depending on the task you
are completing, such as
Open, Save, Include, and so
forth
Displays the current location
within the file system
The Scroll bar allows you to
scroll through all of the files
and directories within the
current folder
0
ClEel
Cl FlounderMail
Cl image,rs
Cl mailfile
Cl NoName
Clsalmon
CJseafood
=
Hidden Files:
These buttons change
with the task you are
performing, for example,
open, save, include
Hidden files are the same thing
as dot files and you can
choose to hide or show them
I Hide I Show I
~ ~
-
Dismisses the window
1..
Figure 1-30 An example of the Open Window
Note - You can use File Manager to keep track of documents and folders
(directories and files). Refer to Chapter 2, "File Manager", for information on
how to use it.
30
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Opening a Document
To open a document from an application:
1. Choose Open from the File menu.
An Open window similar to the one in Figure
I-3~,
is displayed.
2. Select the name of the folder from the scrolling list.
Click SELECT on the name of the folder, then click Open. Or, double-click
on the name of the folder. If it is not displayed, double-click on "Go up one
folder." You may need to repeat this a few times.
3. Choose the folder that contains the document you want to open.
The name of the folder must be displayed under Current Folder. To display
the folder you can:
a. Select the folder from the Go To menu by pressing MENU on Go To,
then choosing the desired folder from the menu.
or
b. Type the path name of the folder in the Go To text field and press
Return, or click SELECT on the Go To button.
4. When the scrolling list shows the contents of the folder, select the desired
document and click SELECT on Open.
You can also double-click on the name of the document.
Note - You can use the same steps as opening a document for including a file
from Text Editor or Attaching a file from Mail Tool. The result will be an
included or attached file (or document).
Saving a Document
You may need to save (or rename) a document in one of three stages:
• Saving a new and untitled document
• Saving an existing document
• Saving and renaming an existing document (Save as)
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
31
Saving a New and Untitled Document
The first time you work with a document (or file), you have to give it a name
and save it to a particular location in your file system.
1. Choose Save from the File menu.
Depending on the application you are working in, you see a Save window
similar to the one in Figure 1-31.
Text:Save
Ty pe in the path to the fol der an d press Return.
(Go To: 17) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Current Folder:
!h ig hti de!egretiF is h/Seafood
I,.
Se lect a fi Ie or fol der an d cl ick 0 pe n Fol der.
Go up one folder ...
CJ c:·,t-: h... f
... !:h>t ... (>",,.. r.':;
],:::;h
(jNewFolder
]S:·,l;n(·r,
~----------------------~=
Save: MyfilEl.,
Hidden Files:
(Open Folder)
I Hide I Show I
(Cancel)
((Save»)
Figure 1-31 An example of the Save Window
2. Choose the folder location for saving the document.
The name of the folder must be displayed under Current Folder.
32
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
3. Select the name of the folder from the scrolling list.
Click SELECT on the name of the folder and click Open, or, double-click
on the name of the folder. If it is not displayed, double-click on "Go up
one folder." You may need to repeat this a few times.
or
a. Type the name of the folder in the Go To text field or click SELECT on
the Go To button and press Return.
b. Select the folder from the Go To menu: press MENU on Go To, then
choose the desired folder from the menu.
4. Type a name for the document in the text field and SELECT Save.
When the scrolling list shows the contents of the folder, type a document
name and click SELECT on Save.
Saving an Existing Document
To save changes to the contents of an existing file:
• Choose Save from the File menu.
The document is saved with the same name and in the same folder.
Saving and Renaming an Existing Document
The following procedure saves a file under a name:
1. Choose Save As from the File menu.
Depending on the application you are working in, you see a Save As
window similar to the one in Figure 1-3l.
2. Choose the folder location for saving the document.
The name of the folder must be displayed under Current Folder. To display
the folder you can:
3. Select the name of the folder from the scrolling list.
Click SELECT on the name of the folder, or, double-click on the name of the
folder. If it is not displayed, double-click on "Go up one folder." You may
need to repeat this a few times.
or
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
33
-
=1
a. Type the name of the folder in the Go To text field or click SELECT on
the Go To button and press Return.
b. Select the folder from the Go To menu: press MENU on Go To, then
choose the desired folder from the menu.
4. Type a new name for the document in the text field and SELECT Save As.
When the scrolling list shows the contents of the folder, type a document
name and click SELECT on Save.
Note - When you rename a document without making changes to it, you will
have two versions of the document, one with the old name and one with the
new name. If you work with a file on a daily basis, note the name of the one
you are working with so as not to overwrite the wrong one when you save
your work.
Introduction to the DeskSet Applications
DeskSet is the collection of applications which come with the Solaris software.
The DeskSet applications are the default set available from the Workspace
Programs submenu.
The following sections discuss the tasks you will most likely perform on a
regular basis, and introduce the applications you need to accomplish those
tasks. Each of the applications is discussed in detail in following chapters.
To start an application:
1. Move the pointer onto the Workspace (the OpenWindows background).
2. Press (and hold) MENU.
3. When the Workspace menu is displayed, drag the pointer to display either
the Programs or Utilities submenu.
4. Drag the pointer down to highlight the application you would like to
start.
When you release the mouse button, the application appears on the
Workspace. Figure 1-32 shows an application being selected from the
Program's submenu.
34
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
~
Workspace
( Programs
Utilities
Properties".
Workstation Info".
Help".
Exit".
~
Programs
( File Manager".
c
)
Text Editor".
Mail Tool...
Calendar Manager".
Command Tool...
Shell Tool".
Clock".
Calcu lator".
Performance Meter".
Print Tool".
Audio Tool".
Tape Tool".
Image Tool".
Snapshot...
Icon Editor".
Binder".
AnswerBook".
Figure 1-32 Choosing an Application
Follow these instructions whenever you want to start a DeskSet application.
The instructions from now on will say
"choose Workspace >- Programs >- application" (where application is the
appropriate application name).
Starting DeskSet Applications
You typically access DeskSet applications from the Programs submenu of the
Workspace menu. You access the Workspace menu by pressing MENU with the
pointer anywhere on the background of your DeskSet environment and off of
all applications. When the DeskSet applications are installed on your system,
they are automatically provided as items in the Programs submenu.
You can also start any of the DeskSet applications from a system prompt in a
Command Tool or Shell Tool window by typing the file name. If you want to
continue doing work in the Command or Shell Tool while the DeskSet
application is running, follow the application name with a space and the
ampersand symbol (&). Table 1-1 shows what you should type to start each
DeskSet application.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
35
Table 1-1
What to Type to Start DeskSet Applications
Application Name
What you should
Type
AnswerBook
answerbook
Audio Tool
audiotool &
Binder
binder &
Calculator
calctool &
Calendar
Manager
cm
Clock
clock
Command Tool
cmdtool &
Console
cmdtool -C
File Manager
filemgr
Icon Editor
iconedit
Image Tool
imagetool
Mail Tool
mailtool &
Performance
Meter
perfmeter &
Print Tool
printtool &
Shell Tool
shell tool
Snapshot
snapshot
Tape Tool
tapetool &
Text Editor
textedit
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
Working with Text
The OpenWindows Text Editor is an application for working within documents
and composing, editing, cutting, copying, and pasting text. Text Editor enables
you to create and compose a new document or open (load) an existing
document into the application for editing. You can also work with text using a
36
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
command line editor (such as vi) in a Command Tool or Shell Tool. For
information on using vi, refer to Salaris 2.2 Advanced User's Guide. Figure 1-33
shows the Text Editor application window.
@)
TeKl: Editor - (NONE), dir; Ihightide/egret
~~~~
•
D
=
~
=
Figure 1-33 Text Editor Application Window
Managing Your Files
The File Manager application provides a graphical display of the structure of
the folders and documents (directories and files) in your file system. Each file
appears as an icon, as shown in Figure 1-34.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
37
r-m
----------
File Managel":/hightide/egl"eVFisl-)---------------------,
~~~(GOTO:I7).
I~
I
D[IITI]
0
877 Mbytes (98%) available
Contains 5 items
[j Cod
[j Salmon [j Eel
[j Swordfish
[j Tuna
D[IITI]
=
~
0=
Updated folder: no files added or deleted since last update.
Figure 1-34 File Manager's Base Window
Opening a File in File Manager
You can open a file or application displayed in the File Manager base window
by pressing MENU on its icon and choosing Open. When you open a text file
icon, for instance, a Text Editor application is started and the chosen file is
opened in the Text Editor window.
Viewing the Contents of a Folder in File Manager
To look at the contents of a folder, you can press MENU on the icon and select
Open, double-click SELECT on the folder icon or press SELECT on it, drag it
into the Workspace, and release the mouse button. The icon opens into a
window pane displaying the items in that folder.
38
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Moving Files in the File System
You move files from one folder to another by selecting and dragging them with
the pointer (for instance, from the top level of the home directory to a folder
you have opened on the Workspace) or by cutting them from one folder,
opening another folder, and pasting them there.
Dragging and Dropping
File Manager works interactively with the other DeskSet applications. For
example, if you want to listen to an audio file, you can drag it from File
Manager and drop it onto the Workspace.
To delete a file, you can drag it from its location to the Wastebasket icon. To
send a file to the printer, you drag it and drop it on the Print Tool icon. To save
a file or a set of files on a tape for other processing, you can drag files from File
Manager to the Tape Tool application.
Managing Your Time
The OpenWindows environment provides an icon-based Clock program and
an icon-based calendar, called Calendar Manager. Figure 1-35 shows the
Calendar Manager base window.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
39
51
r~
...,
Calendar Manager: egret@river
( View'V)( Edit
'V)(
Browse
'V)(
'V)
Pri nt
~(Today)~
Jan uary 1993
Sun
3
10
17
24
Mon
4
Tue
5
10:000. 1:1
10:000. Staff
11
12
10:000. 1:1
10:000. Staff
3:00p Mar
18
19
10:000. 1:1
10:000. Staff
6:00p Rob's
25
26
10:000. 1:1
10:000. Staff
Wed
6
Thu
7
Fri
D
Sat
2
8
9
15
16
1 :Oop Engi 10:000. Prod
12:00p Mari
13
1 :oop Liz's
20
14
10:000. prod
1:00p Writ
21
5:00p Mar
22
23
1 :Oop Engi 10:000. prod writer's se
27
28
29
30
10:000. Prod
1:00p Writ
31
l...,
Figure 1-35 Calendar Manager Base Window
Calendar Manager is an interactive application that lets you schedule your
appointments and will send you messages about them on request. For instance,
you can request that Calendar Manager beep or send an electronic mail
message to your mailbox to remind you of important meetings, and you can
check the calendars of others on your network.
Printing Your Documents
To print documents, you use Print Tool. Print Tool enables you to print
documents from a variety of formats, including ASCII, troff, PostScript®
text, and raster images. Figure 1-36 shows the Print Tool application window.
40
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Print Tool
Filename: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
run
I
Copies: _1_~
Header: ~
Printer:
I Imimeo
L---_ _ _ _ _ _--'
Time
Job
'----_--I! I
( Status)
(;·i·:)·; "·i.;r·i·r;·i:r; ·~:i)
~
M,~,::::-':~w,~,w,'w'''''''''N'W.W''W''N'W'''''W«''W'N'N''''''"«''W««'«~NJ
Figure 1-36 The Print Tool Application Window
To print a document, you can drag a file icon from File Manager and drop it on
the Print Tool icon or on the open Print Tool drag and drop target. Another
method is to type the file and pathname in the Print Tool text field and click
SELECT on the Print button. You can also send messages and images to the
printer from Multimedia Mail Tool and from Snapshot-an application that
enables you to take pictures of windows and images on your workstation
screen.
Communicating on the Network
Multimedia Mail Tool provides a convenient method of communicating with
others electronically by sending and receiving messages, sound files, and other
data files. It works together with the Calendar Manager application when you
want to set up group meetings and send electronic notification and automatic
reminder messages, and with Audio Tool when you want to send Voice Mail.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
41
51
The Multimedia Mail Tool icon looks like a tiny in-box. The in-box is empty
when there is no mail; it has stacked letters when the mail in the mailbox has
been read, and overflowing letters when there is new mail. Figure 1-37 shows
the Mail Tool icon in its different forms. The icon opens up into a base window
for receiving, composing, and sending electronic mail messages.
I'"···~·······l
§
mailtool
I~I
~ mailtool ~
t ............................... .;
Figure 1-37 No Mail; New Mail; All Mail Read
Customizing the Open Windows Environment
You can modify many aspects of the OpenWindows environment, including
the fonts used in applications and menus, the distance you need to drag the
pointer from a menu to open a submenu, and the window and menu colors.
Additionally, if you are left-handed, you may want to remap the keys on the
left and right panels of the keyboard for ease of use.
Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment," provides instructions for
customizing the OpenWindows environment, including WorkSpace Properties,
keyboard and mouse customization.
Hidden Files
Hidden files or "dot" files as they are sometimes called, are distinguished in
your file system with a dot (.) in front of them. These files are normally not
visible to you in your home directory and you should not change or delete
these files unless you have specific knowledge about the file.
42
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Getting Help
There are two kinds of on-line help available: Magnify HelpTM for immediate
assistance with an item in the OpenWindows environment, such as a menu or
window element, and the help handbooks for quick reference on the elements
and applications of the OpenWindows environment.
Note - The OpenWindows "more help" facility (Help Viewer) depends on the
X11/NeWS window server. Therefore, it will not work with a nonOpenWindows server (for example, the MIT X11 server). In particular, clicking
the More button within a Magnify Help window, or choosing Help from the
Workspace menu fails, and the following error message is displayed on the
console:
xView error: NULL pointer passed to xv_set
helpopen: Viewer could not display document: handbooks/ ...
Magnify Help
When you begin using the Solaris software, you will find that you can choose
from a variety of windows and menus. When you need information on a
particular window, menu, or object, Magnify Help enables you to get
information quickly.
Follow these steps to get on-line help about a window or menu item:
1. Move the pointer to the item (such as a menu) that you want to know
about.
2. Press the Help key on the keyboard.
This is the F1 key on some systems. A help window pops up with
information about that item.
Figure 1-38 shows a Magnify Help window.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
43
,:)
olwm: Help
Wi ndow 80 rde r
r
Thi 5 is the header. footer. or si de of a wi ndow
that contai ns an app 1i cati on prog ram.
---l
~
The bo rde r thi ckens when the wi ndow is selected.
To select a window. point to the border and
click SELECT.
---l
Figure 1-38 Magnify Help Window
More Help
Most items on the Workspace have associated help handbooks. When an
associated handbook exists, a button labeled "More" appears at the bottom of
the Magnify Help window. To see more help on that topic, click SELECT on the
More button. Figure 1-39 shows a help window with a More button.
em: Help
Month Vi ew
Thi 5 vi ew di sp 1ays the cu r rent month ina fo rmat
that allows you to see all of the appoi ntments
fo r that month.
Resi zi ng the wi ndow scales the vi ew as
app rop ri ate. 1etti ng you see mo re appoi ntments
on a gi ven day.
Figure 1-39 Window with More Button
Dismissing a Help Window
A pop-up window is dismissed when you close or quit the application. If you
would like to close the Magnify Help window before you quit the application,
you can click SELECT on the pushpin in the upper left corner of the Magnify
Help window.
44
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
No Help
A small pop-up window appears if no Magnify Help is available, stating that
there is no help for that item. The pointer jumps to the OK button, and you
must click SELECT to continue.
Help Viewer
The help handbooks provide introductory information to guide you through
the OpenWindows environment. These are presented in a concise format in the
Help Viewer. The "Introducing Your Desktop" handbook is a tutorial that
describes basic OpenWindows operations. The other handbooks provide taskoriented steps on individual topics. In addition, there is a handbook that
describes how to navigate in the on-line help system. You can browse all of the
handbooks in any order you choose.
Desktop Introduction
You can access the introductory handbook, "Introducing Your Desktop" from
the Workspace menu, as follows:
1. Move the pointer onto the Workspace and press MENU.
The Workspace menu appears, as shown in Figure 1-40.
~
Workspace
( Programs
Util ities
I> )
I>
Properties ...
workstation Info...
Help ...
_ _ _ _-+Choose Help
Exit...
Figure 1-40 Workspace Menu
2. Drag the pointer to choose Help.
When you release the mouse button, the Help Viewer appears displaying a
list of handbooks.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
45
3. Double click SELECT on "Introducing Your Desktop".
Figure 1-41 shows the Help Viewer selection.
Help Viewer
(View
17)
Help Handbooks
~
Double-dick SELEcr on any of the choices 1:elow.
Introducing Your Desktop
IAbout AnsweIBooksl
IAbout Audio Tooll
IAbout Bindeij
IAbout Calculatorl
IAbout Calendar Ma.nageij
Figure 1-41 Selecting Introducing Your Desktop
The on-line tutorial, "Introducing Your Desktop," opens in the Help Viewer,
as shown in Figure 1-42.
46
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1=
Help Viewer
Menu buttons
for modifying
what and how
you view
'V)
(View
(Go Back)
~ ~
_____ I~r----------------------------------------.
Introducing Your Desktop
Everything on your screen is part of your desktop, which
includes many features to make your work easier, This
introduction presents the basic skills you need to start using
your desktop,
.AB you begin this introduction, rest
the mouse on its silvery-blue pad, with
the pad horizontal and the mouse cord
pointing away from you
(!]
~
000
lVDve the mouse on its pad, Notice how each movement is
reflected by a black, arrow-f;haped pointer on the screen,
,di;\~\;~~~~
For most of your work you'll use the left mouse button,
called the SELECTbutton, Use the mouse to turn this page:
SELECT
• Move the pointer over the ~ button above and
click (press and release) the SELECT button on~1--
I
I)
Table of Contenw
I~ I
~
For a description of
how to navigate with
the Help Viewer and
Magnify Help, DoubleClick SELECT here
? lI~Of 45
About H elp
"Desktop Introduction" at 100%
Figure 1-42 First Page of the Desktop Intro Handbook
Help on Help
You can view a description of how to navigate in the help system. Double-click
SELECT on the" About Help" icon shown in Figure 1-42. (Alternatively, you
can click SELECT once on the icon and then click SELECT on the View menu
button.) This option is available from any help handbook. Note also that there
is Magnify Help (described in "Magnify Help" on page 43) for each element on
the Help Viewer.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
47
Other Handbooks
You can access help handbooks that describe the DeskSet applications and the
OpenWindows Workspace by following the steps below. Note, however, that if
you are currently displaying the first page of any handbook, you can bypass
these steps by double-clicking SELECT on the More Handbooks icon at the
bottom of the Help Viewer.
To access the help handbooks at any time:
1. Move the pointer onto the Workspace and press MENU.
The Workspace menu appears.
2. Drag the pointer to choose Help.
When you release the mouse button, the Help Viewer displays the help
handbook table of contents that lists handbooks, as shown in Figure 1-43.
48
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Help Handbooks
~
Double-click SELECT on any of the choices below.
~ntroducmg
Your Desktop!
(About AnswerBooksl
(About AudIO Tooll
(About Bmdeij
(About Calculatorl
Choose a
handbook ____~----~~~~~====
(About Icon Edltorl
(About Image Tooll
(About Mad Too~
Wout Performance Meteij
(About Pont Too~
(About Snapsholj
(About Tape Too~
Wout Text EdltOij
(About the Workspacel
Figure 1-43 Help Viewer
3. Double-click SELECT on the topic of your choice.
The Help Viewer then displays the table of contents for the selected
handbook.
Quick Access to Help Handbooks
You can accelerate access to a help handbook from any DeskSet application,
icon, or menu by pressing Shift and then Help on your keyboard. As an
example, position the pointer over an area of interest, such as the Mail Tool
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
49
51
application window, and press Shift-Help. The Help Viewer appears on the
Workspace, displaying the appropriate handbook, in this case" About Mail
Tool."
Navigating through Handbooks
When you display a particular handbook, you have several choices. You can:
1. Page through the handbook.
2. Double-click SELECT on a topic to access that information quickly.
3. Return to the table of contents of help handbooks.
4. Return to a handbook's table of contents from within that handbook.
The following sections describe these operations.
Paging through a Handbook
The buttons at the top of the Help Viewer enable you to move backward or
forward, page by page. Clicking SELECT on the Next Page and Previous Page
buttons is equivalent to pressing the PgUp and PgDn buttons on your
keyboard. Figure 1-44 shows the help handbook paging buttons.
Jl21
L
Help Viewer
(View
~)
(CoBack)
~
@)
I
Figure 1-44 Buttons for Paging Through the Handbooks
50
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
The Go Back button gives you the option to go back to the last page viewed.
Click SELECT on the Go Back button to return to wherever you were last. If
you have viewed pages in various parts of a handbook or in different
handbooks, you can retrace your steps by choosing Go Back as many times as
necessary.
The paging features are also available from the Viewer menu, shown in
Figure 1-45.
!9
Viewer
Next Page
Prey ious Page
Redisplay
Go Back
Figure 1-45 The Viewer Menu
To use the Viewer menu:
1. Position the pointer in the Help Viewer window and press MENU.
The Viewer Menu appears.
2. Move the pointer to the pushpin and pin up the Viewer menu if you want
to keep the menu up for repeated use.
When you release the mouse button, the menu remains.
3. Click SELECT on a menu item to page down, page up, redisplay (refresh)
the window, or go back to your last location.
Alternatively, if you have not pinned the menu, just choose a menu item
using the MENU mouse button.
Note - As with any DeskSet application or pinned menu, you can move the
Viewer menu by positioning the pointer on the menu outline, pressing SELECT
and dragging the pointer to a new location.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
51
51
Using the Handbook Hypertext Links
The help handbooks can be used in a non-linear fashion. When you see an
outlined reference to more information, you can double-click SELECT on that
portion of the text to go to the referenced location. The black outlines indicate
hypertext links. From the main table of contents for the handbooks, you can
access a handbook quickly by double-clicking SELECT on the handbook's title.
Within a given handbook, you can double-click SELECT on one of the links
within that book to go to that topic. Figure 1-46 shows the hypertext links in
the table of contents for the Calendar Manager help handbook.
Help Viewer'
menu button
Help Viewer
( View
'\7) ( Magnify '\7)
( Previous Page) (Go Back) ( Next Page)
About Calendar Manager
Double-click SELECT an any of the choices below.
Hypertext
links to topics
within the
handbook
are outlined
/WMt Calendar Manager Offersl
t=alendar Manager Viewsl
fScheduJing and Editing Appointmentsl
t=ustomizingCalendar Managerl
jPrillt::iDg a Calendar Viewl
!Browsing Calendarsl
~ailing a Calendar Reminderl
pfelring a Mail Messagel
Hypertext icon
returns you to
main table of
contents
"About Calendar Manager" at 100%
Figure 1-46 Table of Contents with Hypertext Links
52
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Returning to a Handbook's Table of Contents
When you have chosen a handbook, and selected a topic within that handbook,
you can return to that handbook's table of contents by double-clicking SELECT
on the Table of Contents icon (see Figure 1-47) at the bottom of the handbook.
Figure 1-47 The Table of Contents Icon in a Handbook
Returning to the Main Table of Contents
To return to the main table of contents for all the help handbooks, navigate to
the first page of the current handbook and double-click SELECT on the More
Handbooks icon at the bottom of a page (shown in Figure 1-46).
Closing the Help Viewer
You can close the Help Viewer to an icon until you need it next. To close Help
Viewer, click SELECT on the abbreviated menu button in the upper left corner
of any handbook.
Figure 1-48 shows the Viewer icon.
Figure 1-48 Viewer Icon
Double-click SELECT on the Viewer icon when you want to open it again.
Exiting the Help Viewer
You can exit the Help Viewer from any location by choosing Quit from the
Window menu.
Introduction to the Solaris User Environment
53
Double-clicking SELECT on the Exit icon at the bottom of the page of
Introducing Your Desktop handbook displays instructions for quitting the
tutorial handbooks. Figure 1-49 shows the Exit icon.
Figure 1-49 The Exit Icon in Introducing Your Desktop
On-line Documentation: AnswerBooks
As you use your system and its software, you can browse, search, bookmark,
and print from manuals right on your screen in your own on-line Library. Your
Library may contain one or more AnswerBooks, or collections of documents
covering many topics.
In your Library you may find the Solaris 2.2 AnswerBook Administration Guide, a
collection of basic manuals to help get you started using your Sun system.
Note - To give you access to AnswerBooks, your administrator has to install
and configure them for your use. See Solaris 2.2 AnswerBook Administration
Guide for more information.
• To open your on-line Library, choose
Workspace~ Programs~ AnswerBook.
Then refer to Chapter 19, "Using AnswerBooks" for information on how to
use AnswerBooks and your on-line Library.
54
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
File Manager
File Manager provides a graphical display of the UNIX file system, using icons
that represent directories (folders), files (documents), and applications.
You can use File Manager to find, copy, move, open, close, delete, undelete,
create, and print files. You can start applications from File Manager, and
reorganize your file system by moving or copying files between folders. You
can also use File Manager to link files and to transfer files to other machines.
In addition, the icons representing individual parts of the file system can be
dragged out of the File Manager window onto the workspace or onto other
DeskSet application icons or windows.
File Manager Icon
The primary icon for File Manager looks like a file folder. The name of the
current directory is displayed beneath the folder, as shown in Figure 2-1.
\""01
i:. ................................
egret i
:
Figure 2-1
File Manager Icon
55
File Manager Base Windows
The primary File Manager base window displays your file system and allows
you to manipulate it. The secondary base window is a Wastebasket that you
can use to remove files from your file system. When you start File Manager, the
Wastebasket window is normally started and displayed as an icon. The
Wastebasket is described in the section "Using the Wastebasket" on page 92.
The primary File Manager window, shown in Figure 2-2, provides a set of
controls that you can use to manipulate your file system. The window has a
path pane that displays the file system hierarchy and a scrollable file pane that
displays the contents of the open folder in the path. You can open many
windows from within File Manager, and File Manager works the same way
within each window.
III
File Manager: /hightide/egret
~~~(GOTO:'V)
Path Pane
I
Status Sa r
h ig hti de egret
DIIDII
Contai ns 8 ite ms
D
~
Artfi les
File Pane
875 M bytes (98%) ava
dead, letter
~
D
my _ pri ntscri pt
Fish
D
mail
D
root
D
Apps
D
dead, letter, 1
Figure 2-2
56
Primary File Manager Window
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
File Manager File Icons
The files in your file system, by default, are represented by three kinds of icons,
which are similar to application icons on the workspace. Directories are
displayed as folders. Files such as documents, graphic files, and spreadsheet
files are displayed as dog-eared sheets of paper. Executable files (applications)
are displayed as an application icon. Figure 2-3 shows these three file type
icons.
Fol der
Figure 2-3
D
my _ fi Ie
my _ pri ntscri pt
Three Types of File Icons
File Manager checks the Binder database for information bound to each file
being operated on. Every file displayed can have its own file type. Each file
type can have its own icon, open method, and print method stored in the
Binder database. When File Manager displays a folder, it gets the information
from the Binder database on how to display and operate on each file.
When a file is not bound to a specific icon, its generic icon is displayed. In the
example shown in Figure 2-4, the files are bound to different application types.
File Manager
57
®
Fi Ie Manager: lusr/o pe nwi nib i n
~ ~ ~ CI;:H!(r~f*) ..
I~
I
D[ITE
0
Contains 210 items
~
book
~
es
~m
~
m
~
au d iocontrol
~
audiotool
~
351 M bytes (33%) avai lab Ie
[Xl
bitmap
~
bldfamily
~
b dft05 nf
bldrgb
binder
bmtoa
~
~
~
calctool
~
capitalize
~
ce_db_build
0=
D~CITJII
Figure 2-4
~
brus htop b m
=
Data File Icons that also Show the Application Type
You can create your own images for files using the Icon Editor, and bind them
to the File Manager data file icons using the Binder. See the chapters "Icon
Editor" on page 429 and "Binder" on page 451 for more information.
Selecting File Manager Icons
In order to operate on File Manager icons, you first need to select them.
You select a File Manager folder icon in the path pane by moving the pointer
onto it and clicking SELECT.
You select a single icon or group of icons in the file pane by clicking SELECT
on the first icon and clicking ADJUST on each additional icon that you want to
include in a group. Selected icons are highlighted. Exclude an icon by clicking
ADJUST on an icon that is already selected.
58
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
You can select an adjacent group of icons by pressing SELECT to define one
corner of a rectangle surrounding the group of files, dragging the pointer to the
opposite corner, and releasing SELECT. You can select an additional group of
icons using the same method with the ADJUST mouse button.
Double-Click Accelerators
You can double-click SELECT on any individual icon to open it.
Double-clicking SELECT on any folder in the path pane or the file pane opens
it and displays its contents in the file pane. Double-clicking SELECT on a data
file starts the application for that data file and usually displays its data.
Double-clicking SELECT on an application icon starts the application.
Panning Through the Tree and File Panes
A feature provided by File Manager is the ability to pan through file panes.
This lets you scroll through the panes without using the scrollbars. Panning is
like" gluing" the contents of a pane to the current pointer, so that when you
move the pointer, the entire contents of the pane moves with it.
You initiate panning by following these steps:
1. Move the pointer to the place where you want to start panning.
2. Press the Meta key on the keyboard, and then press SELECT.
When the pointer changes to the panning pointer (a curved arrow pointing
down), release the Meta key.
3. Drag the pointer to a new location within the pane, and release SELECT.
The contents of the pane move along with the pointer. Repeat these steps if
necessary to reach the desired location.
Control Area Menus
The control area has four menu buttons: File, View, Edit, and Go To; Go To has
a text field. This section shows each of these controls and provides a brief
introduction to each of the items. Figure 2-5 shows the menu buttons within
the File Manager control area.
File Manager
59
File Manager
Menu Button-=>~-----+f-\..rIFile V') ~ ~ (GOTo: V') ""
Path
pane---------f1!!f-~
'~D=I~=I=I=.~I- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Figure 2-5
File Manager Control Area Menu Buttons
File Menu
The File menu provides choices that you can use to perform filing functions.
• Use Open to open selected folders and files. Open is inactive unless you
have made a selection in the file pane or path pane.
• Use Open in Editor to open the file in the Text Editor.
• Use Create Document to create a new document.
• Use Create Folder to create a new folder.
• Use Duplicate to create another version of the selected item(s).
• Use Print One to print your selection to your default printer. Print is inactive
unless you have made a selection in the file pane.
• Use Print to print selected files using your own print method and specified
printer. You can select the number of copies to print. Print is inactive unless
you have made a selection in the file pane.
• Use Find to display a pop-up window that you can use to find files. See
"U sing the Find Pop-up Window" on page 89 for more information.
• Use Information to find out information about your file. See "File and
Folder Information" on page 97 for more information.
• Use Remote Copy to open a pop-up window for remote transfers. See
"Transferring Files From Your System to Another" on page 85 for more
information.
• Use Custom Commands to run your own customized commands, or to popup a UNIX shell that you use like any other Shell Tool. See "Customizing
Your File Manager" on page 99 for information.
60
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Use Check for Floppy to bring up window, if floppy has been inserted.
• Use Quit File Manager to quit the File Manager. This does preserve the way
you had your icons set up in the window.
Note - The following two items are only visible if you are using a floppy disk.
• Use Format Floppy to format a floppy in your disk drive. For more
information, see "Using Floppy and CD Media" on page 118.
• Use Rename Floppy to rename the floppy inserted into your disk drive. For
more information, see "Renaming a Floppy Disk" on page 125.
View Menu
From the Base Window, the View button has a menu with choices for different
ways to view the file system. These are Open Folder View, Large Icon View,
Small Icon View, Icon By Name, Icon By Type, List by Name, List by Type, List
by Size, List by Date, and Cleanup Selection. Refer to "Folder View" on page 62
for information on the Folder View. Otherwise, use these display options to
choose how the contents of the file pane are displayed and sorted:
• Use Large Icon View for viewing icons at regular size. You can move these
icons around in the file pane.
• Use Small Icon View for viewing icons at reduced size. You can move these
icons around in the file pane.
• Use Icon by Name to sort the large icons alphabetically by name.
• Use Icon by Type to sort the icons in alphabetical groups by file type, with
folders first, followed by files, then by applications.
• As a listing, to show you more information about each individual file.
• Use List by Name to sort the files alphabetically.
• Use List by Type to sort the files in alphabetical groups by file type, with
folders first, followed by files, then by applications.
• Use List by Size to sort the files by size, largest to smallest.
• Use List by Date to sort the files from newest to oldest.
• Use Cleanup Icons for putting all icon(s) in order to the nearest grid point. If
icon(s) are selected, use Cleanup Selection for putting selections in order to
nearest grid point. Each grid point is determined by the width of the largest
name.
File Manager
61
Edit Menu
Edit has a menu with options for editing.
• Use Select All to select all the files in the file pane.
• Use Cut to remove selected icons from a folder and place them on the
clipboard. Cut is inactive unless you have made a selection in the File pane.
• Use Copy to put a copy of selected icons on the clipboard. Copy is inactive
unless you have made a selection in the File pane.
• Use Link to link files together. See "Linking Files" on page 95.
• Use Paste to paste the contents of the clipboard at the next available grid
point in File Manager. Paste is inactive unless something is on the clipboard.
• Use Delete/Destroy to remove selected file names from a folder, and place
them in the Wastebasket or really delete them, depending on the File
Manager Properties setting. See "Using the Wastebasket" on page 92 for
information about the Wastebasket.
• Use Properties to customize your File Manager. See "Customizing Your File
Manager" on page 99 for information.
Go To Menu and Text Field
The Go To menu has choices (that can be set by you in properties) that allow
you to quickly go back to your home directory or to other directories that you
have recently accessed. You can also type the path name of a folder you want
to go to in the Go To text field. See "Using the Go To Text Field and Menu" on
page 87 for more information.
Folder View
Use Folder View to look at your folder hierarchy. The Folder View opens a
separate window that displays only folders and shows how folders are stored
in the hierarchy. You can open each of your folders into a separate window by
selecting the folder and:
• Selecting View »Open Folder View.
Figure 2-6 shows a Folder View.
62
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Opening Fish
Figure 2-6
Opening the Folder View
The hierarchical Folder View (tree structure) is another way of showing the
UNIX file system. The analogy between the parts of a tree and the parts of the
file system is often used when describing the UNIX file system. The Folder
View can show all parts of the file system. Alternatively, you can use the Folder
View to start at any directory or folder in the file system.
Root is the top directory in the file system. Under the root are various branches.
For example, Figure 2-7 shows root and the branches that start with the
directories / , home.
Along with the tree analogy, there is a parent/child analogy. The root directory
is the parent directory. A subdirectory is also a parent directory when there are
one or more subdirectories below it. Each subdirectory is a child of the parent
directory that is above it.
File Manager
63
The File menu from the Folder View has the following options: Open (Opens
the children of the selected folder), Open Folder Window (Brings up the File
Manager folder pane), Find, Information, Remote Copy, and Custom
Commands.
The View menu from the Folder View has the following options:
• Use Show Horizontal/Vertical to change the view orientation from
horizontal to vertical or visa versa.
• Use Show All Sub Folders to show all folders below the selected folder.
• Use Hide Sub Folders to "hide" all sub folders below the selection.
• Use Start Folder View Here to begin showing the folder view from the
selected folder.
• Use Add Parent the parent of the folder selected folder.
Go To can be used the same way as described in "Go To Menu and Text Field"
on page 62.
Folder View Options
The Folder View contains commands that you can use to "prune" the Folder
(or tree) view so that it contains branches of the tree that are useful to you and
hides other folders that you may not need to access.
If you frequently move or copy files between folders, you may find that using
the Folder View allows you to perform more operations using drag and drop,
since more folders can be displayed in the Folder View.
When you open the Folder View window, you can choose the following
options:
•
•
•
•
Hide Sub Folders
Show All Sub Folders
Begin Tree Here
Add Tree's Parent
Subfolders are folders that are farther down the tree than the current folder.
Figure 2-7 shows a Folder View that contains most of the folders from the root
directory downward.
64
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
FM: Fo Ider View: Ih ig htide/egretl
~~(GOTO:'Il)
Seafood
OceanFish
I~====~--------------------------------------~~
DGITIl
Figure 2-7
0
Example of a Folder View
The following examples show a series of progressions, using each of the view
modification commands from the Folder View.
File Manager
65
Clicking SELECT on the home folder and choosing Hide Subfolders from the
Folder View results in the display shown in Figure 2-8. Compare that display
with the one shown in Figure 2-7.
..
@)
FM: Folder View: /hightide/egret/root
~~(GOTO:'V)
D
./
home
home se lecte d
66
~
0=
DCllE
Figure 2-8
=
Example of Hiding Subfolders
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Choosing Show Subfolders from the (Folder View) View menu produces the
display shown in Figure 2-9.
FM: Folder View: /hightide/egret/
~~(GOTO:<;J)
Seafood
LJI----_
/
OceanFish
Figure 2-9
File Manager
Example of Showing Subfolders
67
With the fish folder selected, choosing Begin Tree Here from the View menu
changes the display as shown in Figure 2-10.
@]
FM: Fo Ider View: /h ig htide/egret/root/ho me/Fis h
~~(GOTO:'V)
.~
Fish
=
~
Seafood
0=
Dw::::ill
Fish selected
Figure 2-10
68
Example of Changing the Beginning Point of a Folder View
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Choosing Add Tree's Parent from the Folder View adds one folder farther up
the path, and its subfolders, as shown in Figure 2-11.
@)
FM: Fo Ider View: /h ig htide/egret/root/ho me
~~(GOTO:'V)
..
Seafood
OceanFish
~===-----------------------------------~~
OGIIB-----------------------------------O
home selected
Figure 2-11 Example of Adding a Parent Folder
Path Pane
The path pane shows your current location in your file system.
Parts of the Path and Folder View
The path displayed in the File Manager window shows only the folders for the
directory and subdirectories that lead to the current folder, which is the folder
that is open. Any folders below it in the tree are subfolders. An example of a
path is given in the window in Figure 2-12, which shows the path for
/root/hightide/egret.
File Manager
69
~ (View \7) ~ (
Path Pane
---------ilt-L)--LJ-&
!
h ig hti de egret
D~-------------Contai ns 7 ite ms
LJ
Fish
CJ
mail
n n
Figure 2-12 A home Directory in the Path Pane
Path that is Displayed
When you start File Manager for the first time, it displays the path of the
directory from which you started it. The next time you start File Manager, it
remembers your last location before quitting, and you see the things the way
you left them. If you choose File Manager from the Programs submenu, it
displays the path for your home directory. The last folder in the chain is open,
and its contents are displayed in the file pane, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Use the Open Folder item on the Path pane pop-up menu to open a selected
folder.
• Display the Path pane pop-up menu by moving the pointer on the
background of the Path pane and pressing MENU.
Once a folder has been selected in the Path Pane, all of the Base window
commands are available to you except the following: Duplicate, Print One,
Print, Format Disk, Rename Disk.
70
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
25
FM: Fo Ider View: /h ig htide/egret/
~(Viewv)~
I~==~~==~~==~~--------------~-----------------------.=
OceanFish
1~~===================================nO=
IO[I[]I)
Figure 2-13 Example of a Horizontal Folder View (Tree Structure)
As you move around from folder to folder by double-clicking SELECT to open
each one, Folder View expands to show subfolders and rearranges the other
branches of the file system tree.
After you open a folder, an open folder icon indicates that the folder has been
opened. For example, in Figure 2-13, the folder labelled home has been opened.
You can expand or reduce the number of folders in the Folder View by
choosing View items from the Folder View menu: You can toggle between
showing Horizontal and Vertical views, Show All Sub Folders, Hide Sub
Folders, Start Folder View, and Add (the folder's) Parent. Once you have
chosen one of these items from the menu, File Manager remembers it. When
you choose Folder View again, the view displayed is the last format that you
chose for the Folder View. See "Customizing Your File Manager" on page 99
for examples of these other kinds of displays.
File Manager
71
52
File Pane
The file pane displays the contents of the open folder in the path pane. When
you first start File Manager, the file pane displays icons with names beneath
them, as shown in Figure 2-14.
[i)
Fi Ie Manager: /h ig htide/egl
~ (View
OceanFish
Figure 2-17 New Folder in the File Pane
Naming a Document or Folder
When the name of a file or folder is highlighted and underlined, the name is an
editable text field. You can change the name of any folder or file by clicking
SELECT on its name to select it and display an editable text field. You can edit
the contents of this text field in the same way you edit any other text field.
When you have changed the file name, press Return or click SELECT on the
background of the file pane. You can also change the name of a file using the
Information popup window. See "File and Folder Information" on page 97 for
more information.
Moving and Copying Files
You can move and copy icons that are displayed in the File pane using cut,
copy, paste, choosing Duplicate from the File menu, or using the drag and drop
operation.
File Manager
77
Using Cut, Copy, Paste
You can move or copy files within File Manager using the Cut/ Copy /Paste
commands. Cut/Copy/Paste commands are provided on the Edit menu, the
File Pane pop-up menu, and as function keys on the keyboard. When you cut
material, it is not deleted. It is put on a clipboard, where it is stored
temporarily. Only one item or group of items is stored on the clipboard at a
time.
Note - If you do another cut without using what is on the clipboard, the
previous information is lost.
Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Cut and Paste
To move or copy folders and files using the clipboard, follow these steps:
1. Select the file or files you want to copy or move.
The icon is selected. If you want to move a group of files or folders, click
ADJUST on individual icons to add them to the group. If the icon is already
selected, clicking ADJUST deselects it, removing it from the group.
2. Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu.
Use Cut, or Copy to copy a file. The file or files are moved or copied to the
clipboard.
An instruction message is displayed in the footer, as shown in Figure 2-18.
b~-------------------------------Copy these ti !e{s) by ope n ing the target to! der an d se !ecti ng 'Paste'
Figure 2-18 Messages when Files are Cut to the Clipboard
3. Open the folder you want to receive the files.
4. Choose Paste from the Edit menu or the File Pane pop-up menu, or press
the Paste key on the keyboard.
78
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Using Drag and Drop in File Manager
You can use the drag and drop operation to copy and move files from the
Folder View, path pane, or file pane to the following destinations:
•
•
•
•
Any icon onto any folder icon in pathpane, file pane, or folder view
Onto the background of any open File Manager file pane
Onto the Wastebasket icon or window
Onto the any folder icon on the workspace
You can use drag and drop between tools such as:
• Onto the Mail Tool Compose icon or window (attachment pane)
• Onto the Text Editor icon, text pane, or drop target
• Onto the icon or drop target of Print Tool, Tape Tool, Icon Editor, Snapshot,
Audio Tool, or any other application supporting the drag and drop.
Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Drag and Drop
To move or copy a file or folder into another folder within File Manager when
both the source and destination icons are visible, follow these steps:
1. Select the file or folders that you want to move or copy.
2. To move, press SELECT on a selected file and drag the pointer onto the
destination folder. To copy, press the Control key together with SELECT
on a selected file, and drag the pointer onto the destination folder.
Pointed becomes actual icon being dragged. The tip of the arrow defines the
destination of the move operation.
3. Release SELECT.
The file or folder is moved or copied to the new folder.
Dragging and Dropping a Document Icon onto the Workspace
You can drag and drop data file icons from File Manager onto the Workspace.
When you drop the icon onto the workspace, it starts the appropriate
application, and opens the file.
File Manager
79
Dragging and Dropping a Folder onto the Workspace
You can drag and drop individual folders from File Manager onto the
Workspace. When you drop the folder onto the workspace, it is opened, and
the contents of the folder are displayed in a new window. If you switch
frequently between directories, you can use this feature to display the contents
of more than one folder at a time.
To drag and drop a folder onto the workspace, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on a folder to select it.
2. Press SELECT and drag the folder onto the workspace background.
3. Release SELECT.
The window is opened, and the contents displayed, as shown in the
example in Figure 2-19.
ili~lr;~';iil,;,;,;,;,;,;,;,;,;~,;,;,;,;~~,g,;,;~,;,;,;,;~,;~,;,;,;,;~~~,;~,;,g,;,;,;,;~,;,;,;~,;~,;,;,;,;,;,;';';';';';';';';';;~~;;:~::~:;:;';';;~~;';~;~~:;
~~~~~~~~+
Il~
~~~~
til
:::~~
0GIJ!J
File Man;
contains 10 iterl"",;§:::"""""",==-""""""""""=""""""""""=""""""",,,,,,~==
~~~~L-
D
Artfi les
1::1
l~
Contains 8 items
Fish
mail
root
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
Cod
[J
[J
Swordfish
Tuna
Feb 17 14:06
Feb 17 14:06
31
Des kSetDefau Its Fe b 17 14:06
2230
Eel
o
Feb 17 14:06
itflip.rs
Feb 17 14:06
28192
Sal mon
Fe b 17 14:06
31
Feb 17 14:06
512
Feb 1714:06
o
o
o Seafood
Figure 2-19 Folder Opened into a new File Manager Window
4. Close folder to an icon on the WorkSpace.
80
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Dragging and Dropping Between Tools
You can use drag and drop in the following ways between tools.
Dragging and Dropping a File onto another Application
You can drag and drop a file onto another application outside of File Manager,
regardless of whether the application is displayed as an icon or as an open
window. If you drop a file with an inappropriate format onto a window or
icon, the move or copy is not performed.
When you drop a file onto the drag and drop target or icon of an application,
the file is loaded into the application. Follow these steps to load a file into
another application:
1. In File Manager, click SELECT on the file icon that you want to load.
2. Drag the file onto the application icon or drag and drop target, and release
SELECT.
The file is loaded into the application. Note that when you drag and drop a
file to an application outside of File Manager, the file is always copied. The
original file remains in File Manager. For example, if you move a file from
File Manager to Print Tool, the original file is not deleted after it is printed.
If the application cannot accept the file format, the file is not loaded. When you
drop an icon of an incompatible file type onto an open window, or when you
drop an icon onto an inappropriate location, an error message is displayed in
the footer of the destination window.
Dragging and Dropping Mail onto File Manager
When you receive a mail message, you can drag and drop individual mail
attachments onto File Manager, or you can drag and drop the entire mail
message onto File Manager. See "Mail Tool Attachments" on page 174 for
information about mail attachments.
File Manager
81
Copying Mail Attachments onto File Manager
When you receive a mail message that contains attachments, you can access the
attachments by dragging and dropping any or all of them onto File Manager.
The attachment files are then available for you to use just like any other File
Manager file. You can drag and drop the attachments onto File Manager using
the following steps:
1. Open both File Manager and Mail Tool.
2. Open the folder window in File Manager where you want to put the
attachment(s).
3. In the Mail Tool application, click SELECT on the attachment that you
want to move or copy. Click ADJUST on any additional attachments that
you want to include.
4. Press SELECT and drag the pointer.
A small glyph of the type of file being moved is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-20.
82
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
To: ________________________________
Su bject: ________________________________
Cc:
Fish
FreshWater>
OceanFish
New Folder
Attachments
~ ~
1:
ap poi ntme nt.apt
Data transfer in progress".
Figure 2-20 Dragging a Mail Attachment onto File Manager
5. Drag the pointer onto the File Manager file pane and release SELECT.
The attachment appears in File Manager with its original name and data
type.
Copying Entire Mail Messages onto File Manager
You can copy an entire mail message to File Manager, including all
attachments. The message and attachments are then combined into one file. If
you drag and drop a mail message onto File Manager that doesn't have any
attachments, the message is saved as a simple text file. To copy an entire mail
message to File Manager, follow these steps:
1. Open both File Manager and Mail Tool.
File Manager
83
2. Open the folder window in File Manager where you want to put the mail
message(s).
3. In the Mail Tool application, click SELECT on the header of the mail
message to be copied or moved.
4. Press SELECT and drag the pointer.
A small mail file icon is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-21. You can release
the Control key any time after the envelope is displayed.
i05IID------------------------------------------873 M b~
Contai ns 10 ite ms
D
Cod
@)
De
Mai I Too I -/var/mai I/egr,
~~~( Compose 'J) Mail File: @)*-
(£§)~~(
Seafood
•
mailfile
•
N
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
thi ef@ci ci
patten@newbi rth
bgah l@scuba
aye rs@outhouse
aye rs@outhouse
mari ac@cel ti c
hami 1 ton@artemi 5
abel son@sharonol ds
aquab 1 u@cowman
'J)
Reply
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
Q§2)(§
10: 42
10: 49
10: 50
10: 51
10: 51
11: 00
11: 13
11: 34
13: 58
18/506
46/1282
32/1110
17/532
17/511
90/2531
22/611
32/1232
21/647
VOl
Pn
Inl
SUI
vi
Pn
me,
VOl
SUI
Figure 2-21 Dragging a Mail Message onto File Manager
5. Drag the pointer onto the File Manager file pane and release SELECT.
The first time you drag a mail message onto File Manager, the mail message
appears in File Manager as a file called mailfile. If that file already exists,
the mail message appears as mailfileO. If mailfile and mailfileO
already exist, the file is named mailfilel, and so forth.
You can also drag and drop a mail message onto a mail file icon in File
Manager to append the new message to an existing mail file.
84
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Transferring Files From Your System to Another
To transfer files from your system to another system, follow these steps:
1. Display the Remote Copy popup by choosing Remote Copy from the File
menu.
If you have selected files, your host name (workstation or machine name) is
displayed in the Source Machine Name text field, and the file names are
displayed in the Pathname text field, as shown in Figure 2-22.
Source
Where does the file you want to copy reside?
Mach i ne Name: river
------------------------
What is the path name of the fi Ie to copy?
Path name: /h Ig hti de/egret/F is h
Desti natio n
Where do you want the fi Ie cop ie d?
Mach ine Name:
_ce_lt~ic~_______________
What is the final path name of the copied file?
Path name:
.:...../t~m=!b~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(COpy File] (cancel)
Figure 2-22
Remote Copy Pop-up Window
2. Type the destination machine name in the Machine Name text field under
Destination.
3. Type the pathname in the Path Name text field under Destination.
File Manager
85
4. Click SELECT on Copy File to initiate the transfer.
While the transfer is in process, the Copy button displays the standard busy
pattern.
To transfer files from another system to your system, you must know the path
and file name of the files you want to transfer. To transfer a file from a remote
machine to your machine, follow these steps:
1. Type the name of the remote machine in the Source Machine text field.
2. Type the full path and file name of the file you want to transfer under
Source in the Path Name text field.
3. Leave the Destination text fields blank, or type your machine name.
4. Type the path and file name for the file under Destination in the Path
N arne text field.
5. Click SELECT Copy File to start the transfer.
The Copy button is dimmed until the transfer is complete. If there are
problems with the transfer, error messages will appear in the footer of the
current File Manager window.
6. Click SELECT on the Copy button to start the transfer.
The Copy button is dimmed until the transfer is complete. If there are
problems with the transfer, error messages appear in a pop-up window that
explains the problem.
Printing Files
You can print files from File Manager in three ways:
• Select files in the file pane and drag and drop them onto the Print Tool
application. Files are printed using the default print instructions bound to
the icon in the Binder database. See Chapter 10, "Print Tool" for more
information about using the Print Tool and Chapter 16, "Binder" for
information about print bindings.
• Select files in the file pane and choose Print (or Print One) from the File
menu or the File Pane pop-up menu. The Print (or Print One) item is
inactive unless files are selected. Print One prints files using the print
method in the Binder database, if it exists. Otherwise, Print prints files using
the default print method from the File Manager Properties window. See
86
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
"Customizing Your File Manager" on page 99 for information about tool
properties and the chapter Chapter 16, "Binder" for information about print
bindings.
• Highlight the Print (or Print One) item from the File menu or the File Pane
pop-up menu, drag right to display the Print submenu, and choose Print to
display the Print Options window. This is useful when you want to print a
file using a method other than the default print method, or if you want to
print a file to a different printer. Figure 2-23 shows the Print window with
an alternate printer specified in the text field. Specify $FILE where you
want the file name to be in your print script.
FM: Print
Print Method: cat $FILE Imp -10 lip
Copies: _,_
~
Figure 2-23 Print Popup Window
Finding Files and Folders
File Manager provides three ways to locate folders and files:
• Go To text field and button
• Pattern matching with a string typed in the File Pane
• Find pop-up window
This section describes how to use these methods to find folders and files.
Using the Go To Text Field and Menu
The Go To menu includes a list of the folders that you have accessed since you
started File Manager. Your home folder is the default item on this menu. The
rest of the items on the menu show (a default of) ten of your most recently
accessed folders. You can make the amount of items greater or smaller. You can
change back to any of these folders by choosing the path to the folder from the
Go To menu. You can also add your own items to the menu. For information
on how to make these changes, refer to "Go To Menu Defaults" on page 111.
File Manager
87
When you know the path of the folder you want to open or the path and file
name of a file that you want to select, you can type the path or the path and file
name in the Go To text field. Then either press Return or SELECT the Go To
button.
When a path is typed, the folder specified is opened and its contents are
displayed in the file pane. When a path and file name are typed, the specified
folder is opened, its contents are displayed in the file pane, and the file is
located, scrolled into view, and selected.
Using Pattern Matching to Find Files
You can use wildcard characters to select groups of related files in the currently
displayed file pane by typing a pattern-matching sequence in the Go To text
field or with the pointer anywhere in the File Pane.
Pattern Matching in the Go To Text Field
The star symbol (*) can be used to match any string, so typing * . rs in the Go
To text field and either pressing Return or clicking SELECT on the Go To
button will select all files ending in . rs. Figure 2-24 shows an example of a
file pane with all *. rs files.
A Pps
Scree nS hots
Contai ns 80 ite ms
~
basewindow.rs
~
cmaccess I ist.rs
Figure 2-24
88
~
cmap ptfu lis ize.rs
~
em browser2.rs
cme
cmdaybol
Using Pattern Matching with Go To to Select Related Files
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Pattern Matching in the File Pane
You can also use pattern matching to find files by moving the pointer into the
File Pane and typing the pattern that you want to match.
The pattern you type is displayed in the footer. As the pattern is typed, all the
files starting with the current pattern are selected. For example, when you type
c, the pattern is c *, and all the files starting with c are selected. If you then
type h, the pattern becomes ch *, and only the files starting with ch are
selected. If you then type a, the pattern becomes cha *, and the files starting
with cha are selected, and so on. To finish the pattern, press Return. If there
are no files that match the pattern, an error message appears in the footer.
Using the Find Pop-up Window
When you do not know or cannot remember the specific location of a folder
or file, or when you want to locate a group of files according to specific
criteria, use the Find pop-up window. To display the Find window, choose
Find from the File menu. The Find pop-up window is displayed, as shown
in Figure 2-25.
File Manager
89
-~-"-----------F-M-:F-il-ld----------'
File Type:
[Q] [QJ
~
Find in and below folder: '-/h---=i9""-'-ht'-'-'id;.o..:e/-"-e9"'-re:....;:t!__F_ish.-&.--_ _ _ _ _ __
Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Owner: _ _ _ _ _ _ _
I Included I Excluded I
I Included I Excluded I
Modified After: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (mm/dd/yy)
Modified Before: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (mm/dd/yy)
S(l,~rch
nips Contdning String: ............................................................................
I
i,:iTi')r(')
(::'1,>:
I
I~----------------------~=
Figure 2-25
Find Window
Finding Files With the Find Window
To find a specific file or group of files, you can fill in some or all of the text
fields, according to the type of search you want to perform.
• Use the File Type setting to specify whether you want to search only folders,
only files, only applications, only executable files or a combination. The
mini-icons displayed in the File Type choice item are the same as the miniicons used in the List by... displays, as shown in Figure 2-15.
• Use the Find files in and below folders text field to specify where in your file
system you want to start the search. The search begins in the folder you
specify in this text field, and includes all subfolders in that path.
• Use the Name text field to specify the file name or pattern you want to
match. Use Included or Excluded to either include or exclude the pattern
from the search.
• Use the Owner text field when you want to search for files by owner, or
exclude a particular owner from the search.
90
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Use the Modified After or Modified Before text field, or both, to specify a
time frame for the search. You must specify, as a minimum, the month and
day for each of these text fields.
• Use the Search Files Containing String field when you want to find files with
specific contents. For example, to find all files in which the DeskSet product
is specifically named, you would type DeskSet in the text field. If you click
SELECT to turn on the Ignore Case setting, all files with the word "DeskSet"
will be listed in the scrolling list, regardless of how the word is capitalized.
When you have filled in the text fields, click SELECT on the Find button to
start the search. Once you start a search, the Stop button is activated. You can
stop the search at any time by clicking SELECT on the Stop button.
When the search is completed, all files that match the pattern are displayed in
the scrolling list at the bottom of the Find window. If you have more than one
field filled out on the Find window, a file must match the information in all of
these fields for it be listed. Figure 2-26 shows an example of a file content
pattern matching search. File Manager found 37 files containing the specified
string. (Seven of the files found are shown in the figure, the rest are scrolled
out of view.)
File Manager
91
FM: Find
File Type:
[Q] [Q]
~
Find in and below folder: Ihightide/egret/TestApps/493ScreenShots
Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Owner: _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Modified After:
-'-01:..:../.:....:15:..:.../9::...:%
_ _- - - -
I Included I Excluded I
I Included I Excluded I
(mm/dd/yy)
Modified Before: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (mm/dd/yy)
......................... I
!,:!r;·x(·)
c",,:,
I
o Ih ig hti de/egret/TestA pps/493Scree nS hots
[J /h ig hti de/egret/TestA p ps/493Scree nS hots/fmflop pyw indow,rs
[J Ih ig hti de/egret/TestA p ps/493Scree nS hots/fmformatd is krs
[J Ih ig hti de/egret/TestA p ps/493Scree nS hots/fmre name d is krs
[J Ih ig hti de/egret/TestA p ps/493Scree nS hots/fcope nw in dow,rs
[J /h ig hti de/egret/TestA p ps/493ScreenS hots/fcs~vew in dow,rs
[J /h ig hti de/egret/TestA p ps/493Scree nS hots/ws3w indows,rs
~----------------------~=
37 file(s) found
Figure 2-26 Example of a Find
You can select and open one file at a time from the Find window scrolling list.
To select a file, move the pointer onto the line and click SELECT. The line is
highlighted, and the Open button is activated. To open the highlighted file,
click SELECT on the Open button.
Using the Wastebasket
The Wastebasket is a temporary storage area for files that you want to discard
and that you probably will delete from your file system. When you start File
Manager, the Wastebasket is automatically created and displayed as an icon.
You can move the Wastebasket anywhere you want on the workspace.
When the Wastebasket is empty, the icon shows an empty wastebasket. After
you have put a file in the Wastebasket, the Wastebasket icon's appearance is
changed to remind you that at least one file is there. Figure 2-27 shows the
Wastebasket icon when empty and when there are one or more files in it.
92
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
[~::::: [~::m.1
Figure 2-27
The Wastebasket Icon, Empty and with One or More Files
You can move folders and files to the Wastebasket by selecting them and
dragging and dropping them onto the Wastebasket icon or window, or by
choosing Delete from the Edit menu.
Files that you put in the Wastebasket are stored in a . wastebasket folder in
your home directory.
You can view the contents of the Wastebasket by opening the Wastebasket icon.
A window is displayed with a scrolling pane that shows you the files you have
moved to the Wastebasket. Figure 2-28 shows an example of the Wastebasket
window.
~
FM: Waste:: Ih ig htide/egret/.waste bas ket
~ ~ (Empty Waste)
O~--------------------------------Contai ns 0 ite ms
873 M bytes (98%) ava
Figure 2-28 Wastebasket Window
The Wastebasket window has View, Edit, and Empty Waste functions available.
To access the Wastebasket pop-up menu, move the pointer anywhere in the
Wastebasket window and press MENU. You can use the Wastebasket pop-up
menu to do the following:
File Manager
93
• Use Empty Wastebasket to delete all the files in the Wastebasket. This option
is inactive if the Wastebasket is already empty.
Caution - You cannot recover any files that you delete/ destroy with Empty
Waste or Empty Wastebasket on the File pane menu.
• Use Select All to select and highlight all the files in the Wastebasket. This
option is inactive if the Wastebasket is empty.
• Use Destroy to delete all the selected files in the Wastebasket. This option is
inactive if no files in the Wastebasket are selected.
• Use Undelete to restore the selected files in the Wastebasket. The files are
automatically moved back to their original locations. This option is inactive
if the Wastebasket is empty.
If you quit File Manager and restart it, the new File Manager will not
remember the original locations of files in the Wastebasket. If you choose
Undelete in this case, File Manager sends the message Original
location for <.file> not saved -- please restore manually. See
"Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Cut and Paste" on page 78 or
"Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Drag and Drop" on page 79
for information about how to move the file out of the Wastebasket and back
into the desired folder.
• Use Cut to move the selected files from the Wastebasket to the clipboard.
This option is inactive if no files in the Wastebasket are selected.
• Use Copy to copy the selected files from the Wastebasket to the clipboard.
This option is inactive if no files in the Wastebasket are selected.
• Use Paste to move the contents of the clipboard into the Wastebasket.
Creating a New Wastebasket
If you quit the Wastebasket window, you can create a new one by following
these steps:
1. Make sure the File Manager Tool General Defaults Properties Edit Menu
item is IJDelete".
The "Delete" option is the default setting. See "Customizing Your File
Manager" on page 99 for information about setting the File Manager Tool
Properties.
94
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
2. In File Manager, select a folder or file that you want to put into the
Waste basket.
3. Choose Delete from the Edit menu or the File Pane pop-up menu.
A new Wastebasket is created to contain the files you selected.
Linking Files
A link is a symbolic connection or pointer to a single file that allows you to
access it from more than one directory. You can set up a link to a file in a
restricted directory, allowing access to the file without providing access to the
directory.
The Link option on the Edit menu runs the standard ln operating system
command. A symbolic link is created when you link files between directories.
When you link files in the same directory, a symbolic link is created. Refer to
the man page for ln for a complete description.
For example, if you have a file named Marlin in a folder called Fish, you
can link it to another folder called SwordF ish. Once the link is established,
you can access Marlin from either folder. Marlin has not been copied into
SwordF ish; it has been linked with a pointer from one folder to another.
Any editing changes you make to a file with links are reflected in all of the
folders, since there is really only one file, not multiple copies of it.
To use a linked file, you can drag and drop its icon from any folder that the file
is linked to.
Creating a Link
To link files to folders, follow these steps:
1. Select the file (or files) you want to link.
2. Choose Link from the Edit menu or popup file pane menu.
An instructional message is displayed in the footer, as shown in
Figure 2-29, telling you how to proceed.
File Manager
95
Link these file(s) by opening the target folder and selecting 'Paste'
Figure 2-29
Instruction Message after a Link is Initiated
3. Open the folder you want to link the file to.
4. Choose Paste from the Edit menu or the File Pane pop-up menu, or press
the Paste key on the keyboard.
The file icon is displayed in the file pane and a message confirming the link
is displayed in the File Manager footer.
Link information is displayed as part of the properties of the file, as shown in
the example in Figure 2-30. See "File and Folder Information" on page 97 for
more information about file properties.
FM: Information
Name:~Tu~n~%
D
Size: 0 bytes
Type:
Figure 2-30
_________________
III ide!egretiroot!home!F is h!Tu na
Links Displayed as Part of the File Type Properties.
Removing a Link
You can remove a link by selecting the file and choosing Delete from the Edit
menu or the File Pane menu. Removing a link does not remOve the original file.
If you remove the original file without also deleting the link, the icon for the
link changes to display a broken chain. In the example shown in Figure 2-31,
the original file named aliases has been deleted, but the linked file remains.
96
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Figure 2-31
A Broken Link
File and Folder Information
Each folder, file and application in your file system has the following
information (also known as properties) associated with it:
•
•
•
•
Name
Ownership
Group
Permissions (read, write, execute)
You can display these properties for an individual selected file choosing
Information from the File menu. You can change these properties if you own
the file and have the correct permissions set.
The File Information window also displays the following about each file:
• File Size in bytes
• File Type
• Date the file was last modified
• Date the file was last accessed
• File Permissions and Information-Owner, Group, World, Owner name, and
Group name
These (more advanced) topics can be accessed by pressing the plus button at
the lower right corner of the Information window. Once the information is
displayed, you can "hide" it by pressing the minus sign at the lower right
corner.
• Method to open file
• Method to print file
File Manager
97
• Mount point
• Mounted from
• Free space
Figure 2-32 shows an example of a File Properties window.
FM: Information
Name: Seafood
IContents I
Size: 16 kbytes
Type: directory
last Mod ified: Wed Jan 20 16:26:02 1993 PST
last Accessed: We d Jan 20 16:30:44 1993 PST
Permissions Read
Write Execute
Owner: ~
~
~
Group: ~
D
~
World: ~
D
~
Owner: egret
Gro u p: staff
Open Method:
Print Method:
Mount Point: /hightide
___-..---.Advanced Options
Mounted From: /dev/dsk/cOtOdOs4
Free Space: 875,185 kbytes (99%)
Figure 2-32
Example of a File Properties Window
To display the Information window, select a file or a group of files and choose
Information from the File menu.
If the Information window is already showing when you select a new file, the
File Properties information is updated to reflect the properties of the new file.
98
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
If you select more than one file, the Information window shows those
properties that the selected files can share. The document names and specific
document information are not displayed. You can change the permissions for
the group of selected files to be the same by clicking SELECT on the
Permissions check boxes and then clicking SELECT on the Apply button.
Changing Properties and Permissions
Every file and directory has a security system organized around permissions.
Permissions determine which users can read a file, write to (or change) it, or
execute it (applications are executed). You must own the file to change its
permissions. Users are categorized as owner, group, and world.
• Owner designates the owner of the file.
• Group designates the name of a specified group that can access the file.
• World allows access to anyone on your network.
You can change file properties for any file you own (as long as you have
permission to make modifications in the folder containing the file). If you do
not own the file, the write permissions determine whether you can access a file
to change it.
To change file properties, type new information in the text fields of the
Information window. Click SELECT on a check box to either add or remove a
check.
When you have changed the properties, click SELECT on the Apply button to
apply them. The changes take effect immediately.
You can change common properties on more than one file in the same manner.
Customizing Your File Manager
You can customize your File Manager from the Properties menu in the
following ways:
• Customize General Defaults such as open a new folder into a different
window, view the Folder View horizontally (or vertically), change the
Wastebasket to delete or destroy or change the default document name.
• Customize New Folder Defaults
• Customize Current Folder Settings
File Manager
99
• Customize the Go To menu
• Create your own custom commands and add them to the Custom
Commands submenu that you access from the File menu.
• Customize Advanced settings such as print method, default editor, how you
view floppies and so forth.
These methods are described in the sections that follow.
• You can access the Properties by choosing Edit ~ Properties.
The different properties categories are shown in Figure 2-33.
~
FM: Properties
Category: ~ General Defaults
Ge neral Defau Its
Open
~
Properties categories
available
~
Folder View:
New Folder Defaults
l Show Vertical J
C urre nt Fol der Setti ngs
LShow
Horizontal
J
Go To Menu Defaults
Custom Commands
Edit
I'
Advance d Setti ngs
~
I Destroy I
Applies cha nges but
does not save them
if you quit File
...............
Manager
Saves cha nges as
new defaul ts-
in the waste window.
File is not recoverab Ie.
Default Document Name: NewDocument
------
~.1 Save as Defau Its)
(Re'S8t)
-
Resets to last saved
N efault
~
Figure 2-33 File Manager Properties Menu
In addition, you can customize your File Manager (and other DeskSet
applications) with items such as font type and size that can be set in the
Workspace Properties menu. See "Using the Workspace Properties Window"
on page 478 for more information.
100
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
General Defaults
To change the General Default Properties:
• Choose Properties ~ General Defaults from Category.
The General Defaults Properties window is shown in Figure 2-34.
19
FM: Properties
Category:
@)
Ge neral Defau Its
Open Folder into:
I Same Window
Fo Ider View:
I
I Separate Window I
I Show Vertical I
I Show Horizontal I
Edit Menu item is:
I Delete I
I Destroy I
File is recoverable from the Waste window.
File is not recoverab Ie.
Default Document Name: NewDocument
«Apply)
Figure 2-34
(save as Defaults)
C§D
General Defaults Properties Window
• Use Open Folder any time you open a folder. You can set the folder to open
it into the same window as your existing folders or have the folder open
into a new window each time.
• Use Folder View to layout your folder structure horizontally or vertically.
• Use Edit Menu item to change the Delete option (default) on the Edit menu.
Delete means delete to Waste window (where files can be recovered, if
necessary.) Destroy means files cannot be recovered. Whatever you set for
delete or destroy is reflected in the Edit menu. The Delete/Destroy setting
allows you to choose whether File Manager deletes files by moving them to
the Wastebasket, or destroys them. See "Using the Wastebasket" on page 92
for more information. If you choose Destroy, files are not moved to the
File Manager
101
wastebasket and are not recoverable once you delete them. On the other
hand, you never need to empty the wastebasket if you choose the Destroy
option.
Note - If you choose the Destroy option (and selected Save as Defaults), this
state is saved when you quit File Manager. Therefore, the next time you start
up the File Manager application, the Wastebasket will not be created because
Destroy is on.
• Use Default Document Name to change the default name of a new
document. This is the name you see when you create a new document.
New Folder Defaults
You can change the default for the way new files or folders are displayed in the
file pane using the New Folder Defaults, shown in Figure 2-35. To display this
window, choose New Folder Defaults from the Properties Category.
• Choose Properties
~ N ew
Folder Defaults from Category.
The New Folder Defaults Properties window is shown in Figure 2-35.
102
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
FM: Properties
Category:
@) New Fol der Defau Its
Default Name: .:. . :.Ne:. .:.w.:. .,:.F-"-olc.:;.de;;. ;. r_ _ _ _ _ _ __
Longest Name: ~
EEl
I Type I Size I Date I
Hidden Files: I Hide I Show I
Display Files As: I Icons I List I Content I
Sort By:
I Name
Show in List:
I Date
I Owner
I Size
~==:::::::::
I Group
I ~.~
I Links
I Permissions I
I <:(.!.g !-:');1~;
~===~
·);1( .. : r;;,(·r(;(·) i
n1<>~;
I
I
((Apply» (Save as Defaults) ~
Figure 2-35 New Folder Defaults Window
Default Name
The current default name (when a new folder is created) is NewFolder. You can
change this to anything you like.
Longest Name
The Longest Name field allows you to choose how many characters (based on
the average width of the characters) of each file name are displayed in the file
pane of File Manager. You can type any number from a to 255.
Note - The number of characters actually displayed for each file name may
vary when using variable-width fonts because the width is calculated based on
the width of the average character in the font.
File Manager
103
Names that do not fit within the specified length are followed by a "greater
than" sign (» to show that the complete name is not displayed. Figure 2-36
shows an example of the file pane with shorter file names set.
@)
Fi Ie Manager: /h ig htide/egret
~ ~ ~ (GO To: 'V)
*.rs,.
I~
D~-----------------------------------------------------contains 27 items
874 Mbytes
[] ~ D LJ
D LJ {f} LJ
,tt
,ab_ cardca> ,des ksetde> ,mai Itool-i>
,ab_library
Figure 2-36
,fm
I
D LJ
D LJ
dead, letter
mail
,ope nw i n-> ,waste bas k> dead, letter> TestApps
File Pane with Shorter File Names Specified
If you want to see the complete file name, you can click SELECT on the name.
In this example, the file. ab_cardca> is selected, and the full name is
displayed in an editable text field, as shown in the example in Figure 2-37.
@)
Fi Ie Manager: /h ig htide/egret
~~~(GOTO:'V)
I~
D~------------------------------------------------------
874 Mbytes C
Contains 27 items
D
[9J
D
LJ
[]
=
,ab_cardca> ,desksetde:::IMI,,,.i
,aLlibrary
Figure 2-37
104
.fm
LJ
LJ
D LJ
dead, letter
mail
D
LJ
,openwin-> ,wastebask> dead,letter> TestApps
Displaying a complete file name when short names are specified
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Icon Layout
The Icon Layout setting determines whether files in the file pane are listed in
rows (horizontally) or columns (vertically). The default is row order. For
example, if files are sorted alphabetically by Name in rows, they are listed in
from left to right, with the first files on the top row, then the second row, and
so on. If files are sorted alphabetically by Name in columns, they are listed
from top to bottom, with the first files in the left column, then the second
column, etc. Figure 2-38 shows files sorted by Name in rows, and
Figure 2-39 shows the same files sorted in columns.
File Manager: Ihightide/egreVFish
I~
D~-------------------------------------------873 M bytes I
Contains 10 items
D
Seafood
~
Tuna
~
Cod
~
image,rs
~
Des kSetDefau Its
~
Eel
~
~
FlounderMail
mailfile
~
Salmon
SI
Figure 2-38 Icons Listed in Rows (Horizontally) in the File Pane
File Manager
105
Fi Ie Manager: /h ig htide/egrel
I~
DliIIB'--------------------------------Contains 10 items
D
seafood
~
Cod
~
~
Tuna
~
image.rs
[ZJ
Des kSetDefau Its
FlounderMail
~
Eel
mailfile
~
~
Salmon
Figure 2-39 Icons Listed in Columns (Vertically) in the File Pane
Sort By Options
The Sort By Options allow you to choose how the files in the file pane are
sorted. You can choose any of the following settings:
• Name, to sort the files alphabetically
• Type, to sort the files in alphabetical groups by file type, with folders first,
followed by files, then by applications
• Size, to sort the files by size, largest to smallest
• Date, to sort the files in reverse chronological order (newest to oldest)
106
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Hidden Files
The Hidden Files settings allow you to choose whether or not to display
hidden system files (or dot files as they are sometimes called). Hidden files are
usually system or configuration files, and the filename is preceded by a dot (.).
Figure 2-40 shows an example of a listing with hidden files displayed.
:r-m
-------
File 1'I'lanag
~~~~~
I~
Contains 27 items
[J
Jan 19 17:30
1"
Dee 20 15:43
5"
[J ,eshre
~.d
~ . des ksetdefau Its
Jan 11 14:32
1:
.ab_library
o .eetables
Nov 2411:24
1~
Jan 20 11 :18
2:
O.fm
Jan 2017:16
5"
[J
[J
[J
[J
.history
Jan 20 11 :01
1<
.Iogin
Oet 23 16:04
H
.mailrc
Jan 20 11 :23
H
.maiitooHnit
Nov 13 10:24
1:
1(
~ .openwin-init
~ .0penwin-init.BAK
Nov 13 10:24
Oet 26 15:50
1(
8!
Figure 2-40
File Pane with Hidden Files (dot files) Visible
Disp lay Files As
Display Files as lets you determine the default way to display your files in the
file pane. You can choose any of the following settings:
• Icon, to help you identify each file by type
• List, to display more files in the pane and to show you more information
about each individual file, determined by the List Options. Displaying more
files is true only if no list options are set.
File Manager
107
• Content, to display a preview of the contents of icon and raster files. All
other files are displayed as icons.
Show in List
The Properties window option Show in List allow you to choose how much
information is displayed when you display the contents of the file pane as a list
with mini-icons as shown in Figure 2-4l.
The list options in Show in List are nonexclusive settings. You can choose none,
some, or all of the options. To set an option, click SELECT to toggle it from off
to on, or from on to off. (Chosen options have a thickened border on
monochrome monitors.) Figure 2-41 shows an example of a list display when
all of the options are chosen.
Fi Ie Manager: /h ig htide/~gret
I~
Contains 27 items
[J ,ab_library
875 Mbytes
110
egret
staff
Dec 2015:43
512
egret
staff
drwxr-xr-x
[J ,cshrc
Jan 11 14:32
1392
egret
other
-rw-rw-r--
~,d
~ ,desksetdefaults
Nov 24 11:24
1589
sebring
staff
Jan 2011:18
2230
egret
staff
-rwxrwxrwx
-rwxrwxrwx
Jan 20 17:16
512
egret
staff
Jan 2011:01
146
egret
staff
drwxr-xr-x
-rw-r--r--
O.fm
[J ,history
[J ,login
[J ,mailrc
[J ,mailtool-init
~ ,openwin-init
~ ,ope nw i n-i n it.BA K
Oct 2316:04
1656
egret
other
-rw-r--r--
Jan 20 11:23
1606
egret
staff
-rw-r--r--
Nov 1310:24
Nov 1310:24
132
1006
egret
-rw-r--r--
egret
staff
staff
Oct 26 15:50
1057
egret
staff
-rwxr-xr-x
881
eClret
staff
-rw-r--r--
,Il ,ooenwin-menu-oroClrams Oct 21
11 :28
OCITJIJ
Figure 2-41
108
-rw-r--r--
Jan 19 17:30
o ,cetables
File Pane with all of the List Options Set
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
-rwxr-xr-x
View Contents As
View Contents as lets you determine the type of files that you want to display
a preview of when the Display Mode is Content.
View By Content
When your file system contains icon and raster files created by applications,
such as Icon Editor and Snapshot, you can display an image of the contents of
the file in place of the standard data file icon. The images are displayed to scale
in a 64-by-64 pixel square.
Choosing Content as your default Display Mode in the New Folder Defaults
window displays the contents of black-and-white and color icons, rasters, X
bitmap files, or any combination of these. Folders, applications, and other files
are displayed as icons. Figure 2-42 is an example of a Contents file display.
@)
File Manager: /hightide/egretiFish
~ ~ ~ VM::t~W:)
10
I~
I
DGI:ITJ
0
873 M bytes (98%) avai lab Ie
Contains 10 items
LJ
Seafood
~
Tuna
=
~
Cod
~
image.rs
~
DeskSetDefaults
~
Eel
~
~
FlounderMail
mailfile
~
Salmon
~
~
Swordfish
Figure 2-42 Contents File Display
File Manager
109
Note - Choosing to display the contents of icon and raster files can delay the
reading and displaying of other types of files and folders since File Manager
must perform some additional processing to provide the preview.
You can select any or all of the options, as follows:
• Monochrome Icons, to preview black-and-white Sun icons
• Monochrome Images, to preview black-and-white Sun raster and X Bitmap
images
• Color Icons, to preview XPM files
Current Folder Settings
This allows you to change the settings of the current folder. These settings are
identical to the property settings that can be set for a new folder except there is
no Default Name field. For complete information on these settings, refer to
"New Folder Defaults" on page 102.
FM: Properties
Category:
@)
Current Folder Settings
longest Name: ~
Ico n layo ut:
Sort By:
Hidden Files:
Dis play Fi les As:
EEl
I Horizontal I
Name I Ty pe I Size I Date I
Hide I Show I
Vertical
Icon
I List I Conte nt I
These settings apply to currently active folder window ONLY.
«Apply» ( Save as Defaults) ~
Figure 2-43 Current Folder Settings Menu
110
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Note - The Current Folder Settings window displays the same information for
the active (selected) folder window only. You can use this to change the
settings for the designated active window.
Go To Menu Defaults
This allows you to change the defaults of the Go To menu. You can set the Go
To menu properties to show a trail of the directory paths you last visited, and
you can set up special paths to directories that you visit often. The Go To menu
has several sections divided by spaces. Typically, you see a default label for
home (a label for your home directory pathname), application specific defaults
that include Waste and Folder View, then the paths to the directories you last
visited.
~
FM: Properties
category:
@)
Go To Menu Defaults
Ty pe in the fol der's path an d cI ick Add Ite m,
Path name: /h ighti de/egret Ihome/F is h
(Add Item)
Menu label: OtherFile~
Go To Menu Items:
~
Home
MyFiles
I!
I
The Go To Menu displays the last folders visited,
Display: ~
E8
Folders
«Apply» (save as Defaults) ~
Figure 2-44 The Go To Menu Defaults
File Manager
111
• Use Pathname and the Add Item button to add another pathname to the
default Go To menu. This can be in addition to your home directory
pathname. If you add a pathname without a label, then the entire pathname
is displayed in the Go To menu.
• Use Menu Label to create a new name for the specified pathname. You can
add it to the Go To Menu Items scrolling list. This is useful if the pathname
specified is long.
• Use the Edit button to cut; copy; paste-an item before, after, on top or on
bottom of another item; delete an item in the Go To Menu Items default
scrolling list.
• Use Display: Folders to indicate how many of the last folders visited should
display by default in the Go To menu.
Custom Commands
The Custom Commands window allows you to create and store commonly
used operating system commands. Once you have added the commands to the
menu, you can use them at any time by choosing them from the Custom
Commands submenu from the File menu.
Creating Custom Commands
Choose Custom Commands category from the Properties menu, as shown in
Figure 2-45. You use this window to add often-used UNIX commands to your
Custom Commands menu. You can even create a command that lets you
specify different options every time the command is chosen.
Note - The Custom Command feature assumes that you have some working
knowledge of the UNIX operating system. If you are not familiar with UNIX or
have problems, you might want to have your system administrator help you
create any desired custom commands.
112
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
!9
FM: Properties
Cate gory:
El
Custom Commands
Ty pe in com man d to be I iste din the Custom Com man ds me n u.
( Add Item)
UNIX Command: string Search
Menu Label: grep $ARG $FILf.
Custom Commands Menu Items:
Stri ng Search
Pri ntS cri pt
=
~
~
I
=
Prompt Window:
I Yes I No I
Prompt:
Output Window:
I Yes I No I
[Apply)} (Save as Defaults) ~
Figure 2-45 Custom Command Pop-up Window
The scrolling list shows your current custom commands. You use this window
to add, delete, and change the order of your custom commands.
Follow the steps below to add a new custom command to the Custom
Commands Menu Items scroll box. Follow the examples to add a custom
command to search for a particular text string in the selected files or folders.
1. Type the actual UNIX command in the UNIX Command text field.
You can add $FILE or $ARG to the command to represent the currently
selected file or special arguments (options) that you can specify at the time
you choose the command.
In this example, type grep $ARG $FILE in the UNIX command text field.
2. Type the name of the command that you want to appear in the Menu
Label text field.
This Menu Label does not have to be the actual UNIX command. You may
want the command to be something more descriptive.
In this example, type String Search.
3. Add the item.
File Manager
113
4. To prompt for command options, (that is, if you are using $ARG in the
UNIX command), choose Yes on the Prompt Window setting, then type the
prompt label into the first line of the Prompt text field.
If you use a prompt window, when the custom command is chosen from the
Custom Commands menu a window is displayed with the prompt label.
You use this pop-up window to type the command options.
In this example, choose Yes on the Prompt Window setting and type Search
For: in the Prompt text field. When your custom command is chosen from
the Custom Commands window, a window is displayed in which you can
specify the text that you want to search for.
5. If your custom command will create any output, choose Yes on the Output
Window setting.
This causes an output window to be displayed when the custom command
is chosen, where you can see the result of your command.
In this example, you want to choose Yes on the Output Window. Then when
you choose the new custom command from the Custom Commands menu, a
window will be displayed that lists the places the text string is found.
6. Click SELECT on Apply to add the new command to the Custom
Commands scrolling list.
To use the item, select the folders and files where you want to search for text,
choose the String Search command from the Custom Commands submenu, and
type the text string to search for in the window that is displayed. Press
RETURN to quit or SELECT Quit from the output window.
Advanced Settings
You can change the way File Manager behaves and the way it presents certain
information by changing controls in the Advanced Settings window. To display
the Advanced Settings window, choose Advanced Settings from Category.
The File Manager Tool Properties window is shown in Figure 2-46.
114
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
25
~
FM: Properties
Category: @) Advance d Setti ngs
Print Method:
I mp -10 I Ilk
cat $FILE
Default Editor:
Text Editor
I
Other:
seconds
Follow Symbolic Links:
View Filter Pattern:
I
Update File System Every:
_5_63
I Yes
I No I
I
Open File Manager window upon insertion of:
CDROM:
IYes I No I
Use generic icons for faster display:
I No I Yes I
CDROM: I No I Yes I
Floppy Disk:
«Apply» (Save as Defaults) ~
Figure 2-46
Tool Properties Window
Print Method
The Print Method text field allows you to specify a default UNIX print script
for files that are printed from File Manager that do not have a print method
defined in the Binder database. The print script shown in Figure 2-46 prints
your files in landscape mode on your default printer, using the mp PostScript
pretty printer. If you want to change the print script, make sure to type $FILE
in the script where the file name should be inserted.
File Manager
115
View Filter Pattern
The View Filter Pattern text field allows you to specify that only files of a
certain type are displayed in the file pane of File Manager. In the example
shown in Figure 2-47, the filter pattern * . rs shows only the raster files in a
directory, even though other files are there. Note that the header of the window
shows you what filter pattern is set.
Apps
SereenShots
Contai ns 95 ite ms
874 M bytes (9
~
basewindow.rs
~
emaeeess I ist.rs
~
emap ptfu lis ize.rs
~
em browser2.rs
~
emdateoptions.rs
~
em day bou n dariesan dv iew .rs
Figure 2-47 File Pane with a *.rs Filter Pattern Set
Default Editor
• Use Default Editor to specify what default editor File Manager uses to
display the text of files that are not specifically bound to another
application. If you click SELECT on Other, a text field is displayed in which
you can type the name of a different text editor application. If you specify a
different text editor that does not display its own window, you must specify
that a Shell Tool is started before the text editor.
Note - Running command line programs, such as rm or rlogin, without
specifying a Shell Tool to run the program in can lead to unpredictable File
Manager behavior. Unless a program starts with its own window (such as
textedi t or mail tool), prepend shell tool to the program in the Default
Editor text field, as shown in Figure 2-45.
116
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Update File System
You can set the number of seconds that File Manager checks to see if any items
were added or deleted.
Follow Symbolic Links
If Symbolic Lines is set to No (the default), you see filenames just as you typed
them. For example, in the Go To field. If Symbolic Links is set to Yes, you see
links made across file systems.
Open File Manager Window
Automatically opens the CD window of the CD that has been inserted.
Use Generic Icons
When you insert a Floppy or CD, it can take some time for the icons to display.
If it is not important to you what the icons look like, and/ or if you want the
them to display quickly, you can set Yes and a generic representation of the
icon is displayed and is much quicker time.
Customizing Your File Manager Colors
There are two ways to change the File Manager color scheme, as follows:
• To change the colors in the tree and file panes, use the - fg and - bg
command line flags to specify different colors for your foreground
(characters) and background. For example, if you want the tree and file
panes to have blue characters on a gray background, try starting File
Manager in a Command Tool or Shell Tool by typing the following:
filerngr -fg 0 0 255 -bg 127 127 127 &
Each trio of numbers represents red, green, and blue intensities from
a to 255.
Alternatively, you can specify the actual names of colors instead of the trio
of numbers, as follows:
filerngr -fg blue -bg gray50 &
File Manager
117
To see the available list of color names, look at the file
$OPENWINHOME/lib/rgb.txt.
• If you do not like the colors of the icons displayed in File Manager, use the
Binder with its Color Chooser to change the colors to your liking. See
"Changing a Binding" on page 471 of the chapter "Binder" for information.
File Manager first looks for entries in the Binder database to determine
colors of the icons it displays. If File Manager cannot make contact with the
Binder database, it issues a warning message, and then uses the colors set
up via X resources, described in the filemgr manual page.
Using Floppy and CD Media
File Manager allows you to use removable media such as Floppy Disks or CDROM (Compact disk, read-only memory) on the WorkSpace. You can view
your Floppy disks or CDs if you:
• have a system with at least (1) floppy drive or (1) CD-ROM drive and are
running Solaris 2.2
Refer to the documentation that came with your computer for information on
how to insert a floppy disk or CD into the drive.
Using a Floppy Disk with File Manager
The following explains what to do with your floppy disk once you have
inserted it into your drive. You may encounter these cases when you insert a
Floppy disk:
• The disk is formatted and labeled. In this case you see the window as shown
in Figure 2-48. You can begin using the information on your disk.
• The disk is unformatted. Refer to "Reformatting a Floppy Disk" on page 121
for information on formatting a disk.
• The disk is formatted and may contain data. If the data is in Macintosh™
format or unknown to this system, you may see the a popup as shown in
Figure 2-53.
118
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
25
Checkingfor a Floppy Disk
1. Insert your floppy disk into the disk drive on (or attached to) your
computer.
2. Select Check For Floppy from the File Menu.
If you inserted a formatted, labeled disk, you can move on to "Viewing a File
from the Contents of a Floppy Disk or CD" on page 119.
Note - You do not have to check for CDs.
Viewing a File from the Contents ofa Floppy Disk or CD
Once the File Manager window is displayed, you can view the contents of your
floppy disk or CD.
[.~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(CMC8T)
(Cance I & Eject)
Figure 2-52 Unformatted Floppy Popup
You can choose to:
• format the disk, refer to "Reformatting a Floppy Disk" on page 121 for
information on reformatting the disk.
or
• cancel the operation and dismiss the popup.
or
• cancel the operation and eject the floppy.
Note - Macintosh, Sun TAR and Sun BAR formats are not recognized.
File Manager
123
Unlabeled Floppy
If you inserted a floppy disk that is unlabeled, that is there is data on the disk
but is not a recognized format, the following message displays:
Unlabeled Floppy
This floppy disk is unreadable by the system.
It may co ntai n tar or bar formatted data.
Do you want to format it?
WARNING: Formatting will destroy any information on the disk
and is not u ndoab Ie.
Please select a format:
UNIX
~--------------~
DOS High Density
NEC-DOS Medium Density
Disk Name:.
_________________________
( Format Dis k) (Cance I) (Cance I & Eject)
Figure 2-53 Unlabeled (Unknown Data) Floppy Popup
You can choose to:
• format the disk, refer to Reformatting a Floppy Disk on page 121 for
information on reformatting the disk.
or
• cancel the operation and dismiss the popup.
or
• cancel the operation and eject the floppy.
124
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Renaming a Floppy Disk
There are times when you would like to change the name of your disk.
1. Insert the disk to be renamed.
2. Select Check For Floppy from the File Menu.
3. Choose Rename Disk from the File menu.
You see the rename disk window.
~.
FI'I'1: Rename Disk
Please enter the name of the dis k.
Disk Name:
L-+_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
«Rename Disk»
(Cancel)
Figure 2-54 The Floppy Rename Disk Window
4. Type a new name for the disk.
You type over the existing disk name and it disappears when you have
finished typing.
5. SELECT the Rename Disk button.
The disk is now ready to be used or ejected.
Dragging and Dropping Files from Floppy Disk or CD to File Manager
1. Open the floppy disk or CD into a window.
2. Select the file or folder icon and drag it from one window to the other.
For information on dragging and dropping, refer to Chapter I,
"Introduction to the Solaris User Environment." The file is now copied to
File Manager.
File Manager
125
Copying Files from Floppy Disk or CD to Floppy Disk
You can copy files from a floppy disk (or CD) to another floppy disk.
1. Insert the floppy or CD that contains the files to be copied.
2. Select all files to be copied.
3. Copy the selected files to a folder in a File Manager window.
4. Remove that floppy.
5. Insert a new floppy.
6. Copy the folder to the newly inserted floppy.
126
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Text Editor
The Text Editor is an interactive ASCII text editor. It allows you to create new
files and modify existing files.
This chapter describes how to use the Text Editor. You do not need to know
any special editing commands because the editing commands are available
from the base window. The editing functions provided in this DeskSet
application are also available in the text editing panes of the Console and the
Command Tool, and in the View and Compose windows of the Mail Tool.
• To open the Text Editor window, choose Workspace> Programs > Text
Editor.
Text Editor Icon
The Text Editor icon shows you as much as it can of the beginning of the file
name. When the file has been edited and you have not saved the changes, the
file name is preceded by a right-angle bracket (». When there is no file or
when you have created a new file but have not saved it, the icon displays the
words NO FILE. Figure 3-1 shows an example of three Text Editor icons. The
one on the left contains a file named example. The one in the middle contains
a file named example that has been edited but not saved. The one on the right
contains either no file at all or a file that has never been saved.
127
53
r@il'····.···: ,•....!
1
example ~
~ ............................... j
Figure 3-1
>example ~
t................................ l
1 NO FILE 1
t...............................J
Text Editor Icons
Text Editor Base Window
The Text Editor base window, shown in Figure 3-2, has a control area and a text
pane that you use to compose and edit your text message. The header of the
Text Editor window displays the name of the file you are editing (or the word
NONE when you have not assigned a name to the file), and shows you the
directory where the file is located. When you have made editing changes, the
word edited" is displayed in parentheses following the file name.
/I
Use the text pane to compose and edit your text. To begin, click SELECT in the
text pane and begin typing. For information on adding, modifying, or deleting
text, see the section Working with Text in Chapter I, "Introduction to the
Solaris User Environment." To copy and move text, use the Cut/Copy/Paste
functions from the Edit menu or from the keyboard.
Control Area _____ @)
~~~~
Text Pane
----I"-Figure 3-2
128
..,
Text Editor - (NONE), dir; /hightide/egret
Text Editor Base Window
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
D
Text Editor Menus
The control area of the Text Editor has File, View, Edit, and Find buttons. These
menu buttons are included as menu items in the Text pane pop-up menu.
Text Pane Pop-Up Menu
You display the Text Pane pop-up menu by moving the pointer anywhere onto
the Text pane and pressing MENU. (The Text Pane pop-up menu is also
provided in the text editing panes of the Console, Command Tool, and Mail
Tool applications.)
The commands for each of the items in Text Pane pop-up menu operate in the
same way as the controls in the Text Editor window, described in the following
sections. An additional item on the Text Pane pop-up menu, called Extras, is
also described later in this chapter.
File Menu
The File menu contains items that you can use to open, save, save as, include
and empty the document for your text files. For complete information on
opening and saving files, refer to Opening, Saving, Including and Attaching
Files" in Chapter I, "Introduction to the Solaris User Environment."
Include File
Use the include file to include an existing file into a new text file.
1. Use the Include File item of the File menu to display the Text: Include
window.
2. Locate and include your file.
Include your file in the same manner you would open or save a file. For
detailed information on choosing a file to open or save, refer to Chapter I,
"Introduction to the Solaris User Environment".
Text Editor
129
Empty Document
Use the Empty Document item of the File menu to clear the contents of the text
pane. If you have made editing changes and have not saved them, a Notice is
displayed asking you to confirm or cancel the operation.
View Menu
Use the View menu item to control the position of the cursor and the way the
line wrap is used.
Select Line at Number
Use the Select Line at Number item to display the Text: Line Number window,
shown in Figure 3-3. Type the number of the line that you want selected, and
click SELECT on the Select Line at Number button. The text on the specified
line is selected, and the insert point is moved to the end of the selected text.
l:9
Te:d:Line Number
Line Number: ..._~_ _ _ _ __
( Select Line at Number»
Figure 3-3
Text: Line Number Pop-up Window
What Line Number?
Use the What Line Number? item of the View menu to locate the line number
where the selected text begins. The line number is displayed in a Notice. When
there is no current selection in the Text Editor window, the Notice displays an
error message instead of a line number.
Show Caret at Top
Use the Show Caret at Top item of the View menu to scroll the document so the
line currently containing the caret is the third line from the top of the text pane.
130
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Change Line Wrap
The Change Line Wrap submenu provides three choices for line wrapping:
word, character, and clip lines. The text shown in Figure 3-4 is wrapped at a
character, so words are broken at the end of lines.
,= h:::,nge Line
\,',ir.
to work. Based on my
wrinkles and a
ay this was about 10 y
ears or so into
the usual exit. and e
nded up in East
through the electri
c fence gates.i ~;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;'.I had just recently mov
ed. Everyone wa!
declared that she had
done some figuring. and
was her 32nd office since bei
ng at the company.
I'
Not all of us were still here. Henry had just opened his 0
wn phone repair business called Dead Ringers. and John was
considering retirement from the computer business to organ;
ze 9 of his friends. his brother. wife. and seven kids into
Figure 3-4
Lines Wrapped at a Character
The most commonly used wrapping method is to wrap at the end of words.
The text shown in Figure 3-5 is wrapped at the end of words.
Text Editor
131
TeKt Ed itor - story, d ir; Iho me/j u ng le/bre nda
out a dream I had last night. You
eface thi s with a remi nde r that
st range -- I mean. don't get
r;;==::;==;:;;'1i ng.
p.w_ra...p_a_t_W_o_r_d_-lII:DlI to work. Based on my
wri nkl es and a f Wrap at Character y thi s was about 10
years or so into
d the usual exit. and
ended up in East
I
'
ked through the
elect ri c fence g C i P LI nes
that we had just
recentl y moved.
ng. and Mary decl ared
that she had done some figuring. and this was her 32nd
office since being at the company.
What Li ne Number?
Show Caret at Top
Not all of us were still here. Henry had just opened his
own phone repair business called Dead Ringers. and John was
considering retirement from the computer business to
organize of his friends. his brother. wife. and seven kids
Figure 3-5
Lines Wrapped at a Word
If you choose Clip Lines, the beginning of each line that ends with a Return is
displayed. In Figure 3-6 each line represents a paragraph because there are no
carriage returns embedded in the lines. Only carriage returns are at the end of
each paragraph. That is,
What Line Number?
Show Caret at Top
me driving to work.
Based
just opened
I unpacked and heade
i ng.
Next Alison told us
rse she was busy
Figure 3-6
132
Clipped Lines
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
We had lot
Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides standard editing functions, as follows:
• Again repeats the last editing action.
• Undo undoes the last editing action or all editing actions, depending on
which item you choose from the Undo submenu.
• Copy stores a copy of the selected text on the clipboard. Only one selection
at a time can be stored on the clipboard. If something is already on the
clipboard and you do a Copy or Cut, the contents of the clipboard are
overwritten with the new information.
• Paste inserts the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point.
• Cut removes the selected text and stores it on the clipboard. Only one
selection can be stored on the clipboard at a time.
Find Menu
The Find menu items help you to search for specific text strings, special
characters, and delimiters to find a text string and replace it with another.
Text: Find and Replace
Use Find and Replace to find specific text and replace it through the Text: Find
and Replace window. If you have a current selection, it is automatically
displayed in the Find text field, as shown in the example in Figure 3-7.
TeKt::Find and Replace
~
drea!l)"
(Replace) : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
( Find then Replace) ( Replace then Find) ( Replace All)
Figure 3-7
®
All Text
Text: Find and Replace Pop-up Window
To find a text string and select it, type the text in the Find field and click
SELECT on the Find button. Click SELECT on the Find button again to find
and select the next occurrence of the text string.
Text Editor
133
To replace the current selection with a text string, type the text in the Replace
field and click SELECT on the Replace button. You can use the Replace button
together with the Find button to find a string and then replace it with another,
or separately to replace highlighted text. You can replace a string with nothing
by leaving the Replace text field blank.
If you want to find a text string that contains tabs or carriage returns, select the
text containing tabs or carriage returns in the text pane before you display the
Text: Find and Replace window. You cannot type carriage returns or tabs
directly in the Find or Replace text fields.
The buttons at the bottom of the Find and Replace window combine the find
and replace operations, allowing you to quickly do any of these combinations:
• Use the Find then Replace button to find the text string in the Find text field,
and then immediately. replace it with the text string in the Replace text field.
• Use the Replace then Find button to replace the currently selected text with
the text string in the Replace text field, and then immediately find the next
occurrence of the Find text string.
• Use the Replace All button to replace all occurrences of the Find text string
with the Replace text string.
You can specify whether you want the find and replace operations to apply to
all of the text, or to restrict the operation to the text between the insert point
and the end of the document. Use the abbreviated menu button at the lower
right corner of the window to select either All Text or To End. The current
setting is listed to the right of the abbreviated menu button, as shown in
Figure 3-7.
Find Selection
Use Find Selection on the Find menu to search the file for another occurrence
of the text string that is highlighted as the current selection. You can search
forward or backward from the insert point by choosing Forward or Backward
from the Find Selection submenu.
134
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Find Marked Text
Use Find Marked Text on the Find menu to highlight text between a matched
set of delimiters provided as options in the Text: Find Marked Text window,
shown in Figure 3-8.
o-lJ=Q
Text:Fi nd Marked Text
I () I"" I" I " I I> and < I as
a text field. You can search forward through the text from the insert point to
find and select each field using the Replace I >field < I item of the Find menu.
The Replace I >field< I submenu provides three options: Expand, Next, and
Previous:
• When the caret in the Text Editor pane is between field delimiters, choose
Expand to search in both directions and select the entire field and its
delimiters.
• Use Next to search forward from the insert point and select the next field.
Text Editor
135
• Use Previous to search backward from the insert point and select the
previous field.
Extras Menu
There is an additional item on the Text Pane pop-up menu, called Extras, that
is not a button in the Control area (as File, View, Edit, and Find are). This menu
contains some useful filters to format the selected text. You can customize the
Extras menu and define your own set of filters available from the Extras menu.
See "Customizing Your Text Editor" on page 145 for information about how to
define your own set of filters. This section describes the default Extras menu.
Format
Choose Format to reformat selected long lines of text into physical lines of no
more than 72 characters. This is useful, for example, when reading mail with
lines longer than the width of the window. Formatting text before printing is
also useful to make sure the lines will not be truncated by the printer.
Format uses the UNIX fmt command. It does not split words between lines,
and it preserves blank lines and the spacing between words.
Capitalize
Use Capitalize on the Extras menu to capitalize selected text.
• The first item on the Capitalize submenu, abcd->ABCD, capitalizes every
letter of the selected text.
• The second item on the Capitalize submenu, ABCD->abcd, turns all the
letters of the selected text into lower case.
• The last item of the Capitalize submenu, abcd->Abcd, capitalizes the first
letter of every selected word. Uppercase letters within a word are not
changed.
136
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Shift Lines
Choose the Shift Lines item to insert or remove a Tab character at the
beginning of each line in the selected text. Use the Shift Lines submenu to
specify whether to shift right or left. Shift right inserts a Tab character, and
shift left removes a Tab character.
Pretty-print C
This item uses the UNIX indent command to format C program listings. It
formats the selection according to standard specifications, or to the
specifications of the . inden t . pro file if you have one.
Insert Brackets
You can use the Insert Brackets item to quickly insert any of the following type
of brackets around the selected text, depending on which item you choose from
the Insert Brackets submenu: ( ), [ ], { }, or "
If.
Remove Brackets
Choose the Remove Brackets item to remove any of the following types of
brackets around the selected text, depending on what item you choose from
the Remove Brackets submenu: ( ), [ ], { }, or " ".
Creating a New File
To create a new file with Text Editor:
1. Choose Workspace ~ Programs
Editor window field, such as:
~
Text Editor and type a line in the Text
This is a test file.
2. Press MENU on the File menu button, and select Save.
You see the TextSave window.
3. Save the file.
For complete information on saving a file, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction
to the Solaris User Environment."
Text Editor
137
Working with an Existing File
You can open (load) any standard ASCII text file into the Text Editor and then
modify the current file, or change the name of the file to create a new file,
which leaves the original file intact. To load a file from your file system into
Text Editor:
1. Choose File ~ Open from the Text Editor control area.
You see the Text:Open window.
2. Select and open the file.
The file you have specified is displayed in the Text Editor window. For
complete information on opening a file, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction to
the Solaris User Environment."
Saving the Existing File
You can now edit the existing file and either save your changes in that file, or
save it as a new file. To modify the file, see the section, "Editing Files" on
page 139. To save the changes to the existing file, do the following:
• Choose File ~ Save from the Text Editor control area.
The file is automatically saved.
Because UNIX does not allow two documents with the same name in one
directory, when you make a copy of a document in the same directory the
original file is automatically saved to a backup file and renamed with a %
suffix. For instance, a file named messages would automatically be
renamed messages%. The next save overwrites the existing backup file
rather than creating a second backup. Figure 3-9 shows the two files
displayed as icons in File Manager.
D
D
store d. text store d. text%
Figure 3-9
138
Edited File and Backup File with a % Suffix
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Note - If you do not want to retain the original, delete the file with the % suffix
by pressing SELECT on the icon in File Manager and dragging it to the
Wastebasket.
Saving the Modified File as a New File
To keep the original file intact and create a new file with the modifications, do
the following:
1. Choose File> Save As.
You see the Text:Save As window.
2. Name and save the new file.
The file is stored in the designated directory and file. For complete
information on saving a file, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Solaris
User Environment."
Editing Files
Using Text Editor, you can add and delete text from a file, copy text from one
location to be pasted in another, and search for text strings in a file.
Adding and Deleting Text
You can add new text to a file by placing the insert point anywhere in the file
(click SELECT in the desired location) and typing the new text there. Likewise,
you can delete characters by placing the text caret at the end of the character
string you want to delete, and backspacing over those characters.
Another way to delete a character string is to cut it. This places the text string
in a system clipboard, and if you want you can paste it elsewhere. To cut and
paste a text string, do the following:
1. Click SELECT to the left of the first character in the string that you would
like to cut.
2. Click ADJUST to the right of the last character in the string.
The text string is highlighted.
Text Editor
139
53
3. Press MENU to display the window pane's pop-up menu, drag the pointer
down to highlight Edit, and to the right to highlight Cut.
The text string is placed in the system clipboard. (Alternatively you can use
the Cut button on the keyboard.)
4. Move the pointer to the destination where you would like to paste the text
string and click SELECT to position the caret there.
5. Press MENU to display the window pane's pop-up menu, drag the pointer
down to highlight Edit, and to the right to highlight Paste.
The text string appears in the new location. (Alternatively, you can use the
Paste button on the keyboard.)
Copying and Moving Text
To copy a section of text, you highlight the line of text using SELECT and
ADJUST, as follows:
1. Click SELECT to the left of the first character in the string that you would
like to copy.
2. Click ADJUST to the right of the last character in the string.
The text string is highlighted.
3. Press MENU to display the window pane's pop-up menu, drag the pointer
down to highlight Edit, and to the right to highlight Copy.
The text string is placed in the system clipboard. Figure 3-10 shows the Edit
menu. (Alternatively, you can use the Copy button on the keyboard.)
~
Edit
)
( Again
Undo
Do
Copy
Paste
Cut
Figure 3-10 Edit Menu
4. Move the pointer to the place where you want to insert the text and click
SELECT to set the insert point.
140
Sofaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5. Choose Paste from the Edit menu or press the Paste key on the keyboard.
To move text, the steps are similar, except that you choose Cut instead of Copy,
and the selected text is removed from its original location.
Paste the text in a new location by clicking SELECT once on the destination
point, and then choosing Paste from the Edit submenu in the Text Pane menu.
(Alternatively, you can press the Paste button on the keyboard.)
Tips on Cutting and Pasting
• For some it is more convenient to use the Cut and Paste buttons on the
keyboard rather than the Edit menu.
• Clicking SELECT twice on a word highlights that word for cutting or
copying.
• Clicking SELECT three times on a text line highlights the whole line for
cutting or copying.
• Clicking SELECT four times anywhere in the file highlights the entire
contents of the document.
Printing Text Editor Files
Before printing a Text Editor file, you may need to choose Format from the
Extras menu to reformat selected long lines of text into physical lines of no
more than 72 characters. A line of text is defined as ending with a carriage
return. The Text Editor wraps a long line into several displayed lines, so what
looks like several lines on your screen may actually just be one long line.
You print Text Editor files by dragging and dropping the file onto the Print
Tool application. To drag the entire Text Editor file, press SELECT on the text
glyph inside the drag and drop target, drag the pointer to the Print Tool icon or
drag and drop target, and release SELECT. The drag and drop target is the
small shaded box in the upper right corner of the Text Editor or the upper left
corner of the Print Tool.
You can also print Text Editor files the same way you print any file with the
File Manager. Save your Text Editor file using one of the methods described in
the section "File Menu" on page 129. Then select the file in the File Manager,
Text Editor
141
and drag and drop it onto the Print Tool or choose Print File from the File
Manager's File menu. See "Printing Files" on page 86 for more information
about printing files from the File Manager.
Splitting Panes
The Text Editor pane can be split into two or more panes so that you can view
and edit different parts of the document at the same time. The document itself
is not split, so any editing changes you make in one view are reflected in other
views as well. To split the Text Editor pane:
1. Move the pointer to the top cable anchor of the vertical scrollbar and
press SELECT.
2. Drag the pointer downward into the pane.
A horizontal line is displayed from the left edge of the pane to the center of
the cable anchor to show where the split will occur.
3. Release SELECT.
The pane is now split into two panes, as shown in Figure 3-11.
@)
Text Editor - story, dir; Ihome/jungle/brenda
~CView<;J)~~
~
I have to tell you guys about a dream I had last night. You
were all there. Let me preface this with a reminder that
sometimes dreams are very strange.
gates. it was obvious that we had just recently moved.
Everyone was unplcking. and Mary declared that she had done
some figuring. and this was her 32nd office since being at the
company.
Not all of us were still here. Henry had just opened his own
phone repair business called Dead Ringers. and John was
considering retirement from the computer business to organize
9 of his friends. his brother. wife. and seven kids into a
I~~
Move pointer here
r
,
I";"",
Figure 3-11 A Split Text Editor Pane
Alternatively, you can move the pointer into the scrollbar at the place you want
to split the views, press MENU to display the scrollbar menu, and choose Split
View.
142
Salaris 2.2 User's
Guide~May
1993
3:5
One way to remove a split pane is to move the pointer to the top cable anchor
in the pane you want to remove and press SELECT. Then drag the pointer
down until the top and bottom cable anchors overlap, and release SELECT.
Another method is to move the pointer to the place in the scrollbar where the
views are split, press MENU to display the Scrollbar menu, and choose Join
Views.
Drag and Drop Feature
Drag and drop is a method of moving files or selected text into and out of the
Text Editor using only your mouse. Refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction to the
Solaris User Environment" for an overview of the drag and drop feature.
To load a file (overwriting any existing text), you can drag and drop a text file
onto the Text Editor drag and drop target or icon.
To insert text within a Text Editor file, you can drag and drop a file or selected
text to the spot in the text pane where you want the text inserted.
You can drag and drop either selected text or the entire Text Editor file to any
location in the DeskSet environment that accepts ASCII text. The following
sections describe two different ways to drag and drop from the Text Editor
application.
Dragging Selected Text from the Text Editor
To drag a copy of selected text from the Text Editor:
1. Select the text to be copied.
If you want to copy the entire file, quadruple-click SELECT, or drag from the
drag and drop target as described in the next section.
2. Press the Control key on the keyboard and click SELECT.
Once you have clicked SELECT you can release the Control key. Pressing the
Control key assures that the text is copied instead of moved. If you don't
press the Control key first, the text being dragged will be cut from the
original text.
3. Drag the pointer a short distance.
A text duplicate pointer is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-12, with the first
several characters of the selected text displayed inside the rectangle.
Text Editor
143
Text: Ed itor - story.text:.ed it (ed ited), d ir; tho me/boo kho use/bre nda
Ii
usual exit, and ended up in East Peyton Pl ace. As I walked th rough the e1ectri c c:::J
fence gates, it was obvious that we had just recently moved. Everyone was
unpacking, and Mary declared that she had done some figuring, and this was her
32nd off1" 51 nee bei n. at the com,any.
~
1
I un,acked and headed out for a staff "et1 no.
'" had lots to tal k about i n the
1
Figure 3-12 Dragging a Copy of Text Editor Text
4. Drag the pointer to the destination or the text and release SELECT.
Dragging Complete Text Editor Files
Text Editor files can be dragged and dropped onto any place in the DeskSet
environment that accepts ASCII files. This operation is always done as a copy.
To drag a complete Text Editor file:
1. Press SELECT on the text glyph inside the drag and drop target.
The text glyph is the figure inside the drag and drop target that represents
the entire text file.
2. Drag the pointer a short distance.
A text file move pointer is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-13.
144
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
~
Gil
~
TeKt Ed itor - sto ry.te Kt.ed it, d ir; /ho me/boo kho use/bre nda
(View
'V) ~ ~
~ Dm--Pointerandicon
I
c:::J
Ok. so it started out with me driving to work. Based on my wrinkles and a few
gray hairs. I'd say this was about 10 years or so into the future. I passed
the usual exit. and ended up in East Peyton Place. As I walked through the
electric fence gates. it was obvious that we had just recently moved. Everyone
was unpacking. and Mary declared that she had done some figuring. and this was
her 32nd office since being at the company.
---..
~
~IL
Figure 3-13 Dragging a Copy of Text Editor Text
3. Drag the pointer to the destination of the text and release SELECT.
Customizing Your Text Editor
There are two files used by the Text Editor that you can modify to customize
the Extras submenu of the Text Pane pop-up menu and to specify function key
mappings. This section describes these two files.
The. text extras_menu File
You can customize the Extras menu to include your own commands by
modifying the file . text_extras_menu. By default (and depending on how
your system is configured), the Text Editor uses the information found in the
file $OPENWINHOME/ 1 ib/ locale/ xview / . text_extras_menu.
is a subdirectory that contains locale specific text files. The default is
"C", but may vary depending on the country locale. You can create your own
copy of this file and tell the Text Editor to use it instead of the default in either
of the following two ways:
• Change the value of the .Xdefaults parameter
text.extrasMenuFilenameorText.ExtrasMenuFilenametothepath
and file name of your customized file. See the manual page for XView for
information about the. Xdefaults file.
• Set the environment variable EXTRASMENU to the desired file name.
Text Editor
145
If you specify both options, the. Xdefaul ts parameter will be used.
The standard Extras menu file is
$OPENWINHOME/lib/locale/C/xview/.text_extras_menuandis
shown in Figure 3-14. It will give you ideas about how to implement your own
extras menu file. Once you've created a custom file and indicated where to find
it using one of the previous methods, you can make changes to the file and see
them immediately implemented in the Extras menu. These changes also affect
other text panes in DeskSet applications, such as the Mail Tool Compose
window.
@)
TeKt Ed itor - .teKt_eKtras_ me n u, d ir; Iusr/l i b
~ (VTeW3) ~ ~
.:
~
~
~
~
@(~)text_extras_menu
I
~
1.6 88/02/08 SMI
Copyright (c) 1987 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Text "Extras" menu
"Format"
fmt
"Capitalize"
"abcd -) ABCD"
"ABCD -) abcd"
"abcd -) Abcd"
"Capi tal i ze"
MENU
capitalize -u
capital i ze -1
capi tal i ze -c
END
"Shift Lines"
MENU
"Right" shift_lines -t 1
"Left" shift_lines -t -1
"Shift Lines"
END
"p retty-p ri nt C"
indent -st
"Insert Brackets"
MENU
()" insert_brackets
" [ ]" i nserLbrackets
" {}" insert_brackets
"" "" insert_brackets
"Insert Brackets"
END
( )
\ [ \]
{}
\" \"
"Remove Brackets"
MENU
()" remove_brackets
[ ]" remove_brackets
" {}" remove_brackets
"" "" remove_brackets
"Remove Brackets"
END
( )
\ [ \]
{}
\" \"
Figure 3-14 Extras Menu File in /usr / lib/ . text_extras_menu
The name of each Extras menu item is surrounded by double quotation marks.
Each submenu begins with a MENU statement and ends with an END statement.
146
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
To include a backslash (\) character in the. text_extras_menu file-as in
the troff in line font specifications \fB and \fP-you need to use four
backslash characters; for example:
insert_brackets \\\\fB \\\\fp
Alternatively, you can use quotes in place of one pair of brackets; for example:
insert_brackets "\ \ fB"
"\ \ fP"
The. text swrc File
You can associate filters (programs or routines) with unused function keys by
modifying your own copy of the file. textswrc. When a text selection has
been made and a function key pressed, the selected text is piped through the
filter assigned to that key. The output is then piped back into the text at the
caret, replacing the text that was selected.
If you want to specify your own set of bindings of filter keys to function keys,
you must copy the file /usr / lib/ . textswrc to a file called. textswrc in
your home directory. The Text Editor reads the file. textswrc from your
home directory, if the file exists.
Format of the . textswrc File
List the sample file /usr/lib/. textswrc to see an example of filters used
with a right-handed keyboard. You can copy this file into your home directory,
then modify it by adding filter bindings to unused function keys.
Here is the basic format of each. textswrc file entry:
key-name
FILTER
command-line
A function is assigned to one of the function keys by including a statement like
the following in your. text swrc file:
/*
* Note that:
Text Editor
147
*
*
insert_brackets
/* */ does NOT work
double quotes are needed
*/
KEY_TOP (10) FILTER
insert_brackets "/* " " */"
This example shows how to include C language comment markers around a
piece of text. You could enter this example into your. textswrc file, and save
the file. Then, to use this added function, start up a new Text Editor
application. Changes to your . text swrc file are only effective when you
bring up a new Text Editor. Then select the text and press the key. The text will
be replaced with a copy of itself surrounded with 1/ 1*" and 1/*1". Note the
C-like syntax of comments in the. textswrc file.
When defining a filter in the . text swrc file, remember that the filter must
appear in a directory accessible by your search path. If the command is not
found, or if there is some other failure in the invocation of the filter, no change
occurs in the document.
148
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Multimedia Mail Tool
Multimedia Mail Tool lets you communicate with other people on the network.
You can write, send, and receive electronic mail. When you receive an
electronic mail (" email") message, you can act upon it in various ways:
• Save the message as a file anywhere in your file system
• Delete the message
• Reply to the sender
• Forward the message to another recipient along with your own message
• Print the message.
You can send and receive attachments: audio files, image files, document files,
executable files, or any other files.
Using drag and drop, Multimedia Mail Tool works in combination with File
Manager, Text Editor, AudioTool, Calendar Manager, and other applications to
provide an integrated workspace environment.
For brevity, Multimedia Mail Tool is referred to simply as Mail Tool throughout
the rest of this document.
• To open Mail Tool, choose Workspace
~
Programs
~
Mail Tool.
149
How Mail Tool Is Organized
Mail Tool has three key windows:
• The Header window is a base window that lists mail messages that you
have received.
• The View Message window is a pop-up window where you read your
messages.
• The Compose window is a base window for responding to messages or
writing new messages.
Each of these windows is described in detail later in this chapter.
Header Window Icons
The primary Mail Tool icon, for the Header window that shows you incoming
mail messages, looks like a standard office In-Box. When you don't have any
mail, the In-Box on the icon is empty. When you have mail that has all been
read, the In-Box contains a neatly stacked set of envelopes. When new mail
arrives, envelopes are placed in the In-Box with the stamped and addressed
side showing. Figure 4-1 shows these views of the mailbox icon.
No mail icon -
§
mailtool
Q
mailtool
New mail icon
mailtool
No new mail icon
Figure 4-1
Mail Tool Header Window Icons
The Mail Tool Compose window can also be closed to an icon. See "Mail Tool
Compose Window" on page 159 for a description and picture of the Compose
window icons.
Mail Tool Header Window
The window shown in Figure 4-2, provides a set of controls with which you
access other parts of the Mail Tool application, display a list of your electronic
mail messages, and see the status of your mail messages.
150
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
45
By default, this window shows you a scrolling list of the mail messages in your
In-Box. Each line in the scrolling list of the window represents a single
electronic mail message, and is called the header for the mail message.
@)
Mail Tool -/var/mail/egret
~(View \7)~(compose \7) Mail File: @)
~~( Delete )( Reply
Message Headers
1
U+ 2
3
U
u.
4
5
U
U+ 7
8
U
U
9
N 10
thi ef@ci ci
patten@newbi rth
bgahl@scuba
aye rs@outhouse
ayers@outhouse
mari ac@cel ti c
hami 1ton@artemi s
abel son@sharonolds
aquabl u@cowman
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
17)~@E)~
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
13
42
49
50
51
51
00
13
34
58
18/506
46/1282
32/1110
17/532
17/511
90/2531
22/611
32/1232
21/647
Your Move
Proj ect Status
Inbox status
SunU Trai ni ng Regi st rati on
vi command summary
Project Schedul e
meeti ng remi nde r
Your posi ti on paper
Summer Coll aborati on
=
~
=
11 items, 1 new, 2 deleted
Figure 4-2
Primary Mail Tool Header Window
Mail Message Headers
Each message header has six fields or columns of information, as follows:
• The first field shows you the status of the mail message:
• An arrow points to current messages (messages currently displayed).
• An N shows you that the message is new.
• A U shows that a message is unread, that is, it has been saved without
having been read.
• A blank is displayed after you have viewed the message.
• A diamond indicates that the message contains attachments.
• The second field contains a message number that is automatically assigned to
messages by the Mail Tool in the order in which they are loaded.
• The third field contains the mail address of the sender of the message.
Multimedia Mail Tool
151
• The fourth field contains the day, date, and time the message was received.
If the message is over 11 months old, the year is shown instead of the time.
• The fifth field tells you how big the message is. The first number tells you
the number of lines in the message, and the second number tells you the
number of characters. These numbers include the number of lines and
characters of the full message header, as well as the text of the message.
• The sixth field contains the subject of the message when the person who
sent the message provides a subject line.
Message Header Status Messages
Status messages are displayed at the right side of the footer. These messages
tell you how many messages are in your mail file, how many new messages
you have, and how many you have currently deleted. In Figure 4-2, the status
message tells you there are 4 items, 4 new messages, and 0 deleted messages.
Selecting Message Headers
You can select each message header by moving the pointer onto the line and
clicking SELECT. A selected header has a box around it. To select additional
messages, move the pointer into the line and click ADJUST. If a message is
already selected, clicking ADJUST deselects it.
You can select all the messages sent by or to a particular person or alias,
and/ or about a particular subject by using the Mail Tool Find feature.
Mail Tool Controls and Menus
The control area, shown in Figure 4-3, has three groups of controls.
I""'@l
Mail Tool - Ivar/mail/bren
~(View 'V)~(compose 'V)
~ ( Next
Figure 4-3
152
) (Delete) ( Reply
Mail Tool Control Area
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mail File: @l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
'V) ( Move 'V) ( Copy 'V) ~
L
The first four buttons in the top row are the standard Mail Tool menu buttons.
The first four buttons in the bottom row are user-defined accelerator buttons,
which you can customize to represent any of the items available from the
standard menus. The items at the right side of the control area are the Mail File
controls. These include the Mail File abbreviated menu button and text field,
and the Mail File Move, Copy, and Load menu buttons.
The following sections provide a brief description of each of these controls.
File Menu
The File menu has choices that you use to organize mail messages.print them,
or commit changes (such as deleting and sequentially renumbering messages).
• Use Load In-Box to load and view messages from your In-Box. This is how
you return to the default mail view after you are done viewing a different
mail file. It is also how you can get your new mail in between mail delivery
intervals. See "Organizing Your Mail Messages" on page 186 for more
information about mail files.
• Use Print to print the selected messages. See "Printing Messages" on
page 164 for more information about printing.
• Use Save Changes to incorporate changes. See "Saving Changes for Mail
Tool" on page 185 for more information.
• Use Done to incorporate changes and to close Mail Tool to an icon.
• Use Mail Files to display a window that helps you organize your mail
messages into separate mail files. See "Organizing Your Mail Messages" on
page 186 for more information about mail files.
The default item of the File Menu is Load In-Box. When you click SELECT on
the File button, your In-Box is loaded.
Multimedia Mail Tool
153
54
View Menu
The View menu has choices for different ways to view messages and move
between them, and for finding particular mail messages.
• Use Messages to view messages with an abbreviated or full header.
• Use Previous or Next to view the message before or after the current
message.
• Use Sort By to sort messages in your In-Box or mail files. See "Sorting the
Contents of a Mail File" on page 193 for more information.
• Use Find to find messages in your In-Box or mail file by sender, recipient,
and/ or by subject. See "Saving Changes for Mail Tool" on page 185.
See "Mail Tool View Message Window" on page 156 for more information
about the first three items on the View menu.
The default item of the View menu is Next. When you click SELECT on the
View button, the next message is displayed.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu has choices for editing and deleting mail messages and
configuring your Mail Tool from the Mail Tool Properties window.
• Use Cut and Copy to put selected messages onto the clipboard. You can then
paste these messages from the clipboard into other windows using the Text
Pane menu. These options are dimmed if you do not have any selected
messages.
• Use Delete to delete selected messages. This option is dimmed if you do not
have any selected messages, or are not currently viewing any.
• Use Undelete to restore deleted messages. When you save your Mail Tool
changes, deleted messages are really deleted, and can no longer be restored.
The Undelete option is dimmed if you do not have any deleted messages.
• Use Properties to customize your Mail Tool. See" Customizing Mail Tool" on
page 197 for information about Mail Tool properties.
The default item of the Edit menu is Delete. When you click SELECT on the
Edit button, the currently selected messages are deleted or the currently
viewed messages are deleted if no messages are selected.
154
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Compose Menu
The Compose menu has choices for opening Compose windows from which
you can write and send mail messages.
• Use New to open a new Compose window.
• Use Reply to open a Compose window to respond to a selected message. See
"Replying to a Message" on page 167 for more information.
• Use Forward to open a Compose window that includes the selected message
for forwarding. If the message has attachments, the attachments are also
included in the forwarded message.
• Use Vacation to initiate or stop an automatic response to incoming messages
when you are away from your mail. See "Using the Vacation Notifier" on
page 170 for more information about Vacation options.
The default item of the Compose menu is New. When you click SELECT on the
Compose button, a new Compose window is opened.
Custom Mail Tool Buttons
The first four buttons on the second row of the control area are custom Mail
Tool buttons. You can change these buttons to be any of the items on the File,
View, Edit, or Compose menus.
The default items of the custom buttons are Done (from the File menu), Next
(from the View menu), Delete (from the Edit menu), and Reply (from the
Compose menu). See "Header Window Properties" on page 198 for
information about how to change the items on these custom buttons.
Mail File Text Field and Menus
You use the Mail File text field and abbreviated menu button to create and
view mail files, and to store messages into mail files. You use the abbreviated
menu button to choose from all your available mail files. See "Mail File
Menus" on page 188 for information on creating and viewing mail files.
Use the last three buttons on the second row of the control area to move or
copy selected messages into a mail file, or to view (load) a different mail file.
Each of these buttons displays a menu of the most recently used mail files. You
can customize this menu to always include particular mail files. See "Mail File
Multimedia Mail Tool
155
Menus" on page 188 for information on creating and viewing mail files. See
"Mail Filing Properties" on page 208 for information about customizing your
mail file menus.
Pop-up Menus
A pop-up menu in the Header pane, called Messages, contains a subset of
controls from the File, View, Edit, and Compose menus. Display this menu by
moving the pointer anywhere in the Header window pane and pressing the
MENU button. Each item on the Messages pop-up menu works the same way
as it does when you choose the same item from a menu button.
The text editing panes in the View Message and Compose windows contain a
pop-up menu with the standard editing commands from the Text Editor. For a
description of the text editing commands, see the chapter "Text Editor" on
page 127.
Mail Tool View Message Window
To view a message, double-click SELECT on the header for the message that
you want to display. Alternatively, you can SELECT the message header, and
then choose Messages from the View menu.
A View Message pop-up window is displayed showing the text of the selected
message with an abbreviated message header, as shown in Figure 4-4.
156
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
o~
Mail Tool: View Message 2
~;rom
patten@newb; rth Thu Feb 18 10:49 PST 1993
ate: Thu. 18 Feb 93 10:49:35 PST
From: patten@newb; rth (Robert Patten)
To: egret@r;ver
Subj ect: Proj ect Status
Cc: otte r@dodona
Content-Type: X-sun-attachment
Content-Length: 710
=
~
Enclosed; s a summary of our current status aga; nst
the mil estones we establ; shed ; n our 1ast weekl y
meet; ng.
Pl ease make th; s ; nfo rmat; on avail ab 1e to you r
staff.
As a rem; nder. our next meet; ng has been postponed
Attach me nts
1:0
~~
wee kly.status
Figure 4-4
=
=
~
=
1 attachment (14 bytes)
View Message Window
The number of the displayed message is always shown in the header of the
View Message window (Message 2 in Figure 4-4).
Once you have displayed a message in a View Message window, any uNew" or
uUnread" flags on the message header are cleared, whether or not you have
actually read the message.
The View Message window uses the standard text editing pane and pop-up
menu. You can edit the text in the View Message pane. If you have made
editing changes to the message, a Notice (asking if you want to save the
changes), is displayed when you change messages or dismiss the window.
The View Message window can be split into two or more panes to view and
edit different parts of the mail message at the same time. See Chapter 3, "Text
Editor" for more information.
If the message you are viewing contains attachments, a separate attachment
area is displayed at the bottom of the View Message window. See "Mail Tool
Attachments" on page 174 for information about mail attachments.
Multimedia Mail Tool
157
54
Using the Pushpin in the View Message Window
The View Message window has a pushpin that you can use to pin the window
to the workspace if you want to keep a message (or several messages) visible.
If you do not pin the View Message window, it is reused for subsequent mail
messages that you view. If you do pin the View Message window, a new View
Message window will be displayed for the next message you view, and you
can display multiple View Message windows at the same time.
Viewing the Next or Previous Message
You can view the next message by clicking SELECT on the View button or the
Next button. If the View Message window is displayed but not pinned, the
next message is displayed in the existing View Message window.
Note - Clicking SELECT on the View menu button activates the default item
for the menu. If you have changed the default, you must display the View
menu and choose Next. Also note that the Next button is a custom button, and
may not be available on the header control area if you have changed the value
of this custom button.
To display the previous message, choose Previous from the View menu. You
can also use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to display the
previous and next messages. The Mail Tool Header window must be the
currently active window for this to work.
Alternatively, you can always view any message by double-clicking SELECT
on the desired message header.
Viewing Messages With a Full Header
Mail Tool messages are normally displayed with an abbreviated header. To
display a message with the full message header, select the desired message
header and choose Full Header from the Messages submenu of the View menu.
Figure 4-5 shows an example of a full message header.
158
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mail Tool: View Message 7
o-lPJ
~~om
mari ac@celti c Thu Feb 18 11: 00 PST 1993
etu rn-Path:
Received: from celtic.Eng.Sun.COM by river.Eng.Sun.COM (5.0/SMI-SVR4)
id AA00670; Thu, 18 Feb 93 11:00:10 PST
Recei ved: by celtic.Eng.Sun.COM (4.1/SMI-4.1)
id AA04215; Thu, 18 Feb 93 10:55:09 PST
Date: Thu, 18 Feb 93 10:55:09 PST
From: mari ac@celti c (Mari a A. Che rem)
Message-Id: <9302181855. AA04215@cel ti c. Eng. Sun. COM>
To: egret@river
Subject: Project Schedul e
Content-Type: X-sun-attachment
X-Lines: 73
Status: RO
Content- Length: 2010
Here's the 1atest Project Schedul e.
Attachments
~~
=
~
=
1 attach me nt (1693 bytes)
1:~
=
tasks
=
Figure 4-5
~
Full Message Header
The contents of the abbreviated header are determined by the Hide items on
the Message Window Properties scrolling list. All mail headers are displayed
except those listed in the Hide scrolling list. See "Message Window Properties"
on page 201 for information about customizing your default abbreviated
header with the Hide scrolling list.
Viewing Multiple Mail Messages
If you select multiple mail messages and display them by choosing Messages
from the View menu, a View Message window is opened for each message,
layered one on top of another in numerical order (not in the order that you
selected them).
Another way to view multiple mail messages is to pin an existing View
window, and then double-click SELECT on another mail message header. The
new message will be displayed in a new View window.
Mail Tool Compose Window
Any time you choose an item from the Compose menu (except for Vacation), a
Compose Message window is opened. (The Compose Message window is
simply referred to as the Compose window in the rest of this document.) A
Multimedia Mail Tool
159
Compose window operates independently from the Mail Tool Header window.
You can close an opened Compose window to an icon for later use, or keep a
Compose window open while the primary Mail Tool Header window is closed
to an icon. The Compose window icon shows an unsealed envelope, a sheet of
paper, and a label indicating the recipient of the message if the recipient has
been specified. Figure 4-6 shows these views of the Compose icon.
Figure 4-6
Compose Window Icon (before and after specifying a recipient)
You can open as many Compose windows as you like at one time, while
replying to or composing several messages concurrently. The Compose
window is shown in Figure 4-7.
@]
Mail Tool: Compose Message
~ (Deliver
'V) (
Header
'V) ~
( Attach
'V)
To:",
Subject:
Cc:
=
~
Attachments
~~
I
Figure 4-7
=
I§
Compose Message Window
The Compose window has its own set of controls that you use to create and
send mail messages:
160
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• The Include menu button provides choices to include selected messages as
part of the message you are composing. It also provides you with a set of
templates for creating different types of messages. See "Template
Properties" on page 213 for more information about templates. If you are
not going to include any attachments, you can use the Include menu to turn
off the Attachments pane at the bottom of the Compose Window, allowing
recipients to see more of the mail message.
• The Deliver menu button provides choices for how the Compose window
behaves once the message is sent.
• The Header menu button provides choices for the number and type of text
fields that make up the message header. The default choice is Bcc, which
allows you to add or delete the blind carbon copy (a copy of the message is
sent to another recipient without the original recipient knowing) field to the
message header. You can add other fields to this menu with the Custom
Fields scrolling list in the Compose Window Properties sheet. See "Compose
Window Properties" on page 203 for more information. The Aliases item
brings up the Alias properties window.
• The Clear button clears the contents of the window. Your message is saved
in the file dead .let ter whenever you use the Clear button or the Clear
message item from the Compose window's Deliver menu. See the man page
for mailx (1) for information about dead .let ter and the "save" variable.
• The Attach menu button brings up Voice, which accesses AudioTool and
allows you to compose a voice message. See Chapter II, "Audio Tool" for
information about Audio Tool. It also brings up Appt, an appointment
editor window for creating appointments to be used with Calendar
Manager. For information on how to do this, refer to Chapter 5, "Calendar
Manager."
• The Log check box determines whether or not the mail you are composing is
recorded in a file. You specify the file where messages are recorded using
the Mail Tool Properties window. See "Compose Window Properties" on
page 203 for more information.
The Log check box does not appear on the Compose window if you have
not specified a log file name with the Compose Window properties.
• The To, Subject, and Cc text fields are used to type the email addresses of
the recipients, the subject of the message, and the email addresses for those
to receive copies of the message, respectively.
Multimedia Mail Tool
161
• The text pane of the Compose window is used to type the text of the
message you want to send. The text pane uses the standard text editing
conventions available from the Text Editor. See the chapter "Text Editor" on
page 127 for more information about editing.
• The Attachments pane at the bottom of the Compose window is used to add
attachments to your mail. Attachments can be any kind of file, and can be
used to send images, voice mail, documents that retain their word-processor
file formats, Calendar Manager appointments, and so forth. See "Mail Tool
Attachments" on page 174 for information about mail attachments.
Reading Messages
You can tell you have new mail in two ways:
• If Mail Tool is closed, the Mail Tool icon shows the status. An overflowing
in-box means you have new mail.
• If Mail Tool is open, new message headers, preceded by "N" (for New) are
displayed in the Header window. Additionally, a counter in the lower right
corner tracks the number of new messages.
Mail Tool: View Message 8
~{rom
hami 1ton@artemi s Thu Feb 18 11: 13 PST 1993
luate: Thu, 18 Feb 93 11: 13: 33 PST
From: hami 1ton@artemi 5 (Mary "Hacksaw" Hami 1ton)
To: egret@ri ver
Subj eet: meeti ng remi nde r
Content-Type: text
Content- Length: 92
Hi Egret,
Don / t fo rget ou r meeti ng today at 3pm.
Marsh Confe rence Room.
Thanks,
Otter
Figure 4-8
162
Header window
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• To read a message, double-click SELECT on the message header.
The header you select is outlined, as shown in Figure 4-9, and the View
Message window displays the message.
Message status
@)
Mail Tool -/var/mail/egret
Message number
in mail queue
1 thi ef@ciciThuFeb18
patten@newbi rth
Thu Feb 18
3 bgah l@scuba
Thu Feb 18
Email address
4 a ers@outhouse
Thu Feb 18
of sender =_-----1tlr~5ra;ayers@outhouse
Thu Feb 18
U+ 7 mari ac@ceHi c
Thu Feb 18
Thu Feb 18
U
8 hami 1 ton@artemi s
U
9 abel son@sharonol ds Thu Feb 1
Thu Feb 8
N 10 aquab 1 u@cowman
Date and time
mail received
Figure 4-9
10: 42
10: 49
10: 50
10:51
10:51
: 00
1 : 13
11 : 34
13: 58
18/506
46/1282
32/1110
17/532
17/511
90! 531
22 611
3 /1232
1/647
You r Move
=~
P roj ect Status
Inbox status
..
SunU Training Registration
vi command sum ry
P roj ect Schedu e
meeti ng remi n e r
You r positi 0 pape r
Summe r Co 11 bo rati on
Number of lines
and characters Subject
Number of messages
in the queue
Message Headers in the Mail Tool Window
To read a message:
1. If Mail Tool is closed, double-click SELECT on icon.
The Header window is displayed.
2. Double-click SELECT on the header of the message you want to read.
The message is displayed in the View Message window.
Multimedia Mail Tool
163
Printing Messages
You can print your mail messages using either Mail Tool or Print Tool.
Printing Mail Messages Using Mail Tool
To print your messages from Mail Tool, select the headers for the messages you
want to print, and choose Print from the File menu. Figure 4-10 shows these
steps.
Load In-Box
-am
Save Changes
Done
<>
S
Your Move
Project Status
Inbox status
SunU Training Registrati
vi command summary
Project Schedule
meeting reminder
Your osition
Figure 4-10 Printing Multiple Mail Messages
The messages are printed using the print script specified in the Message
Window Properties sheet. See "Message Window Properties" on page 20l.
If a message has attachments, the attachments are not printed. A message is
printed that tells you how many attachments the message has.
To print an attachment, open the attachment and print it using the
attachment's application, or drag the attachment to the Print Tool.
164
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Printing Mail Messages Using Print Tool
You can use Print Tool to print your mail messages using these steps:
1. With both Mail Tool and Print Tool running, select the headers for the
messages you want to print.
2. Press SELECT and drag the headers until the hot spot of the pointer is on
the Print Tool drag and drop target.
The drag and drop target is the box in the upper left corner of the Print Tool
window.
The pointer changes to a document glyph if you are dragging one mail
header to indicate that what is being dragged is document. The pointer
changes to three document glyphs if you are dragging several mail headers.
In the example shown in Figure 4-11, two files have been selected for
printing.
+
u
u
Fi Ie name: /tm pig u i deEAAaOOOEg.,
Copies: _,_
~
~
Header: ~
Printer:
I
( Properties .. , )
---'I~
1c::J
Im_imeO_ _
.1--
( Information",)
Figure 4-11 Printing by Using Drag and Drop
3. Release SELECT to drop the headers.
Messages are displayed in the footer of the Print Tool window displaying
the printing status.
Multimedia Mail Tool
165
If a selected mail message has attachments, and the message is dropped on the
Print Tool, the attachments are not printed. A message is printed that tells how
many attachments are with the message. To print an attachment, open the
attachment and print it using the attachment's application, or drag just the
attachment to the Print Tool.
Composing Messages
Your email address is typically your login ID and your machine's host name,
combined like this: name@host. If there is more than one domain on your
network, you may need to append a domain name to the address as well. For
instance, the name would appear in this format: name@host. domain. Check
with your system administrator to make certain.
Others on your network will typically have the same address format. When
you are certain of your email address, try sending a test message to yourself.
Composing a New Message
To compose a new message:
1. In the Header window control area, click SELECT on Compose.
The Compose Message window is displayed.
2. Click SELECT on the To text field, and fill in the message header
information.
• Press Return as you complete each line
• In the To and Cc text fields, separate multiple email addresses with a
comma, a space, or both. For example:
here@machine,
there@elsewhere,
outside@somewhere
a. Type the topic in the Subject text field, and press Return.
b. If desired, type email addresses of carbon copy recipients in the Cc text
field.
Separate the addresses with a comma, a space, or both.
3. Move to the Text pane either by pressing Return or clicking SELECT in
the Text pane.
The dimmed insert point darkens to indicate it is active.
166
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
4. Type your message.
The Compose window Text pane uses standard text editing functions.
Figure 4-12 shows a sample message.
Addressee
-------
Message s ubject
Carbon cop y line
Text pane
@]
( Include
Mail Tool: Compose Message
17) ( Deliver V') ( Header V')
~
r--
~
To: user@machinename
Subject: Title of the mail message
~user@machine name
Thi sis whe re you type the text of the mail message.
You can add an attachment or two if you 1ike.
=
~
Make su re you at 1east fi 11 out the sender i nformati on
in the To: field ..
Attachments
~~
Attachmen ts
pane
=
=
~
=
Figure 4-12 Addressing a Message
To include an attachment, see "Sending Mail Attachments" on page 178.
5. To send the message, click SELECT on Deliver.
The message is delivered, and the Compose window closes.
Replying to a Message
Replying to a message is similar to composing a message.
Multimedia Mail Tool
167
1. In the Header window control area, press MENU on Reply.
2. Choose the appropriate item for your recipient(s).
The Compose Message window is displayed. Note the following:
• The To and Subject text fields are filled out.
• A copy of the original message is included only if you chose Reply To
Sender, Include or Reply To All, Include.
3. Type or edit your message and its header, and send the message.
Refer to the section "Composing Messages" on page 166.
Forwarding Messages to Third-Parties
You can forward a message to another person in two ways, depending on
where you start from:
• Forwarding a message from the Header window.
• Including a message from the Compose Message window.
Forwarding a Message
To forward a message from the Header window:
1. Select the message(s) you want to forward.
• Click SELECT on the first message header.
• Click ADJUST on additional message headers.
2. Choose Forward from the Compose menu.
The Compose Message window is displayed. Note the following:
• The Subject text field is filled in. You need to fill in the other To text field,
and if desired, the Cc text field.
• The Text pane displays the original message.
• The Attachments pane includes any attachments to the original message ..
3. Type your message, and send the entire new message.
Refer to the section "Composing Messages" on page 166.
168
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Including a Message
To include a message from the Compose window.
1. Compose your message.
2. In the Header window, click SELECT on the header of the message(s) you
want to include.
3. In the Compose window, choose Bracketed or Indented (as you prefer)
from the Include menu.
Your choice determines the formatting of the original message:
• Bracketed labels the beginning and end of the message.
• Indented indents each line of the message and marks each line with a
greater-than sign (».
4. To send the message, click SELECT on Deliver.
Using Templates
A template is a file you can include in a mail message that contains text you
frequently use when composing messages. Mail Tool allows you to create your
own template files. You might, for example, want to create a standard table
format for status report information or a standard signature and closing
message. See "Template Properties" on page 213 for information about how to
create and store templates. When you have created a template file and added it
to Mail Tool, it is displayed as an item on the Templates submenu. The menu in
the left margin shows a Templates submenu with three templates.
The default Templates submenu contains only the Calendar template. The
Calendar template creates messages in a form that Calendar Manager
interprets when the message header is dragged and dropped onto the Calendar
Manager. See the chapter "Calendar Manager" on page 221 for more
information.
Any template available from the Templates submenu can be added to a
message at any time while you are composing it. When you choose the item
from the Include menu, the template is inserted at the caret location.
Figure 4-13 shows an example of a signature template.
Multimedia Mail Tool
169
Mail Tool:
(Include
Subject:
Cc:
'V) (Deliver 'V) (Header 'V) ~ /
------------------7
Bri ana Hal va rsen
Technical ~riter
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Figure 4-13 Example of a Signature Template
Using the Vacation Notifier
When you are away from your office, you can use the Vacation notifier on the
Compose menu to automatically respond to each email message you receive.
Mail Tool provides you with a generic message form that you can edit and
customize to suit your individual needs. Figure 4-14 shows the Vacation Setup
pop-up window with the generic message. Choose the Start/Change item on
the Vacation submenu to display the Vacation Setup window.
Mail Tool: Vacation Setup
o-{l;O
~ubject:
I am on vacati on
recedence: junk
Your mail regardi ng U$SUBJECT u wi 11 be read when I
return.
c::J
~
If you have somethi ng urgent. please contact ...
c::J
[ Start ))
Figure 4-14 Vacation Setup Pop-up Window
You can edit this message in the same way you edit messages in the Compose
window. The string $SUBJECT in the message text automatically extracts the
subject from the message being responded to, and includes it in the reply
170
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
message. The Precedence:junk line tells the mail delivery agent to set this mail
to a lower priority and not to return any error messages to this mail message.
Figure 4-15 shows an example of a vacation message that has been customized.
r o~
Subject:
Mail Tool: Vacation Setup
I am on vacation
Precedence: junk
I'm on vacation from December 18 through
December 25.
=
~
Your mail regardi ng "$SUBJECT" wi 11 be read when I
return.
Hope you have a happy holiday season.
Jan
I
~
=
I
Figure 4-15 Modified Vacation Message
To start the vacation message, click SELECT on the Start button. The word
"Vacation" is displayed in the header of the Mail Tool window to remind you
that the vacation notifier is turned on.
While the vacation notifier is turned on, incoming mail messages are stored in
your In-Box and are readily available when you return to the office. When the
vacation notifier is turned on, it replies to each person who sends mail to you.
Each sender receives a reply from the vacation notifier, but it replies to the
same sender only once in each seven day period.
If your name is listed in a public alias and a message is sent to the alias, the
vacation notifier does not respond to the sender of that message. The vacation
notifier will respond to names included as part of a private alias. See "Alias
Properties" on page 215 for information about mail aliases.
Once you have activated the vacation notifier, the Stop item on the Vacation
submenu is also activated. To stop the vacation notifier and remove the word
"Vacation" from the header, choose Stop from the Vacation submenu.
Multimedia Mail Tool
171
Deleting Messages
It is a good idea to periodically delete obsolete messages from your In-Box. To
delete one or more mail messages, select the message headers that you want to
delete, then choose Delete from the Edit menu. The selected mail messages are
deleted from the display, and the status message in the footer updates to reflect
the current state of your In-Box, as shown in the example in Figure 4-16.
@)
i.
Mail Tool -/var/mail/egret
~(View v)~(compose v) Mail File: @)
~~(Delete)(RepIY
I 1
2
3
U
4
U
5
7
8
9
N 10
•
•
thi ef@ci ci
patten@newbirth
bgahl@scuba
aye rs@outhouse
aye rs@outhouse
mariac@celtic
hamilton@artemis
abel son@sharonolds
aquab 1u@cowman
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
v)
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
~(COPY v)~
10: 42
10:49
10:50
10:51
10: 51
11: 00
11: 13
11: 34
13:58
18/508
46/1282
32/1110
17/532
17/511
90/2531
22/611
32/1232
21/647
Your Move
Praj ect Status
Inbox status
SunU Training Registratio
vi command summary
Proj ect Schedul e
meeti ng remi nde r
Your position paper
Summe r Co 11 abo rati on
=
~
=
11 items, 1 new, 2 deleted
Figure 4-16 Status Message after Deleting Two Mail Messages
Delete is also the default value of the third custom button. It is also available
from the header pane pop-up menu, described in the section "Pop-up Menus"
on page 156.
Undeleting Messages
As long as you do not incorporate changes to Mail Tool by switching to
another Mail File or by choosing either Save Changes or Done from the File
menu, your deleted messages remain available and you can "Undelete" them.
When there are no deleted messages available, the Undelete item on the File
menu is inactive.
To undelete the message most recently deleted, choose Undelete from the Edit
menu.
To undelete a different message, or to undelete more than one message at a
time, choose From List on the Undelete submenu to display the Undelete
window. The Undelete window contains a scrolling list of messages that you
172
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
have deleted since you last incorporated changes in Mail Tool. Select the
headers of the messages that you want to undelete, then click SELECT on the
Undelete button.
To save your undeleted messages in your Inbox, click SELECT on Done in the
Mail Tool Message window control area, or choose Save Changes on the File
menu.
Finding Messages
To find messages, you can search your In-Box or mail files for messages with a
particular subject, messages that have been sent to or from a specific person, or
both. You can use this feature to find one particular message, or to find a group
of messages. For example, if you come back from vacation and find a lot of
mail messages about a topic you are not interested in, you can find all the
messages about that subject and quickly delete them.
To find a message, first display the Find pop-up window by choosing Find
from the View menu. The Find pop-up window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-17.
Mail Tool: Find Messages
From: "''IL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
To!Cc: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
To: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Cc: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Subject: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
((FInd Forward» (Find Backward) (Select All) ~
Figure 4-17 Find Pop-up Window
You can search for messages based on the mail header's From field, To field,Cc
field, or Subject field, or by any combination of these fields. The Search text
fields are case-insensitive and match partial words and phrases. You do not
need to type a complete sender name, and you can use keywords to match
subjects. For example, typing the name robles in the From text field will find
messages sent by robles@oak as well as manual. robles.
Multimedia Mail Tool
173
To search for messages by sender, type the sender name in the From text field.
Clicking SELECT on the Find Forward button selects the next message header
with the sender name you specify. Clicking SELECT on the Find Backward
button selects the previous message header. Clicking SELECT on the Select All
button selects all message headers with the sender name. A message is
displayed in the footer of the Find Messages window telling you how many
messages are selected.
If you want to find mail sent to a person or alias either directly or by Cc list,
type the name in the TolCc field. If you only want to find mail sent directly to
a person or alias (but not carbon copied), type the name in the To field. If you
only want to find mail carbon copied to a person or alias (but not sent directly),
type the name in the Cc field.
To search for messages by subject, type a word or phrase in the Subject text
field.
To search for messages by sender, receiver, and by subject, type the appropriate
information in each text field and click SELECT on one of the buttons at the
bottom of the Find window. Only mail messages that satisfy all the conditions
will be found.
Clicking SELECT on Clear removes all the text typed in the Find Messages
window text fields.
Mail Tool Attachments
A mail message can contain attachments, which are files of any type in their
own file formats. For example, a mail message might contain an image
attachment and an audio attachment, providing an illustration and voice mail.
When a message contains attachments, the View Message pop-up window
displays a separate Attachments pane at the bottom, as shown in Figure 4-18.
174
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
@)
.,
Mail Tool: Compose Message
(Include v) ( Deliver v) ( Header v) (Clear)
~
To: mariac@celtic
Subject: Two File§r.
Cc:
=
~
Maria,
Attached are two fi 1es that you mi ght fi nd useful.
Attachments
I
1:0
my_file
~~
=
2 attachments (8920 bytes)
2:~
my _ pri ntscri pt
I~
Figure 4-18 View Message Pop-up Window with Attachments
You can move attachments to the File Manager or any other application that
accepts files of the attachment's file type. You can also open the attachments
without moving them out of the Mail Tool. You can add new attachments to a
mail message, delete attachments, or rename them.
Opening Mail Attachments
There are two groups of mail attachments:
• Ordinary attachments, which are bound to their applications. You open
them (and their applications) directly from the Attachments pane. For
example, Calendar Manager appointments, mail messages, icons and
images, voicemail, and executable files.
• Special attachments, which are not bound to their application. You cannot
open these files directly from the Attachments pane. For example, speciallyformatted text files created with desktop publishing software.
Multimedia Mail Tool
175
54
Note - If there are more attachments than can be displayed in one row, you
need to scroll down with the Attachments pane scrollbar to see all the files.
Opening Ordinary Attachments
To open most attachments:
• Double-dick SELECT on an icon in the Attachments pane.
The message, "Launching... " appears in the message area beneath the
Attachments pane, and in a moment the application opens, and the file is
displayed.
Caution - When starting an executable from the Mail Tool Attachments pane,
you receive a warning message asking if you want to run the executable
program or cancel. Before you click SELECT on "Run it," make sure you know
what the outcome will be and that the sender is someone you trust.
Executables such as shell scripts can be used to perform operations on the files
in your file system.
Figure 4-19 shows a mail message with a voice mail attachment opened up in
the AudioTool application. See the chapter" Audio Tool" on page 347 for
information about using AudioTool to listen to the message.
176
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Date:
,24 F 93 15:27:07 PST
From: mari ae@eeltie CMari a A. Cherem)
To: egret@river
ubj eet: Last Week's Conve rsati on
ontent-Type: X-sun-attaehment
Content- Length: 23876
He re' s a reeo rdi ng of the sho rt eonve rsati on I
had wi th Rob and Kei th 1ast week.
Audio Tool
o
~ ~ (Volume 'Il)
1:111
shortehat
Rev
Play
Fwd
Rec
Voice Format
Figure 4-19 Mail Message with an Opened Voice Mail Attachment
Note - PostScript attachments are displayed in Image Tool. For complete
information on how to use Image Tool, refer to Chapter 13, "Image Tool."
Viewing Special Attachments
You will need access (on your system or file server) to the software used to
create the attachment. Also, you probably need to be running the same version
of the software. If you do not have access to the correct software, you might
want to request that the sender convert the file into PostScript format and
res end the file.
To view specially-formatted text files:
1. Copy the attachment into File Manager.
See "Moving Mail Attachments" on page 183.
2. Open the file from the application in which the file was created.
Consult the user manual that came with the application for details.
Multimedia Mail Tool
177
Sending Mail Attachments
To include attachments in a mail message you are composing, select thefile
icons that you want to include from the File Manager, and drag and drop them
onto the Attachments pane of the Compose window. You can also drag and
drop files or data from the Text Editor or any other application that supports
drag and drop.
Alternatively, you can use the Attachments pane Add Attachments popup to
include attachments in your message, as described in Adding Mail
Attachments" on page 180.
1/
Follow these steps to drag and drop a file from the File Manager onto Mail Tool
to be included in a mail message:
1. Open the File Manager application and the Mail Tool Compose window
of the message you are sending.
If the Attachments pane is not showing at the bottom of the Compose
window, choose Show Attachments from the Compose window Include
menu.
2. In the File Manager, click SELECT on the file that you want to include as
a mail attachment.
Click ADJUST on any additional files that you want to include.
3. Press SELECT on one of the highlighted files, and drag the pointer to the
Attachments pane of the Compose window, as shown in Figure 4-20.
The pointer changes while the file is being dragged.
178
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
r~"~~:;;;';;~';;;;;"d;;:;;;:;;;:;;w'~'W""'''w''~'wmw'-wN'''~l
I
OJ
I
II
h;,ht;de e,,,' F;,h
0 i~
DCITTIl
::
l!
Contai ns , 0 ite ms
D
@)
;~
872 Mbytes (98%) avai lab Ie
Mail Tool: Compose Message
I~ ~!l
~
I
1 L - - - - -_ _ _ _1;
Attachment,
~~
I~
.
'-':
Figure 4-20 Selecting a File for dragging onto the Compose Window Attachments Pane
4. Release SELECT.
The file is displayed in the Attachments pane as an icon, and will be
included as part of the mail message.
Note - If you drag and drop a file onto the text area of the Compose window,
the file is included in the text as ASCII text. Some types of files, such as binary
program files, are unreadable in the text pane. If you want to include the file as
a separate attachment in its native format, make sure to drag and drop the file
onto the Attachments pane.
If you drag data that is not a file onto the Attachments pane, the name of the
icon that appears in the Attachments pane is the data type. For example, if you
want to drag and drop the text in the Text Editor pane, you can press SELECT
on the drag and drop target that appears in the Text Editor header, drag the
pointer to the Compose window Attachments pane, and release SELECT. The
new icon in the Attachments pane is named Text.
Multimedia Mail Tool
179
Adding Mail Attachments
You can add new mail attachments to a message using drag and drop, as
described in the previous section, or the Add Attachment pop-up window.
Note - Keep in mind that when you add attachments to a mail message, it is
easy to construct very large messages without realizing it.
To add a new mail attachment using the Add Attachment popup window,
follow these steps:
1. Choose Add from the File menu at the top of the Attachments pane.
The Add Attachment popup window is displayed.
2. Select the directory name of the file to be attached.
Alternatively, you can type the path in the Go To text field.
3. Click SELECT on the Add button, as shown in Figure 4-21.
180
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mail Tool: Add Attachment
Type in the path to the folder and press Return,
(GoTO: ~)$
_______________________
Current Folder:
/h ig hti de/egret/F is h
Select a file and click Add
. . ",Go up one folder",
IClcod
Cl Salmon
ClSwordFish
ClTuna
~----------------------~~
Hidden Files:
I Hide I Show I
Figure 4-21 Adding an Attachment with the Add Attachment Popup Window
The file is added to the mail message attachment pane, as shown in
Figure 4-22.
Multimedia Mail Tool
181
54
@)
Mail Tool: Compose Message
( Include
'i7) ( Deliver 'i7) ( Header 'i7)
~
~
To: mariac@celtic
Subject: Requested file
Cc:
=
~
Attached is .the fi 1e you requested.
Attachments
I
~~
=
1 attach me nt (2230 bytes)
1:~
Des kSetDefau Its
Added 1 attachments for a total of 3k bytes
I~
Figure 4-22 Attachment Added to a Mail Message Attachment Pane
Renaming Mail Attachments
Follow these steps to rename a mail attachment in the View Message or
Compose window Attachments pane:
1. Select the attachment that you want to rename.
You can only rename one attachment at a time.
2. Choose Rename from the Edit menu at the top of the Attachments pane.
The Rename Attachment popup window is displayed.
3. In the Rename Attachment popup window, type the new attachment name
in the Name text field and click select on the Rename button, as shown in
Figure 4-23.
The attachment in the Attachments pane is renamed.
182
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
lSI
Mail Tool : Rename Attachment
Rename selected attachment to:
Name: new.attach me n~
~illllll'
Figure 4-23 Renaming an Attachment in the Rename Attachment Popup Window
Note - The name of an attachment should never contain the slash (/) character.
This can cause confusion between file and directory names.
Moving Mail Attachments
You can drag and drop attachments to the File Manager, or any other
application that accepts files of the attachment's file type. See "Using Drag and
Drop with Mail Tool" on page 195 for more information.
Alternatively, you can use the Attachment pane's controls to copy an
attachment to a directory:
1. In the Attachments pane, click SELECT on the attachment to be copied.
The file is highlighted.
2. In the control area of the Attachments pane, choose Save As from the File
menu.
You see the Mail Tool: Save Attachment As popup window, as shown in
Figure 4-24.
Multimedia Mail Tool
183
Mail Tool: Save Attachment As
o-iJ:(l
Ty pe in the path to the fol der an d press Return.
(Go To:
17) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Curre nt Fo Ider:
/h ig hti de/egret/F is h
I, .
Se lect a fi Ie or fol der an d cI ick 0 pe n Fol der.
Go up one folder ...
C) C.)d
!jS,"i n1 u;
Lj S~'~udf:::;h
Lj'!'t,,1-:<
~------------~=
Save As:
~sa~lm~o~~~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Hidden Files:
(Open Folder)
I Hide I Show I
(Cancel)
((Save»
Figure 4-24 Save Attachment As Popup Window
a. Select the directory and filename to be moved.
Alternatively, you can type the directory name in the Directory text field.
b. Click SELECT on the Save button.
A copy of the file is stored in the specified directory, with the file name
derived from the name of the attachment.
184
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Deleting Mail Attachments
To delete attachments from a message in the View or Compose window, select
the attachment or attachments you want to delete and choose Delete from the
Edit button in the control area of the Attachments pane.
Use the Undelete item to restore the most recently deleted attachment. This
item is grayed out if there are currently no deleted attachments.
Saving Changes for Mail Tool
To improve system performance, Mail Tool does not automatically save
changes that you make when you close it to an icon. Messages that you have
deleted remain available to you when you open the Mail Tool Header window.
To free up disk space and keep your mail box a manageable size, it is a good
idea to periodically delete obsolete messages and save changes.
You save changes using either Save Changes or Done from the File menu.
• Use Save Changes to commit changes and incorporate new mail without
closing the primary Mail Tool Header window.
• Use Done to commit changes, close the primary Mail Tool Header window
to an icon, and incorporate new mail the next time you open the icon. Using
Done leaves Mail Tool in a condition that lets you read mail using another
mail program without creating conflicts in the mail spooling files.
Mail Tool automatically checks and incorporates new mail messages using a
time period specified from the Mail Tool Properties window. If you have a long
time period set and want to see if you have new mail, you can use Load In-Box
from the File menu. Choosing either Save Changes or Done also checks for new
mail messages. See "Customizing Mail Tool" on page 197 for more information
about Mail Tool properties.
When you quit the Mail Tool application, a Notice is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-25, asking you whether you want to save changes, quit without saving
changes, or cancel the quit notice.
Multimedia Mail Tool
185
The curre nt mal I box has bee n change d
Do you w Is h to save the changes?
Figure 4-25 Quit Notice
Choosing Save Changes commits the changes and quits Mail Tool. Choosing
Discard Changes discards changes, reincorporating any deleted messages as
part of the In-Box, and quits Mail Tool. Choosing Cancel cancels the quit
operation, and leaves Mail Tool running.
Organizing Your Mail Messages
A convenient way to organize your mail is to group related messages together
in a mail file. A mail file is a file that can contain multiple mail messages. If you
view a mail file outside of Mail Tool, it looks like a single file with multiple
mail messages appended to one another. When you view a mail file using Mail
Tool, each separate message header is displayed in the header pane, and you
can view, edit, delete, and respond to each message individually.
You can use the Mail Files pop-up window to create, delete, and rename mail
files and subdirectories of mail files, to add messages to mail files, or to view
mail files. To display the Mail Files window, shown in Figure 4-26, choose Mail
Files from the File Menu.
186
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
~
Mail Tool: Mail Files
Name: ..
~ ~ (Create
'\7) ~
Ihightide/egret
If ".Go up one folder".
QArtfiles
QFish
QFolder
QTestApps
Qfilename
Qmail
Qroot
I
=
~
=
Figure 4-26 Mail Files Window
The Mail Files popup window contains a scrolling list of all your mail files (or
mailfolders). There are three groups of entries listed in the mailfolder scrolling
list, as follows:
• Double-click SELECT on that entry to display the mail files up one directory
level.
• The next entries in the mailfolder scrolling list are your subdirectories (or
folders) of mail files. You can double-click SELECT on these entries to
display the mail files of each subdirectory.
• The last entries in the mailfolder scrolling list are the regular mail files that
you can load or save messages to.
You specify the directory where the mail files reside in your file structure using
the Mail Filing category in the Properties window. See "Mail Filing Properties"
on page 208 for more information. Any mail files that you create in this
directory are displayed as items in the Mail File menu on the Header window
control area (described in the section "Mail File Menus" on page 188). The
default mail file directory is your home directory. If you want to specify a
different directory, it's a good idea to do so before you create new mail files.
In addition to using the Mail Files window, you can also create new mail files,
add messages to mail files, or view a mail file using the Mail File menu and the
Move, Copy, and Load menus on the Mail Tool Header window control area.
These menus are described in the next section.
Multimedia Mail Tool
187
Mail File Menus
The Mail File menu of the Header window contains a list of files and
subdirectories in your mail file directory, as shown in Figure 4-27. Use this
menu as an easy way to fill in the name of a mail file in the Mail File text field.
~~~( Compose
~~~(RepIY
1
+ 2
3
4
5
+ 7
8
9
N 10
+ 12
thief@cici
patten@nelYbi rth
bgahl@scuba
aye rs@outhouse
aye rs@outhouse
mari ac@celti c
hami 1 ton@artemi 5
abel son@sharonol ds
aquabl u@cowman
mariac@celtic
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Thu
Wed
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
'if) Mail File:
'if)~
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
24
10:42
10:49
10:50
10: 51
10: 51
11: 00
11: 13
11: 34
13: 58
15:32
18/506
46/1282
32/1110
17/532
17/511
90/2531
22/611
32/1232
21/647
418/24
TestApps/
dead. letter
FlounderMail
dead.letter.1
NoNa me
dead.letter.2
Salmon
edit_undo.rs
Seafood/
filename/
Swordfish
Tuna
rs
image.rs
mailfile
Figure 4-27 Mail File Menu Showing Mail Files and Subdirectories of Mail Files
As you access a mail file, it is added to the Move, Copy, and Load menus of the
Header window. Each of these three menus contains an identical list of recently
accessed mail files. The first item on each menu is the entry in the Mail File text
field. If no entry is in the text field, the first item is called Entry, and is
dimmed. Figure 4-28 shows a Copy menu after several mail files have been
accessed, and when there is an entry in the Mail File text field.
Jan 7 22: 02
Jan 22 12:58
n 22 16: 1 8
25 10: 09
5 12: 30
13: 55
7: 07
finance
des ksetimai I. tool
ow.docs
todo
lp
c
Rel,l'
ana
46
10/45121 request
Figure 4-28 Copy Menu with the Most Recently Accessed Mail Files
188
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
If you have a set of mail files that you want to always appear on the Move,
Copy, and Load menus, you can specify these files in the Mail Filing category
of the Properties window. You can also control the maximum height of these
menus. See "Mail Filing Properties" on page 208 for information.
Creating a New Mail File
You can create a new mail file using only the controls on the Header window,
or using the Mail Files popup window.
Creating a New Mail File Using the Header Window Controls
Follow these steps to create a mail file using only the Header window controls:
1. Select one or more messages to move or copy to the new mail file.
2. Type the name of the new mail file in the Mail File text field on the
Header window, and then click SELECT on the Move or Copy button.
When you just type a file name, such as proj ectreports, Mail Tool puts
the mail file in the Mail File directory that you specify from the Mail Filing
Properties window. Alternatively, you can type a complete path name, such
as /horne/usernarne/proj ects/proj ectreports, to put the mail file
somewhere else in your file structure, or you can type a relative path name,
such as proj ects/proj ectreports, to put the mail file in a subdirectory
of your Mail File directory.
The new mail file becomes the first and default item of the Move, Copy, and
Load menus.
3. Click SELECT on the Move or Copy button.
The new mail file is created, the selected messages are moved to the new
file, and a message is displayed in the footer of the Header window.
Creating a New Mail File Using the Mail Files Popup Window
Follow these steps to create a new mail file using the Mail Files popup
window:
1. Choose Mail Files from the File menu to display the Mail Files popup
window.
Multimedia Mail Tool
189
54
2. Type the name of the new mail file in the Name text field.
For example, type proj ectreports to create a project report mail file, as
shown in Figure 4-29.
19
"1
Mail Tool: Mail Files
Name:
projectreport~
~ ~ (Create,,) ~
/h ig htide/egret
I" . . Go up one folder...
CJArtfiles
CJFish
=
1
~
CJ Folder
CJTestApps
CJfilename
CJmail
CJroot
=
Figure 4-29 New Mail File Typed in the Mail Files Name Field
You can also type the name of a new mail file subdirectory if you'd like to
create a subdirectory of mail files.
If you already have a subdirectory where you want to put the new mail file,
you can type a relative path name in the Name field, starting with the
subdirectory. For example, type proj ect s /proj ectreport s to create a
mail file in the subdirectory called proj ects. Alternatively, you can
double-click SELECT on the proj ects subdirectory in the scrolling list to
display that mail directory, and then type the name of the new mail file in
the Name field.
3. Choose Mail File or Directory from the Create menu to create the new
mail file or subdirectory.
190
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Adding Messages to an Existing Mail File
You can add messages to an existing mail file using only the controls on the
Header window, or using the Mail Files pop-up window. Both of these
methods are described in the following sections.
Adding Messages to a Mail File Using the Header Window Controls
Follow these steps to add messages to a mail file using only the controls on the
Header window:
1. Select the mail headers that you want to move or copy to the mail file.
2. Move or copy the selected messages to an existing or new mail file as
follows:
a. If the desired mail file already exists and is listed in the Move and
Copy menus, simply choose the mail file from the Move or Copy menu.
b. If the desired mail file already exists but is not listed on the Move and
Copy menus, choose the desired mail file from the Mail File menu, and
then click SELECT on the Move or Copy button.
The new mail file becomes the first and default item of the Move, Copy,
and Load menus.
Adding Messages to a Mail File Using the Mail Files Popup
Window
Follow these steps to add messages to a mail file using the Mail Files window:
1. Select the headers of the mail messages that you want to move or copy.
2. Choose Mail Files from the File menu to display the Mail Files window.
3. Select a mail file in the Mail Files window scrolling list.
If the desired mail file is in a subdirectory, double-click SELECT on the
subdirectory to display its contents in the scrolling list.
4. Choose Move Message into Mail File or Copy Message into Mail File
from the Save menu.
The selected messages are moved or copied to the selected mail file.
Multimedia Mail Tool
191
Viewing a Mail File
You can view the messages stored in a mail file using either the Mail Files
window or the Load menu of the Mail Tool Header window. Once the mail file
is loaded, you access the messages of the mail file exactly the same way as you
access the messages of your In-Box.
To return to the In-Box after you are done viewing a mail file, choose
Load In-Box from the File menu.
Viewing a Mail File Using the Header Window Controls
Follow these steps to view the messages in a mail file using the Header
window controls:
1. If the desired mail file is not already on the Load menu, choose the
desired mail file from the Mail File menu.
Alternatively, you can type the name of the mail file in the Mail File text
field.
2. Choose the mail file from the Load menu on the Mail Tool Header
window.
If the desired mail file is listed in the Mail File text field, you can just click
SELECT on the Load button.
Viewing a Mail File Using the Mail Files Window
Follow these steps to view mail file messages using the Mail Files window:
1. Choose Mail Files from the File menu to display the Mail Files popup
window.
2. Select the mail file that you want to view on the Mail Files popup window
scrolling list.
If the desired mail file is in a subdirectory, double-click SELECT on the
subdirectory to display its contents in the scrolling list.
3. Choose Mail File from the Load menu.
The mail file is loaded into the Mail Tool Header window.
Alternatively, you can just double-click SELECT on the mail file in the Mail
Files scrolling list to load that mail file.
192
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Editing a Mail File (Emptying, Renaming, Deleting)
You can empty a mail file, rename it, or delete it with the Edit menu of the Mail
Files window.
To empty, rename, or delete a mail file, you first need to select the mail file in
the scrolling list on the Mail Files window. If the mail file is in a subdirectory
below the one displayed on the scrolling list, double-click SELECT on that
subdirectory to display it. If the mail file is in a directory higher up from the
one displayed in the scrolling list, double-click SELECT on the
.. (Go up one folder) folder item until the mail file is in the scrolling list.
When the mail file is in the scrolling list, click SELECT on the mail file to select
it.
To delete a mail file, select the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list, then
choose Delete from the Edit menu. Mail Tool will give you a notice asking you
to confirm that you really want to delete the mail file.
To empty a mail file, select the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list, then
choose Empty from the Edit menu. Mail Tool will give you a notice asking you
to confirm that you really want to empty the mail file.
To rename a mail file, select the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list, type the
new name in the Name field, and then choose Rename from the Edit menu.
Sorting the Contents of a Mail File
You can sort items in your In-Box or the currently viewed mail file by choosing
an item from the Sort By submenu of the Header window View menu:
• Sort by time and date of receipt, placing the most recently received messages
at the bottom.
• Sort alphabetically by name of sender. This is useful for grouping together all
the messages from a particular person.
• Sort alphabetically by subject of mail, to group together all the messages
about a particular subject.
• Sort by the size of mail messages, from smallest to largest.
Multimedia Mail Tool
193
54
• Sort by the "read" status of the mail. This puts the messages you have read
first, the unread messages next, and the new messages last. This is useful to
group together all your unread mail after you have read your messages in a
non sequential order.
• Sort by the message numbers.
Loading Saved Messages Back into Mail Tool
You can load saved messages back into the Mail Tool base window and view
them as you would new mail messages. When you load previously saved
messages, they temporarily replace the current messages contained in your inbox.
Loading a Message from the Mail Files Directory
If the message you want to view is in the default Folder directory:
1. Press MENU on the abbreviated menu button to the left of the Mail File
text field.
A menu pops up listing the messages in the Folder directory.
2. Drag the pointer to the message you want to load, highlight it, and release
MENU.
3. Choose Load.
All messages saved to that file appear in the Mail Tool base window as
separate messages, just as they did when first received in the In-Box.
Loading a Message from Another Directory
To load a message saved to another directory:
1. In the Mail Tool base window, type the path to the message file in the text
field.
Use the same path that you used to store it initially.
2. Choose Load.
All messages saved to that file name appear in the Mail Tool base window
as separate messages, just as they did when first received in the In-Box.
194
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Alternatively, you can drag a file of saved mail from File Manager and drop it
onto the Mail Tool base window. The message or messages in that file will
appear in the base window just as they did when you first received them. This
method is especially helpful if you have forgotten the path to the file.
Loading the In-Box
To reload your In-Box messages:
• In the Header window, choose Load In-Box from the File menu.
All of the message headers in the In-Box are again displayed in the Mail
Tool Header window.
Using Drag and Drop with Mail Tool
You can use the OpenWindows drag and drop capability to drag mail
messages out to other applications, and to drop information from other
applications onto your Compose window to be included as text or as a
separate attachment. This section gives an overview of the ways you can use
drag and drop with Mail Tool and the other DeskSet applications described in
this guide.
Dragging Mail to Other Applications
You can select single or multiple headers in the Mail Tool window and drag
them to other DeskSet applications. When you drag a mail header, the entire
mail message is moved along with it, including any mail attachments.
You can also select single or multiple mail attachments and move just the
attachments to other applications.
Dragging Message Headers to Other Applications
You can drag and drop message headers onto the File Manager, Text Editor,
Print Tool, Calendar Manager, or any other application that accepts files via
drag and drop.
Multimedia Mail Tool
195
To drag and drop a copy of a mail message, select the message header, then
drag the pointer to the destination. A small Text file glyph moves with the
pointer to show that you are dragging a Text file, as shown in the example in
Figure 4-30. When you select multiple message headers, a group of Text glyphs
is dragged with the pointer.
I'---..
Q
f@)
Mail Tool -/var/mail/egret
~~~(compose 'il) Mai I Fi Ie: @)
~~(Delete)(RepIY
'il) (MoVe'il)~~
Thu Feb 18 10:42 18/506 Your Move
I 1 thi ef@ci ci
Thu Feb 18 10:49 46/1282 Project Status
+ 2 patten@newbirth
Thu Feb 18 10:50 32/1110 Inbox status
U 3 bgahl@scuba
Thu Feb 18 10:51 17/532 SunU Training Registratio
U 4 ayers@outhouse
5 ayers@outhouse
Thu Feb 18 10:51 17/511
vi command summary
Thu Feb 18 11:00 90/2531 Project Schedule
+ 7 mari ac@celtic
8 hamilton@artemis Thu Feb 18 11:13 22/611
meeting reminder
9 abelson@sharonolds Thu Feb 18 11:34 32/1232 Your position paper
Thu Feb 18 13:58 21/647 Summer Collaboration
N 10 aquablu@cowman
L
c:::J
~
c:::J
Figure 4-30 Dragging a Copy of a Message Header
You can schedule appointments in Calendar Manager by using the
Appointment Editor Attachment. See the Chapter 5, "Calendar Manager" for
more information.
Dragging Attachments to Other Applications
You can drag individual attachments onto the following destinations:
• File Manager
• Print Tool (See "Printing Mail Messages Using Print Tool" on page 165.)
• Any application that accepts drag and drop data of the attachment's file
type. For example, you can drag audio attachments onto AudioTool, Icon
Editor attachments onto Icon Editor, ASCII attachments onto Text Editor,
and so forth.
• A Calendar Manager appointment attachment to Calendar Manager.
To drag and drop attachments onto other applications, follow these steps:
196
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1. Click SELECT on the attachment to be copied.
Click ADJUST on any additional attachments that you want to drag at the
same time.
2. Press SELECT on one of the highlighted attachments, drag the pointer to
the destination, and release SELECT.
Dropping Files onto the Mail Tool
The Mail Tool Compose and View windows accept dropped files from the File
Manager and Text Editor in the text panes. The Compose and View windows
accept dropped files of any type in the Attachments pane. See the section
"Sending Mail Attachments" on page 178 for more information.
The Header window pane accepts dropped mail files. When you drop a mail
file onto the Header pane, it is loaded into the Mail Tool and becomes the
current mail file.
Customizing Mail Tool
You can customize the properties of Mail Tool from the Mail Tool Properties
window. Display this window by choosing Properties from the Edit menu.
The Properties window has seven categories: Header Window, Message
Window, Compose Window, Mail Filing, Template, Alias and Expert
properties.
To display a particular category of properties, choose the category from the
Category menu located at the top of the Properties window. When you release
MENU, the contents of the Properties window shows the properties you can
set for that category. The new properties take effect immediately in most cases.
In a few cases (such as number of Headers to display in the Header Window
Properties), you must quit and restart Mail Tool before the changes take effect.
You must apply changed properties for each category by clicking SELECT on
the Apply button.
Multimedia Mail Tool
197
Header Window Properties
The Header Window properties are shown in Figure 4-31 and described in the
following sections. After you change any of the Header Window properties,
click SELECT on theApply button to apply them to the Mail Tool application.
Mail Tool: properties
Category: @) Header Window
Retrieve Every:
Signal With:
Display:
Delivery:
Custom Buttons:
Command:
Label:
Figure 4-31
133
_,_133
300.
Secon ds
Beep(s)
_0_
EEl
Flash(es)
~
133
Headers
~
133
Characters wide
Ii!
Automatically display headers
o
Show "To: recipient" when mail is from me
IDone I Next IDelete I Reply I
@)
Done
Done
Header Window Properties
Mail Arrival Properties
Use the Retrieve Every field to determine how often new mail is retrieved. The
default value is 300 seconds, or 5 minutes. You can retrieve mail at any time
between this interval by choosing Load In-Box or Save Changes from the File
Menu.
Use the Signal With fields to determine how Mail Tool signals new incoming
mail. The Beep setting causes Mail Tool to beep the specified number of times.
The Flash setting causes the icon to flash or the Header window to flash,
depending on whether the Mail Tool is closed to an icon or open.
198
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
45
Mail Tool Window Size
Use the Display Headers field to determine how many headers are displayed
in your primary Mail Tool Header window. You can increase the setting to
display more headers at one time, or decrease the setting to display fewer
headers to make the Header window smaller.
Use the Display Characters field to determine the width of all Mail Tool panels
and windows.
After you make changes to the Display fields, you need to quit the Mail Tool
application and restart it in order to see the change.
Delivery Properties
If you want Mail Tool to automatically display the headers for incoming mail
messages, check the Automatically Display Headers option. If you do not
choose this option, Mail Tool does not display headers for incoming messages
unless you specifically request them by choosing Load In-Box or Save Changes
from the File menu.
If the Show "To: recipient" '" option is checked, the Mail Tool header of a
message sent by you will display the recipient of the message instead of your
mail address.
Mail Tool Custom Buttons
The first four buttons on the second row of the Mail Tool Header window are
custom buttons. You can change the value of these buttons to be any of the
items from the File, View, Edit, or Compose menus. If there are items on these
menus that you use very frequently, you can change your custom buttons to
activate those commands.
• The Custom Buttons choices indicate the current value of the four custom
buttons. You select one of these choices to change the value of that custom
button.
• The Command setting shows you the command of the currently selected
button, that is, what the button does.
• The Command menu button provides a menu of all of the available
commands from the File, View, Edit, and Compose menus.
Multimedia Mail Tool
199
54
• The Label text field determines what the custom button says. Usually this is
the same as the command, but it doesn't have to be. Sometimes the
command is too long to fit in the button, so the Label might be an
abbreviation of the actual command.
To change the value of a custom button, follow the steps below.
1. Select the Custom Buttons choice that you want to change.
The first choice represents the first button on the second row of the Header
window, the second choice represents the second button, and so on.
2. Choose the desired command from the Command menu shown in
Figure 4-32.
The first column in the Command menu displays all the choices available
from the Mail Tool File menu, the second column displays the choices from
the View menu, the third displays the choices from the Edit menu, and the
last column displays the choices from the Compose menu.
Mail Tool: Properties
Category: @) Header Window
Custom Buttons:
Command:
label:
IDo", I "''' I D,'''' I ''''Y ~
@) Next
I Messages (me n u)
I Load
Print
Save
"
Done
Mail Files
Cut
New
A b brev iate d Header
Copy
Reply (menu)
Full Header
Delete
Reply To Sender
Previous
Undelete (menu)
Reply To All
Next
Undelete Last Message
Reply To Sender, Include
Sort By (menu)
Undelete From List
Reply To All, Include
Sort By Time & Date
Properties
Sort By Se n der
Sort By Subject
Sort By Size
Sort By Status
Sort By Message Number
Find
Figure 4-32 Header Window Properties Command menu
200
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Forward
Vacation (menu)
3. If you want to select a new label to go with the selected command, type a
new label.
Try to keep the label as small as possible in order to keep the custom button
to a reasonable size.
4. Click SELECT on Apply to change the custom button in the primary Mail
Tool Header window.
The custom button on the Mail Tool Header window is changed to the new
label and command. Figure 4-33 shows the Header window with the second
custom button changed to Print.
@)
Mail Tool
~(VTBW3)~(compose
~/.record
~ Log all messages
Defaults:
~ Request confirmations
~ Show attachment list
CJ
Custom Fields:
~
~
~
( Change)
CJ
Header Fie Id: ...
Defau It Val ue:
[Apply)) ~
Figure 4-35 Compose Window Properties
Multimedia Mail Tool
203
Included Text Marker
Use the Included Text Marker field to specify the characters that precede each
line of an included text message. The default value is "> ". This puts the
right-arrow character at the start of the included message when you choose
Indented from the compose window Include menu. Tabs are not accepted as an
indent character (but spaces are). Figure 4-36 shows the Compose window with
an included message indented with ">".
Note - The right angle bracket is at the start of the included message when you
select Reply to Sender, Include or Reply to All, or Include from the compose
menu in the Header window.
@)
Mail Tool: Compose Message
( Include \7) ( Deliver \7) ( Header \7) ~
~
To: abe Ison@sharonolds
Subject: Re: Your position paper
Cc:
> From abel son@.sharonol ds Thu Feb 18 11: 34 PST 1993
> Date: Thu. 18 Feb 93 11: 35: 09 PST
> From: abel son@.sharonol ds (Kathy Abelson)
> To: eg ret@.ri ve r
> Subj ect: You r positi on pape r
> Content-Type: text
> Content- Length: 703
=
~
>
> Dear Mar; a.
>
> I wholeheartedly approve your position paper that has been so hotly cont
> estedl ate 1y by othe r membe rs of the 0 rgan; zati on. As we di scussed ; n ou
Attachments
~~
I
=
I~
Figure 4-36 An Indented Included Message
Logged Messages File for Outgoing Mail
If you want to log outgoing mail messages in a file, type the name of the
desired log file in the Logged Messages File text field of the Compose Window
Properties Category. If a log file name is specified, a Log check box appears on
204
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
the Compose window, as shown in Figure 4-36 above. When the Log option is
checked on your Compose window, the message is logged in the log file when
it is sent.
Use the Log all messages setting on the Compose Window Properties Category
to determine whether the Log checkbox on the Compose window is checked by
default.
Viewing the File of Logged Messages
To view the messages you have logged, do the following:
1. In the Mail Tool base window, type the name of the file in which you have
logged your messages in the text field.
Using the example above, for instance, you would type - / . record.
2. Click SELECT on the Load button.
The messages you have logged will appear in your Mail Tool Base window
(in place of the current mail messages), and each has the message header.
Request Confirmations
If the Request Confirmations setting is checked, a Notice is displayed in the
following cases:
• When you have text or attachments in the Compose window, and you select
Clear on the Compose window control panel, a message is displayed asking
if you really want to clear the Compose window.
• When you have text or attachments in the Compose window, and you quit
the Compose window, a confirmation message is displayed asking if you
really want to quit.
• When you have made changes to a message in the View window, and you
then display a new message, unpin the View window, or receive new
incoming mail, a message is displayed asking if you want to save the
changes.
Multimedia Mail Tool
205
Caution - If the Request Confirmations setting is not checked, any editing
changes in the View window are automatically incorporated without
notification. If you remove or change the From header of a message. The
message that lost the From header will appear to be lost. You can find it
appended to the previous message.
Show Attachment List
By default, a Compose window includes a pane at the bottom of the text area
where you can add attachments to your message. If you never or rarely use
attachments, you can turn off the Attachments pane for new Compose
windows. Use the Show Attachment List setting of the Compose Window
Properties Category to determine if the Attachments pane is shown by default.
If you turn off the default Show Attachments List setting, you can display the
Attachments pane on an as-needed basis by choosing Show Attachments from
the Include menu of the Compose window.
Compose Window Custom Header Fields
The header of your Compose window always has To, Subject, and Cc fields. In
addition, Bcc is available via the Header menu. You can add custom headers to
the Header menu by adding them to the Custom Fields scrolling list on the
Compose Window Properties category.
Some useful headers that you might want to use are the following:
• Precedence: junk - If the mail system cannot send a message with this
header, the message will not be "bounced" back to you. This is handy if you
are sending out a message to a large alias, and you do not wish to receive
notices whenever the message cannot be delivered to an individual.
• Reply-To: email address - When you reply to a message with this header, the
reply is sent to the email address in the Reply-To: header field (instead of
being sent to the sender of the message).
• Return-Receipt-To: email address - When you send a message with this
header, you will receive a "Return Receipt" from the mail system when the
message is successfully delivered.
To create a custom header field, follow these steps:
206
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1. Type the label for the field in the Header Field line of the Properties
window.
Do not type a colon following the label. The colon is automatically provided
by Mail Tool.
2. If you want the field to be filled in with a default value, type this value in
the Default Value field.
3. Choose either Before or After from the Add menu to add the new header
field to the scrolling list.
4. To apply the change to Mail Tool, click SELECT on the Compose Windcw
Properties Apply button.
5. To include the new header field in a mail message, choose the item from
the Compose window Header menu, as shown in the menu at the left.
Figure 4-37 shows an example of a custom header field added to the
Compose window.
@)
Mail Tool: Compose Message
(Include
1;])
(Deliver
1;])
(Header
1;]) ~ ~ ~
Log
To:
Subject:----------------------------------~
Cc: ~--~~--------------------------_i
Reply-To: bren @jungle
Figure 4-37 Example of a Custom Field Added to the Compose Window
To delete a custom field, click SELECT on the item in the Custom Fields
scrolling list, click SELECT on the Delete button, and click SELECT on Apply.
To change a custom field, click SELECT on the item in the Custom Fields
scrolling list, type the new values in the Header Field and Default Value text
fields, click SELECT on the Change button, then click SELECT on Apply.
Automatically Storing Copies ofMessages You Send
You can set up Mail Tool so that you record a copy of each email message you
send. To do this, follow these steps:
Multimedia Mail Tool
207
1. From the Mail Tool base window, choose Edit .. Properties.
A Properties window appears.
2. In the Properties window, position the pointer on the abbreviated menu
button labeled Category, and choose the Compose Window category.
The properties choices for the Compose Window appear in the Properties
window.
3. In the text field labeled Logged Messages File, type the name of a file in
which you would iike to log copies of your mail messages.
For instance, to save the mail in an invisible file in your home directory, you
could name the file $HOMEI .mail. save.
Note - $HOME is a variable that points to your home directory. You can also use
the tilde (~) symbol to indicate your home directory.
4. Click SELECT on the Apply button at the bottom of the Properties
window.
Now, when you send a message, a copy is logged in the file you created;
additional messages you send are appended to the end of the file.
Mail Filing Properties
You use the Mail Filing Properties category to choose where your mail files are
stored, and to customize the Move, Copy, and Load menus of the Mail Tool
Header window. To see the Mail Filing Properties, shown in Figure 4-38,
choose Mail Filing from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup
window.
208
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mail Tool : Properties
Category: @)
Mail Filing
Mail File Directory:
Display Up To:
ffiJungle/brenda/maildir,.,
~ ~ Files in Menus
Move, Co py, Load Me nus:
~
~
(Change)
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~~
Permanent File: ______________
Figure 4-38 Mail Filing Properties
Mail File Directory
Use the Mail File Directory text field to specify the directory where mail files
are stored when you move or copy messages from your In-Box to mail files.
For example, you might want to name the directory mail, maildir, or
mail_files. Unless a full path name is specified, the directory is considered
a subdirectory of your home directory. If the directory name you specify does
not exist, a Notice is displayed asking if you want to create the directory when
you click SELECT on the Apply button. See "Organizing Your Mail Messages"
on page 186 for more information about using the Mail File directory.
Multimedia Mail Tool
209
Mail File Move, Copy, and Load Menus
The Move, Copy, and Load menus on the Mail Tool Header window display up
to 10 of the most recently accessed mail files. You can change the maximum
number of files on the menus with the Display Up To setting of the Mail Filing
Properties category. Click SELECT on Apply after changing the setting.
When you start up a new Mail Tool application, the Move, Copy, and Load
menus are empty. Mail files are added to these menus as you access the mail
files. You can specify mail files that you always want to appear at the top of
these menus by adding them to the Move, Copy, Load Menus scrolling list.
You can add any mail file to this list by typing the name of the mail file in the
Permanent File text field, and clicking SELECT on the Add button.
Use the Add menu to place the mail file either before or after the currently
selected mail file. Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected mail
file, and use the Change button to change the currently selected mail file to the
mail file typed in the Permanent File text field.
See "Organizing Your Mail Messages" on page 186 for more information about
using mail files.
When you have changed Mail Filing properties, click SELECT on the Apply
button.
Saving Mail to Another Location
You can save mail to any location in your file system by typing in an absolute
pathname. This means that the location you specify is an exact location within
your file system rather than one that is relative to the Folders directory.
Saving to an Absolute Path in Your Home Directory
To save mail to an absolute location in your home directory, you can precede
the path with the variable $HOME, or with the tilde (---) on your keyboard,
followed by your user account name (or that of another user's home directory
where you have write permission). The tilde indicates the top level of your
home directory.
210
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
To save a mail message in a location under your home directory, follow the
instructions in the section "Saving Mail to the New Default Location" on
page 212, but use the form in one of the examples below to type the path on
the Mail File text field:
i
-username/Subdirectory/filename
$HOME/username/Subdirectory/fi1 ename
When you choose Move or Copy, the chosen mail file in your mailbox is stored
in a file named filename in a subdirectory named Subdirectory under
your home directory.
Saving to an Absolute Path Relative to the Root Directory
To save a mail message to an absolute location starting from the top level
directory in your file system, you use a slash (I) to indicate the root directory,
and follow that with an absolute path.
To save a mail message in a location under your root directory, follow the
instructions in the section "Creating a New Mail File" on page 189, but use the
following form on the Mail File text field:
/Subdirectory/filename
where / is the root directory, and Subdirectory is an existing directory
under root.
For example, you could type:
/tmp/myfile
The / tmp directory is a directory that contains some system files.
Caution - You should only use the / tmp directory for temporary file storage.
When you reboot your system, these files will be purged.
When you choose Move or Copy, the chosen mail file in your mailbox is stored
in a file named myfile in the subdirectory named tmp under the root
directory.
Multimedia Mail Tool
211
Modifying the Default Location
Using Mail Tool's Properties window, you can permanently change the default
location for your saved mail. For instance, you could change the name of the
Folders directory, or you could save your mail to a location directly relative to
your home directory.
To change the default location for your saved mail, follow these steps:
1. From the Mail Tool base window's control area, choose Edit
The Mail Tool Properties window appears.
>- Properties.
2. Position the pointer on the Category menu button and choose Mail Filing.
The Mail Filing properties appear in the Properties window.
3. Double-click SELECT on the word Folders on the text field.
Folders is highlighted, for example.
4. Choose the default location for your saved mail:
a. To change the name of the Folders directory type in a new name, such
as Mail.
b. To save mail directly under your home directory, type:
$HOME
This will expand to the actual path name of your home directory.
5. Click SELECT on the Apply button.
A pop-up message asks if $HOME should be expanded to the path name of
your home directory.
6. Click SELECT on the Expand String button.
The Properties window is dismissed.
Saving Mail to the New Default Location
Saving mail messages to the new default that you have specified is just like
saving mail to the Folders directory. To save mail, do the following:
212
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1. Type the file name, or a subdirectory name and then the file name, on the
text field in the Mail Tool base window.
Note that if you have changed the default location to your home directory
there is no need to type a tilde to specify your home directory as the
destination.
2. Click SELECT on the message you want to save.
3. Choose Move or Copy.
The chosen mail message is saved to the directory name of your choice under
your home directory (e.g. the directory name you substituted for Folders, the
top level of your home directory, or a specified subdirectory).
Template Properties
Mail Tool allows you to create your own template files containing text that you
frequently use for composing messages. Each template is an individual file that
you create outside of Mail Tool, using any editor such as Text Editor or vi.
You can add a created template to Mail Tool using the Template Properties
category, shown in Figure 4-39. Display the Template properties by choosing
Template from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup window.
Multimedia Mail Tool
213
54
!:9
Mail Tool : Properties
Category: @) Template
Templates:
=
~
Calendar
~
~
(Change)
=
Name: ..
File:
«Apply)} ~
Figure 4-39 Template Properties
To add a template to the Include Templates submenu of the Compose window,
follow these steps:
1. Type the name of the template in the Name field on the Properties
window.
2. Type the path and name of the file containing the template in the File
field.
3. Choose Before or After from the Add menu.
4. Click SELECT on the Apply button.
The items in the scrolling list are added to the Templates submenu of the
Compose window Include menu.
A Calendar template is automatically provided when you have no other
templates installed. Otherwise, if you want to use the Calendar template you
must add it to the Template menu yourself following the steps above. Your
template can contain text to be included in a message, and it can also include
header information. If you include header information, make sure that there
214
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
are no lines in the template file before the header lines. Figure 4-40 shows an
example of a template that contains both header information and text. Make
sure there is at least one blank line between the header lines and the message
text.
r·············.. ···························.. ·· ..·····..··................................................................................................................······1
1
i
To: mai l-team
Subject: Staff meeting
! It's time for our staff meeting ... .
t ................................................................................................................................................................................~
Figure 4-40 Contents of a Template File with Text and Header Information
To use a template, choose the item from the Templates submenu of the
Compose window Include menu. The text from the template file is then
displayed in the Compose text pane. If your template contains headers, the
headers in the Compose window are automatically filled out.
To delete a template name, click SELECT on the name in the scrolling list of the
Template Properties window, click SELECT on the Delete button, then click
SELECT on the Apply button.
To change a template, click SELECT on the item in the Template Properties
window scrolling list, type the new values in the Name and File text fields,
click SELECT on the Change button, then click SELECT on Apply.
Alias Properties
You can create your own distribution lists containing groups of user names.
Then, instead of typing a distribution list of many names, you can type the
single name that you specify as the name of the alias in the To text field.
There are two kinds of distribution lists, or aliases, you can create:
• Private aliases that only you can use.
• Aliases in your / etc / al iases file that anyone can use. See "Creating and
Using Public Aliases in / etc/ aliases" on page 217 for information about this
kind of alias.
You use the Alias Properties category, shown in Figure 4-41, to create your own
private distribution list aliases. Display the Alias properties by choosing Alias
from the Category menu at the top of the Properties window.
Multimedia Mail Tool
215
54
~
Mail Tool : Properties
Category:
@)
Aliases:
Alias
I
d ocgroup
=
elizabeth@Eng. brenda@jungle. pa3
=
~
~
~
( Change)
=
Alias:
docgroup
Addresses: &lizabeth@Eng, brenda@jungle, paws@thecomma, jtaylor [i)
[Apply)}
C§)
Figure 4-41 Alias Properties
To add a private distribution list alias, follow these steps:
1. Type the name of the alias in the Alias text field.
In Figure 4-41, the alias name is docgroup.
2. In the Addresses field, type the email address of each person in the
distribution list.
Separate each name by either a comma, a space, or both.
3. Click SELECT on the Add button.
The item is added to the scrolling list in alphabetical order.
4. Click SELECT on the Apply button.
The items in the scrolling list are added to your private aliases.
To use the alias, simply type the name of the alias (for example, docgroup) in
the To, Cc, or Bcc line of the Compose Messages window. The names you typed
in the field are expanded and included as part of the outgoing message. Use
the Delete button to delete the currently selected alias, and use the Change
button to change the currently selected alias to the text typed in the Alias Field
text field.
216
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Creating and Using Public Aliases in jete/aliases
To create an alias that anyone can use, you must have root access to your
system. Edit your jete/aliases file using any text editor. Under the Local
Aliases category, on a separate line, type al iasname: username username.
Separate each item with a comma and end the group with a Return. You can
include a space after each comma, if desired.
I
Figure 4-42 shows an example of an alias group in jete/aliases.
textedit - (aliases), dir: letc
~(View \l)~~""$_ _ _ __
friends:albert@monkey,gene@bigbird,fred@skyhig~
Figure4-42 Example of an Alias Group in jete/aliases
To use the alias, type the name of the alias in the To, Cc, or Bcc line of the
Compose Messages window. The names you typed in the field are not
expanded as part of the outgoing message. The alias group itself is displayed
as the user name when the message is received. To use an alias on someone
else's system, type the alias name, @, and their machine name in the To, Cc, or
Bcc line of the Compose Messages window. For example, someone else could
send mail to the "friends" alias in the example by typing friends@eastle,
because the "friends" alias is on the machine "castle".
Expert Properties
You use the Expert Properties category to set some advanced mail defaults that
are provided for mai Ix ( 1) compatibility. To see the expert default settings,
shown in Figure 4-43, choose Expert from the Category menu at the top of the
Properties popup window.
Multimedia Mail Tool
217
~~
Category:
Defaults:
Mail Tool: Properties
@) Expert
D
Include me when I "Reply To All" (metoo)
D
Ignore host name in address (all net)
D
Use network aware mail fi Ie locki ng
[Apply» ~
Figure 4-43 Expert Properties
The expert settings determine what happens when you choose Reply to All or
Reply to All, Include from the Compose menu.
These settings only apply when your email address appears in the To or Cc list
of the message you are replying to.
The following sections describe what happens when these settings are checked
or not checked. Only the names listed in parentheses are used below when
referring to the options. That is, the options are called "metoo", "allnet", and
use network aware mail filelocking.Thesearethenamesusedinthe.mailrc
file, as described in the mailx (1) manual page.
218
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
When Metoo is Checked
When the meta a option is checked, and your email address appears in the To
or Cc field when you do a Reply to All, you will receive the reply. Your mail
address is recognized in all forms that include your login address, such as
yourname@machine and yourname@host. Where machine is the name of your
machine and host is the name of any host that is not your machine.
For example, suppose you Reply to All to a message with the following header:
From:salmon@sea Fri Aug 23 10:36:21 1991
To: yourname@machine, yourname@host, tuna@ocean
Your reply will include the following To line:
To: yourname@machine,
yourname@host,
tuna@ocean,
salmon@sea
When Metoo is Not Checked
If the metoo option is not checked, the message header of your reply depends
on the allnet option. The allnet option determines whether your mail address is
recognized in all forms that include your login address, or only in the form
yourname@machine.
Note - The allnet option only has an effect when the metoo option is not
checked.
When Allnet is Checked and MetOD is Not Checked
If the allnet option is checked and the metoo option is not checked, and you do
a Reply to All, your address is not included in any form in the To or Cc fields
of your reply.
For example, suppose you receive a message with this header:
From: salmon@sea Fri Aug 23 10:36:21 1991
To: yourname@machine, yourname@host, tuna@ocean
The To field of your reply would look like this:
To: tuna@ocean, salmon@sea
Multimedia Mail Tool
219
When Neither Allnet Nor Metoo is Checked
When neither the allnet nor the metoo options are checked, your email address
is only included in the To and Cc fields of a Reply to All in the form
yourname@host.
For example, suppose you receive a message with this header:
From: salmon@sea Fri Aug 23 10:36:21 1991
To: yourname@machine, yourname@host, tuna@ocean
The To field of your reply would look like this:
To:
yourname@host,
tuna@ocean,
salmon@sea
When Use Network Aware Mail File Locking is Checked
Mail Tool tries to prevent two different instances of Mail Tool from opening the
same mail file at the same time. By default, a technique that successfully
detects this access when both Mail Tools and the file are all on the same
machine.
As an option you can use a network aware locking protocol that uses
ToolTalk® to coordinate the Mail Tools. This ensures consistency if running
MailTool from more than one machine, or if mail files are accessed over the
network.
Mail Tool can only change this option when first opening a mail file. If you
change this option when a mail file is open you are given three choices:
• You can save the current mail file and reopen it, making the new locking
technique take effect immediately.
• You can continue editing the current mail file. The new locking technique
will take effect the next time you open a mail file.
• You can abort the apply and return to editing the property sheet.
220
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Calendar Manager
5=
Calendar Manager is an appointment and resource scheduling tool. Calendar
Manager can help you schedule and keep track of your daily appointments.
Upon request, Calendar Manager can send you reminders in advance of your
appointments.
Your system must be set with the accurate date and time for you to receive
these advance notices when you need them. Additionally, you must keep
Calendar Manager running on your system-open or in icon form-for this
message system to work properly. With Calendar Manager, you can:
• Display appointments and To Do items for a day, week, month, or year at a
glance
• Schedule a single or repeating event
• Provide reminders of events
• Access, browse, and edit the calendar appointments of other users who have
given you permission to do so
• Browse calendars of many users at one time in order to find meeting times
available to everyone
• Schedule appointments for several users at one time
• Send mail to other users notifying them of new appointments
• Print high-quality calendar output for reference
221
=5
• To open Calendar Manager, choose Workspace
Manager.
Calendar Manager opens to icon form.
~
Programs
~
Calendar
Calendar Manager Icons
Calendar Manager provides different ways to view your calendar. You can
view your schedule a day, week, month, or year at a time. You can also view a
daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly list of appointments or To Do items. This
section describes all the ways you can view the calendar.
Icons
When Calendar Manager is displayed as an icon, it shows the current date, as
shown in Figure 5-1.
[::::::::::(:::1
Figure 5-1
Calendar Manager Icon
Calendar Manager Base Window
Views by Day, Week, Month, and Year
To view the full calendar, double-click SELECT on the calendar icon. Calendar
Manager opens up into a full-sized window containing the current month.
Figure 5-2 shows the Calendar Manager window. Note that one appointment is
displayed for each line, and the text for the appointments is clipped to fit the
size of the date box.
222
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
@)
Calendar Manager: egret@river
( View \7)( Edit \7)( Browse \7)( Print \7)
CEE)( Today )(g)
January 1993
Sun
3
10
17
24
Mon
4
Tue
5
10:00a 1:1
1 O:OOa staff
11
12
10:00a 1:1
1 O:OOa staff
3:00p Mar
18
19
10:00a 1:1
1 O:Ooa Staff
6:00p Rob's
25
26
10:00a 1:1
1 O:OOa Staff
Wed
6
1 :Oop Engi
13
1:00p Liz's
20
1 :Oop Engi
27
Thu
7
Fri
Sat
1
2
8
9
15
16
1 O:OOa prod
12:00p Mari
14
1 O:OOa prod
1:00p Writ
21
s:OOp Mar
22
23
1 O:OOa Prod Writer's Se
28
29
30
1 O:OOa prod
1 :OOp Writ
31
1.
Figure 5-2
Default Calendar Manager Window
The default Calendar Manager display is the current month at a glance, which
shows appointment scheduling for a one-month period. (You can, however,
change the default from the Properties window.)
The current day is automatically selected when you open the Calendar
Manager window. The selected day has a double border. On color
workstations, the inside border is the color of your Windows, as determined by
the Workspace Properties Color category. In Figure 5-2, August 6th is the
selected day. You can select any other day by pointing to the day and clicking
SELECT.
Calendar Manager Controls and Menus
There are four menu buttons at the top of the Calendar Manager window:
View, Edit, Browse, and Print and three Navigation Controls. The related menu
functions are listed here.
Calendar Manager
223
55
View Menu
The View menu allows you to alternate between day, week, month, and year
views; change time zones; locate an appointment; and go directly to a selected
date.
• Day displays a view of the currently selected day, list of scheduled
appointments for the day, and a daily To Do list.
• Week displays a mini view of the current week, list of scheduled weekly
appointments, and weekly To Do list items.
• Month displays a full month view with the current date highlighted, a list of
scheduled monthly appointments, and a monthly To Do list.
• Year displays a view of the current year, a list of appointments scheduled
throughout the year, and a yearly To Do list.
• Time Zone lets you change your time zone to another time zone, and allows
you to view another user's calendar in their native time zone.
• Find lets you search for an appointment. See the section "Finding a
Calendar Appointment" on page 241.
• Go To allows you to search through your entire calendar for a specific date.
For complete information refer to "Finding a Calendar Appointment" on
page 241.
The View menu allows you to change the view. For information on displaying
more detail as well as displaying past, present, and future time, see "Resizing
Your Calendar" on page 225 and "Navigation Controls" on page 225.
For information on using appointment and To Do lists, see "Displaying an
Appointment or To Do List" on page 231.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu items have the following functions:
• Appointment allows you to schedule appointments and To Do items. The
Appointment Editor pop-up window is displayed.
• Properties lets you customize various features of the Calendar Manager,
including settings for the appointment and calendar display, date format,
printing, and security access.
224
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Browse Menu
The Browse menu allows you to view Multiple calendars: browse a single
Calendar; set up the Browse list and the Browse menu pulldown which allows
quick access to a calendar. For more information refer to "Multiple Calendars
Base Window" on page 243.
Print Menu
The print menu allows you to print the currently selected view as well as Day,
Week, Month, Year views and corresponding Appointment and To Do lists.
Navigation Controls
(§(Today)~
Figure 5-3
The Calendar Navigation Controls
The right side of the control area has three buttons for changing to past,
present, or future views:
• Prev displays the previous day, week, month, or year.
• Today displays a view that contains the current date.
• Next displays tomorrow or the upcoming week, month, or year.
Resizing Your Calendar
For all views and lists, the Calendar Manager window has resize corners that
you can use to change its size to see greater detail. For information on resizing,
see "Resizing Windows" on page 26.
• To display more information on each line, use one of the resize corners to
stretch the window horizontally.
• To increase the number of lines for appointments, use one of the resize
corners to stretch the window vertically.
Calendar Manager
225
=5
Calendar Views
The following sections describe the views you can choose from the View menu:
Day, Week, Month, and Year.
Day View
The day-at-a-glance view is useful when you have many appointments
sched uled for a single day.
• To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays
appointments for one day, choose View> Day.
The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the currently
selected day. If the current view is the year view, the day displayed is the first
day of the currently selected month. Figure 5-4 shows an example of the day
view.
@)
Calendar Manager: egret@river
~~( Brows8'V)( Print 'V) ~~~
Thu, January 7 1993
Decembe r 1992
?a
sa.
sa
10a 10:00 -11 :00 Product Meeting
11a
12p 12:00 - 1 :00 Maria's Lunch
1p
2p
ap
4p
sp
sp
Figure 5-4
226
Day View
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
55
If the current view is the week view, an accelerated way to change to the day
display is to move the pointer into the date box at the top of the day you want
to view and click SELECT.
You can set the range of hours that are displayed for the day view from the
Properties window. See "Customizing Your Calendar Manager" on page 259
for more information.
You can also display a daily list of Appointments or To Do items. Displaying
these lists next to the day view is particularly useful because Appointments
and To Do items without times associated with them do not appear on the
regular day view. See the section" Appointment List and To Do List Views" on
page 229 for more information.
Week View
• To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays
appointments for one week, choose View> Week.
The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the week
containing the current date, as shown in Figure 5-5. The chart in the lower left
corner of the window shows you the blocks of time allocated for appointments
during the week. The darkly shaded area indicates overlapping appointments.
You can also display a weekly list of Appointments or To Do items. See the
section "Appointment List and To Do List Views" on page 229.
You can also display to the Day View by selecting the date header in the Week
View.
Calendar Manager
227
=5
r'12l
.,
Calendar Manager: egret@river
~~(
Browse 'Il)( Pri nt
'Il)
~(Today)~
Week Starting Mon, January 41993
Tue 5
Mon 4
Wed 6
Thu 7
Fri 8
10:00ilm-11:00 10:00ilm-11 :O~ 1 :oopm - 2:00p 10:00ilm-11 :00
1:1 w/Steve
staff Meeting
Engineering ,0,11- product Meeting
Tech Talk
on-Line Help ov Design Review B
1 0:30ilm-11 :31] 1 :oopm -2:00p 10:30ilm -1 :OOp
12:00pm-1 :00
Maria's Lunch
"1
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
M
C!::J
J
''"''''''
4
5
6
"1
Figure 5-5
W
..
T
F
S
S
Sat 9
Sun10
~
I
I!II!ImIlIIIIl!
Week View
Month View
• To change the View in the Calendar Manager window so that is displays
appointments for a month, choose View ~ Month.
Alternatively, from the Month view, place the pointer over the number for an
individual day and click SELECT to change the view to the week containing
that day. Make sure to click SELECT directly on the number of the day within
Month view. Clicking SELECT anywhere else on the day just selects that day.
When you click SELECT directly on the number of a day, the entire week
containing that day is highlighted when the SELECT button is down, and the
view changes to the Week view when the SELECT button is released.
You can also display a monthly list of Appointments or To Do items. See
" Appointment List and To Do List Views" on page 229 for more information.
228
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Year View
• To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays
the calendar for the current year, choose View ~ Year.
The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the current
year. Figure 5-6 shows the Calendar Manager window with a year display.
~
Calendar Manager: egret@river
~~~~ (§( Today )Q:§
1993
january
February
5 M T W T F 5
3 4
1011
17 18
24 25
31
5 6 7
121314
19 20 21
26 27 28
1
8
15
22
29
April
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
27
7
14
21
28
1
8
15
22
29
2
9
16
23
30
3
10
17
24
4
11
18
25
5
12
19
26
3
10
17
24
31
4
11
18
25
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
27
5 M T W T F 5
September
5 M T W T F 5
1 2 3 1 2 3
5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10
121314151617 15 16 17
19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24
26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 31
Figure 5-6
2
9
16
23
30
june
5 M T W T F 5
August
5 M T W T F 5
October
5 M T WT F 5
6
1
13 7 8
20 14 15
27 21 22
28 29
1
3
1 2 3 4 5
10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
17 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13141516171819
24 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 30
30 31
july
4
11
18
25
2
9
16
23
May
5 M T WT F 5
4
11
18
25
March
5 M T W T F 5
1
2
9 7 8
16 14 15
23 21 22
30 28
4
11
18
25
November
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
27
5 M T WT F 5
7
14 5 6
21 12 13
28 19 20
26 27
7
14
21
28
1
8
15
22
29
2
9
16
23
30
3
10
17
24
4
11
18
25
December
Year View
You can also display a monthly list of Appointments or To Do items. See
Appointment List and To Do List Views" on page 229.
1/
Appointment List and To Do List Views
In addition to displaying your schedule for a day, week, month, or year, you
can also display separate windows of lists of all the Appointments and To Do
items for a particular day, week, month, or year. (The appointments and To Do
items also appear on your base window schedule.) Figure 5-7 shows a day
view displayed along with the Appointment and To Do lists for that day.
Calendar Manager
229
=5
Calendar Manager: egret@river
Fri, February 12 1993
9:00 -10:00 Staff Meeting
19
A Ppt List: Fri, Fe bruary 12 1993
LJ
11:00-12:00 Eng
~
1.
9:00am-10:00am Staff Meeting
2.
11 :OOam-12:00pm Engineering Team Meeting ...
11a
19
To Do List: Fri, Fe bruary 12 1993
1.
2.
3.
D
D
D
Start user guide outline
Review Engineering Spec
Com p lete 1st draft of - Proposal
6p
Figure 5-7
Day View with an Appointment List and To Do List
An Appointment List displays all the appointments for a particular time
period, while a To Do list displays all the To Do items for a particular time
period. To help you keep track of tasks that need to be done, the To Do list
includes check boxes where you can check off an item when you have
completed it. To check off a To Do item, click SELECT on the check box of the
completed list item. To erase a check mark, click SELECT on the check box
containing the check mark.
An appointment, such as a meeting, typically has a time associated with it, but
it doesn't have to. A To Do item, such as "Create status report," typically does
not have a time associated with it, but you can give it a time if you want to. It's
entirely up to you which items on your calendar are Appointments and which
are To Do items. See "Edit Menu" on page 231 for information about creating
and changing calendar items.
230
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Displaying an Appointment or To Do List
To display an Appointment List or To Do list, follow these steps:
1. Select or view the day, week, month, or year that you want to display a list
for.
2. Choose Appt List or To Do List from any of the View submenus.
A pop-up window with the selected list appears next to the Calendar
Manager base window.
Edit Menu
You schedule Appointments and To Do items from the Appointment Editor
pop-up window. You can display the Appointment Editor window by selecting
a day and choosing Appointment from the Edit menu.
Alternatively, you can double-click SELECT on an hour (for Day view) or a day
(for Week or Month view) to display the Appointment Editor.
The Appointment Editor window automatically displays the selected day and
lists scheduled appointments in the scrolling list, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Calendar Manager
231
=5
CM
Displays selected Date
Appointment Editor: egret@river
-----I----nuate: 2/12/93
Appointment
~
I
Drag and Drop
Target
To Do ~
Month I Day I Year
Set appointment time here
Type information about
the appointment here
start:@)10:00 I....-AM---''''--PM---'
L.--- - :=::::::==~
--Stop: @) ~ I...._A_M-'-_P_M-l
---
Appointments
c:::J
r------Choose between
110:00 Staff Meeting
1 I~
11:00 Engineering Team Mee ~
3:00 Writer's Team Meeting
i
~ hat: Staff Meeti ng.,
~
________________
Appointment and
To Do
Existing appts.
~C:::J
~ca~l~e~nd~a~rS~~I~n~se~rt~A~c~ce~s~;"~::;-I---Access setting
Alarm:~
Alarm controls
~
(Advance settings)
-
~
legret@river
@) .. : :1~:
~
~
@)
~
..
: : ~~.
@)
..
: : ~.:
@)
Hr~~
~
________________
Repeat: @)
~
I
~c:::J
One Time-----------t-----For
hlY: @) .......
Privacy: @) Show
repeating Appts .
Time and Text __-t-_____Privacy
settings
~) ~ ( Change ) ~
Author: egret
Editing Buttons
Figure 5-8
/
/
Appointment Editor Pop-up Window
Appointment Editor Options
The Appointment Editor window contains the following controls:
• A Date field that automatically displays the selected date. You can type in
another date to schedule additional appointments. You can change the
format of the Date field with the Calendar Manager Properties window. See
"Date Format Properties" on page 269 for more information.
• A Start and Stop set of controls that you use to set the time of the
appointment. You can either use the time menu or type in a number in the
text fields.
232
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
The time menu is available through the Start and Stop abbreviated menu
buttons. The choice of times on this menu is determined by the Day Bounds
settings from the Properties window. See "Customizing Your Calendar
Manager" on page 259 for more information.
When you set a start time, the stop time is automatically set to one hour
later. If the appointment is longer than an hour, you can set a new stop time
by choosing a time from the time menu or by typing a time in the text field.
The last choices on the time menu are No Time and All Day. Use No Time if
you don't want a time associated with an appointment. When you choose
All Day, the appointment is set for 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. This is useful for
appointments that refer to the entire day, such as "Vacation Day."
• A What field in which you type information about the appointment or To
Do item. The first line of this field is displayed in the Day, Week, and Month
views, so the first line should describe the appointment. You can also
include details about the appointment, such as the appointment place, a
brief meeting agenda, or a reminder to bring something to the appointment.
• A scrolling list that displays existing appointments for the selected date.
• An Appt/To Do setting, that lets you choose whether the item is to be
considered an Appointment or a To Do item. See "Displaying an
Appointment or To Do List" on page 231 for more information.
• Calendars and Insert access tells you what permissions you have for the
selected calendar. See "Customizing Your Calendar Manager" on page 259.
• A setting called Privacy Setting, which lets you create a private
appointment. If you select the options: Show Time Only or Show Time and
Text (only the time of the appointment and what fields are displayed) or
Show Nothing (nothing from the appointment is displayed). If you select
Show Nothing the appointment, including the appointment time, is
completely hidden from everyone else. You can change the default in the
Properties menu. Refer to "Customizing Your Calendar Manager" on
page 259.
Calendar Manager
233
=5
Caution - If you create a Show Nothing appointment by using the Privacy
setting, nobody else will be aware that you have an appointment scheduled in
that time slot when they browse your calendar. There is a possibility that
someone else will schedule another appointment for you in that time slot
because they cannot see that time slot filled when using Multiple Calendars.
(See "Multiple Calendars Base Window" on page 243 for information.)
• Alarm controls determine how you are reminded of an appointment. You
can use as many of the alarm controls as you like for each appointment.
Each alarm setting allows you set an advance alarm in intervals of minutes,
hours, or days, by using the abbreviated menu buttons and typing a number
in the text field.
The Beep and Flash settings cause the Calendar Manager icon to beep and
flash if it is closed. The Calendar Manager window itself will beep and flash
if it is open. If you choose PopUp, at the time specified for PopUp the
appointment Reminder window is displayed, showing the appointment
information. Choosing the Mail setting automatically mails a reminder to
the email addresses you type into the Mail To text field.
• Repeat controls specify the following: if the appointment is individual,
Daily, Weekly, Every Two-Weeks, Monthly By Date (this is the date of the
appointment such as the first or the fifteenth of the month), Monthly By
Weekday (this is the weekday of the appointment such as every third
Tuesday of the month), Yearly, Monday thru Friday, Mon., Wed., Fri.,
Tuesday-Thursday, or repeat the appointment for a set amount of days,
weeks or months (Repeat Every... ). When an appointment repeats, use the
For: field to set the number of times the appointment is repeated during the
day, week or month. You can also set a limit on the amount of day(s),
week(s), or month(s) it is repeated.
• You can drag and drop appointments from Mail Tool onto the Appointment
Editor.
You can change the default settings for the Appointment Editor window from
the Calendar Manager Properties window. See "Customizing Your Calendar
Manager" on page 259 for more information about properties.
234
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Use the set of buttons at the bottom of the default Appointment Editor window
to create and edit appointments. For information about using the Insert, Delete,
Change, and Reset buttons, see the sections "Scheduling Appointments and To
Do Items" on page 235, "Deleting an Appointment" on page 238,"and "Editing
an Appointment" on page 239.
Scheduling Appointments and To Do Items
To schedule an appointment on your calendar, do the following:
1. Double-click SELECT on the day you would like to schedule an
appointment.
This opens an Appointment Editor window, shown in Figure 5-9.
CM Appointment Editor: egret@river
Appointment
Date: 2/12/93
Month
1
To Do
I Day I Year
1....-AM---'~PM----'
Start:@J 10:00
Stop: @J ~ 1 AM
PM
What: Staff Meeti ng
Appointments
110:00 Staff Meeting
11 :00 Engineering Team Mee
3:00 Writer's Team Meeting
~~
..
I
~----------------~=
Calendars
Alarm:~ 5
~
~
~
@J Mins
5
@J Mins
5
@J Mins
~
@J Hrs
Mail To: egret@river
Insert Access
I·,,,t.,, '"
~
I
~----------------~=
Repeat: @J Weekly
For:@J_52_ _ weeks
Privacy: @J Show Time and Text
~) ~ ( Change ) ~
Author: egret
Figure 5-9
Calendar Manager Appointment Window
2. If the commitment is a task rather than an appointment click SELECT on
the To Do box.
The Appt (appointment) box is selected by default.
You may enter a To Do item with or without an associated time.
Calendar Manager
235
=5
3. To set the time, move the pointer onto the Start abbreviated menu button
and press MENU to display a menu from which you can choose times.
The hours displayed on this menu are determined by the setting of day
boundaries from the Properties window.
Each hour item has a submenu with 00, 15,30, and 45 minute items.
Highlight the time you want and release MENU to enter the time in the text
field. When you choose a time from the menu, the correct a.m. or p.m.
setting is automatically chosen for you. If you choose the menu item None,
no time is associated with the appointment. If you choose All Day, the
appointment is set from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m.
Alternatively, you type a time in the Start text field. If necessary, click
SELECT on the PM setting.
The time in the Stop text field is automatically set to one hour later than the
time in the Start text field.
4. To change the duration for the appointment from the default of one hour,
move the pointer onto the Stop menu button and press MENU to display
the time menu as described in Step 2.
Alternatively, you can type a time in the Stop text field. If necessary, click
SELECT on the PM setting.
5. If the appointment is one that is repeated on a regular basis, choose the
appropriate Repeat setting from the menu displayed through the Repeat
abbreviated menu button.
You can use the Repeat menu to choose a variety of intervals. These are
outlined in the" Appointment Editor Options" on page 232. When Repeat is set
to One Time, the For text field is inactive and is dimmed to show you that it
will not accept input. When you choose a repeating appointment, the For text
field and abbreviated menu button are active and the units are displayed in the
text field.
You use the For menu and text field to choose the time frame you want the
appointment to repeat. For example, you may know that a weekly meeting will
be scheduled for the next ten weeks.
The default number in the For text field usually sets the appointment to repeat
for a year. For example, the default number is 365 when the repeat interval is
Daily, or 52 when the repeat interval is Weekly. The default number for the
236
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Yearly setting is two years. If you want the appointment to repeat indefinitely,
you can choose forever from the For menu or type the word "forever" in the
text field.
6. Choose a Privacy setting, if applicable.
If this is a private appointment that you do not want anyone to view, you
can use the abbreviated menu button from the Privacy field to select Show
Time Only or Show Nothing about the appointment. For complete
information refer to "Appointment Editor Options" on page 232.
7. Choose the way you want to be reminded of this appointment.
You can set none, some, or all of the Alarm options. Beep and Flash cause
the Calendar Manager icon to beep and flash if it is closed. The Calendar
Manager window itself will beep and flash if it is open. If you choose
PopUp, at the time specified for PopUp the appointment Reminder window
is displayed showing the appointment information. Figure 5-10 shows an
example of the Reminder pop-up window.
Calendar: Reminder
o~
Sta ff meeting
5/7/91
From
3:45 to
4:45
n
Bldg 5, Bradbury Conf Rm
Take Design Committee
material for status
presenta tion
Figure 5-10 Example of the Reminder Pop-up Window
Choosing the Mail setting automatically mails a reminder to the email
addresses you type into the To text field.
S. Change the Alarm times, if necessary by typing a new number into the
appropriate text field.
Decimals and fractions are not accepted formats.
You can also change the default Alarm times from the Properties window.
See "Customizing Your Calendar Manager" on page 259 for information.
Calendar Manager
237
9. When you have entered all the information for the appointment, click
SELECT on the Insert button.
The appointment is added to the scrolling list in the Appointment Editor
window and to the Calendar Manager window.
If you want to enter appointments for another day, double-click SELECT on the
new day in the Calendar Manager window or type a new date in the Date
field.
Deleting an Appointment
To delete an existing Appointment or To Do item, follow these steps:
1. Select a date and display the Appointment Editor pop-up window.
2. Select the appointment in the scrolling list that you want to delete.
The appointment is highlighted, as shown in Figure 5-11, the appointment
information is displayed in the Appointment Editor fields, and the author of
the appointment is displayed in the footer.
CM Appointment Editor: egret@river
Appointment
Date: 2/12/93
Month
Start:
@)
1
To Do
I Day I Year
Appointments
~ 1
....-A-M.....----P-M---,
stop: @) ~ 1 AM
110:00 Staff Meeting
11 :00 Eng i neeri ng Team M ee
PM
What: Staff Meeting.,
Calendars
~
~
~
I
3:00 Writer's Team Meeting
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Alarm:~
~~...
@)
.. : :
@) .. : :
.
~~
1
~~
Insert Access
eg ret@ri ve r
.
~~
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
@) .. : :
@)
~
I
~~
~.:
Re peat: @) 0 ne Ti me
Hr~~
for;
@) ................................
Privacy: @) Show Time and Text
(~) ~ ( Change ) ~
A uthor: egret
Figure 5-11 Appointment Editor Window with a Highlighted Appointment
238
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
3. Click SELECT on the Delete button at the bottom of the Appointment
Editor window.
The appointment is deleted from both the scrolling list and the Calendar
Manager window.
If you try to delete a repeating appointment, a Notice is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-12, allowing you to delete the appointment for the selected date only,
for (forward) future dates, all dates, or to cancel the operation.
I Calendars
£) Mi ns
[) Mi ns
!nsert A
Thi s appoi ntment is part of a repeati ng se ri es.
Do you want to del ete ... ?
Figure 5-12 Notice for Repeating Events
Editing an Appointment
To edit an existing Appointment or To Do item, follow these steps:
1. Select a date and display the Appointment Editor window.
2. Select the appointment in the scrolling list that you want to edit.
3. Change the information in the Appointment Editor window to reflect the
new information for the appointment.
4. Click SELECT on the Change button at the bottom of the Appointment
Editor window.
If you change a repeating appointment, a Notice is displayed allowing you to
change the appointment for the selected appointment only, for all future
appointments in the repeating series, for all scheduled appointments, or to
cancel the operation.
Calendar Manager
239
=5
Appointment Reminders
You may want to receive a reminder before a scheduled appointment. You can
make your system beep, flash, or send you an electronic mail message, or you
can set your calendar to display a pop-up window containing the appointment
details. You can also choose some combination of those events.
To receive a reminder, do the following:
1. Begin a new appointment, or edit an existing appointment in the
Appointment Editor.
2. Click SELECT on the button or buttons for the Alarm reminders you
would like to receive before that appointment.
The buttons you choose are highlighted. Figure 5-13 shows the appointment
reminders when they have been selected.
CM Appointment Editor: egret@river
Appointment
Date: 2/12/93
Month
I
To Do
I Day I Year
Start:@) 10:00
....
, -AM---''-PM--'
Stop: @) ~ 'AM
PM
What: Staff Meeting
Appointments
110:00 Staff Meeting
11 :00 Eng i neering Team Mee
3:00 Writer's Team Meeti ng
~~.
I
~----------------~=
Calendars
Alarm:~
All alarms are
turned on
_5_
@) Mins
_5_
@) M ins
, poPUP' _5_
@) M ins
~
@) Hrs
Default advance
warning times appear
Insert Access
[,',,"''' '"
~
I
~----------------'=
Repeat: @) Weekly
For:@)_52_ _ weeks
Privacy: @) Show Time and Text
Author: egret
Figure 5-13 All Appointment Reminders Selected
3. If needed, change the default advance warning times, as follows:
240
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
a. Click SELECT to the right of the time and press the Backspace key on
your keyboard to delete the default time.
b. Type in the desired time.
4. Add mail addresses to the Mail To text field, as needed.
By default, your own mail address appears on the text field. If you add more
addresses, the names will scroll out of sight. You can scroll them back into
view using the arrow keys on your keyboard.
5. Save the appointment, in one of the following ways.
a. If you are changing an existing appointment, press the Change button
to enter your modifications.
b. If you are creating a new appointment with reminders, press Insert to
enter your new appointment.
Finding a Calendar Appointment
If you want to find an appointment, but you can't remember exactly when it
was scheduled, you can use the Calendar Manager Find feature.
• To display the Find window, choose View
~
Find.
From the Find window type the appointment you want to search for in the text
field. The Find window contains a text field where you type in the
appointment that you want to search for. The text that you type can be any part
of the appointment description, and can be in upper or lower case. For
example, Figure 5-14 shows a Find window with the word "Dentist" typed in
the Match Appt text field. This will find the next appointment with the word
"dentist" (upper or lower case) in the What field, including "Dentist
appointment", "See the dentist", "DENTIST", "Pay dentist bill", and so forth.
eM: Find
Match Appt:
Dentisk
Months: _12_
EEl
( Fi nd Fa rward) (Fi nd Backward)
Figure 5-14 Calendar Manager Find Window
Calendar Manager
241
=5
Use the Months text field and increment/ decrement buttons to specify the
number of months that you want to search for an appointment, starting with
the currently displayed month. Clicking SELECT on Find Forward searches
forward for the number of months specified, and clicking SELECT on Find
Backward searches backward for that number of months.
Finding a Specific Calendar Date
Sometimes you may need to look at or go to" a specific date very quickly.
Instead of using the navigator buttons to do this, you can use the Go To
function.
/I
1. Choose View ~GoTo.
You see the Go To Date window.
2. Type the exact date on the Date: line, and SELECT the GoTo button.
The date must be in the format specified in the Date Format Properties.
Depending on the view selected, the day is shown or highlighted.
Dragging an Appointment Message from Mail Tool
When you receive a mail message that has an appointment icon attached to it,
or a mail reminder generated by another Calendar Manager application, you
can drag and drop the message (or appointment icon) onto Calendar Manager
to schedule your appointment by following these steps:
1. Open the Mail Tool window that displays your mail message headers.
2. Point to the header and click SELECT to select it.
3. Press the SELECT mouse button and drag the pointer a short distance.
The pointer changes to the duplicate pointer, and a small envelope
representing the mail message is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-15.
64 winsor
67 winsor
Figure 5-15 Dragging a Mail Message
242
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Fri
Fri
5=
4. Drag the envelope onto the Calendar Manager.
You can drop it onto the Calendar Manager icon or anywhere on the open
Calendar Manager window.
5. Release SELECT.
When the appointment has been successfully scheduled, a message is
displayed in the footer of the Calendar Manager window. Figure 5-16 shows an
example of such a message.
Figure 5-16 Example of a Message for a Scheduled Appointment
For complete information on the appointment icon, refer to Chapter 4,
"Multimedia Mail Tool." If the appointment is in a format that Calendar
Manager cannot understand, a Notice is displayed informing you that the
appointment cannot be scheduled.
Multiple Calendars Base Window
Calendar Manager allows you to access the calendars of other users if you are
included on their Access List. This convenient feature allows you and your
coworkers to coordinate scheduling of appointments. You can use the Show
Multiple Calendars menu item to overlay the calendars of many users at one
time in order to find the best time to schedule a meeting. Once you have found
a convenient meeting time, you can schedule the meeting in everyone's
calendar, and/or send each user mail about the new appointment.
You can also see all the public appointments on another user's calendar, and
insert, delete, or change existing appointments, as long as you have the
appropriate access list permissions. See" Access List and Permissions
Properties" on page 264 for information about creating the access list for your
personal calendar.
Calendar Manager
243
55
Using Multiple Calendars
The Show Multiple Calendars menu item allows you to view many people's
calendars overlaid onto the same display at one time. It lets you see how many
and which users are busy during any particular hour, and quickly tells you if
there is a time slot in which all the users are free. If there is not a time slot
when all the users are free, you can determine a time when the majority or a
particular subset of users are available. This makes it much easier to figure out
the best time for a meeting.
Once you have figured out the best time for a meeting, you can schedule the
appointment for all the users who have given you Insert access to their
calendars. In addition, you can send mail to the meeting participants in a
format that the users can drag from the Mail Tool and drop onto their Calendar
Manager in order to schedule the appointment themselves.
Multiple Calendars Window
You access Multiple Calendars by choosing Show Multiple Calendars from the
Browse menu. This displays the Multiple Calendars window. Figure 5-17
displays the Multiple Calendars icon and the default window with one
calendar displayed. Using Show Multiple Calendars to display multiple
calendars is described later in this section.
244
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
CM: Multiple Calendars
( Schedul e ... )
rn
=
(Mail ... )
(Go To: 17)1/19/91,
Cal endars Busy At Ti me Selected
legret@river
mari ac@ri ve r
sebring@curry
(Setup Menu ... )
Jan uary 1 993
M
18
T
19
W
20
T
21
F
22
S
23
S
24
8~==~--~----+----+----r----r--~
9r---_r--~----+----+----r_--_r--_;
1 Calendar Displayed
Figure 5-17 Multiple Calendars Icon and Window
The Multiple Calendars window has the following controls:
• Schedule, Mail, and Go To buttons that you use to schedule appointments
for many users at once, mail information about new appointments, and
change the display of Multiple Calendars to show a different week or
month.
• Scrolling list of calendars available to be browsed
• Setup menu button from which you type the user names (login and system
name) of the calendars that you want to add to the browser scrolling list
Calendar Manager
245
=5
• Multiple Calendars display, on which any number of calendars can be
overlaid to show a composite schedule
In Figure 5-17 there is one calendar displayed. A footer message tells you how
many calendars are being displayed at any time.
The gray areas of the calendar display indicate the times that the selected user
has scheduled an appointment. If several calendars are being displayed, the
gray blocks have varying shades. Darker blocks indicate more existing
appointments during that time slot. (There are only up to three shades of gray,
so a time slot with four existing appointments will not appear any darker than
a time slot with three appointments.) The white areas indicate times in which
none of the selected users are busy.
Figure 5-18 shows Multiple Calendars with five calendars displayed. The
calendars displayed are those of the five users selected in the scrolling list. The
unshaded white area on Monday at 11:00 indicates that this is a time when the
five selected users are all available.
246
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
CM: Multiple Calendars
( Schedul e ... )
rn
(Mail ... )
(Go To:
'if )1/18/93
= Cal endars Busy At Ti me Selected
egret@river
(Sl hami 1ton@artemi s
mariac@celtic
~patten@phosphor
...
seb ri ng@cur ry
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~~
(setup Menu ... )
Jan uary 1993
M
18
T
19
W
20
T
21
F
22
S
23
S
24
5 Calendars Displayed
Figure 5-18 Multiple Calendars with Five Calendars Displayed
One hour in the Multiple Calendars display has a double border. On color
workstations, the inside border is the color of your Windows, as determined by
the Workspace Properties Color category. This indicates the selected time.
Every user who has an appointment scheduled during the selected time has a
clock symbol to the left of their name in the scrolling list. You can use these
clock symbols to see who is busy during a desired time slot. For example, if
Calendar Manager
247
=5
you have to schedule a meeting and there is no time that everyone is available,
you can use the check mark display to find out who is scheduled during a time
slot for which only one person is busy.
The selected time in Figure 5-18 is Tuesday at 11:00. You can see by the check
marks in the scrolling list that users hamilton@artemis and
patten@phosphor both have appointments scheduled on Tuesday at 11:00
a.m.
Adding a Calendar to Multiple Calendars and the Browse Menu
The scrolling list of the Multiple Calendars displays all the calendars that are
available to be browsed. The Browse menu (from the Browse button of the
Calendar Manager control panel) is also made up of this same list of calendars.
In order to browse a calendar, you must first add it to the Multiple Calendars
scrolling list.
New calendars are displayed on the Browse menu in the order you enter them
in the Multiple Calendars scrolling list. This list can be sorted alphabetically
after adding the name to the list.
To add calendars to the browse list and menu follow these steps:
1. If the Multiple Calendars window is not currently displayed, choose
Browse >- Setup Menu.
If the Multiple Calendars window is displayed, click SELECT on the Setup
Menu ... button. You see the Setup Menu window.
2. In the User Name text field, type the calendar address of the user whose
calendar you want to add.
The calendar address is the user's login name, followed by @, followed by
the user's host machine name. For example, the calendar address
mariac@celtic is in the Calendar field of Figure 5-19.
If you are using the NIS or DNS system, which uses the concept of domains,
make sure you are either browsing a calendar in your domain, or that you
specify the remote domain.
For example, if you are trying to browse the calendar for user egret in your
own domain, the correct calendar address is egret@host. However, if
egret is in another domain, the calendar address needs to be in the format
egret@host.domain.
248
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
eM: Setup Menu
(Add Name
1
~
( Change
V
~
C"-R_e_m_ov_e_....:l--._____
User Name: mariac@celti5$
Browse Menu Items
c:::::J
eg ret@ri ve r
"hamilton@artemis
patten@phosphor
sebring@curry
Changes the selected
user calendar
..........
( So rt Li
L - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---lc:::::J
Adds user calendar
if name is typed
Removes the selected
--name from browse
list
50-- __Sorts list of calendars
alphabetically
( Appl Y )( Reset)
Figure 5-19 Adding a Calendar to Multiple Calendars and the Browse Menu
3. Select Add Name to add the name.
If you enter an invalid host name or an invalid user name, while attempting
to browse, you see an "Unable to access Calendar" error message.
Note - To improve system and network performance, Calendar Manager does
not confirm that the user name is valid or that you have browse permission for
that calendar when you enter the user name in the scrolling list. Calendar
Manager does this checking when you select the calendar in the Multiple
Calendars scrolling list, or when you choose the calendar from the Browse
menu.
4. Click Apply.
Calendar Manager
249
=5
Deleting/Removing a Calendar from Multiple Calendars and the
Browse Menu
To delete a calendar from your Multiple Calendars scrolling list and from your
Browse menu, follow these steps:
1. Choose Setup Menu from the Browse Menu pulldown or Setup Menu
from the Multiple Calendars window.
2. Select each calendar that you want to delete in the Browse Menu Items
scrolling list.
3. Choose Remove from the Setup menu to delete all the selected names in
the scrolling list.
Note - You cannot delete your calendar name or "initial calendar view".
4. Click Apply.
Selecting a Week to Browse
When you display the Multiple Calendars window, the week shown in the
Multi-Browser calendar display is determined as follows:
• If the current view is the Day view or Month view, the week containing the
currently selected day is displayed.
• If the current view is the Week view, the current week is displayed.
• If the current view is the Year view, the first week of the currently selected
month is displayed.
To change the week displayed in Multiple Calendars, use the Go To menu and
text field.
To display a specific week, type a date during the desired week in the Go To
text field, and click SELECT on the GoTo button. Type the date using the
format set on the Date Format Properties window. The default format is
MMjDDjYY. See the section "Date Format Properties" on page 269 for more
information.
You can also use the items of the Go To menu to change the Multiple Calendars
week display, as follows:
250
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
• Choose Prev Week or Next Week to display the previous or next week.
• Choose This Week to display the week of the day currently selected in the
Calendar Manager base window.
• Choose Prev Month or Next Month to display a week one month before or
after the current Multiple Calendars week.
Finding a Time Slot for a New Appointment for Many Users
If you want to schedule a meeting or other appointment that involves many
users, follow these steps:
1. Choose Multiple Calendars from the Browse menu, if the Multiple
Calendars window is not currently displayed.
2. Add the calendars to the Multiple Calendars scrolling list for all the
meeting participants.
See" Adding a Calendar to Multiple Calendars and the Browse Menu" on
page 248 for information.
3. Select all the calendars of the meeting participants by clicking SELECT on
each user's calendar in the scrolling list.
Each selected calendar is overlaid in the Multiple Calendars display area.
4. If the week you want is not currently displayed, use the Go To menu or
text field to display the desired week.
See "Selecting a Week to Browse" on page 250 for more information.
5. When all calendars are selected and overlaid, find an unshaded block of
time for the meeting.
This represents a time when everyone is available. For example, in
Figure 5-20 all selected calendars have an open time slot on Tuesday from
1:00 to 2:00 and from 3:00 to 5:00.
Calendar Manager
251
55
CM: Multiple Calendars
(Schedule ... )
rn
=
~
(Go To: 17)1/18/93
Cal endars Busy At Ti me Selected
egret@river
~hamilton@artemis
mariac@celtic
Sl patten@phosphor
•
sebri ng@curry
~
____________________________
~CJ
(setup Menu ... )
Jan uary 1993
M
18
T
19
W
20
T
21
F
22
S
23
S
24
5 Cal endars Di sp 1ayed
Figure 5-20 Multiple Calendars window with Five Users Selected
6. If there is not a large enough available time slot for all the selected
calendars, select a time slot that is lightly shaded and look at the clock(s)
in the scrolling list to see who has a time conflict.
Keep trying this until you find a time slot with the least number of conflicts,
or where only the people who don't have to be at the meeting have conflicts.
Alternatively, you can deselect the calendar of a user who does not have to
be at the meeting by clicking SELECT on that calendar in the scrolling list.
The Multiple Calendars display is then updated, and you may now be able
to find an available time slot.
252
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Scheduling Appointments for a Group of Users
Once you have found a good time for a new appointment for many users, you
can use the Appointment Editor to schedule the appointment in the calendars
of all users who have given you Insert access.
For complete information on scheduling an appointment with the CM
Appointment Editor see Appointment Editor Options" on page 232.
II
Note - If a question mark "?" appears in the Calendars Insert Access field it
means that the user you are trying to access is running an older version of
Calendar Manager. You mayor may not have access to this user's calendar,
and you can determine this by attempting to access the calendar.
The Appointments scrolling list on the CM Appointment Editor displays
appointments for all of the calendars selected in the Calendars scrolling list, at
the time selected in the Multiple Calendars window. When you select an
appointment on the Appointments scrolling list, the appointment information
is displayed in the CM Appointment Editor fields, and the Calendars scrolling
list is updated to display only the owner of the appointment.
To schedule an appointment for a group of users at one time, follow these
steps:
1. Use Show Multiple Calendars to find a time slot for the new appointment.
If you are unsure how to do this, see the section "Finding a Time Slot for a
New Appointment for Many Users" on page 251 for complete information.
2. Move the pointer to the block of time that you want to schedule the
appointment for and click SELECT.
The selected time must be for one hour in the Multiple Calendars display,
but you can change the time or duration when you schedule the
appointmen t.
3. Click SELECT on Multiple Calendars Schedule.
Alternatively, you can just double-click SELECT on the block of time in
step 2. The CM Appointment Editor is shown in Figure 5-21 on page 254.
Calendar Manager
253
55
1:9
CM Appointment Editor: egret@.river
Appointment
Date: 2/12/93
Month I Day I Year
Start: ~ 10:00
Stop: ~ ~
I AM
I AM
PM
PM
What: Staff Meeting
I
ToDo
~
Appointments
c:::J
10:00 Staff Meeting
11:00 Engineering Team Mee
3:00 Writer's Team Meeting
~
I
c:::J
Calendars
Insert Access
c:::J
I
I
I Flash I 5
~
Mins
~
Mins
I!O£U?J
~
M ins
~
Hrs
Alarm: Bee p
5
5
I Mail I ~
Mail To: egret@river
«
Insert )
legret@river
mariac@celtic
hamilton@artemis
V
N
N
~
!
c:::J
Repeat: ~ Weekly
For: ~ 52
Privacy:
( Delete) ( Change )
@)
weeks
Show Time and Text
~
A uthor: egret
Figure 5-21 eM Appointment Editor
The CM Appointment Editor is displayed. The selected date and time are
filled in and the selected calendars are listed on the Calendars scrolling list.
If you have Insert Access to any of these calendars, that calendar is
automatically selected. If any of the selected calendars has an appointment
at the selected time, that appointment is added to the Appointments
scrolling list.
If you change the time or selected calendars in the Multiple Calendars
window, that information is automatically updated in the CM Appointment
Editor window.
Sending Mail about Appointments from Multiple Calendars
You can use the Multiple Calendars Mail facility to send mail about an
appointment to other users. The mail is sent with an appointment icon that, for
easy scheduling, can be dragged and dropped on the Calendar Manager main
254
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
window. See "Vsing Calendar Manager with Mail Tool" on page 276 for
information about using drag and drop with Mail Tool to schedule Calendar
Manager appointments.
This feature is particularly useful when you have used the Multiple Calendars
to schedule a new appointment. After scheduling the appointment, you may
want to send mail about the appointment to all the participants. In addition,
there may be users who have not given you Insert access to their calendar, in
which case you can send them mail and let them schedule the appointment
themselves.
To use the Multiple Calendars mail feature:
• Click SELECT on the Mail button at the top of the Multiple Calendars
window.
This displays a Mail Tool Compose window that contains an appointment icon
in the attachment area. Refer to "V sing Calendar Manager with Mail Tool" on
page 276 for more information. See "Mail Tool Compose Window" on page 159
in Chapter 4, "Multimedia Mail Tool" for information about creating and
sending mail.
If you have calendars selected in the Multiple Calendars scrolling list, the Mail
Tool Compose window displayed by the Mail button is automatically
addressed to those users. The subject field is "Meeting".
The Calendar Manager appointment icon in the Compose window attachments
area is automatically filled out with the appropriate date and time, as follows:
• If the Appointment Editor window is or has been displayed, the Date, Start,
End, and What fields are included with the appointment attachment with
the corresponding fields from the most recent session of the Appointment
Editor. For complete information on using the Appointment Editor, refer to
"Appointment Editor Options" on page 232.
• If the Mail Tool Compose window is displayed before the Appointment
Editor window is displayed, the Date, Start, and End fields are included in
the appointment attachment with the date and time of the currently selected
time in the Multiple Calendars display.
You can change any of the information that is automatically filled out, and add
more information. Figure 5-22 shows the Mail Tool Compose window
displayed when the Mail button is selected from the Multiple Calendars
window. Attaching the appointment saves your changes.
Calendar Manager
255
=5
CM: Multiple Calendars
~
(GO To: 17)1118/93
(Include 17) (Deliver 17) (Header 17) ~
(Attach 17)
To: egret@river hami 1ton@artemis mari ac@celtic patt
Subject: :. .;.;Me;. .=.e. :. .;ti. :. :.ng=----_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
m
Cc:
Can add another
ntment by
selecting Attach,
then Appt. ..
Attached is date and ti me of the revi ew meeti ng ..
~ ~
1 attachment (131 bytes)
Figure 5-22 Multiple Calendars Compose Message Window
Browsing a Single Remote Calendar
Once a calendar has been added to the Browse menu, you can display and/or
edit the appointments for that user (depending on the access permissions that
user has given you) by choosing the calendar from the Browse menu.
If Calendar Manager cannot find the user name or access the appointments for
that user, the error message Unable to access user@machine ... is
displayed in the footer of the Calendar Manager window. The appropriate user
and machine names are displayed in the error message.
256
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
If Calendar Manager can access the user's appointments, they are displayed in
the window, and the name of the user is shown in the header. If you do not
have browse access for that user you cannot see or edit their appointments, but
you can see blocks of scheduled time as shown in Figure 5-23.
Calendar Manager: bud@cad
Week Starting Mon, February 81993
Appointment
11 :Ooa.m-12:o 1111·'nn..m-·' ~'n
Appointment
12:30pm-3:00 1112:000m-11 :00
Appointment
3:0opm-4:00p
Appointment
4:00pm-s:00p
Appointment
II ~~I~~~;~~:~OP
112
II ~~I~~~;~::~OP
113
ent
CM: Show Calendar
.,
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
.---r--jj;!;;;;:;;;;~
User Name: ,.=:.b.: :.;ud::. ;@=-c.=,:a;.:,.d:.lI>_ _ _ _ _
0Cs how»
4
S
6
I----t---t--
.,
L.---L._...&...._
Figure 5-23
Browsing a Week View Calendar When You Don't Have Browse Access
To change back to your own calendar, choose your user name from the Browse
menu.
Browsing a Single Remote Calendar One-Time Only
Sometimes you may need to browse a single user's calendar just for a certain
appointment only. It does not make sense to add this user to your list of
frequently browsed calendars. To show a single calendar one-time only:
1. Choose Browse ~ Show Calendar.
You see the Show Calendar window.
Calendar Manager
257
=5
2. Type the user's name for the calendar to be displayed in the User Name:
text field, and select Show.
Depending on which view is displayed, you see the calendar of the user
name you entered. Figure 5-24 shows a calendar selected from the Show
Calendar window.
@)
Cale ndar Manager: mariac@.ce Itic
( View
Go To...
~
~
MST
Canada
I>
MST7MDT
Chile
I>
Mexico
..,.,.
Cuba
Mideast
EET
EST
NZ
Egypt
Poland
PRC
PST8PDT
Factory
ROC
GB-Eire
GMT+l
ROK
Singapore
GMT+l0
Turkey
GMT+ll
-----.r-
Libya
CST6CDT
Day
US
GMT+12
w-su
GMT+13
WET
GMT+2
africa
GMT+3
asia
australasic
GMT+4
Figure 5-25 A portion of the Time Zone Menu
Customizing Your Calendar Manager
You can customize the following parts of Calendar Manager from the
Properties window:
•
•
•
•
•
Editor Defaults, for the Appointment Editor pop-up window
Display Settings, to specify default display options
Access List and Permissions, to specify security access defaults
Printer Settings, to specify default print options
Date Formats, to specify the format for the date on the Appointment Editor
The Properties window has five separate displays (selected from the category
field) that you use to modify the five different sets of properties.
To display the Properties window:
Calendar Manager
259
• Choose Edit
~ Properties
or move the pointer into the control area or pane of the Calendar Manager
window and press the Properties key (L3) on the keyboard to display the
Properties window, shown in Figure 5-26.
eM Properties: egret@.river
Category:
go
Editor Defaults
Editor Defaults
Alar
Display Settings
Access List and Permissions
Printer Settings
Date Format
Mail To:
Privacy:
egret@river
@) Show Ti me and Text
( Appl Y ) ( Reset ) ( Defaults)
Figure 5-26 Properties Window
To display a particular category of properties:
• Choose the item from the Category menu at the top of the Properties
window.
When you release MENU, the contents of the Properties window show the
properties you can set for that category.
When you have changed properties, you must apply them by clicking SELECT
on the Apply button. This only applies the properties currently displayed. To
change properties of a different category, display the new category, change the
desired settings, and click SELECT on the Apply button again.
Alternatively, you can click SELECT on the Reset button to reset all the options
to be the same as they were since the last time you applied changes. Click
SELECT on the Defaults button to reset all the options to their default settings.
260
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Editor Defaults Properties
The Editor Defaults properties, shown in Figure 5-27, specify the defaults for
the Appointment Editor pop-up window. When you set the editor defaults
from the Properties window, they are automatically set each time you display
the Appointment Editor window. The Mail To text field determines who
receives reminder mail when you use the Mail Alarm.
CM Pro perties: egret@river
Category: @) Editor Defau Its
Alarm:
Mail To:
~
~
~
~
~
@)
Mins
5
@)
Mins
5
@)
Mins
2
@)
Hrs
egret@river
Privacy: @) Show Time and Text
(ii]jITY)
~
( Defaults
)
Figure 5-27 Editor Defaults Properties
To change the defaults:
1. Click SELECT on the settings you want to change.
2. Click SELECT in the text field and type a new number.
Use the abbreviated menu buttons to indicate minutes, hours, or days.
Figure 5-27 shows an example of the Alarms with Beep, Flash, and PopUp
set. You can change the default Privacy setting to Show Time Only or Show
Nothing.
When you click SELECT on the Apply button, the new defaults become
effective immediately. Changing the Alarm settings does not affect any
appointments that have already been scheduled using the old default choices.
Calendar Manager
261
=5
Display Settings Properties
The Display Settings controls, shown in Figure 5-28, specify the location of the
default user calendar; the boundary times for the day; 12 or 24-hour time
display; the default calendar view and the initial calendar to be viewed in the
Calendar Manager window. To display this set of controls, choose Display
Settings from the Category menu.
eM Properties: egret@river
Category: ~ Display Settings
~
User Calendar Location:
~rl:....:.'v.:::..:er_ _ _ _ __
Day Boundaries:
Begin: ....(]
~
End:
Hour Display:
Default View:
Initial Calendar View:
7:00 a.m.
12 Hour
I
7:00 p.m.
24 Hour
I
I'Year IMonth I Week IDay I
.:::...;eg~r.:::..:et:.::..@:....:ri...:...ve::..:.r_ _ __
Appl Y ) ( Reset ) ( Defaults)
Figure 5-28
Display Settings Properties
Changing the User Calendar Location
You can change user calendar location by specifying a different machine name.
Just type the machine name. The new user calendar location becomes the first
name (or default) in the Browse menu pulldown. Any properties applied are
added to the new calendar.
Changing Day Boundaries
You can specify the range of hours for your workday using the Day Boundaries
sliders shown in Figure 5-28. This determines the hours displayed by Calendar
Manager in these places:
• Calendar Manager Day view
262
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
• Week chart in the Calendar Manager Week view
• Multiple Calendars display
• Start and End time menus in the Appointment Editor window
The current value of the day boundaries is displayed to the right of each slider.
To change the setting, follow these steps:
1. Move the pointer to the slider drag box and press SELECT.
2. Drag the pointer to the left or to the right.
Note that the time changes as you drag the slider.
3. When the time you want is displayed, release SELECT.
Alternatively, you can move the pointer onto the slider bar to the left or
right of the drag box and click SELECT to change the time hour by hour.
You cannot set a day boundary that ends before it begins. When the values
overlap, the drag boxes are synchronized and move together so that the end
time is always at least one hour after the start time.
4. When you have set the day boundaries, click SELECT on the Apply
button to record them.
Your new boundaries are now in effect.
Changing the Hour Display
You can specify the way hours are displayed with the Hour Display setting on
the Properties window. The default setting is 12 Hour, which displays the
hours from 1:00 to 12:00, with an "a.m." or "p.m." extension. You can use the
24-Hour setting to display the hours in 24-hour time. An appointment that
goes from 11:30 am to 1:00 pm with the 12-Hour setting will go from 1130 to
1300 with the 24-Hour setting.
To change the hour display, click SELECT on the setting you want and then
click SELECT on the Apply button. The change takes effect immediately.
Changing the Default View
You can set the default view of the Calendar Manager window to Year, Month,
Week, or Day using the Default View settings on the Properties window. After
you have changed the default view, click SELECT on the Apply button. The
changes take effect immediately.
Calendar Manager
263
55
Changing the Initial Calendar View
You can specify the default calendar (initial calendar to be viewed) with the
Initial Calendar View text field, the first time Calendar Manager is started.
After you have changed the calendar view, click SELECT on the Apply button.
The changes take effect immediately.
Access List and Permissions Properties
Calendar Manager allows you to browse the appointments of others, as well as
allowing other users to browse your appointments. See "Multiple Calendars
Base Window" on page 243 for more information about browsing.
The Access List and Permissions properties let you specify who may browse,
insert, delete or change your appointments.
The default access list, shown in Figure 5-29, gives all users permission to
browse your calendar.
• To display the Access List controls, choose the Access List and
Permissions item from the Category menu.
264
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
CM Properties: egret@river
Category:
@) Access List an d Perm iss ions
User Name: ~sa~l~m~on~@~s~e~%~________
User Name
(Add Name)
Perm iss io ns
~ (Remove
world
~
)
( Sort List)
I
~----------------------~~
Permissions:
IBrowse I ~ IDelete I
« Apply
, ~ ( Defaults)
Figure 5-29 Access List and Permissions Properties
The scrolling list displays everyone who has access to your calendar. The entry
"world" means everyone who is using the DeskSet environment. The default is
that the world has Browse access permissions. If you delete the world entry,
only the users you specifically add will be able to access your appointments.
To the right of each name in the scrolling list are letters indicating the
permissions that user has. The available permissions are:
• "B" for Browse, meaning the user can read your appointments.
• "I" for Insert, meaning the user can add new appointments in your calendar.
• "D" for Delete, meaning the user can delete existing appointments from
your calendar.
If you give more permissions to the world than you give to an individual, that
individual will still have the world permissions. For example, if you give a
user named Jim permission to browse your calendar, but the world has
permission to browse and insert, Jim will inherit the world permissions and
will be able to insert appointments as well as browse your calendar.
Calendar Manager
265
=5
To give someone the ability to edit or change appointments, you must give
them both Insert and Delete permissions. That person then has full permissions
to insert new appointments, and delete or modify existing appointments they
own. After you have entered the list of users, you can sort the list
alphabetically using the sort list button.
Adding Users to the Access List
To add a user, follow these steps:
1. In the User Name text field, type the email address of the user you want to
add.
Names in the access list can either be in the form name@host or simply
name. Note that if you just specify the user name, you are giving access to
any user on your network with that name.
If you are using the NIS or DNS system, which uses the concept of domains,
make sure names on the access list do not use the format name@domain or
name@host. domain. Just use name@host.
2. Select the permissions you want to give the user.
3. To add the name, enter a name in the User Name: text field, choose Add
Name, as shown in Figure 5-30.
266
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
~
CM Properties: egret@river
Category:
@)
Access List an d Perm iss ions
(Add Name~
User Name: salmon@se~
Choose this to add the
user name
I--entered
User Name
Perm iss io ns
c::J
worl d
B
~
( Remove
1
( Sort List
)
I
Choose this to remove
the selected user name
Choose this to sort
alphabetically
........... 1--
c::J
Permissions:
t
IBrowse I ~ I Delete I
Choose permissions
Apply ~ ~ ( Defaults)
Figure 5-30 Adding a Name to the Access List
4. Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes.
Deleting Users from the Access List
To delete a user from the access list, select the user name in the scrolling list,
choose Remove from the Properties menu or the scrolling list pop-up menu,
and click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes.
Changing the Access List
To change the existing permissions for a user already on the Access List, follow
these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the user name in the scrolling list.
If you want to change several users at one time, click SELECT on each
additional user name you want to change.
2. Select the new permissions you want to give the user.
In Figure 5-30, Browse and Insert are selected to replace the existing
permission of Insert for salmon@sea.
Calendar Manager
267
=5
3. Click SELECT on Add Name from the Calendar menu or the scrolling list
pane menu.
Add Name is used to add a new user, and it's also used to change the access
permissions of an existing user.
4. Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes.
Printer Settings Properties
You can set printing options from the Printer Settings Properties window.
• To display this set of controls, choose the Printer Settings item from the
Calendar Manager Properties window Category menu.
Figure 5-31 shows the default settings for the Printer Settings window.
CM Properties: egret@river
@)
Printer Settings
Destination:
I Printer I File I
Category:
Pri nter: _oc;..;;..e=an.:.-_ _ _ __
options: _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Width: ~ Height: ~
position:
~
Inches from left
~
Inches from bottom
Units: _,_I3±:! Copies: _,_
Include:
f3:iJ
I "Show Time and Text" Appts I
I "Show Time Only" Appts
I "S how Noth i ng" Appts
Q]]!Y)
~
( Defaults)
Figure 5-31 Printer Settings Properties Window
You can specify the following options from the Printer Options window:
268
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
• Destination of the printed output (Printer or File)
• Printer name and printer options, or file destination and file name
If the Destination is Printer, as in Figure 5-31, a field called Options is
displayed. You can type in UNIX print options in this field to customize
your printer option defaults.
If the Destination is File, the Printer and Options fields are replaced by
Directory and File fields. Use these fields to type in the directory and file
name of the file that you want to print to.
• Width and height of the printed image
• Left and bottom margins (position)
• Number of units that print
The "unit" is the number of calendar views to print: day, week, month, or
year. When a day view is printed, the unit is Days, and so on. The selected
unit always begins the sequence. For example, if February 13th is selected,
and the number of units is three, then February 13th, 14th and 15th are
printed.
• Number of copies to print
• Whether or not to include appointments created for Privacy Type (Show
Time and Text, Show Time Only, Show Nothing) on the printed output
When you're done choosing your Printer Settings, click SELECT on the Apply
button to record the changes.
Date Format Properties
The Date Format properties, shown in Figure 5-32, determine how the date is
displayed in the Appointment Editor window, in the Go To text field of the
Multiple Calendars window, and in the Browser Editor window.
• To display this set of controls, choose the Date Format item from the
Calendar Manager Properties window Category menu.
Calendar Manager
269
=5
eM Pro perties: egret@river
...
Category: @) Date Format
Date Ordering:
Date Separator:
.....-----...,
MM
DD
DD
MM
VV
VV
VV
MM
DD
,.-----..------...---,
I B1 ank II I . I - I
(
App1 y )
(
Reset )
(
Defau1 ts )
Figure 5-32 Date Format Properties
The Date Ordering item determines the order in which the month, day, and
year appear in the various date fields. The Date Separator item determines
what character separates each element of the date.
To change the defaults, click SELECT on the settings you want. When you click
SELECT on Apply, the new date forrnat becmnes effective irnrnediatel y.
Figure 5-33 shows the Appointment Editor with the DD IMM IYY date
ordering and the / date separator.
~
~~
~,
"~,...
~'
'"
Alternate date
format.-----+---uate: 13/1/9;'
I
APPOi ntment
~
To_
Do_---I
.... _ _......L_ _
Day I Month I Year
~~ .... ~.
r.:;)
Q.
nn
..
, -.-••- - - -
Figure 5-33 Appointment Editor with an Alternate Date Format
270
,
,
0.'1 Appointment Editor: egret@river
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Appointments
I
5=
Printing Calendar Views
Calendar Manager provides high-quality printed output for day, week, month,
and year views, as well as daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly appointment and
To Do lists. You set the printer name and options from the Printer Settings
Property window described in "Printer Settings Properties" on page 268. You
use the Print menu to print specific views, appointment lists, and To Do lists.
Current View
This allows you to print the view you have selected.
Day View
• To print the Day view for the current day, choose Day from the Print
menu.
To print appointments for a day other than the current one, move the pointer
onto the day you want to print and click SELECT. Then choose Day from the
Print menu. The schedule for the day is printed in the format shown in
Figure 5-34.
Calendar Manager
271
=5
Figure 5-34 Printed Day View
You can also print a daily list of Appointments or To Do items. See "Printing
Appointment and To Do Lists" on page 276 for more information.
272
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Week View
• To print the Week view for the current week, choose Week from the Print
menu.
Appointments for the week are printed in the format shown in
Figure 5-35. Note that all the information about an appointment is printed, not
just the first line.
ll13/93lO:3'J
M
Week Starling Mon, Febmary 81993
Rm
T
w
T
11
s
s
101-----t----+------l----t---t-----t------I
11r---r--+---;--~--r---r---;
12~-~--+_-_1---~---~--~--~
Figure 5-35 Printed Week View
You can also print a weekly list of Appointments or To Do items. See "Printing
Appointment and To Do Lists" on page 276 for more information.
Calendar Manager
273
=5
Month View
• To print the Month view for the current month, choose Month from the
Print menu.
Appointments for the month are printed in the format shown in
Figure 5-36.
February 1993
lIU'!l3!1):71Rm
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
.....
....
••
...
13
..
2i
::~:
i::S: :~:~:
:id:..l.:.:a:U:.i:
:~:
:~:
:~:
:::::
:i.i:it-iir::::::
::
:"": :eo: :.-::.r:
~:!t::~
:~: ~: :(
::~::a: :~:.b:U
:::::...:
:S::A
u:a:
Ill:
:::U::O:S:IIl:U:iII~::t(
.:~~)III:~:II~:
~:
: ~:~
.::M:~:~:JI'~:
1'11:
..................
:;c::::::::::
~~::j!I ~:~
:~:'I':1'I1~::::::::
Figure 5-36 Printed Month View
You can also print a monthly list of Appointments or To Do items. See
"Printing Appointment and To Do Lists" on page 276 for more information.
274
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5
--
Year View
• To print the currently displayed year, choose Year from the Print menu.
You can print a standard view of the year, shown in Figure 5-37, or a schedule
view of the year, Yr view (Alt), as shown in Figure 5-38. These figures were
printed using a height and width of 2.5 inches on the Print Properties window.
'~'..;..~'~'~
.~.~~.~.~
.... ...,........... .
.... I. I.
,._ •. __
_____
... ..••••
__'.''1'... __
....
I. I. •..•'1'..
I.
I. ,._
I. ,._
.. __ .... _-•
••
..
I.
•
•
'I'
I ....
I.
••
-
I
......
I. II I • • a
...
I
,. loa
...
".
•
..... .
I . I I .a I •
or • •
I ....
. ~ ' ':' ',-:r ; .; . ~ . ~ '':' .:-:7 ; .; .:
':''':''!~;';':
-_ .... _-- -.. -_ .. _- .... _-. ' ':' . ;. .,;. . . .
...:. ..:. . . .
.:. .
.• ,.-.... ..--_
_--•. ----.__.... •._-----__ ., .... - _
I.....
. .. .
.•.. ...-_._---I. --_. -----_ ....._..._.._--_.
----... __
I
•
•
. . . . ..,. • • I .
II •
I •I_
. _
I. •
I•. _
I. _ _
'.''1'
~
..
I I
~.:r
•
•
..
~
I
••
•
'.''1'
f ••••• I.
•
I.
I
..........
•
I.
~ ~~
,
~
......
• • I.
I. I.
····a.w..-····
...
. . . ,.. .. 1'"" . . . .
''1'
II
•
II
.,.
•
•
...
••
. . . . . I.
II
.,..
~ :-r:.-::-~
or
• • • • I..
I ••• _..
~
•
••
•
I.
. . . . .I
.I. .
_
••
• _
I_
. _
I . •••• •
• _
I ••
I. _
I. _
1'1' _
I . _I .
I
•
......
_
••
I •• _..
•
••
..
II
'''1' ••
...... .
~
1oW
..
,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._ _
~
..
. . . . . I.
I. f ••••a
.r
_
.......
II
••••••••• _
.... _
Figure 5-37 Printed Standard Year View
Calendar Manager
275
=5
1993
Figure 5-38 Printed Schedule Year View
Printing Appointment and To Do Lists
In addition to printing the schedule for a day, week, month, or year, you can
print any Appointment or To Do list. To print an Appointment list or To Do
list, follow these steps:
1. Select the day that you want to print a list for, or a day in the week,
month, or year that you want to print a list for.
2. Choose the list that you want to print from any of the Print submenus.
Using Calendar Manager with Mail Tool
You can enter appointments into Calendar Manager from Mail Tool by
dragging and dropping a Calendar Manager appointment attachment, if it is
included in the attachment area of the mail message. You can create a mail
message with the appropriate format by using the Mail pop-up window in
Multiple Calendars. Or create a Calendar Manager appointment that can be
attached in the attachment area of a mail message by:
• Selecting Attach
276
~
Appt... from the Compose window in Mail Tool.
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Sending Appointment Mail from Calendar Manager
The easiest way to generate a message about an appointment is to use the Mail
feature of Multiple Calendars. This will automatically generate a compose
window with an appointment icon attached. See "Sending Mail about
Appointments from Multiple Calendars" on page 254 for information about
this feature.
Creating an Appointment Message from Mail Tool
Mail Tool provides a template that you can use to create mail messages in the
format that Calendar Manager can accept. See "Template Properties" on
page 213 in Chapter 4, "Multimedia Mail Tool for more information about Mail
Tool template. The section, "Mail Tool Template for Calendar Manager
Messages" on page 278 shows the Appointment window. If all the information
you need has not automatically been filled in, add it at this time. This works
just like the appointment editor. For information on the appointment editor,
see" Appointment Editor Options" on page 232. You can however, drag and
drop from the appointment panel (using the drag and drop target) to a
Calendar Manager canvas. You can drop another appointment icon onto the
drop target of the appointment panel and the fields are automatically filled in.
RESET returns you to the last appointment attached.
Calendar Manager
277
=5
....
1
.1): Compose Message
)
Voi ce...
l
19
Appointment
--I
Date: 12/19/9?Month I Day I
Year
Start: @"9:00
Stop:
@)~~
What: _ _ _ _ __
Repeat: @) One Time
ror; @) ............
Figure 5-39 Mail Tool Template for Calendar Manager Messages
Displaying the Calendar lv1anager lvlonthly Icon
If you want your Calendar Manager icon to display the entire current month
with the current date highlighted, as shown in Figure 5-40, you can start
Calendar Manager from a Command Tool or Shell Tool by typing em - i 2 &.
August 1991
S M T W T F S
4
5
6
7
1
2
8
9 10
3
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23~
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Figure 5-40 Alternate Calendar Manager Icon
278
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5=
Accessing Your Calendar from a Shell Tool or Command Tool
There are three Calendar Manager programs that you can run from a Shell Tool
or Command Tool in order to view, insert, or delete appointments. This may be
useful, for example, if you are logging into your machine from a remote
destination and are therefore unable to run the Calendar Manager
window-based application. These programs are called em_lookup,
ern_insert, and ern_delete.
Use ern_lookup to display your appointments for the current day. You can use
command line options to specify the calendar that you want to see, a different
date, or an alternate view (such as week or month). See the em_lookup man
page for more information.
Use ern_delete to delete your appointments. You are shown a list of your
appointments for the current day, and you are prompted for the number of the
appointments that you want to delete. You can also use command line options
to specify the calendar, date, and view. See the man page for ern_delete for
more information.
Use ern_insert to add new appointments to your calendar. You can use
command line arguments to specify the calendar, date, start and end times, and
a description of the new appointment. See the man page for ern_insert for
more information.
Calendar Manager
279
=5
280
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Command Tool, Shell Tool, and
Console vVindow
This chapter provides information about the Command Tool, Shell Tool, and
Console Window (or Console). These tools are essentially the same application,
but display different default pane pop-up menus. The Command Tool is an
enhanced Shell Tool.
Command Tool and Shell Tool are standard OpenWindows shells, or terminal
emulators, that interpret commands typed in UNIX. When you use one of these
applications it is as if you are working at a terminal, rather than in a complex
networked windowing environment. The advantage is that you can display
many other windows and continue running other applications at the same
time.
These tools are useful if you need to:
• Read reference manual pages
• Use a command line editor such as vi
• Invoke special processes and applications not available from the Workspace
menu
The Console is a special Command Tool designated for displaying error and
system messages sent by the SunOS operating system, the OpenWindows
environment, and some applications.
281
56
Command Tool
Command Tool provides a scrolling pane that acts as an editable command
interpreter and can also provide a standard text editing pane. It can be used for
a variety of tasks, including moving around in your file system, composing
and editing files, and communicating with the operating system.
• To open a Command Tool, choose Workspace> Programs> Command
Tool.
Figure 6-1 shows an open Command Tool window. The Command Tool icon
looks the same as the Shell Tool icon shown in Figure 6-4.
cmdtool - Ibin/csh
[26]castle{w;nsor}% +
I~
Figure 6-1
Command Tool Window
A Command Tool window has a header with a Window menu button, a
Window menu, resize corners, a scrollbar, and a text/ terminal emulator pane.
For more information on these elements, refer Chapter I, "Introduction to the
Solaris User Environment."
282
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Command Tool Term Pane Menu
In a Command Tool, the Term Pane pop-up menu has the Edit, Find, and
Extras items of the standard text editing pop-up menu (described in Chapter 3,
"Text Editor"), plus three additional items: the History, File Editor, and
Scrolling submenus. Move the pointer anywhere onto the Command Tool pane
and press MENU to display the Term Pane menu.
History Submenu
The History of a Command Tool is a log of all the characters displayed. You
can access this log by scrolling the Term Pane with the scrollbar or by saving
the log to a file. This may be useful, for example, if you have performed a
complicated sequence of operations that you want to save or send as part of a
mail message for troubleshooting or debugging. The History submenu
provides options to modify the history log.
The Mode setting determines whether the history log is Editable within the
Command Tool, or Read Only. If you set the mode to Read Only in order to
protect against accidental changes, you can still save the log to a file and edit
that file using the File Editor option described in the next section. If the mode
is editable, you can edit text anywhere in the Term Pane and use the editing
items on the Term Pane menu. See Chapter 3, "Text Editor" for information on
the editing functions.
• Choose Store log as new file to save the current history log to a file.
When you choose this option, the Text: Save As window is displayed. For
complete information on saving files refer to Chapter I, "Introduction to the
Solaris User Environment."
You can treat this new file as you would any other text file. You can edit it and
save it again or drag and drop it from the File Manager onto a Mail Tool
Compose or Text Editor window.
• Choose Clear log to clear the current history log.
This resets the Command Tool history log as if you just started the
Command Tool application. (This does not change the output of the UNIX
history command.)
Command Tool, Shell Tool, and Console Window
283
File Editor Submenu
The items on the File Editor submenu determine whether a Text Editor Pane is
displayed. When you enable the File Editor, the Command Tool is split into
two panes: a Command Tool pane and a Text Editor pane. The Text Editor pane
is described in Chapter 3, "Text Editor." Figure 6-2 shows a Command Tool
with the File Editor enabled.
@1
cmdtool -/bin/csh
~
%.
~~~~
=
~
•
..."
Figure 6-2
Command Tool with the File Editor
Scrolling Submenu
The choice from the Scrolling submenu of the Command Tool Term Pane menu
determines whether a scrollbar is displayed. When you disable scrolling, the
Command Tool acts like a Shell Tool.
Typing Commands in Command Tool
You can access all of the files and directories in your file system from the
Command Tool. Use of the Command Tool requires familiarity with the
operating system and with your file system.
284
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
In the sample session that follows, the cd command changes directories to
your home directory, the rnkdi r command creates a new directory there, and
the cp command copies that directory to a new directory with a different
name. You execute each command when you press Return at the end of the
command line.
example% cd (Press Return)
example% mkdir Directoryl (Press Return)
example% cp -r Directoryl Directory2 (Press Return)
Viewing Your Command History
The Command Tool is a scrolling window. The scrollbar at the side of the
window enables you to go back and view commands that are no longer visible
in the window. You can scroll back to see the commands typed during the
entire life of the window.
Editing the Command Line
In the Command Tool, the command line can be edited. You can move the
pointer to any location on the command that you have typed and click SELECT
to position the insert point there. You can then type in that location or erase the
previously typed characters and retype that portion of the command.
Figure 6-3 shows the insert point.
Command Tool, Shell Tool, and Console Window
285
--
Command Ii ne
Insert point
cmdtool -/bin/csh
~
examp 1e % cd /hame/j ayna/P raj ect7lDacs/
c::J
~
"'-
'"11
Figure 6-3
Insert Point in a Command Line
Editing Text with Command Tool
Command Tool can be used as a Text Editor window at any time. The
advantage to this is that you do not need to know a command line editor such
as vi. To enable the Command Tool text editing window, move the pointer
onto the window pane, press the MENU button, drag the pointer down to
highlight File Editor, and then to the right to highlight Enable. The Command
Tool pane splits in two; the top pane remains as Command Tool, while the
bottom pane becomes a Text Editor.
See the "Text Editor" section for an introduction to the commands in the
Command Tool File Editor.
• To return to the basic Command Tool, position the pointer in the top pane
and choose File Editor ~ Disable.
286
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Shell Tool
Like Command Tool, Shell Tool is a window that you use to communicate with
the operating system, or to move around in your file system and compose and
edit files by command line. You can use Shell Tool for shells or other programs
that employ a standard teletype (TTY) interface.
The basic differences between Command Tool and Shell Tool are:
• Command Tool is a scrolling window by default.
• Shell Tool cannot be converted into a File Editor.
• Their default pane menus.
• To open a Shell Tool window, choose Workspace
Tool.
~
Programs
~
Shell
Note - Open as many Shell Tools as you need, but remember that as you add
more applications to the Workspace, you may compromise system
performance.
Figure 6-4 shows the Shell Tool icon and Figure 6-5 shows an open Shell Tool
window.
Ib in/csh
Figure 6-4
Shell Tool Icon
Command Tool, Shell Tool, and Console Window
287
~
@j
%1
Figure 6-5
she lito 0 I -/b i nics h
Shell Tool Window
A Shell Tool window has a header with a Window menu button, a Window
menu, resize corners, and a terminal emulator pane. A Shell Tool window does
not have a scrollbar at start up, but you can enable scrolling if desired. The
insert point is shown by a block cursor. When the insert point is not in the Shell
Tool, the block cursor is displayed as an outline of the block cursor. Editing is
limited to the end of the current line. For example, you can only delete
characters on the current line. Once you press Return, the characters on the line
are interpreted as a command. If you are not familiar with these window'
elements, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Solaris User Environment."
Shell Tool Term Pane Menu
• To display the Shell Tool terminal emulator pane menu, move the pointer
anywhere into the Shell Tool pane and press MENU.
• Choose Enable Page Mode to display only one page or pane of text at a
time, just as the UNIX more command does.
The pointer changes to a stop sign when the window fills up, as shown in
Figure 6-6.
288
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
shelltool- Ibin/csh
total 1194
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
drwxrwxrwx
Figure 6-6
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
!
512
2560
15360
512
6656
1024
512
3584
1024
Feb
Feb
Feb
Jan
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
11
11
20
29
11
11
6
11
11
15
15
11
09
15
15
09
15
15
19
18
46
47
17
18
54
18
18
Binder
Calendar
Deskset
Examples
Filemgr
Gettingstarted
Installation
~ailtool
Printtool
Shell Tool Stop Sign Pointer
Instead of displaying continuing text in the window, the display stops so that
you can look at it as long as you like. The Enable Page Mode item on the Term
Pane pop-up menu changes to Continue when there is more information that
you can display.
• When you want to see the next pane, press any key or choose Continue
from the Term Pane menu.
When there is no more data to display, the first item of the Term Pane menu
changes to Disable Page Mode, which switches the display out of page
mode .
• Use the Copy item to copy highlighted text from the Shell Tool window to
the clipboard.
When there is text on the clipboard, you can use the Paste item to insert the
contents of the clipboard at the insert point.
The Enable Scrolling item on the Term Pane menu can be used to turn the Shell
Tool into a Command Tool. When you choose Enable Scrolling, the name stripe
at the top of the Shell Tool still says "shelltool", but the application acts like a
Command Tool. See the section, "Command Tool" on page 282, for details.
Command Tool, Shell Tool, and Console Window
289
Console
The Console is a special Command Tool window that is used to display error
and system messages for the SunOS operating system, the OpenWindows
environment, and some applications. You can recognize a Console window by
the term (CONSOLE) in the Command Tool header.
If you do not have a Console window, messages are displayed in large type at
the bottom of the screen. To clear such messages, choose Refresh from the
Workspace menu. Always have one (and only one) Console window running.
If you have more than one Console window running, messages are displayed
in the most recently opened Console window. You may miss important system
messages if you have more than one Console window running and do not look
for messages in the newest one, or if you have opened a new Console window
and then quit the most recently opened one.
290
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Clock
The Clock application displays the current time in a window or icon. The
current time can be displayed in either an analog or digital form, for any time
zone around the world. The Clock application can also be used as a stopwatch
or alarm clock.
The Clock relies on the date and time being correctly set. If you have not yet
set the date and time on your system, refer to the manual page for date.
This chapter describes how to use and customize the Clock.
• To display the Clock, choose Workspace
~
Programs
~
Clock.
Clock Icon and Window
The clock icon displays an analog clock with or without roman numerals, as
shown in the examples in Figure 7-1. See the section "Customizing the Clock"
on page 292 for information about how to display a Roman clock icon.
1:"<::,1
lVIII
IIlIl
l:. .•..............................
VII VI V
;
i
Figure 7-1
Clock Icons (Analog and Roman)
291
57
When you open the Clock icon, the clock is displayed in the pane of a base
window, as shown in Figure 7-2. The current time zone is displayed beneath
the clock if it is not the local time zone.
r@) clock
..,
~.
Figure 7-2
Clock Window
The Clock window has a header and resize corners. You can use the resize
corners to change the area of the window, making the clock larger or smaller.
You can also disable the header. See the manual page for clock for
information about this and other customization features.
Customizing the Clock
You can customize the Clock using the settings in the Clock Properties
window.
1. Open the Clock if it is in icon form.
2. Display the Clock Properties window:
a. Move the pointer into the Clock pane.
b. Press MENU to display the Clock menu.
The Clock menu, shown in Figure 7-3, is displayed.
rlEj clock
L
Clock
( Properties)
Sun jul 14
Figure 7-3
292
Clock Pop-up Menu
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
7=
c. Choose Properties from the Clock menu.
The Clock Properties window, shown in Figure 7-4, is displayed.
Clock Pro perties
Clock Face:
I digital 1analog
1
Icon display: 1 analog 1 roman I
Digital display:
Display options:
112 hour 124 hour I
ISeconds II Date I
Timezone:
I local
Sto pwatch:
I none 1reset Istart I stop I
1other 1 @)
US/Pacific
Alarm: Hr: _0_13;;'1 Min: _0_13W'l
Alarm command: ...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Repeat:
I none I once I daily I
Hourly command: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
~ (Save as Defaults) ~
Figure 7-4
Clock Properties Window
3. Change the settings, as desired.
The settings are described in the following sections.
• If you are dissatisfied with your changes, revert to previous settings by
clicking SELECT on Reset.
• If you want the new settings to become the default every time you start a
new Clock, click SELECT on Save as Defaults.
Clock
293
=7
4. Click SELECT on Apply.
The new settings take effect immediately.
Changing to a Digital-Style Clock Face
The Clock face and icon are displayed in analog style, by default. To change the
Clock face to digital display, click SELECT on the digital box in the Properties
window, and then click SELECT on the Apply button. The digital style clock is
shown in Figure 7-5.
@)
Figure 7-5
clock
Digital-Style Clock Face
Changing to a Roman-Style Clock Icon
To change the icon style from basic analog to Roman, click SELECT on the
roman box, and then click SELECT on the Apply button. Both styles are shown
in Figure 7-6.
Note - There is no digital-style icon option.
i"·~··x·i··~·i···"i···::"l
[:::S·:.I
Figure 7-6
294
!IX
'-.III!
~ VIII
1111 ~
~ VII VI V ~
:. ................................ i
Analog and Roman Icon Styles
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
12-Hour or 24-Hour Clock
If you change the face style to digital, you also have the option of a 12-hour or
24-hour clock. The default is a 12-hour Clock, which has an A.M. or a P.M.
printed next to it. The 24-hour Clock uses military time. For instance, 1:00 P.M.
is displayed as 13:00. Figure 7-7 shows both the 12-hour and the 24-hour
clocks.
r@)
I
I
., r@)
clock
I
I
: 2:3
Figure 7-7
'1.
clock
2:3:2:3
pm
12-Hour and 24-Hour Clocks
Displaying a Second Hand and the Date
If you select the Seconds display option, a second hand appears on the analogstyle clock face and icon, and moves like the second hand on a physical analog
clock. The digital-style clock face displays the passing seconds digitally.
Figure 7-8 shows both the 12-hour and the 24-hour clock faces with the
Seconds option selected .
f@)
I
I
I
I
Figure 7-8
Clock
.,
clock
.25
+
28
pm
@)
clock
2:3 : 25
29
Seconds Option on 12-Hour and 24-Hour Clocks
295
Choose the Date option on the Props window if you would like to display the
date at the bottom of the Clock window, as shown in Figure 7-9.
@]
clock
Sun Aug 18
Figure 7-9
Date in the Digital Clock Face
Changing the Time Zone
You can display the current time in a different time zone using the Time zone
option. The default is local. To choose a new time zone:
1. Open the Properties window, if not already opened.
This is described in the section "Customizing the Clock" on page 292.
2. Click SELECT on the other option in the Timezone category, as shown in
Figure 7-10.
An abbreviated menu button appears.
Timezone:
I local Iother I
@] - - - - - -
Figure 7-10 Timezone Category
3. Press MENU on the abbreviated menu button, drag the pointer to the
desired time zone, and release.
Figure 7-11 shows the list of time zones. Note that countries with more than
one time zone have submenus containing the time zones for that country.
296
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
i1
( Australia
[:»
Iceland
Brazil
[:>
Israel
Canada
[:>
Japan
Chile
[:>
Mexico
EET
[:>
NZ
GB-Eire
PRC
GMT
Poland
GMT+1
ROC
GMT+10
ROK
GMT+11
Singapore
GMT+12
Turkey
GMT+13
US
GMT+2
W-SU
GMT+3
WET
GMT+4
asia
GMT+5
australas ia
[:>
GMT+6
etcetera
GMT+7
europe
GMT+8
northamerica
GMT+9
pacificnew
GMT-1
southamerica
GMT-10
CET
GMT-11
CST6CDT
GMT-12
EST
GMT-2
EST5EDT
GMT-3
Greenwich
GMT-4
HST
GMT-5
MST
GMT-6
MST7MDT
GMT-7
Navajo
MET
PST8PDT
GMT-8
UCT
GMT-9
UTC
Hongkong
Universal
Figure 7-11 Time Zones Example
4. Click SELECT on the Apply button.
The time for that zone then appears on the clock face or icon.
Clock
297
Using the Stopwatch
To use the stopwatch:
1. Open the Clock if it is in icon form.
2. With the pointer on the Clock, press MENU and choose Properties from
the Clock menu.
3. Select digital box for the Clock Face style.
The stop watch also works in analog style, but it does not display the time
in numerical form, so is less suited to use as a stopwatch.
4. Click SELECT on the Stopwatch reset box, as shown in Figure 7-12.
The clock face changes to a timer, with 00 hours, 00 minutes, and 00
seconds.
Sto pwatch:
I none Ireset I start I stop I
"
Figure 7-12 Resetting the Stopwatch
5. Click SELECT on the Stopwatch start box when you want to begin timing.
The Clock begins clocking seconds as ShmA!H in Figure 7-13.
@)
clock
n . nn03
LI • LILI
Figure 7-13 Stopwatch in the Digital Display
6. Click SELECT on the Stopwatch stop box when the timing period is over.
7. Click SELECT on the start box again if you want to resume timing.
298
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8. Click SELECT on the reset box if you want the next timing session to
begin with zero time.
9. Click SELECT on none to return to the regular Clock.
Alarm Settings
• To set the alarm, choose
Properties~Clock
menu.
Use the Alarm Hr and Min settings to specify the time for an alarm. Use the
Alarm command text field to type in the command that you'd like to take place
at the alarm time. If you don't specify a command, the Clock application will
beep. For example, if your workstation has audio capabilities you can set the
Clock to create a cuckoo sound with the following Alarm command:
sh -c
Hcat
lusr/demo/SOUND/sounds/cuckoo.au > Idev/audio H
Use the Repeat settings to specify whether the alarm should happen just one
time, or every day at the given time. The alarm will not occur if the Repeat
setting is none.
If you want a command to take place hourly, type that command in the Hourly
command text field. Clock processes this command as hourly and alarm
commands, for example, $HOMEI clock. hourly.
Clock Keyboard Accelerators
You can change many of the Clock settings without using the Properties
window by moving the pointer anywhere within the open Clock window and
typing the following keyboard accelerators:
• Type 1 to set the 12-hour display mode if the current Clock is digital.
• Type 2 to set the 24-hour display mode if the current Clock is digital.
• Type c to toggle the Clock face between analog and digital displays.
• Type d to toggle the Date display on and off.
• Type i to toggle the icon face between analog and Roman.
• Type s to toggle the seconds display on and off.
Clock
299
• Type s to set the stopwatch. Type s again to start the stopwatch. Type S a
third time to stop the stopwatch. You can then type S to reset the stopwatch
again, and so on.
• Type c when you want to reset the Clock to the normal clock display.
• Type t to toggle the time zone between local and other. You must have a
valid Other time zone set on the Properties window for this to work.
Note that you can have more than one Clock running at a time. This is useful if
you want one clock to display the time and another to display the Stopwatch.
300
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Calculator
The DeskSet Calculator is a scientific and financial calculator designed to
perform a variety of mathematical functions. It operates in much the same way
as many hand-held calculators. There are financial, logical, and scientific
modes. You can store numbers in ten different memory registers and retrieve
and replace them easily. In addition, you can store up to 10 of your own
functions and constants in menus.
The Calculator displays numbers in fixed-point notation and decimal base, but
you can change it to display numbers in engineering or scientific notation, and
in binary, octal, or hexadecimal base.
This chapter describes how to use the Calculator. You can use Calculator with
a mouse, as you do other OpenWindows applications, or without a mouse, as
you would a physical hand-held calculator. With the mouse, you click SELECT
on the Calculator buttons; otherwise, you use the keyboard.
• To open the Calculator application, choose Workspace
Calculator.
~
Programs
~
301
=8
Calculator Icon and Base Window
The Calculator icon and base window are shown in Figure 8-1. The base
window has six rows of eight buttons. Click SELECT on a button to activate it.
Calculator
isplay for
calculations
hows mode:
Basic
Financial
Logical
Scientific
Shows num
base type
Shows display
mode
Figure 8-1
Calculator Icon and Base Window
The Calculator base window is resizable by using the resize corners (it might
take a few seconds to redisplay when it's resized).
Modes of Operation
The Calculator has various modes of operation. The area below the window
header displays the current number, followed by a mode line that displays the
current mode settings.
Numeric Bases
You can set the numeric bases to Binary, Octal, Decimal, or Hexadecimal using
the Base key pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 8-2. Press MENU on the Base
key to display the menu.
302
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Numeric base
Mode line
Figure 8-2
Numeric Base Pop-up Menu
The current base setting is shown as the first item in the mode line. In
Figure 8-2, "DEC" indicates Decimal base.
Up to 40 digits can be entered for each number, regardless of the base. If you
need to enter a larger or smaller number, use the Exp key as discussed under
"Number Manipulation Functions" on page 306. The numeric keypad changes
to display only those numbers appropriate to the current base mode.
Inappropriate numbers are dimmed out. For example, in Figure 8-2 the
hexadecimal letter keys (A-F) are dimmed. The numeric base in that figure is
decimal, so the hexadecimal letters are not valid or accessible.
• Choosing Binary displays the digits 0 and 1 on the numeric keypad.
• Choosing Octal displays the digits a through 7.
• Choosing Decimal displays the digits 0 through 9.
• Choosing Hexadecimal displays the digits 0 through 9 and also activates the
alphabetic keys at the top of the numeric keypad.
Figure 8-3 shows the keypads for both Binary and Hexadecimal numeric bases.
Calculator
303
58
HEX
DEC
D
E
A
B
7
8
5
2
Figure 8-3
The Binary Keypad and Hexadecimal Keypad
Display Notation
You can choose to display Calculator results in Fixed point, Engineering, or
Scientific notation by using the Disp (Display) key menu shown in Figure 8-4.
Press MENU on the Disp key to display the menu.
Figure 8-4
Display Type Pop-up Menu for Display Notation Mode
The current display notation is displayed as the third item in the mode line. In
Figure 8-4, the mode line shows FIX, indicating Fixed Point notation. When the
current display notation is Engineering, ENG appears on the mode line. When
the current notation is Scientific, SCI is displayed.
When the current notation is Fixed Point, the Calculator will revert to Scientific
notation if a number is larger than the display will allow.
304
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Major Calculator Modes
There are four major Calculator modes that determine the available functions:
•
•
•
•
Basic
Financial
Logical
Scientific
You can choose these four modes using the Mode pop-up menu shown in
Figure 8-5. Press MENU on the Mode key to display the menu. The default
mode is Basic mode, which uses the standard keys on the Calculator window.
The other three modes have extra buttons that appear in a pop-up window. For
information on these modes, see "Financial Functions" on page 312, "Logical
Functions" on page 319, and "Scientific Functions" on page 320.
Calculator
O.OOe+O
HEX
DEC
Figure 8-5
Calculator
SCI
BASIC
Mode Pop-up Menu
305
=8
Figure 8-6
The Mode Menu
The current major mode is displayed on the mode line underneath and slightly
to the left of the number display. In Figure 8-5, BASIC is listed as the current
mode.
Number Manipulation Functions
The Calculator has 12 number manipulation functions, as shown in Figure 8-7.
Calculator
O,OOe+O
Figure 8-7
Number Manipulation Functions
• Int returns the integer portion of the currently displayed value.
306
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
• Frac returns the fractional portion of the currently displayed value.
• Abs returns the absolute value of the currently displayed value.
• + / - changes the arithmetic sign of the currently displayed value or of an
exponent being entered with the Exp key.
• l/x returns the value of 1 divided by the currently displayed value.
• x"2 returns the square of the currently displayed value.
• % calculates the percentage of the currently displayed value specified by the
next value entered. For example, to find 75% of 40, enter 40, click SELECT
on %, enter 75, then click SELECT on =. The Calculator returns the result, 30.
• Sqrt returns the square root of the currently displayed value.
• Parentheses give a calculation arithmetic precedence. All calculations within
parentheses are calculated first. Parentheses can be nested. The result of an
operation containing parentheses is not performed until the last parenthesis
is matched.
• Exp starts exponential input. Any number entered after you choose Exp is
taken to be the exponent portion of this number. The numbers entered
before the Exp key are taken to be the mantissa. If no numerical input has
occurred when the Exp key is entered, a mantissa of 1.0 is assumed. You can
use the + / - key after entering the exponent to change its arithmetic sign.
• Asc displays the ASCII value of a character in the appropriate numeric base.
Clicking on the Asc key displays a small pop-up window. Type the character
that you want an ASCII equivalent for in the Character text field of the Get
ASCII window, and then click SELECT on the ASCII button. The ASCII
equivalent becomes the current value in the Calculator base window.
Miscellaneous Functions
The Calculator has five miscellaneous functions, shown in Figure 8-8.
Calculator
307
=8
Figure 8-8
Miscellaneous Functions
• Clear (Clr) clears the current value from the display.
• Backspace (Bsp) deletes the rightmost character of the current display and
recalculates its value.
• Keys changes the display of the Calculator keys to show the keyboard
equivalents of each Calculator key for mouseless operation of the Calculator.
See the section "Calculator Function Keys" on page 322, or the calctool
manual page, for more information about the Calculator keyboard mapping.
• Accuracy (Acc) chooses the number of digits of precision used in the
calculator display. This key has a pop-up menu associated with it, which lets
you specify 0 through 9 radix places. The default value is 2 radix places.
• Quit quits the Calculator.
Memory Registers
The Calculator has 10 memory registers that you can access using the keys
shown in Figure 8-9.
308
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Figure 8-9
Memory Register Keys
• Memory (Mem) displays a pop-up window showing the values of the 10
memory registers in the current base to the current accuracy.
• Store (Sto) stores the current value in the memory register that you choose
from the Store pop-up menu.
• Recall (Rcl) retrieves a value from the memory register that you choose from
the Recall pop-up menu.
• Register Exchange (Exch) exchanges the contents of the current display with
the current value in the memory register that you choose from the Exch key
pop-up menu.
• To display the Exch, Sto, and Rcl pop-up menus, press MENU on the
buttons.
User-Defined Functions
The Calculator allows you to enter your own set of constants and to define
your own functions through the Can and Fun keys shown in Figure 8-10.
Calculator
309
=8
Figure 8-10
User-defined Function Keys
Each of these keys has a menu associated with it, which you display by
pressing MENU on the key. Choosing the first item from the menu displays a
window that lets you enter the value of a constant or a function, and associate
a name with that value. The numbers you enter are stored in a . calctoolrc
file in your home directory.
Once you have entered the new value, the new value and its name are
displayed in the pop-up menu associated with that Calculator key. To use the
constant or function value, choose the desired item from the pop-up menu.
Performing Simple Calculations
Calculations are performed from left to right, with no arithmetic precedence.
For example, 2+3*4=20. You need parentheses, available on the Calculator base
window, to establish correct arithmetic precedence. For example, 2+(3*4)=14.
To perform a numerical operation, such as adding two numbers together:
1. Click SELECT on the first digit, for example, 7.
The number is entered in the display at the upper right corner of the
Calculator. In Figure 8-1 the number 0.00 is displayed.
2. Click SELECT on the operation you want to perform, for example, +.
310
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
3. Click SELECT on the number you want to add to the first number, for
example, 6.
The number is displayed in the numeric display area.
4. Click SELECT on the = sign.
The result, 13 in this example, is displayed in the numeric display area.
Alternatively, you can use the keyboard to enter numbers and simple
functions. You can also use the Copy key to store the numeric display to the
clipboard, and the Paste key to retrieve the contents of the clipboard. If you
want to copy just a portion of the numeric display, use the SELECT and
ADJUST mouse buttons to define the portion of the numeric display to copy.
If an operation needing more than one input is partially complete, the pending
operation is displayed on the line beneath the current number as a reminder.
Creating and Saving a Function
Note that when you enter a value for a new function, you must type the
keyboard equivalents in the Value field. To display the keyboard equivalents
for each Calculator key, click SELECT on the Keys button.
The following example describes how to create and save a function that adds
together two numbers taken from memory registers, and stores the result in
another memory register.
1. Choose Enter Function from the Fun key menu.
The Enter Function pop-up window is displayed.
2. Type in the number of the function you wish to add or replace in the
Function No: field.
The function number must be in the range 0 through 9.
3. Type a function name in the Description field, for example, addi tion.
Calculator
311
=8
4. Type a function into the Value field.
To add the numbers in Memory Registers 1 and 2, and store the sum in
Register 5, type Rl+R2=85. Rl means "R[etrieve] register 1," R2 means
"R[etrieve register] 2," and 85 means "S[tore] into register 5." See Table 8-1
at the end of this chapter for the keyboard equivalents (such as Rand S) that
you can use when creating your functions.
When you create your own functions, if you want to use a function from one
of the function windows (that is, the Financial, Logical, or Scientific
windows), make sure to include a command to change modes. For example,
if you want to retrieve the contents of memory register 3 and get the
factorial value of it, R3 ! will not work, because you need to change to
Scientific mode before retrieving the factorial. Instead, use R3Ms ! Mb. This
function translates correctly to "Retrieve the contents of memory register 3,
change mode to Scientific mode, get the factorial value, and change mode
back to Basic mode."
5. Click SELECT on the Enter Function button to store the new function in
your. calctoolrc file and add it to the Functions menu.
To use the new function, choose it from the Functions menu.
When creating functions, remember that calculations are performed from left to
right, with no arithmetic precedence. For example, the calculation 2 + 3 * 4 as
performed by the DeskSet Calculator gives a result of 20. The same equation
1""I01"fA1"1'Y'I0r! HT;-!-h (""<>nAn;(""<> 1 <>1",-!-h1'Y'l0-!-,("" 1""I1"0(""0r!0.... (""0 TATA111r! n-'-.ra <> "'ac" 1-!- A+ 1 A
y'-'.L .... ...., ........ ..LL'-'''-'L
" " ... '-.LL
'-''-'I..I.L...., .... L.L'''''-lA...l.
U. ...... "' ... L.J.. ...
L'-"'.1.'- y.L'-'-'-""-'-.Ll""'-'-
YY V
\..1...1.'-4..
6.1.
V '-
U
.1.'-IJU.l.l. V.1.
..L-:I: •
can be achieved with the Calculator by using parentheses: 2 + (3 * 4)
Financial Functions
The Calculator has the financial functions shown in Figure 8-11. Choose
Financial from the Mode key pop-up menu to display the Financial Mode
window.
312
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
'1""1-..",
..LJ.L.1.Cl
8=
o~
Figure 8-11
Fi nancial Mode.
Financial Functions
The financial functions retrieve needed information from the memory registers.
For example, in order to determine the amount of an installment payment, the
Calculator needs to know the amount of the loan, the interest rate, and the
term of the loan. You must store this information in the appropriate registers
before you click SELECT on the financial function button. See "Memory
Registers" on page 308 to learn how to store numbers in the registers.
The following function descriptions include information about what the
Calculator expects to find in each register for each function, plus examples of
how to use each function.
Ctrm: Compounding Term
Use Ctrm to compute the number of compounding periods it will take an
investment of present value to grow to a future value, earning a fixed interest
rate per compounding period. Store the following numbers in the memory
registers:
• Register 0: Periodic interest rate
• Register 1: Future value of the investment
• Register 2: Present value of the investment
Ctrm Example:
You have just deposited $8,000 in an account that pays an annual interest rate
of 9%, compounded monthly. You want to determine how long it will take to
double you investment.
Register 0: 0.0075 (interest rate = 9% / 12)
Register 1: 16000 (future value)
Register 2: 8000 (present value)
Calculator
313
=8
Clicking SELECT on Ctrm returns 92.76, which tells you that it would take
92.76 months, or almost eight years, to double your $8,000.
Ddb: Double-Declining Depreciation
Use Ddb to compute the depreciation allowance on an asset for a specified
period of time, using the double-declining balance method. Store the following
information in the memory registers:
•
•
•
•
Register
Register
Register
Register
0:
1:
2:
3:
Amount paid for asset
Salvage value of asset at end of life
Useful life of an asset
Time period for depreciation allowance
Ddb Example:
You have purchased an office machine for $8,000. The useful life of this
machine is six years. The salvage value after six years is $900. You want to
compute the depreciate expense for the fourth year, using the double-declining
balance method.
Memory register usage:
Register
Register
Register
Register
0:
1:
2:
3:
8000 (amount paid for asset)
900 (value of asset at end of its life)
6 (useful life of the asset)
4 (time period for depreciation allowance)
Clicking SELECT on Ddb returns 790.12, which tells you that the depreciation
expense for the fourth year will be $790.12.
Fv: Future Value
Use Fv to determine the future value of an investment. The Calculator
computes the future value based on a series of equal payments, earning a
periodic interest rate over the number of payment periods in a term. The
memory registers need to contain the following numbers:
• Register 0: Amount of each payment
• Register 1: Interest rate
• Register 2: Number of payments
314
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Fv Example:
You plan to deposit $4,000 each year for the next 20 years into a bank account.
The account is paying 8% interest, compounded annually. Interest is paid on
the last day of each year. You want to compute the value of your account in 20
years. You make each year's contribution on the last day of the year.
Memory register usage:
Register 0: 4000 (periodic payment)
Register 1: 0.08 (periodic interest rate is 8%)
Register 2: 20 (number of periods)
Clicking SELECT on Fv returns 183047.86, the value of your account in dollars
at the end of 20 years.
Pmt: Periodic Payment
Use Pmt to compute the amount of the periodic payment of a loan. Most
installment loans are computed like ordinary annuities, in that payments are
made at the end of each payment period. Store the following information in the
memory registers:
• Register 0: Principal or amount of the loan
• Register 1: Periodic interest rate of the loan
• Register 2: Term, or number of payments
Pmt Example:
You are considering taking out a $120,000 mortgage for 30 years at an annual
interest rate of 11.0%. You want to determine your monthly repayment.
Memory register usage:
Register 0: 120000 (principal).
Register 1: 0.00916 (periodic interest rate is 11.0% / 12)
Register 2: 360 (term - 30 x 12)
Clicking SELECT on Pmt returns 1142.06, the value in dollars of your monthly
repayment.
Calculator
315
=8
Pv: Present Value
Use Pv to determine the present value of an investment. The Calculator
computes the present value based on a series of equal payments discounted at
a periodic interest rate over the number of periods in the term. The following
information is retrieved from the memory registers:
• Register 0: Amount of each payment
• Register 1: Periodic interest rate
• Register 2: Term, or number of payments
PvExample:
You have just won a million dollars. The prize is awarded in 20 annual
payments of $50,000 each (a total of $1,000,000 over 20 years). Annual
payments are received at the end of each year. You are given the option of
receiving a single lump-sum payment of $400,000 instead of the million dollars
annuity. You want to find out which option is worth more in today's dollars.
If you were to accept the annual payments of $50,000, you assume that you
would invest the money at a rate of 9%, compounded annually.
Memory register usage:
Register 0: 50000 (periodic payment).
Register 1: 0.09 (periodic interest rate is 9%)
Register 2: 20 (term)
Clicking SELECT on Pv returns a value of 456427.28, which tells you that the
$1,000,000 paid over 20 years is worth $456,427 in present dollars. Based on
your assumptions, the lump-sum payment of $400,000 is worth less than the
million-dollar ordinary annuity, in present dollars (before taxes).
Rate: Periodic Interest Rate
Use Rate to compute the periodic interest rate. It returns the periodic interest
necessary for a present value to grow to a future value over the specified
number of compounding periods in the term. Store the following information
in the memory registers:
• Register 0: Future value
• Register 1: Present value
• Register 2: Term, or number of compounding periods
316
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Rate Example:
You have invested $20,000 in a bond. The bond matures in five years and has a
maturity value of $30,000. Interest is compounded monthly. You want to
determine the periodic interest rate for this investment.
Note - Before entering the information into the memory registers, choose 5
radix places from the Acc (accuracy) key pop-up menu to produce more
accurate results.
Memory register usage:
Register 0: 30000 (future value)
Register 1: 20000 (present value)
Register 2: 60 (term - 5 x 12)
Clicking SELECT on Rate returns.00678, which tells you that the periodic
(monthly) interest rate is 0.678%, under 1% per month. To determine the
annual rate, multiply the above formula by 12, which yields a result of 8.14%.
SIn: Straight-line Depreciation
Use SIn to compute the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period.
The straight-line method of depreciation divides the depreciable cost
(actual cost minus salvage value) evenly over the useful life of an asset. The
useful life is the number of periods, typically years, over which an asset is
depreciated. Use the memory registers to store the following information:
• Register 0: Cost of the asset
• Register 1: Salvage value of the asset
• Register 2: Useful life of the asset
Sin Example:
You have purchased an office machine for $8,000. The useful life of this
machine is six years, and the salvage value in eight years will be $900. You
want to compute yearly depreciation expense, using the straight-line method.
Memory register usage:
Calculator
317
=8
Register 0: 8000 (cost of the asset)
Register 1: 900 (salvage value of the asset)
Register 2: 6 (useful life of the asset)
Clicking SELECT on SIn returns 1183.33, the yearly dollar depreciation
allowance.
Syd: Sum-of-the-years' -digits Depreciation
Use Syd to compute the sum-of-the-years'-digits depreciation. This method of
depreciation accelerates the rate of depreciation so that more depreciation
expense occurs in earlier periods than in later ones. The depreciable cost is the
actual cost minus salvage value. The useful life is the number of periods,
typically years, over which an asset is depreciated. Store the following
information in the memory registers:
•
•
•
•
Register
Register
Register
Register
0:
1:
2:
3:
Cost of the asset
Salvage value of the asset
Useful life of the asset
Period for which depreciation is computed
Syd Example:
You have just purchased an office machine for $8,000. The useful life of this
machine is six years, and the salvage value after eight years will be $900. You
want to compute the depreciation expense for the fourth year, using the sumof-the-years' -digits method.
Memory register usage:
Register
Register
Register
Register
0:
1:
2:
3:
8000 (cost of the asset)
900 (salvage value of the asset)
6 (useful life of the asset)
4 (period for which depreciation is computed)
Clicking SELECT on Syd returns 1014.29, the dollar depreciation allowance for
the fourth year.
318
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Term: Payment Period
Use Term to compute the number of payment periods in the term of an
ordinary annuity necessary to accumulate a future value earning a specified
periodic interest rate. Store the following information in the memory registers:
• Register 0: Amount of each periodic payment
• Register 1: Future value
• Register 2: Periodic interest rate
Term Example:
You deposit $1,800 at the end of each year into a bank account. Your account
earns 11% a year, compounded annually. You want to determine how long it
will take to accumulate $120,000.
Memory register usage:
Register 0 - 1800 (periodic payment)
Register 1 - 120000 (future value)
Register 2 - 0.11 (periodic interest rate is 11%)
Clicking SELECT on Term returns 20.32, the number of years it will take to
accumulate $120,000 in your account.
Logical Functions
The Calculator has the logical functions shown in Figure 8-12. This pop-up
window is displayed when you choose Logical from the Mode key pop-up
menu.
Logical Mode.
Figure 8-12
Calculator
Logical Functions
319
=8
• Use < to shift the displayed value, treated as a 32 bit integer, to the left. This
key has a pop-up menu. The number of places to shift can be selected from
this menu, and ranges from 1 through 15.
• Use> to shift the displayed value, treated as a 32 bit integer, to the right.
This key has a pop-up menu. The number of places to shift can be selected
from this menu, and ranges from 1 through 15.
• Use &16 to truncate the current display to a 16-bit integer.
• Use &32 to truncate the current display to a 32-bit integer.
• Use Or to perform a logical OR operation on the last number and the next
number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.
• Use And to perform a logical AND operation on the last number and the
next number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.
• Use Not to perform a logical NOT operation on the currently displayed
value.
• Use Xor to perform a logical XOR operation on the last number and the next
number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.
• Use Xnor to perform a logical XNOR operation on the last number and the
next number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.
Scientific Functions
'"
The Calculator has the scientific functions shown in Figure 8-13. This window
is displayed when you choose Scientific from the Mode key pop-up menu.
Scientific Mode.
10 A x
Ln
Figure 8-13
Log
Scientific Functions
• Press MENU pm the Trig key to access a pop-up menu to set the
trigonometric base to Degrees, Radians, or Gradients. The current
trigonometric base is indicated by the second item on the mode line.
320
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
• Use Hyp as a toggle for setting or unsetting the hyperbolic function flag.
This flag affects SIN, COS, and TAN functions. When this flag is set, the
word HYP appears on the mode line beneath the numeric display.
• Use Inv as a toggle for setting or unsetting the inverse function flag. This
flag affects SIN, COS, and TAN trigonometric functions. When this flag is
set, the word INV appears on the mode line beneath the numeric display.
• Use eAx to return e raised to the power of the currently displayed value.
• Use 10 Ax to return 10 raised to the power of the currently displayed value.
• Use yAx to raise the last number entered to the power of the next number.
• Use x! to return the factorial of the currently displayed value. The factorial
function only works for positive integers.
• Use Cos to return the trigonometric cosine, arc cosine, hyperbolic cosine, or
inverse hyperbolic cosine of the current value, depending on the settings of
the hyperbolic and inverse function toggles. (See Hyp and Inv listed
previously.) The result is displayed in the current trigonometric base.
• Use Sin to return the trigonometric sine, arc sine, hyperbolic sine, or inverse
hyperbolic sine of the current value, depending on the settings of the
hyperbolic and inverse function toggles. (See Hyp and Inv.) The result is
displayed in the current trigonometric base (degrees, radians, or gradients).
• Use Tan to return the trigonometric tangent, arc tangent, hyperbolic tangent,
or inverse hyperbolic tangent of the current value, depending on the
settings of the hyperbolic and inverse function toggles. (See Hyp and Inv.)
The result is displayed in the current trigonometric base (degrees, radians,
or gradients).
• Use Ln to return the natural logarithm of the currently displayed value.
• Use Log to return the base 10 logarithm of the currently displayed value.
• Use Rand to return a random number between 0.0 and 1.0.
Click SELECT on the Set Default button to make your Appearance, Base,
Mode, Display, Accuracy, Contents, Functions, and Style settings the default
every time you start a new Calculator.
Calculator
321
=8
Calculator Function Keys
Every function in the Calculator application has a keyboard equivalent
associated with it. Table 8-1 lists each Calculator function with its keyboard
equivalent. See the manual page for calctoQl for a more complete
description of each function. The manual page for calctool also lists
Calculator command line options and various resources that can be set in your
.Xdefaults or .desksetdefaults files.
Keyboard equivalents listed in brackets indicate a choice of options. For
example, the keyboard equivalent for the Disp function is D [e, f, s]. This
means that you can enter De, Df, or Ds. Similarly, the Exch function keyboard
equivalent is F [0-9], which means you can enter FO, Fl, F2, etc. through F9.
Table 8-1
Number Manipulation
Operators
Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents (1 of 5)
Function
Keyboard Equivalent
Description
Int
Control-i
Integer portion of current
entry
Frac
Control-f
Fractional portion of entry
Abs
Control-u
Absolute value of current
entry
+/-
C
Change arithmetic sign
l/x
r
1 divided by current entry
x/\2
@
Square of current entry
%
%
Percentage using current
entry and next entry
Sqrt
s
Square root
Asc
Control-a char
Displays ASCII value of
character typed after
Control-a
Base
B [b,o,d,h]
Change the base to binary
[b], octal [0], decimal [d],
or hexadecimal [h]
Menu Operators
322
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Table 8-1
Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents (2 of 5)
Function
Keyboard Equivalent
Description
Disp
D [e,f,s]
Change display mode to
engineering [e], fixed
point [f], or scientific [s]
Mode
M [b,f,l,s]
Change calculator mode to
default basic mode [b], or
to financial [f], logical [1],
or scientific [s] mode
Acc
A[0-9]
Set display accuracy to 0
through 9 significant
digits
Can
# [0-9] (defaults)
Display a constant value.
The constants are labeled
from 0 through 9 and can
be defined by entries in
the. calctoolrc file.
Default values are:
0- 0.621 (kms per hour /
mph)
1 - 1.41421 (square root of
2)
2 - 2.71828 (e)
3 - 3.14159 (pi)
4 - 2.54 (cms / inch)
5 - 57.2958 (degrees in
radian)
6 - 1048576.0 (2 to power
of 20)
7 - 0.0353 (gms / oz)
8 - 0.948 (kilojoules
/thermals)
9 - 0.0610 (cubic cms
/cubic in)
Fun
F[0-9]
Execu te a function. There
are 10 functions, labeled 0
through 9, taken from
.calctoolrc.
Calculator
323
=8
Table 8-1
Other Operations
Financial Mode
Operations
324
Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents (3 of 5)
Function
Keyboard Equivalent
Description
Rcl
R[0-9]
Retrieve value in memory
register. There are 10
memory registers, labeled
o through 9
Sto
5[0-9]
Store value in memory
register 0 through 9
Exch
X[0-9]
Exchange current entry
with contents of memory
register 0 through 9
Clr
Delete
Clear calculator display
Bsp
Back Space
Delete rightmost
character and recalculate
(and)
(and)
Set arithmetic precedence
Exp
E
Turn current entry into
scientific notation
mantissa. Next entry
becomes exponent.
Keys
k
Toggle labels on calculator
buttons between mouse
and keyboard equivalents
Mem
m
Display window showing
10 memory register values
Quit
qorQ
Exit Calculator
Ctrm
Control-t
Compounding term
Ddb
Control-d
Double-declining
depreciation
Fv
v
Future value
Pmt
P
Periodic payment
Pv
p
Present value
Rate
Control-r
Periodic interest rate
SIn
Control-s
Straight-line depreciation
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Table 8-1
Logical Mode
Operations
Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents (4 of 5)
Function
Keyboard Equivalent
Description
Syd
Control-y
Sum-of-the-years' -digits
depreciation
Term
T
Payment period
<
<
Shift current entry left
>
>
Shift current entry right
&16
Truncate to 16-bit
unsigned integer
&32
Truncate to 32 bit
unsigned integer
Or
Logical OR of current and
next entries
And
&
Not
Scientific Mode
Operations
Logical AND of current
and next entries
Logical NOT of current
entry
Xor
1\
Logical XOR or current
and next entries
Xnor
n
Logical XNOR of current
and next entries
Trig
T[d,g,r]
Set trigonometrical base to
degrees [d], gradians [g],
or radians [r]
Hyp
h
Toggle hyperbolic function
indicator
Inv
Toggle inverse function
indicator
e raised to the power of
current entry
10 raised to the power of
current entry
Calculator
325
=8
Table 8-1
Function
Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents (5 of 5)
Keyboard Equivalent
Description
y
Current entry raised to
power of next entry
Factorial of current entry
xl
Cos
Control-c
Cosine of current entry
Sin
Control-s
Sine of current entry
Tan
Control-t
Tangent of current entry
Ln
N
Natural logarithm of
current entry
Log
G
Base 10 logarithm of
current entry
Rand
?
Random number from 0.0
through 1.0
Customizing Your Calculator
Use the Calculator Properties window to customize the look and layout of your
Calculator. To display the Properties window, place the pointer anywhere in
the Calculator application:
• Press MENU, Choose Properties from the Calculator pop-up menu, and
release MENU.
The Properties window is shown in Figure 8-14.
326
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
8=
Calcu lator pro perties
Appearance: 12D-look
I 3D-look I
I color I monochrome I
Style: I left-han de d I right-handed I
Display:
( APPIy) (save as Defau Its)
(RB"58"t)
Figure 8-14 Calculator Properties Window
• Use the Appearance setting to determine if your Calculator is displayed
with two- or three-dimensional buttons. The default is two-dimensional for
performance reasons.
• Use the Display setting to determine if your Calculator is shown in
black-and-white or color. Color is applicable only on machines that support
it.
• Use the Style setting to determine the layout of the Calculator. The default
layout is with the number keys on the left. If you choose the right-handed
Style setting and click SELECT on Apply or Save as Defaults, the Calculator
will be laid out with the number keys on the right, as shown in Figure 8-15.
Calculator
327
=8
Calculator
0.00
Figure 8-15 Right-hand Layout of Calculator Display
Click SELECT on the Save as Defaults button to make your Appearance, Base,
Mode, Display, Accuracy, Contents, Functions, and Style settings the default
every time you start a new Calculator.
328
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Performance Meter
The Performance Meter, designed to meet application developer needs, allows
you to monitor many aspects of system performance, such as processor
performance, network performance, and I/O performance.
You can use a single Performance Meter to monitor different factors one at a
time, or you can use several meters to monitor separate factors simultaneously.
However, running a number of Performance Meters simultaneously degrades
system performance.
• To start Performance Meter, choose Workspace> Programs >
Performance Meter.
The Performance Meter icon is shown in Figure 9-1.
I~,
~
perfmeter ~
t ................................ i
Figure 9-1
Performance Meter Icon
Performance Meter Displays
There are two types of display for the Performance Meter: dial and graph. The
dial display, shown in Figure 9-2, is a speedometer-like dial with two needles.
329
Figure 9-2
Performance Meter Window with a Dial Display
The needles move as system conditions change. The short needle, or hour
hand, tracks average performance over a 20-second interval, and the long one,
or minute hand, tracks current performance over a 2-second interval. The
display is updated every two seconds. You can change these default interval
times from the Performance Meter Properties window. See "Customizing
Performance Meters" on page 332 for information about setting Performance
Meter properties.
The name of the performance option being measured is displayed in the lower
left corner of the window. Its maximum value is shown in the lower right
corner. For example, if the Performance Meter measures percentage, the long
hand pointing straight up would indicate 50 percent.
You can use the Performance Meter Properties window to change the display
to a graph. See "Performance Meter Display Options" on page 334. With a
graph display, performance data is shown as a strip chart. Figure 9-3 shows an
example of the Performance Meter window with a graph display.
Figure 9-3
Performance Meter Window with a Graph Display
The graph can be a line graph, as shown in Figure 9-3, or a solid graph. See
"Performance Meter Display Options" on page 334 for information about
displaying a solid graph.
The window has resize corners that you can use to change the area of the
window when you are displaying a graph. A resized Performance Meter
window is shown in Figure 9-4.
330
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Figure 9-4
Resized Performance Meter Window
If there is not enough room to display all the text associated with a graph, as
much of the text is displayed as possible, and the last character is a "-". This
indicates that you should resize the window to be wider in order to see all the
text.
Performance Meter Menu
You can change the performance value to be monitored in a Performance Meter
window by choosing an item from the Performance Meter pop-up menu
shown in Figure 9-5. To display this pop-up menu, move the pointer to
anywhere in the Performance Meter window and press MENU.
Performance Meter
( Show cpu
').
Show packets
Show page
Show swap
Show interrupts
Show disk
Show context
UHl
Show load
Show collisions
Show errors
Properties ...
Figure 9-5
The Performance Meter Pop-up Menu
Here are the performance values you can display:
• Show cpu monitors the percent of CPU being used.
• Show packets monitors the number of Ethernet packets per second.
• Show page monitors the paging activity in pages per second.
• Show swap monitors the number of jobs swapped per second.
Performance Meter
331
59
•
•
•
•
Show interrupts monitors the number of device interrupts per second.
Show disk monitors disk traffic in transfers per second.
Show context monitors the number of context switches per second.
Show load monitors the average number of runnable processes over the last
minute.
• Show collisions monitors the number of collisions per second detected on
the Ethernet.
• Show errors monitors the number of errors per second on receiving packets.
If the Performance Meter is displaying just one graph or dial when you choose
an option from the pop-up menu, that graph is replaced with the new
selection. If the Performance Meter is displaying more than one graph or dial,
the new one is added to the display.
Customizing Performance Meters
You can customize many aspects of the Performance Meter from the Properties
window shown in Figure 9-6. Choose Properties from the Performance Meter
pop-up menu to display the Properties window, or move the pointer anywhere
into the Performance Meter window and press the Props key on your
keyboard.
Events to
monitor
---t-_-.!!!M!.!!o!!ni~to~r~: cpu
Direction added
meters are
I packets
displayed
I
Meter style
Directio n: I horizontal
Perfmeter: Pro perties
I page
I interrupts I I context
~====~
I swap
I I dis k
IL-I_oa_d_---' I errors
I vertical I
I dial I graph I
Machine: I local I remote
Display:
Frequency of
display update
Monitoring frequency
of dial's hour hand
Monitoring frequency
of dial's minute hand
I
Sample time: ~ 1-1"'1 seconds
Hour hand: ~ 1-1 ... 1 seconds
Log Samples:
Minute hand: _2_I~!"'I seconds
( Set Defau It)
Figure 9-6
332
The Performance Meter Properties Window
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
I collisions
D
Performance Meter Monitors
Selecting one or more of the Monitor settings and clicking SELECT on the
Apply button changes the display to show performance of the selected item or
items. If more than one Monitor setting is selected, the Performance Meter
displays all of the selected dials or graphs at the same time. Figure 9-7 shows
three aspects of system performance being monitored at the same time.
Figure 9-7
Performance Monitor with Three Horizontal Displays
The Direction setting determines whether multiple monitors are displayed
side-by-side (horizontally), or stacked on top of each other (vertically). In
Figure 9-7, the Direction setting is horizontal. In Figure 9-8, the Direction
setting is vertical.
load
Figure 9-8
4
Performance Monitor with Vertical Displays
Note that the performance meter does not try to fit multiple graphs in the
window based on the shape of the window. It always uses the Direction setting
to determine if the graphs are displayed horizontally or stacked vertically. For
example, if you have a vertical display like the one in Figure 9-8, resizing the
window to be short and wide (as in Figure 9-7) does not change the Direction
display to be horizontal.
Performance Meter
333
Performance Meter Display Options
As discussed earlier, you can monitor system performance with either dial or
graph displays. Use the Display setting of the Performance Meter Properties
window to choose Dial or Graph displays. Remember to click SELECT on
Apply to change the display in this session only, or click SELECT on Set
Default to make the selected display your default every time you start the
Performance Meter.
If you choose Graph, the Graph Type setting is activated on the Properties
window. Choose Line to display a single line graph, and choose Solid to
display a solid graph. Figure 9-9 shows a Performance Meter with a line graph
on the left, and a solid graph on the right.
cntxt
Figure 9-9
128
Line Graph and Solid Graph Displays
Performance Meter Machine
You can monitor performance for your own system or for another system on
the network. To monitor a remote system, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the Remote Machine setting of the Performance Meter
Properties window.
The Machine name text field is activated.
2. Type the name of the machine you want to monitor in the text field.
3. Click SELECT on the Apply or Set Default button.
The Performance Meter displays the name of the remote system at the
bottom of the pane under the name of the value you are monitoring, as
shown in Figure 9-10. Click SELECT on Set Default to make the remote
system the default monitored system every time you run the Performance
Meter.
334
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Figure 9-10 Monitoring a Remote Machine
To change back to your system, click SELECT on Local, then click SELECT on
the Apply or Set Default button.
Performance Meter Display and Sample Intervals
You can change the Sample Time (the frequency that the meters are updated)
and the units measured by the hour and minute hands on the dial display with
the Sample time, Hour hand, and Minute hand settings. The default is for the
hour hand to show a sample over a 20-second interval and the minute hand
the average over a 2-second interval. If you change the values in these fields,
remember to click SELECT on the Apply or Set Default button to record the
changes.
If you'd like to save and examine individual samples, choose Yes on the Log
Samples setting on the Properties window. This activates the Filename text
field. Samples are saved in the file typed in the Filename text field. If no file
name is specified, samples are saved in a file in your home directory called
perfmeter .1ogXXX, where xxx is replaced by a unique identifier.
Do not specify the same file name for more than one Performance Meter at the
same time. Either specify a different file name for each sample file, or do not
specify any file name at all and let the Performance Meter construct unique file
names.
Caution - Do not leave the Performance Meter running for a long time with
Log Samples on. The file with the samples will keep getting larger until your
system runs out of disk space on the file's partition.
Performance Meter
335
Shortcuts
The Performance Meter has keyboard accelerators that you can use to quickly
toggle property settings without using the Properties window. To use these
keyboard accelerators, move the pointer anywhere into the Performance
Monitor window and type the letter as follows:
• Type d to toggle the Direction setting. If multiple monitors are displayed
vertically, they will be changed to a horizontal display, and vice-versa.
• Type g to toggle the Display setting between the Dial and Graph display.
• Type q to quit the Performance Meter application.
• Type s to toggle a graph display style between Line and Solid graphs.
• Type s to toggle the Save Samples setting.
• Type t to toggle the Machine setting between Local and Remote.
336
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
10::
Print Tool
The Print Tool DeskSet application provides an easy way to print files. Print
Tool provides a graphical user interface to the UNIX printing functions.
This chapter describes the functions of the Print Tool. For information about
UNIX printing functions, see SunGS 5.2 Setting Up User Accounts, Printers, and
Mail or the Solaris 2.2 Advanced User's Guide.
• To start Print Tool, choose Workspace> Programs> Print Tool.
Print Tool Icons
You can print files by dragging and dropping files from the File Manager or a
header attachment from the Mail Tool onto the Print Tool icon, which is shown
in Figure 10-1.
mimeo
mimeo
Figure 10-1 Print Tool Icon-Before and During Printing
337
The name of the current printer is displayed at the bottom of the Print Tool
icon. When a file is dragged and dropped onto the Print Tool, the footer of the
open Print Tool window displays the name of the file being printed and may
also display error messages. You can drag and drop files to be printed onto the
drop target of the Print Tool window and onto the Print Tool icon.
Print Tool Window
You can perform the following operations from the Print Tool window, as
shown in Figure 10-2:
• Print files using the Filename text field and the Print button.
• Print files by dragging and dropping files from other applications.
• Specify the number of copies to print.
• Specify a header page.
• Choose which of the available printers to use.
• Use the Information button to view information about each printer, if set up
by system administrator.
• Specify an executable print command or print script for use with the file to
be printed.
• Display print queue status.
• Stop printing job(s) in this print queue.
• Change printer property information such as including a header page,
notification of job completion, overriding a default print method.
338
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
10=
Pathnam e to file for
printing
!@)
"'1
Print Tool
De
Drag and drop target
Fi Ie name: Itm pig u i deEAAaOOOE9t.
Copies: _,_
SELECT this to start
~f-printing after typing
a;;'}
Header: ~
filename
( Properties ... )
~
r=J
Printer:
Scrolling list of
available printers
I
Imimeo
Information ... )
~
..............
I
r=J
Job
Displays status of
print jobs in the queue
Size(K)
Time
9
10
10
9
9
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
SELECT this to bring
up Properties window
SELECT this to find out
information about a
selected printer (This is
only available if info was
entered during the
installation.)
r=J
Jmimeo-7
mimeo-8
mimeo-9
mimeo-10
mimeo-11
22
22
22
22
22
19:49
19: 50
19:50
19: 50
19: 50
I
~
I
r=J
SELECT Status to
view upd ated status
of selected print jobs
( status) ( Stop Pri nti ng)
Once print job(s) have
been selected, this
button is enabled and
selected jobs are
cancelled
1-'
L..,
Figure 10-2
Print Tool Window
Printing Files
There are two ways to print files:
• By typing the filename in the Print Tool window
• By dragging and dropping
With both methods, status messages are displayed in the footer of the Print
Tool window. The following sequence of messages is typical (each time you
start a print job or change printers):
Print Tool
339
1. Printing
This flashes for a short time before displaying:
2. no entries
You see no entries once all the job(s) have been completed.
If the properties have been set, the Print Tool window flashes and beeps, when
all printing jobs have been completed.
If you want to print a file with a format other than the default, you need to
supply an alternative print method. Refer to "Changing the Print Method in
the Print Tool" on page 345 for information on these procedures.
Typing the Filename in the Print Window
To print by typing the file name in the PrintTool window:
1. Type the file's full path name in the Filename text field.
If the file is in your home directory, just type the filename. Otherwise, start
the path name from your home directory and include each subdirectory in
the path to the file in the form: directoryl/directory2lfilename.
2. Click SELECT on the Print button.
Dragging and Dropping the File
When you drag a file from another application, you can drop it onto either the
Print Tool icon or the drop target of the Print Tool window.
To print a file by dragging and dropping:
1. Display the item you want to print.
For example:
• A file in the File Manager window
• A mail message in Mail Tool
• An attachment in a Mail Tool message
2. Drag the icon or message header to either the Print Tool icon or the drop
target in the Print Tool window.
To drag more than one file, click ADJUST on additional files.
340
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
10=
3. Release the mouse button to drop the file.
Printing should begin.
@)
L ~:
Print Tool
Filename:
------------------------
Copies: _1_
Header:
I8P. ~Drag and drop icon
Illilf"-..~is grayed once file
(!J;;"j
!if
( Properties ... )
Pri nter: I Imlmeo
.
I
1c=:J~
<$>
( Information ... )
c
...
~
Job
______________
Size(K)
I
~C=:J
Time
~
~
1-,
____________________________________
I
~C=:J
no entries
..J ~:
:"'./.."'.............."'..".."'.."'.."................................./ ......................' ......' ..........".."......"'.."'......"'.."..................".."..".........."'......"......"'..........' .........."'.."......'......"..' ..' ..........' ............./ ..........' ..................' ..".."..........".."......"'..' . "'......................'.."'.."..........".........."..' ..........' ........./~:
Figure 10-3 Dropping a File on the Print Tool Drop Target
Choosing Another Printer
When the Print Tool window is open, the list of available printers is shown in
the scrolling list for Printer. The list is alphabetical with the default printer
highlighted and located at the top of the list, if it exists. If a default printer
does not exist, the first printer in the list is highlighted.
To choose another printer, follow these steps:
1. Scroll down the list until the printer you want to use is visible.
Print Tool
341
2. Select the printer name.
The printer must be available. For information on adding a printer, refer to
SunOS 5.2 Setting Up User Accounts, Printers, and Mail.
The printer you chose is selected, as shown in the example in Figure 10-3.
Checking the Print Queue Status
To check the status of your print jobs, click SELECT on the Status button near
the bottom of the Print Tool window. The scrolling status window lists by job,
size (in KB), and time all of your files or jobs (for the selected printer) in the
print queue as shown in Figure 10-4.
i
Print Tool
D
Fi Ie name: /tm p/g u i deEAAaOOOEI$.
Copies: _,_
EEl
~
Header: ~
( Properties." )
Printer: I
'--1_mi_me_O_ _ _---'1
Job
Imi meo-7
mimeo-8
mimeo-9
mimeo-10
mimeo-11
( Information".)
~
1c::J
SheCK)
Time
9
10
10
9
9
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
22
22
22
22
22
( status) (Stop Pri nti ng)
Figure 10-4 Example of Entries in the Print Queue
342
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
c::J
19 :49
19:50
19:50
19: 50
19:50
~
I
c::J
Each entry in the print queue is identified by Job, Size (in KB), and Time. The
Job category shows a unique job number for each file in the queue. It is also
helpful to know the size of a print job. Time shows the time the job was
submitted. Figure 10-4 shows that the job ranked first will take longer to print
than the following job, because it is larger in size.
Stopping a Print Job
You can stop one or more of your jobs in the queue. To stop your job(s) in the
queue, do the following:
1. Click SELECT on the Status button to display the jobs in the print queue.
2. Move the pointer onto the job you want to cancel, and click SELECT.
To stop more than one job, point to the additional jobs and click SELECT.
The Stop printing button is enabled once a job is selected.
3. Click SELECT on the Stop Printing button, shown in Figure 10-5.
Si zeOO
Time
9
10
10
9
9
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Job
CJ
Imimeo-7
mimeo-8
mimeo-9
mimeo-10
mimeo-11
22 19:49
22 19: 50
19: 50
19:50
22 19:50
22
22
~
I
CJ
Applies to current
print run only
Figure 10-5 Stopping a Print Job
Note - When you stop printing one or more print jobs, the Print Tool remains
busy and does not accept further input until the printer acknowledges the
request. Depending on the number of jobs selected and the status of the printer
queue, it may take several minutes for the printer to respond to your request.
Print Tool
343
510
Changing Print Tool Properties
The Print Tool properties window allows you to change certain of functions of
Print Tool.
• Click SELECT on the Properties button from the Print Tool window.
The Print Tool Properties window is shown in Figure 10-6.
Print Tool: Properties
Header Page: 1Aff------+------,SELECT this checkbox to turn
the header page "on" or "off"
Notify when All jobs done: ~ ~
Override Default Print Method:
(Show text field.)
~
SELECT a beep and/or flash to
notify you when all your jobs sent
to the printer have been completed
SELECT this to provide your
own print method and override
the default method.
Save as Default
aves the selections made as
the new defaults
Figure 10-6 The Print Tool Properties Window
The following properties can be set from the Print Tool Properties window:
• Use the Header Page setting to indicate whether or not your jobs should
print with a header (or banner) page. The Header Page setting on the Print
Tool window overrides the setting made here.
You can turn the header page on or off for an individual job from the Print
Tool window, without going back and forth to the Print Tool: Properties
window. A check in the checkbox box indicates that the default is to print a
header page with each job.
• Use the Notify when ALL jobs done setting to beep and/ or flash you when
all of the print jobs you sent to the queue have printed.
• Use the Override Default Print Method to use your own print method next
time you start Print Tool. For more information on using your own print
method, refer to "Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool" on page 345.
344
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
10=
Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool
Note - Depending upon your installation, certain printer filter programs
should have been installed for the printers you use by the system
administrator. If no print filters are installed, your print job will not be printed.
Check with your system administrator for the filter programs installed for your
printer, or for a complete listing of print filters available and information about
the lpfilter command, refer to the SunOS 5.2 Setting Up User Accounts,
Printers, and Mail Guide.
The Override default print method option allows you to use alternate
(command line) print methods within Print Tool. If you need to print a file
with another print method (such as troff), you need to override the default
print method. You must also use the following environment variables (listed
here with their meaning):
$FILE=Name of your file
$ PRINTER/ $LPDEST=Printer name
$COPIES=Number of copies to be printed
$HEADER=Print header page with job
You can type any command line print method, including UNIX pipes and shell
scripts. The print method must be an executable command in your path. For
example, if you want to pretty-print a C source file using the vgrind
command, you would follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the Properties button.
2. Click the Override Default Print Method checkbox, and press Apply.
3. In the Print Method text field, type:
vgrind $FILE I dpost
I Ip -d$PRINTER -n$COPIES -Tpostscript
4. Type the name of the file in the File text field, or drag and drop the file to
be printed onto the Print Tool icon or drag and drop target.
Print Tool
345
Note - The SunOS S.X print system does not recognize the type of the file to be
printed. You must supply the appropriate filter for the file type when using an
alternate print method. Otherwise, the file will be printed as a plain ASCII file.
Changing the Print Method with the Binder
You can use the Binder application to view or change the print method bound
to specific types of files. This information is stored in the non-ASCII file called
cetables in the $OPENWINHOME/lib/cetables directory and can be viewed
using Binder. Once you use Binder to customize this file, the information is
stored as . cetables directory in your home directory. For complete
information on using Binder, refer to Chapter 16, "Binder."
Starting Print Tool from the Command Line
When started from the command line, Print Tool looks at the following to
determine the default printer:
1. If the Print Tool was started in a Shell Tool or Command Tool, and the
printer was specified with the - P command line argument, Print Tool uses
that printer as the default. For example, the printer named mimeo is the
default if Print Tool is started by typing print tool -P mimeo.
2. If a printer was not specified with a command line argument, Print Tool
looks for the environment variable $PRINTER (or $LPDEST, if the
$ PRINTER environment variable has not been set). If this environment
variable is set, the printer it specifies becomes the Print Tool default.
3. If neither a command line argument was specified, nor the $ PRINTER (or
$LPDEST) environment variable was set, Print Tool automatically selects the
name of your system default printer.
All printers that are available to you are listed on the Printer scroll list. Printers
are in separate directories under / etc / lp/printers. If you need to add or
delete printers to your system configuration, you must use the admin tool. See
the SunOS 5.2 Setting Up User Accounts, Printers, and Mail Guide for more
informa tion.
346
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Audio Tool
n --
Audio Tool is an application that is used to record, play, and edit audio files.
Audio Tool works in conjunction with the Audio Control application, which
controls and configures the desktop's audio capabilities. Audio Tool also works
with Multimedia Mail Tool to provide the audio capabilities for composing,
sending, and receiving Multimedia Mail.
About This Chapter
The first part of this chapter explains how to perform common Audio Tool
tasks, such as playing, recording, editing, and saving audio files. The rest of the
chapter, which is in a reference format, contains detailed descriptions of Audio
Tool's base window and the File, Edit, and Volume menus. Refer to these
reference sections for more information about a particular button or menu
option.
Audio Tool Capabilities
Before using Audio Tool, make sure that your machine supports, at a
minimum, basic (monaural) audio capabilities and that a speaker and
microphone are installed. Refer to your system's documentation for this
information.
Many computers support stereo and higher-quality audio, such as CD and
DAT quality. Audio Tool automatically recognizes the capabilities of the
computer's audio devices. Therefore, the features of Audio Tool that you can
347
use depend on your particular system configuration. This chapter describes all
of the features and controls of Audio Tool. However, if your computer
supports only monaural audio, you will not see some controls, such as a
balance slider.
Required Accessories
For recording (creating) voice audio files, use the microphone that is shipped
with your computer or a commercial-variety microphone. Connect the
microphone to your computer's microphone jack.
You can listen to audio output in one of these ways; either from your
computer's speaker, or headphones, or from externally powered speakers
connected to the speaker ou tpu t.
Invoking Audio Tool
You can invoke Audio Tool in several ways:
• from the desktop menu by choosing Workspace> Programs> Audio
Tool...
• from the Mail Tool by choosing Attach> Voice ... from the Compose
window
• from an audio file attachment to a mail message by double-clicking SELECT
on the audio file glyph
• from the File Manager by double-clicking SELECT on an audio file glyph
• from the command line with the audiotool command
Refer to the audiotool (1) manual page for information about the Audio Tool
command's syntax.
348
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
About Audio Tool's Base Window
The Audio Tool base window, shown in Figure II-I, contains all of the controls
needed to play, record, and edit a sound file.
Play/Record position pointer
Drag and drop target
0:01.4
0:02.9
Display canvas
Cursor mark
-Hi-t:=--!---1
Rev
Play
Fwd
Voice Format
Ree
c:::::J
c:::::J
C:=J
C:=J
C:=J
c:::::J
C:=J
C:=J
C:=J
C:=J
Le ngth: 0:08.5 [0:00.9]
Figure 11-1 Audio Tool Base Window
The top center of the Audio Tool window displays the name of a sound file
along with the file's status.
Three menu buttons are located near the top of the window (File, Edit, and
Volume). Use these buttons to edit audio files and the audio configuration
parameters, such as play and record volume. The four buttons located near the
bottom of the window (Rev, Play, Fwd, and Rec) function like buttons on a
tape recorder.
Audio Tool
349
Loading and Playing an Audio File
To load and play an audio file, do the following:
1. With the pointer inside Audio Tool, choose File ~ Open....
The Audio Tool: Open window is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-2.
Audio Tool: Open
Ty pe in the path to the fol der an d press Return.
~.~--------------------
Current Folder:
/dO/au d io/Getfi les
5e leet a fi Ie or fol der an d cI ick 0 pe n.
~~.~"G~O~u~p~on~e~fo~l~de~r,,~.________~ ~~•
.IS!I
au d io. test
IS!I
audiotest.audio
CJ Testfiles
IS!I
IS!I
testmai I.au d io
voicefi le.au d io
~--------------------~=
Show:
_A_"_F_ile_s_1A_U_diA~
,-I
II..,
="
Figure 11-2 Open Window
2. Double-click SELECT on the directory that contains the audio file you
want to hear.
3. Click SELECT on the name of the audio file.
4. Click SELECT on the Open button.
The audio file appears in Audio Tool's base window.
350
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
5. Press MENU on the Volume button and choose Play...
The Audio Control: Play window appears (Figure 11-3).
Audio Control: Play
I Speaker II Headphone II
Line Out
Play Volume: ~ ~
Balance:
Left
~
Right
Figure 11-3 Audio Control: Play Window
Note - Depending on the audio capabilities of your computer, you mayor may
not see all of the choices shown in the figure (e.g., if your computer does not
support stereo, the balance slider is not displayed)
6. Click SELECT on the Play button in Audio Tool's base window.
7. To adjust the volume, press SELECT on the Play Volume: slider in the
Audio Control: Play window and move the slider left (to lower the
volume) or right (to raise the volume).
Note that you can choose just a small segment of the sound file to be played.
To do this, click SELECT on the location in the recording where you want to
start, and click ADJUST at the end of the segment that you want to hear.
Recording Sound
To record an audio file, do the following:
1. If you're recording from a microphone, place the microphone near the
sound source.
2. Press MENU on the Volume button and choose Record ...
The Audio Control: Record window appears (Figure 11-4).
Audio Tool
351
o~
I
Audio Control: Record
M icrop hone
I
I
Line In
Press the A uto-A dj ust button to set the record vol u me
DDDDDDDDDD
Record Volume: ~ - - - - ( ] : = (Auto-Adjust)
Balance:
Left
Monitor Volume: _0_
~
0
Right
Figure 11-4 Audio Control: Record Window
3. In the Audio Control: Record window, select a source; either click
SELECT on the Microphone button or on the Line In button.
4. Click SELECT on the Auto-Adjust button, and speak into the microphone
for three to five seconds. Or, playa selection from the sound source that's
connected to your audio hardware's "line in."
Auto adjust automatically sets the recording level. You can also move the
Record Volume: slider to adjust the recording level manually.
5. Click SELECT on the Rec button in Audio Tool's base window.
The Rec button changes to Stop, as shown in Figure 11-5.
Audio Tool - Untitled [Modified]
~ ~ (volume '\7)
Rec becomes
Stop
Rev
Play
Fwd
Stop
Record i ng".
Figure 11-5 Record Button Changed to Stop
6. Begin speaking into the microphone or playing the music (or other sound
source).
352
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
7. When you have finished recording, click SELECT on the Stop button.
If you make a mistake, you can either choose File ~ New (which cannot be
undone) to clear all the sound data and start over, or you can edit the sound
later. Refer to "Editing an Audio File" on page 354 for information on how
to do this.
Saving an Audio File
To save your file, do the following:
1. Choose File ~ Save As ...
The Audio Tool: Save As window appears, as shown in Figure 11-6.
Audio Tool: Save As
Type in the path to the folder and press Return.
~ ------------
Use the scroll bar
to choose a
Current Folder:
/home/robertg/LatestA u d iotool
____________
;elect
a file or folder and click Open Folder. -,=
/
directory
~-----------~=
Save As: " " < i > - - - - - - - - -_ _ __
Format:
Compress:
@) 16-bit linear, 22.05kHz, stereo
@) None
File Size: 5.7 Mbytes (207.1 Mb Available)
Show:
~l_ile_s......1L-A_U_di_o_Fi_les--,1
( Open Folder)
(cancel)
( Save»
Figure 11-6 Saving a File in the Save As Window
2. Double-click SELECT on the directory destination for the file from the
scrolling directory list.
3. Type the file name in the Save As text field.
Audio Tool
353
4. Click MENU on the Format: menu button to choose an appropriate
format.
The current format is displayed next to the menu button.
5. Click MENU on the Compress: menu button to make a compression
choice.
The current compression setting is displayed next to the menu button.
6. Click SELECT on the Save button.
The file you named is saved in the selected directory.
You can cancel a file-save operation by clicking SELECT on the Cancel button
in the Save As window. Or, you can press the keyboard's Stop key while the
mouse cursor is in Audio Tool's base window.
To update the file that is being edited, follow the previous steps to modify the
file, then choose File ~ Save from Audio Tool's base window.
Editing an Audio File
Because you can see an audio file graphically, you can determine which
portions are sound and which are silence. This feature allows you to edit audio
files such as voice messages. For instance, you might want to edit out long
pauses (silence) between sentences or phrases. To modify the sound file, you
edit the audio file as you would edit a text file in Text Editor, using cut, copy,
and paste commands from the Edit menu.
To cut a portion of sound from one location and paste it in another, do the
following:
1. Click SELECT at the beginning of the sound portion you want to cut.
354
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
2. Click ADJUST at the end of the portion you want to cut.
Or, instead of steps 1 and 2, position the hairline cursor at the beginning of
the sound portion, hold down the SELECT mouse button, and drag the
pointer to the end of the portion.
That portion is highlighted, as shown in Figure 11-7.
Audio Tool - audio.test
~ ~
(Volume 'i7)
Pointer:
0:02.9
I~I
8[8800
Rev
Play
Fwd
Rec
Length: 0:07,9 [0:01 ,0]
Figure 11-7 Selecting a Portion to Cut
3. Choose Edit> Cut.
That portion is removed to the clipboard.
4. Click SELECT on the destination point for the portion of sound you cut.
S. Choose Edit> Paste.
The cut portion of sound is pasted into the new location, as shown in
Figure 11-8.
@)
Audio Tool - audio.test [Modified]
~ ~ (Volume'i7)
Poi nter:
1~I~O:O_O
,r______~IO_:05
8[88 00
__________
Rev
Play
Fwd
0:03.2
________
~
I
I
§
c.::J
Rec
Length: 0:07,9
Figure 11-8 Pasting the Sound Portion Back Into a File
Audio Tool
355
Undoing an Edit
• You can undo the last edit you made by choosing Edit
~
Undo.
Tips for Editing Audio Files
• In the display canvas, the granularity of selections is based on pixel width,
which depends on the length of the file that is loaded. You can stretch Audio
Tool's base window to see more detail when you are selecting segments.
• You may find it useful to use multiple Audio Tools. For example, you can
edit a small region of a large file by selecting a segment that is somewhat
larger than the region and copying the segment to another Audio Tool
display canvas. Then, you can easily edit the segment in the other Audio
Tool by stretching the tool to provide better pixel resolution. When you're
finished editing, you can copy the edited region back into the original
Audio Tool.
• You can also use multiple Audio Tools to assemble an audio track from
multiple sources.
Sending a Voice Mail Message
You can create an audio file from Mail Tool by selecting Attach ~ Voice ... in the
l\1f,,~1
.lVJ.UJ.J.
'T'",,1
J.VVJ.
r".,..,...
..... "" . . .
,"-VJ.J.t!-.IV':'C
TAT~ ..... ~"TAT
VVJ.J.LU.VVV.
'T'h
.....
J.J.LC
""~~" J:~1 ..... TT"" ,.., ......... ,,-1-..... ~" ..... "-I-".,..,... ..... -I-~,..,,,l1TT
UUU.J.V J.J.J.C
yvu
LJ.CULC .L':' UULV.LJ.LUULU.l.LY
h""
..... ~
VVU.LLLL
to Audio Tool and to an audio file glyph. The glyph is automatically attached
to an electronic mail message when you notify the application that you have
finished recording. The mail recipient can hear the contents of the audio file by
double-clicking SELECT on the audio attachment glyph from Mail Tool. Refer
to Chapter 4, "Multimedia Mail Tool" for information on using Mail Tool.
To record an audio file and attach it to a mail message, do the following:
1. Click SELECT on the Compose button in the Mail Tool control area, and
address the mail.
356
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
2. Click SELECT on the Attach ... > Voice ... button in the Mail Tool Compose
window control area.
The Audio Tool window appears, as shown in Figure 11-9. Note that the
mail button labeled "Done" appears only when Audio Tool is invoked from
the Mail Tool Attach button.
@)
AudioTool
- Untitled From mailtool
D
~ ~ (volume v)
Rev
Play
Fwd
Rec
5e lection Req uest: Com p lete d
Figure 11-9 Audio Tool Window Opened From the Mail Tool Compose Window
3. Record your voice message as described in the section, JJRecording
Sound" on page 351.
4. Make any editing changes, as described in the section, JJEditing an Audio
File" on page 354.
Audio Tool
357
5. Click SELECT on the Done button.
The audio attachment glyph appears in the Attachments window
(Figure 11-10).
Note also that if you have a pre-recorded message in Audio Tool that you
want to attach to a mail message, you can drag the file's glyph from Audio
Tool's drag and drop target to the Compose window's Attachments
subwindow.
@)
Mail Tool : Compose Message
~ (Deliver \7) (Header \7) ~
(Attach \7)
To: au diotest
Subject: au dio test fi Ie
Cc: ..
Attached is an audi 0 test fil e~
IL-------~~~~------------~--~--~=
Attachments
~ ~
, attachment (68664 bytes)
au~io-file_____
.Ll:_~
• __
Data Transfer: Completed
113=:
.8
Figure 11-10 Audio File Attached to a Mail Message
6. If needed, type in an additional message in the Compose text region.
7. Click SELECT on the Deliver button in the Mail Tool Compose window.
Listening to a Voice Mail Message
If you have a machine equipped with a built-in speaker or an attached speaker,
you can listen to the audio file by doing the following:
1. Open Mail Tool.
2. Double-click SELECT on the message header containing the attached
audio file in the Mail Tool base window.
The mail message containing the file is displayed in the View Message
window.
358
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
3. Double-dick SELECT on the audio attachment glyph in the view window
Attachments area.
The audio file opens and begins playing.
Audio Tool Reference
This part of the chapter provides information about Audio Tool's File, Edit,
and Volume menus.
Base Window
The Audio Tool base window, shown in Figure 11-11, contains all of the
controls needed to play, record, and edit a sound file.
Audio selection
Cursor and pointer locations
Play/Record position painter
Filename
Drag and drop target
0:01.4
0:02.9
Display canvas
Cu rsor mark
---11---+---1-'----+----'
Rev
Fwd
Rec
Format
Interval marking
Length of file
Status area
Recorded silent data
Recorded sound data
Level meter indicator
Figure 11-11 Audio Tool Base Window
Audio Tool
359
Audio Tool Icon
When you iconize the Audio Tool base window, you'll see the icon shown in
Figure 11-12. Double click SELECT on the icon to restore the window.
~
AudioTool
Figure 11-12 Audio Tool Icon
Display Canvas
The display canvas provides a region for the graphic representation of audio
data. Sound data is represented graphically as a box. Silence is represented as a
thin horizontal line.
Sound and silence data can be selected using the SELECT and ADJUST mouse
buttons. An entire sound or silence segment is selected by double-clicking
SELECT in the segment. Using ADJUST extends the selection to segment
boundaries or to the hairline cursor position. Triple-click SELECT to select the
entire audio file. (Audio selection in Audio Tool follows the same general
conventions that are used for text selection throughout the Open Windows
environment. )
In Figure 11-11, the selected audio data includes both sound and silence. Once
a segment has been selected, clicking SELECT on Play activates only that
selection.
Selected data can be dragged and dropped into other applications, such as
Mail Tool and File Manager, or other invocations of Audio Tool. Using multiple
Audio Tool windows enables you to assemble audio data from multiple files or
break large files into smaller sections. Audio attachments to a mail file are
discussed earlier in this chapter, as well as in the Mail Tool chapter.
Cursor and Pointer Location
Cursor and Pointer locations are displayed in the upper right corner of the
Audio Tool window with time offset of (MM:SS.d), where MM is minutes, SS is
seconds, and d is tenths of seconds. Whenever the mouse position marker is
360
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
moved into the display canvas (and when a file is loaded) the marker is shown
as a thin vertical line (hairline cursor), and its location is displayed as a time
offset. In Figure 11-11, the cursor is located near the beginning of the audio file,
location 0:01.4.
The Play/Record pointer information shows the location of the play/record
position pointer in the display canvas. The position pointer marks the data that
is currently being played, recorded, or where playing or recording will begin
when the Play or Rec button is pressed. It also marks where include, drag and
drop, and paste operations will occur. Clicking SELECT while the cursor is in
the canvas moves the pointer to the hairline cursor location.
Drag and Drop Target
The drag and drop target is where you can drop sound data into or drag sound
data out of Audio Tool. For example, you can drag and drop sound data to and
from the File Manager. Sound data dropped on the drag and drop target
replaces any data in the display canvas.
Press SELECT on the drag and drop target and drag out of the target to copy
the current audio file to another application.
When sound data is dropped directly into the display canvas, the data is
inserted at the play position pointer location. If data is selected (highlighted) in
the display canvas, the insertion occurs at that specific location, replacing the
selected data.
Level Meter
The level meter, which looks like an LED indicator, is active during play and
record. On color monitors, the indicators are green and red. During recording,
there should generally be 5-to-7 green LEDs displayed. If the red LEDs are lit
all of the time, the recording level is too high.
Status Information
The lower left corner of the Audio Tool window is the status message display
area. If any status information or error messages occur while using Audio Tool,
the information is displayed here. For example, the current audio format is
displayed there.
Audio Tool
361
511
The lower right corner of the Audio Tool window displays the length of a
recorded file (e.g., Length: 0:08.5). Whenever a sound segment is selected in the
display canvas, brackets appear indicating the length of the selection (e.g.,
Length: 0:08.5 [0:00.9]). These brackets also appear when recording is initiated,
and display the length of the newly recorded data (which is updated
periodically).
Rev (Reverse) Button
This button controls the backward movement of the play position pointer.
Click SELECT on the Rev button to move the play position pointer backward.
If there is no selection in the canvas, clicking SELECT on the Rev button causes
the pointer to jump backward, segment by segment, until it reaches the
beginning of the file. (A segment is the start of a sound "box" in the display
canvas.)
If there is a selection, the pointer's movement is constrained to the selection.
Hold down SELECT on the Rev button to play the selection in reverse at an
accelerated speed until you release SELECT or until the play position pointer
reaches the beginning of the selection.
Play Button
This button controls the playing of an audio file. If you've selected part of an
audio file, only that part of the file is played. Otherwise, the entire file is
played.
Click SELECT on the Play button to start playing from the current play
position pointer location to the end of the selection or file. If the play position
pointer is at the end of a selection or file, clicking SELECT on the Play button
moves the pointer to the beginning of the selection or file before playing starts.
Once selected, this button changes from Play to Stop, so to stop playing, click
SELECT on the Stop button.
If Auto Play on Selection in Audio Tool: Properties options is set "on," playing
starts automatically whenever you make a selection.
362
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Fwd (Fast Forward) Button
This button controls the forward movement of the play position pointer. Click
SELECT on the Fwd button to move the play position pointer forward.
If there is no selection in the canvas, clicking SELECT on the Fwd button
causes the pointer to jump forward, segment by segment, until it reaches the
end of the file.
If there is a selection, the pointer's movement is constrained to the selection.
Hold down SELECT on the Fwd button to play the selection at an accelerated
speed until you release SELECT or until the play position pointer reaches the
end of the selection.
Rec (Record)/Stop Button
This button controls the starting and stopping of recording. Click SELECT on
the Rec button to start recording at the current play position pointer location.
Recorded audio data is inserted into the sound file at the play position pointer.
The existing data is moved forward in the file-it is not overwritten. However,
if a sound segment is selected when record is activated, the selected segment is
cut from the audio file and placed on the clipboard.
Once selected, this button changes from Record to Stop, so to stop recording,
click SELECT on the Stop button.
You can click SELECT on New from the File menu to delete the current sound
and record from scratch.
Note - Clicking SELECT on the Play button during a recording session causes
the recording to stop and the segment that was just recorded to be
automatically selected and played back.
Audio Tool
363
File Menu
Items on the File menu handle opening, including, and saving files. Click
MENU on the File button to display the File menu.
Whenever a command cannot be performed, the corresponding menu item is
dimmed. For example, Save is dimmed when there is no new data to be saved.
New
Use the New menu to clear the current audio file or select a new audio data
format. Press MENU on New and drag to the right to display a pop-up menu
with format choices. (If you click SELECT on New, the display canvas is
cleared and retains the current format.) The selected audio format stays in
effect until the next New operation (or other operation that loads a new audio
file, such as Open). When recording a new file, you have the option of saving
in the current format or in a new format.
If there is an unsaved sound file in the display canvas, a confirmation message
appears, saying that the file is modified and asking if you want to discard the
edited data. Click SELECT on the Continue button to clear the display canvas
and begin recording. The confirmation message can be disabled in the Edit >Properties ... window.
You cannot undo a New operation.
Audio Format Choices
Click SELECT on the format of your choice. You can retain the current format
or choose one of the standard formats-Voice, CD, or DAT. (If an audio format
is not supported by the audio hardware, the corresponding menu item is
disabled.) User defined formats may also be included and you can choose New
Format... to define a new format.
364
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
New Format...
Click SELECT on the New Format... choice in the New menu to select, create,
or edit the characteristics of a recording format. The Audio Tool: New Format
window, shown in Figure 11-13, is displayed.
o-IFU
Audio Tool: New Format
Encoding:
Sample Rate:
Channels:
@J 16-bit linear
@J 8kHz
@J stereo
( New Format) ~
G
Figure 11-13 Audio Tool: New Format Window
Encoding:
Open this menu with a MENU click to select a type of encoding. Then, click
SELECT on your choice of 8-bit ~-law, 8-bit A-law, or 16-bit linear. The 16-bit
linear encoding provides better accuracy (signal-to-noise ratio) than the two
8-bit encodings. However, the 16-bit linear encoding requires twice the storage
capacity. Stereo audio data must use 16-bit linear encoding to play on a
machine with stereo capability.
Sample Rate:
Open this menu with a MENU click to select a sample rate. Higher sample
rates provide better high-frequency response (at the cost of larger file sizes).
Click SELECT on your choice.
Channels:
Open this menu with a MENU click and click SELECT on your choice of
channels (mono or stereo).
New Format Button
Click SELECT on the New Format button to clear the current audio file and
reset the data format to match the currently selected audio format.
Audio Tool
365
=11
Reset Button
Click SELECT on the Reset button to restore the panel so that it displays the
current audio format.
+ Button
Click SELECT on the + button in the New Format window to display an
extended window, shown in Figure 11-14. The Format scrolling list displays the
formats available to you. Note that formats are stored on a per-user basis, so
that the formats listed (other than the standard Voice, CD, and DAT) have been
created under your user name.
Note - Audio formats and preferences are stored in the $HOME/ . audiorc file
(where $HOME is the name of your home directory).
You can use the New Format window to name a format type to appear in the
New and Save As ... menus. You can also use this window to add, change, or
delete an audio format.
Click SELECT the - button to close the extended part of the New Format
window.
Audio Tool: New Format
O-{l;O
Encod i n9:
@)
16-bit linear
Sample Rate:
@)
44.1 kHz
Channels:
@)
stereo
( New Format) ~
Format:
I Voice Format
Ico Format
OAT Format
new format
(2) 8
Name: CD Format.,
18
~
I l!J ~
=I
( Change)
Figure 11-14 New Format Window Extensions
To create a new format:
1. Select the new format's encoding, sample rate, and number of channels
from the lefthand part of the window.
2. Type the new format's name in the Name: field.
366
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
3. Click SELECT on the Add button.
The new format is added to the bottom of the list. To add the new format
elsewhere, click MENU on Add and choose Before, After, Top, or Bottom.
The new format will appear in the list of formats.
Open ...
Open ... enables you to open a directory or file. Click SELECT on the Open ...
menu item to display the Audio Tool: Open window, shown in Figure 11-15.
This window contains a "browser" that can be used to locate particular
directories within a file system.
..,
Audio Tool: Open
Ty pe in the path to the fol der an d press Return,
~.---------------------Current Folder:
/dO/aud io/Getfi les
Select a file or folder and click Open,
~~,~"G~O~u~p~on~e~fo~ld~e~r,,~,________~ ~:
iI audio,test
~
~ audiotest.audio
o Testfiles
~ testmail.audio
~ voicefi Ie, au dio
~--------------------~=
Show:
il~
L-I_A_"_F_i
le_s---.J1.....A_U_d
Figure 11-15 Audio Tool: Open Window
Audio Tool
367
Co To:
To change directories, type the pathname of the new directory in the Go To:
field, then click SELECT on the Go To: button or press Return. Notice that if
you click MENU on the Go To: button, a directory stack is displayed that
includes the recently visited directories, as well as the directories specified in
the AUDIOPATH environment variable.
Path Scrolling List
The scrolling list displays the names of directories and files. Double-click
SELECT on the first item in the scrolling list to move to the parent directory.
Double-click SELECT on any of the directories in the scrolling list (indicated by
folder icons) to change the current directory.
All Files Button and Audio Files Button
If you click SELECT on the All Files button, the path scrolling list displays the
names of all directories and files. However, non-audio files are dimmed and
cannot be loaded.
If you click SELECT on the Audio Files button, the scrolling list displays the
names of audio files only; other file types are omitted from the display.
Open Button
Click SELECT on this button to open the specified audio file and load it into
Audio Tool's display canvas. If the selected item is a directory, click SELECT to
open the directory.
You can also open a sound file by following these steps.
1. Scroll to the directory that contains the specific file.
2. Double-click SELECT on the directory.
3. Double-click SELECT on the audio file icon glyph.
The specified file is loaded into the display canvas.
368
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Note - If the audio hardware of your computer does not support the audio
format of a file that you're trying to open, Audio Tool displays the conversion
pop-up shown in Figure 11-16.
The au d io fi Ie format is i ncom pati b Ie with the au d io dev ice. You may:
Convert to a p layab Ie format an d load as a new fi Ie,
Load the file as is (play and record will be disabled), or
Cance I th is operation.
Figure 11-16 File Conversion Pop-Up
Click SELECT on the Convert button to convert the file into a format that is
supported by your computer's hardware. Click SELECT on the Load button to
load the file into Audio Tool's canvas. If you load the file, you will not be able
to play it. However, you can perform editing operations on the file (such as
cutting and pasting segments) and save the result into a new format.
Cancel Button
Click SELECT this button to close the Open window.
If you open a compressed audio file, the conversion can take a long time. The
Cancel button remains active and can be used to cancel the in-progress load
conversion.
Save
Save enables you to save changes made to the current audio file. Click SELECT
on the Save menu item to save the file.
If a file has been named and previously saved, clicking SELECT on Save
replaces the old copy with the current version.
If the audio data has not been saved previously, or has not yet been edited, the
Audio Tool: Save As window is displayed. The Save item is dimmed if no
audio file is loaded (following a New operation, for example) or if the audio
file has not been edited since a previous Save.
Audio Tool
369
211
SaveAs ...
Save As ... enables you to save a copy of the current sound file to a new file.
Click SELECT on the Save As ... menu item to display the Audio Tool: Save As
window (Figure 11-17). To save a file, enter its name into the Save As field and
click SELECT on the Save button.
Audio Tool: Save As
Ty pe in the path to the fol der an d press Return.
~ -----------Current Folder:
/dO/au d io/Getfiles
Select a file or folder and click Open Folder.
~~~... G~O~u~p_o_ne_f~o~ld_er_... _ _ _ _ _~ ~..
13
o Testfiles
~-----------~~
Save As: . newaudio.voic%.
Format:
Compress:
@)
@)
Voice Format
None
File Size: .20 Mbytes (67.2 M b Available)
Show:
_A_I_IF_il_es--,I_A_Ud_il~
,-I
(open Folder)
(Cancel)
[Save»)
Figure 11-17 Audio Tool: Save As Window
The Go To: button and field, Current Folder: field, scrolling list, All Files and
Audio Files buttons, and the Cancel button work the same as their
counterparts in the Open window. The Save As window has additional items
that the Open window does not have. Use the Format: and Compress: menus
to save an audio file in different formats.
370
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Format:
Click MENU on the Format button to display the list of formats. The standard
formats are Current, Voice, DAT, or CD. Click SELECT on Current Format to
match the format that is being used in the display canvas.
In the list of formats, click SELECT on New Format ... to display the Audio
Tool: Save Format window (Figure 11-18). Use the selections in this window to
save the audio data in a different format. The buttons in the window work the
same as the buttons in the Audio Tool: New Format window (described on
page 365).
o-Q::ll
Audio Tool: Save Format
Encoding:
@) 16-bit linear
Sample Rate:
@) 8kHz
Channels:
@) mono
( Save Format) ~
Q)
Figure 11-18 Audio Tool: Save Format Window
Compress:
Click MENU on the Compress button to display a list of compression
techniques. The choices are:
• None-no compression. This choice provides the best audio quality, loads
and saves files the fastest, but consumes the most disk space.
• 4-bit G.721 ADPCM-2:1 compression. This is a good choice for voice files
and adequate for music. It uses 50% less disk space than no compression.
• 3-bit G.723 ADPCM-8:3 compression. This is an adequate choice for voice
files, but may be unacceptable for some music. It uses 62.5% less space than
no compression.
If the size of a file is a concern, choose compression. If loading time is a
concern, choose no compression. A compressed file uses less disk space but
requires additional loading time because it must be decompressed before it is
used. Also, if you choose to compress a file, the audio encoding specified by
Audio Tool
371
New Format... is ignored. When you load a compressed file, the format may
change from its previous choice (e.g., if you compress an A-law file and reload,
the file format changes to /.l-law).
File Size:
The File Size field displays the storage requirements of the file (when Audio
Tool writes it to disk) and the amount of free disk space that you have
available in the file system that contains the selected folder.
Open Folder
Click SELECT on the Open Folder button to open a folder that you have
selected in the file scrolling list.
Cancel Button
Click SELECT on the Cancel button to close the Save As window.
If you save a compressed audio file, the conversion can take a long time. The
Cancel button remains active and can be used to cancel the in-progress save
conversion.
Save Button
Click SELECT on this button to save the specified audio file. If the file selection
is not made, this button is dimmed.
Include ...
Include ... enables you to insert audio data from another file into the current
file. Click SELECT on the Include ... menu item to display the Audio Tool:
Include window. This window is similar to the Open window shown in
Figure 11-15 on page 367, with the Include button replacing the Open button,
and the addition of the Open Folder button. Choose the file you want to
include, then click SELECT on the Include button to insert the selected file into
the display canvas at the play position pointer. Note that if the file selection is
not made, the Include button is dimmed.
372
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Note - You can include only files whose formats match the current audio
format. All other files are dimmed (if All Files is selected) or are removed from
the scrolling list (if Audio Files is selected).
Edit Menu
The commands on the Edit menu are common to most DeskSet tools. Click
MENU on the Edit button to display the Edit menu.
Whenever a command cannot be performed, the corresponding menu item is
dimmed. For example, Undo is dimmed when there are no editing operations
to undo.
Clear
The Clear command removes the current sound data from the display canvas.
Click SELECT on Clear when you want to delete all the data in the canvas.
Note - The clear operation does not change the name of the file that's being
edited. Take care not to accidentally save an empty canvas to an audio file.
The clear operation can be undone, and the audio data is retained so that it can
be used by a Redo operation. However, since newly recorded data consumes
space in the temp file directory, you might consider using the File >- New
operation. This operation, which cannot be undone, recovers the unused space
in the file system.
Undo
The Undo command reverses the effects of the last editing command issued.
Click MENU on Undo to display the Undo submenu, which has the following
options:
• Last Edit-Restores the previous data prior to the last change. This is the
default action for Undo.
• All Edits-Restores all edited changes to their state as of the last time the
audio file was saved, loaded, or cleared.
Audio Tool
373
Redo
The Redo command restores the effects of the Undo command. Click MENU on
Redo to display the Redo submenu, which has the following options:
• Last Undo-Restores the previously revised data. This is the default action
for Redo.
• All Undos-Restores all edited changes.
Making edits to the audio buffer clears any subsequent editing history in the
redo list.
Cut
The Cut command removes the current selection from your sound file and
places it on the clipboard. Click SELECT on Cut to cut the selection.
Copy
The Copy command copies the current selection to the clipboard, without
modifying the original sound file. Click SELECT on Copy to copy the selection.
Paste
The Paste command pastes data currently stored on the clipboard into the
current audio file at the location specified by the play position pointer. For
example, after doing a Cut or Copy, the next step is often to paste the stored
data to some new location. Click SELECT on Paste to paste the selection.
Delete
The Delete command removes the current selection from the sound file,
without modifying the contents of the clipboard. Use Delete instead of Cut
when something is on the clipboard that should not be overwritten or when
you are sure you do not want to use the selection again.
374
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Click MENU on Delete to display the Delete submenu with the following
options:
• Selection-This is the default, which deletes the current audio selection.
• Unselected-This option deletes everything that is not selected. This enables
you to select the part of an audio segment that you want, then delete the
parts that you don't want.
• All Silence-This option deletes all silent segments, which are indicated by
horizontal lines. This is useful, for example, when you are sending or
storing voice mail.
• Silent Ends-This option deletes only the silent segments at the beginning
and end of the file. This enables you to remove a pause that occurs between
the time you press the Rec button and start talking, or the pause between
the time that you stop talking and press the Stop button.
Properties
Properties ... enables you to modify the functionality of Audio Tool. Click
SELECT on this menu item to display the Audio Tool: Properties window,
shown in Figure 11-19.
0-0:11
Audio Tool: Properties
Auto Play on Load: ~
Auto Play on Selection:
0
Confirm on New/Load: ~
Silence Detection: ~
Silence Threshold:
Temp file directory:
~
~
,-,/t=m.!lll>!l..~ _ __
Figure 11-19 Audio Tool: Properties Window
Audio Tool
375
The controls on the Audio Tool: Properties window are described in the
following paragraphs.
• Auto Play on Load:-Causes Audio Tool to begin playing files as soon as
they are loaded or dragged and dropped onto the drop target.
• Auto Play on Selection:-Causes selections to be played immediately after a
selection is made. This option can be useful when you are working on a
specific editing task because the entire selection replays each time that you
make or change a selection.
• Confirm on New /Load:-Causes a confirmation message to be displayed if
a file contains unsaved data when a New or Load operation is performed.
• Silence Detection:-Turns silence detection ON or OFF. If this option is
turned off, no silence detection occurs and the entire audio file is displayed
as a single sound segment. Turning off this option speeds up the time it
takes to load an audio file.
Note - Silence detection is automatically suppressed for audio file formats that
have a sample rate greater than 16kHz, regardless of the silence detection
setting in the Edit ~ Properties ... window.
• Silence Threshold:-Changes the parameters for silence detection. Moving
the slider to the left increases the sensitivity to short pauses. This should
increase the number of sound and silence segments. Moving the slider to the
right decreases the sensitivity to short pauses. This should decrease the
number of segments.
• Temp file directory:-This displays the name of the directory where
temporary sound files are placed. All newly recorded data is stored in this
directory until the data is saved.
Note - Recorded audio can quickly use up disk space. Set the temp file
directory to a file system that contains adequate disk space. Also, if you are
using high sampling rates (e.g., CD or DAT format), you may have difficulty
recording to a remotely mounted temp file system.
376
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
In addition, there are two buttons at the bottom of the Properties window,
Apply and Reset. Use these buttons as follows:
• Click SELECT on Apply to apply all changes made in the Properties
window.
• Click SELECT on Reset to restore all parameters to their original value, as
set by the last Apply operation.
Edit Pop-Up Menu
A pop-up menu with commonly-used audio editing commands is available
when you click MENU in the display canvas (Figure 11-20). Note that many of
these choices also appear in the Edit menu under Clear and Delete.
Audio Tool - maintalk.au
0:02.5
0:05.3
Delete Unselected
Delete All Silence
Delete Silent Ends
Rev
Play
Select All
Voice Format
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
c:=::J
Length: 0:08.5 [0:01.9]
Figure 11-20 Edit Pop-Up Menu
Reset Pointer
This command clears the current selection and places the pointer at the
beginning of the file.
Clear
This command removes the current sound data from the display canvas.
Delete Unselected
This command deletes everything in the display canvas that is not selected.
Audio Tool
377
Delete All Silence
This command deletes all silent segments (which are indicated by horizontal
lines).
Delete Silent Ends
This command deletes only the silent segments at the beginning and end of the
file.
Select All
This command selects all of the audio data in the display canvas. This is the
same as triple-clicking SELECT in the display canvas.
Volume Menu
The Volume menu has options for controlling play volume and recording level.
These functions are part of Audio Control-a separate application that
cooperates with Audio Tool. Click MENU on Volume to display these options.
Play...
Play... controls audio output. Click SELECT on Play... to display the Audio
Control: Play window, shown in Figure 11-21. The controls on this panel affect
the entire desktop audio environment.
Audio Control: Play
I
Speaker
II Headphone II
Play Volume: ~
Balance:
Left
Line Out
-=:F==
~
~
Right
Figure 11-21 Audio Control: Play Window
Note - Depending on the audio capabilities of your computer, you mayor may
not see all of the choices shown in the figure (e.g., if your computer does not
support stereo, the balance slider is not displayed)
378
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Speaker, Headphone, and Line Out Buttons
Click SELECT on these buttons to select audio output devices.
The buttons that are available depend on your hardware configuration. For
example, some configurations support only speakers and headphones. Other
configurations support all three devices, and some configurations allow you to
select more than one device at a time. Also, some configurations recognize
whether a plug has been inserted into a jack. In these configurations, the
corresponding button is dimmed when no plug is inserted into a jack.
Play Volume
This slider controls the audio output volume. You can also type in a volume
level (0-100).
Balance
If your computer has stereo capability, use the Balance slider to adjust the
balance. The slider has a "detent" at the 50-50 balance point.
Record ...
This button displays the Audio Control: Record window, which is described in
"Record ... " on page 379.
Mute
This button mutes the audio output to the selected devices. The audio file or
selected audio segment continues to play. Click SELECT on the button to turn
off muting so that you can hear the audio. Audio Tool turns muting off when
you adjust the play volume.
Record ...
Record ... controls the adjustment of volume gain during recording. Click
SELECT on Record ... to display the Audio Control: Record window, shown in
Figure 11-22.
Audio Tool
379
Note - If recording difficulty is experienced with a commercial microphone,
use an external pre-amp to boost the recording gain level.
o~
Audio Control: Record
IMicrophone I
Line In
I
Press the Auto-A dj ust button to set the record vol u me
0000000000
Record Volume:
Balance:
3 - ---G===
Left
Monitor Volume: 0
~
(Auto-Adjust)
Right
0
Figure 11-22 Audio Control: Record Window
Microphone and Line In Buttons
Click SELECT on one of these buttons to select an audio input device (if they
are supported by your hardware configuration).
Record Volume:
This slider controls the recording volume gain. You can also type in a volume
level (0-100).
Balance:
If your computer has stereo capability, you can use the Balance slider to adjust
the balance. The slider has a "detent" at the 50-50 balance point. Typically,
you'll only want to change the record balance if your audio inputs are not at
the same level.
Before adjusting the record balance, make sure that the play balance is
calibrated for your output configuration. You can do this by using the Audio
Tool: Save As window to convert a monaural file to stereo and then adjusting
the play balance until the left and right speakers produce the same output
level.
380
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
11
--
Once the play balance is calibrated, you can record a segment of audio data
and play it back to determine if the record balance is correct.
Note - On systems that support the monitor function, the record balance may
not affect the monitor output. To determine the actual effect of record-balance
changes, you must record and play back a sample of stereo audio.
Monitor Volume:
This slider controls the volume of the audio input signal that is channeled
through the output port. (You can also type in a monitor-volume level (0-100).)
This is useful when an audio source, such as a CD player or tape deck, is
connected to the selected input jack. By adjusting the monitor volume, the
audio input is heard without having to record any data.
Auto-Adjust Button
This button enables you to automatically set the optimum recording level. This
is recommended before a recording session begins or whenever the
microphone is moved or the input source is changed.
Click SELECT on Auto-Adjust to initiate scanning of the input sound data to
determine its loudness. The current level of the input signal is examined and, if
necessary, minor adjustments are made to set a Record level. If no signal is
found, the Record level jumps to the maximum, then automatically adjusts
down until the optimal level is achieved. An LED-like input level meter
displays the sound level. During the auto-adjust operation, no data is recorded.
The auto-adjust procedure continues until a satisfactory level has been
maintained for three to five seconds.
To adjust the level of your voice, talk into the microphone in a normal speaking
voice. Speak continuously during the entire time (for instance, counting) until
the auto-adjust operation ends. If the input signal does not register on the level
meter, check the ON/OFF switch on the microphone or replace the microphone
battery.
You should also use the auto-adjust operation to set the optimal recording level
for input sources connected directly to the microphone jack, such as a CD
player or tape deck. For best results, play the loudest section of your audio
Audio Tool
381
source during the auto-adjust operation. You can use the Monitor Volume to
listen to the source while you are setting the volume level (as well as while you
are recording).
Note - If you cannot achieve a satisfactory signal level with a commercial
microphone, it may be necessary to speak closer to the microphone, or to
obtain a microphone preamplifier.
Using the Audio Control Status Panel
The Audio Control application includes a status window that displays the
current state of the audio device. The status window provides information that
can be useful for debugging audio applications and for determining whether
applications are holding an audio device open.
To display the status window (Figure 11-23), click MENU in the background of
the Audio Control: Play or Audio Control: Record windows, then click
SELECT on the Status ... button. The check boxes display the status of the tool.
(The check boxes are informational; you cannot modify them.)
Click SELECT on the Status Change button to cause the displays to be updated
only when one of the status items changes. Click SELECT on the Continuous
button to cause the displays to be updated continuously. Refer to the
audio (7) rP..anual page for a description of status indicators.
~
Audio Control: Idev/audio Status
Play Status
Record Status
~ Open
0
0
0
Paused
~ Active
0
0
0
0
0
Underflow
Ope n-Waiti ng
EOF Count: 0
Samples: 0
I
Status Change
Paused
Active
Overflow
Ope n-Waiti ng
Samples: 0
In p ut De lay: 0.125 secs
Encoding: 16-bit linear
Sample Rate: 11.025kHz
Channels: stereo
Update:
Open
Encoding: 16-bit linear
Sample Rate: 11.025kHz
Chan ne Is: stereo
I
Continuous
I
Figure 11-23 Audio Control: Status Window
382
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Tape Tool
Tape Tool enables you to copy files and directories onto a tape cartridge. You
may need to do this to make backup copies or to archive files that you want to
retain but that you do not need on a regular basis. Or, you may need to copy
files or directories onto tape in order to pass them on to someone else with a
compatible system who can then extract them from the tape.
Tape Tool provides a user interface to the UNIX tar tape archiving and
retrieval functions. Refer to the manual page for tar for more detailed
information.
Note - Tape Tool is not intended to be an all-purpose system backup tool. It
cannot read tapes that have been written using the epio command.
• To open Tape Tool, choose Workspace
~
Programs
~
Tape Tool.
Tape Tool Icon
The Tape Tool icon has an image of a tape cartridge, as shown in Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Tape Tool Icon
383
-- 12
You can select files and folders from the File Manager to be archived on tape.
You can drag and drop them as a group or individually onto the Tape Tool icon
or onto the open Tape Tool window to accumulate a list of files to be written to
a tape or archive file.
Tape Tool Window
The Tape Tool base window is shown in Figure 12-2.
Tapetool
Drag and drop
target
Lists files on
the tape
Copies files
from the tape
Tape Tool
Properties
Desti natio n: Ihome/bookhouse/bre n da
Location
of files
or destination of
files read from
the tape
Scrolling
window for
listing files
to write
16
Local Host
J
Figure 12-2 Tape Tool Window
You can perform the following operations from the Tape Tool window:
• List the files from a streaming tape cartridge or archive file that have been
archived using the tar command.
• Read some or all of the files from the tape or archive file into the directory
that you specify.
• Write specific files or directories that you specify onto a streaming tape
cartridge or into an archive file.
384
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Display a window in which you set the properties for the tar command
from the Tape Tool Properties window.
The control area provides controls for listing, reading to tape, writing from
tape, and setting Tape Tool properties.
Use the File To Write button and text field to type in the names of files that you
want to write to tape. The scrolling list displays a list of the files you specify by
typing file names or by dragging and dropping icons from the File Manager.
If files were archived without a path name or with a relative path name, you
can specify in the Destination field where those files are put in your file system
when they are read from the tape. The default destination is your current
working directory.
If the files on a tape have a complete path name (absolute path name), the files
are always put in the directory specified on the tape, regardless of what you
type in the Destination field. To strip files of their absolute path name when
you archive them, set the Strip Path option in the Tape Tool Properties window
to All and click SELECT on the Apply button.
Each of the Tape Tool operations is described in more detail in the following
sections.
Editing the List of Files in the Tape Contents Window
Once the files are listed (by pressing the List button) in the Tape Contents
window, you can retrieve all of the files in the list, retrieve specific selected
files, or edit the list to remove files you do not want to retrieve.
The Tape Contents window has a Read Functions pop-up menu, shown in
Figure 12-3. To display this menu, move the pointer into the Tape Contents
window and press MENU.
Tape Tool
385
!9
Tapetool: Tape Contents/Files to Read
( File To Read:) ,
lusr2/bre n da/. defal Read Fu nctio ns
lusr2/brenda/.exr~ Select All
)
I/usr2/bre n da/. h ist
lusr2/bre n da/.log i ~ Deselect AII
I/usr2/bre n da/.logoj De lete Se lecte d
lusr2/bre n da/. mai Ir....
lusr2/bre n da/. newsrc
I/usr2/bre n da/.record
I~
I
I
CJ
....
Figure 12-3 Read Functions Pop-up Menu in the Tape Contents Window
Select All from the Read Functions menu selects all files on the tape.
You can edit a group of files by clicking SELECT on the name of each file that
you want to delete. Clicking SELECT on a selected file deselects it. Files such as
group, licenses, and passwd are highlighted, as shown in Figure 12-4.
!9
Tapetoo I: Tape Co nte nts/Files to Read
( File To Read:) ..
t fstab
~roup
I
nosts
!Iicenses
passwd
printcap
II~
u
I
lusr2/bre n da/dose d
CJ
Figure 12-4 Selected Files to Read (group, licenses, and passwd)
Delete Selected from the Read Functions pop-up menu removes these files
from the list. Choose Select All and then Delete Selected from the pop-up menu
to delete all the files from the list.
To restore an accidentally deleted file, add it back to the list by typing the file
name in the File To Read text field, then press the Return key or click SELECT
on the File To Read button.
These functions prepare the scrolling list for an operation from the Read menu
described in the next section.
386
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Reading Files from a Tape
The Read menu, available from the Read button at the top of the Tape Tool
base window, has three options to read files from the tape or archive files to the
directory specified in the Tape Tool window.
Caution - When you read files that have a path name in front of them (an
absolute path name), as shown in the Tape Contents list, that path name is
always used as the destination.
If the files are not preceded by a file name, the directory you specify in the
Destination text field is used as the destination.
Read Selected
When you have listed the contents of a tape and selected all or some of the
files, choosing Selected from the Read menu copies the specified files to the
destination directory shown in the control area.
When you have not listed the contents of a tape, choosing Selected displays the
Tape Contents window without a listing. If you know the names of specific
files that you want to retrieve, you can type a name in the File To Read text
field, then press the Return key or click SELECT on the File To Read button to
add them to the list.
Read Entire List
When you have listed the files from a tape, choosing Entire List from the Read
menu reads the entire list of files from the Tape Contents window.
When you have not listed the contents of a tape, choosing Entire List displays
the Tape Contents window without a listing.
While the files are being read, messages are displayed in the footer of the Tape
Tool window showing you the percentage of files that have been read. As the
files are read, they are removed from the Tape Contents window. When the
process is complete, a message is displayed in the footer of the Tape Tool
window telling you how many files were read.
Tape Tool
387
512
If there are a large number of files, it may take several minutes for the files to
be copied to your system.
Read Entire Tape
Choosing Entire Tape from the Read menu copies all of the files on the tape to
the destination directory without displaying the Tape Contents window.
Copying (Writing) Files onto Tape
To copy (write) one or more files or directories onto a tape cartridge:
1. Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties
window and confirm that you have the correct options set.
You should check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you write files
to a tape, since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start it
up again.
2. Check the tape to be sure that it is not write-protected.
3. Insert a blank tape into your tape drive.
Alternatively, you can use a tape containing data that are no longer needed.
Caution - Any data on the tape will be overwritten by the new data.
4. Click SELECT on the files or directories in a File Manager file pane that
you want to copy onto tape.
Use ADJUST to select additional files or directories.
5. Drag and drop the files onto the Tape Tool drag and drop target and
release.
Press SELECT and use the pointer to move the file or directory icon across
the Workspace to the Tape Tool target.
Alternatively, you can type the name of a directory or of an individual file in
the File To Write text field and then press the Return key or click SELECT on
the File To Write button. The files or directories you have chosen are listed
in the Tape Tool window pane, as shown in the example in Figure 12-5.
When you see the directory in the scroll box, select it.
388
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
12=
,r @)
Tapetoo I
~ (Read
'J)
(Write) ~
o
(File To Write:) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Destination: !..,;./h.;,.,:;o"'-'-m;..:;.e.:...<./j=ayc...:,.n'-"'l%"--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
[j
[j
[j
[j
/home/jay na/arch ive. information
/home/jayna/news
/home/jayna/projects
/home/jay na/protocol
~------------------~~
't
Local Host
Figure 12-5 Files to be Copied to Tape
6. Click SELECT on the Write button in the Tape Tool window.
The file listing is cleared from the window pane when the copy is complete.
Because the files are copied, the original data remain on your system. If you are
archiving the files to free up disk space, you then need to delete the files from
your system. Before removing the files, refer to, "Checking the Tape Contents"
on page 389.
Checking the Tape Contents
Before deleting the backup files from your system, make certain that the copy
occurred. At any time, you can list the files on a tape as follows:
1. Insert the tape into the tape drive.
2. Click SELECT on the List button in the Tape Tool base window.
In a few moments, the contents of the tape are listed in the Tape Contents
window pane. Messages in the footer tell you how many files have been
found.
Tape Tool
389
Retrieving (Reading) Files from a Tape
The following three sections describe three methods of retrieving (reading) files
from a tape. The method you choose depends upon whether you want to
retrieve a small portion of the files, a large portion, or all of the files from the
tape.
Retrieving a Portion of the Files from a Tape
To retrieve a particular portion of the archived files from a tape cartridge
(providing they were initially archived with the SunOS tar command, or
through Tape Tool), follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties
window and confirm that you have the correct options set.
You may want to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you
retrieve files, since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start
it up again.
2. Insert the tape into the tape drive.
3. Click SELECT on the List button in the Tape Tool window.
A Tape Contents window displays listing the files on the tape. If there are a
large number of files, it may take several minutes for the listing to be
complete. Figure 12-6 shows a list of files in Tape Tool's scrolling window.
r-'jp
"1
Tapetool: Tape Contents/Files to Read
(File To Read:) cP.
I/home/jay na/news
/home/jay na/protocol
!/home/jay na/arch ive. information
/home/jay na/projects
I-t
~
! ...'"
c::::J
1.
,.J
Figure 12-6 File Listing from a Tape Showing Two Files Selected
390
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Selected files
have an outline
4. Click SELECT on the files you want to retrieve from the list.
S. Type the destination path, if necessary.
If you want the destination path to be somewhere other than the path you
specified when the files were written (copied) to the tape, type it in the
Destination text field.
6. Choose Read ~ Selected from the Tape Tool base window.
Alternatively, because the Selected option is the default, you can just click
SELECT on the Read menu button.
Retrieving Most of the Files from a Tape
If you have a long list of files, and you want to retrieve all but a few of them:
1. Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties
window and confirm that you have the correct options set.
You may want to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you
retrieve files, since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start
it up again.
2. Insert the tape into the tape drive.
3. Click SELECT on the List button in the Tape Tool base window.
4. Deselect the files you do not want in the Tape Contents window.
Click SELECT on those files that you do not want to include in the file
extraction.
~ Selected from the Tape Contents window Read
Functions menu.
The files you have selected are removed from the list.
S. Choose Delete
6. Choose Read ~ Entire List from the Tape Tool base window.
The files remaining in the list are extracted from the tape.
If you have archived a group of files, you can retrieve the whole group or just
a few of them. Unless you removed or changed the path names of the files
when you archived them, they are automatically restored to their original
directories. (If you have removed or changed the path names, then the files are
restored to the new paths with which you archived them.)
Tape Tool
391
Retrieving All Files from a Tape
If you want to retrieve everything on the tape and do not want to list the
contents first:
1. Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties
window and confirm that you have the correct options set.
You may want to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you
retrieve files, since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start
it up again.
2. Insert the tape in the tape drive.
3. Choose Read> Entire Tape.
The contents of the entire tape are copied onto your system.
Customizing the Tape Tool
Before you read to or write from a tape or archive file, you may want to
confirm that the properties you want to use are set correctly, as shown in
Figure 12-7 .
• To display the Properties window, click SELECT on the Props button.
392
Safaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
12
--
Tapetoo I: Pro pertles
Device: /dev/rmt/Omb.
Host Name: .:....:.riv'-".e,-r_ _ __
Tar options
Write:
Strip Path:
I No sees I I No sees+ I IBlock I/O
ISym Links II Show Errs I ISuppress
I None I All I Pattern I
I No Check I I Mod Time I IOrig Mode I
Other: I Err Ex it I IExcl u de I
Read:
Figure 12-7 Tape Tool Properties Window
• Device text field identifies the tape drive to your system. The most common
device numbers for a tape drive are / dev / rrnt / Ornb (rn is for medium
density) and /dev/rrnt/01b (1 is for low density). Alternatively, you can
specify a file name in this field if you wish to read or write files to and from
one big archive file instead of a tape.
• Host Name text field identifies the name of the workstation where the
reading or archiving of files is to take place. The default value is your local
host name.
• Write sets none, some, or all of the options listed here:
• No sees excludes all sees directories.
• No sees+ excludes all sees directories, files with a suffix. a, and files
named errs, core, and a. out.
• Block I/O specifies a blocking factor for better throughput. When you
click SELECT on this setting, a text field is displayed in which you can
type the blocking factor you want Tape Tool to use.
• Sym Links follows symbolic links as if they were normal files.
• Show Errs displays error messages if all links to archived files cannot be
resolved.
Tape Tool
393
• Suppress suppresses information showing owner and file modes.
• Strip Path settings determine whether selected files are stripped completely
of their path names, use complete path names, or use a specific path name.
When you click SELECT on Pattern, a text field is displayed in which you
can type the name of a path to use for all the files.
• Read sets none, some, or all of the options listed here:
• No Check ignores directory checksum errors.
• Mod Time prevents Tape Tool from resetting the modification time of files
that it reads from the tape.
• Orig Mode restores the named files to their original mode, ignoring the
default umask setting of 2.
• Other sets none, one, or both of the following options for both read and
write operations:
• Err Exit exits the operation as soon as an error is encountered.
• Exclude to specifies a file name that contains a list of files and/or
directories that you want to exclude from reading from the tape. This item
can be useful when the tape contains many files and you want to retrieve
all but a few of them.
When you have set the options you want, click SELECT on the Apply button to
apply the changes. These options will remain in effect until you quit the Tape
Tool application.
394
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Image Tool
Image Tool is an application that you can use to view multiple page documents
(such as PostScript files) and single page image files (such as Sun Raster). You
can also use it to manipulate or translate a file. Image Tool works with other
DeskSet applications such as Mail Tool and Snapshot.
Image Tool is the default viewer for Mail Tool, so if you receive (and open) an
attached multiple page document (for example), Mail Tool launches Image Tool
to display the attachment. Once you have taken a picture of an image with
Snapshot, you can view it, manipulate it, or print it using Image Tool. For
complete information on Snapshot, refer to Chapter 14, "Snapshot."
Image Tool works with color and monochrome monitors. Color monitors vary
in their ability to display color, so Image Tool adapts color images to suit the
type of monitor. Monochrome monitors display all images in black and white.
Color monitors may display images in fewer colors than the original. For
example, a 24-bit image appears on an 8-bit color monitor as an 8-bit color
image.
This Chapter describes how to use Image Tool to:
• Open an image or document for viewing
• Save an image file (in the same or different format)
• Print an image or document
• Use the Image Tool palette to manipulate a document
• To open Image Tool, choose Workspace
~
Programs
~
Image Tool.
395
Image Tool Icon and Window
The Image Tool icon is shown in Figure 13-1, and the Image Tool View window
is shown in Figure 13-2. The icon includes a file name if the View window
contains an image.
ri}l
~
Figure 13-1 The Image Tool Icon
@)
Menu
Image Tool
File: Fish
buttonc-------I---,,::::;::;-;-:~
Drag and Drop Target
Paging Up and Down
buttons - Become active
with a multiple page
document
Help butto
_-I-I--I-View Window
OGIIBI-----------------------------------O=
Figure 13-2 Image Tool Base Window
396
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Opening Image Files and Documents
There are several ways to open (or display) an image for viewing, depending
on your starting point:
• Open an image by selecting File~Open.
See Chapter I, "Introduction to the Solaris User Environment", for standard
information on opening a file.
• In Mail Tool, open an attached image file or multiple page document.
• Drag and drop a file from another application to the Image Tool View
window.
• In Snapshot, after an image has been snapped, choose the View option.
Once Image Tool is launched from Mail Tool or Snapshot you don't have to
open Image Tool again to view other images.
Viewing Single Page Images and Multiple Page Documents
If the image you opened is a single page image, the View window resizes to the
size of the image (unless the image extends beyond the size of the screen.)
You can now save your image as described in "Saving an Image" on page 401,
print your image as described in "Printing Images" on page 405, or use the
palette with your image as described in "Using the Image Tool Palette" on
page 407.
If your document is a multiple page document, refer to "Viewing Multiple
Page Documents" on page 412.
Formats that Image Tool Can Open
Table 13-1 lists the file formats that Image Tool can open along with
recommended file name extensions. These extensions may help you recognize
file formats.
Note - PostScript file formats are for PostScript and Encapsulated PostScript
File (EPSF) documents. For simplicity, in the rest of this chapter the term
PostScript includes EPSF.
Image Tool
397
513
Table 13-1 Image Tool File Formats and Extensions
398
File Format
File Name Extension
Encapsulated PostScript File
.ps, .eps, .epsf
PostScript
.ps
3 Portable Graymap
.rgb3
Abekas YUV
.yuv
Andrew Toolkit
.atk
Atari Compressed
.spc
Atari Uncompressed Spectrum
.spu
Atari Degas 1
.pil
Atari Degas 3
.pi3
AutoCAD Slide
.sld
Benet Yee Face File
.ybm
CMU Window Manager
.cmu
FITS
.fits
GEM
.img
GIF
.gif, .GIF
Gould Scanner
.gould
Group 3 Fax
.g3
HIPS
.hips
IFF ILBM
.ilbm
HP PaintJet
.pj
JFIF (JPEG)
.jpg, .jpeg, .JPG, .JPEG
Lisp Machine Bit-Array
.lispm
MGR
.mgr
MTV jPRT Ray-Tracer
.mtv
MacPaint
.mac
PBM
.pbm
PC Paintbrush
.pcx
PGM
.pgm
PICT
.pict
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Table 13-1 Image Tool File Formats and Extensions
File Format
File Name Extension
PPM
.ppm
QRT Ray-Tracer
.qrt
Raw Grayscale
.rawg
Raw RGB
.raw
Sun Icon
.icon
Sun Raster
.iml (monochrome)
.im8 (8-bit color)
.im24 (24-bit color)
.im32 (32-bit color)
.rs
TIFF
.tif, .tiff, .TIF, .TIFF
TrueVision Targa
.tga
Usenix FaceSaver
.fs
X Bitmap
.xbm
XlI Window Dump
.xwd
XPM
.xpm
Xerox Doodle Brush
.brush
Xim
.xim
Opening Your File in a Specific Format
If Image Tool cannot recognize the file format you want to open, you may need
to specify the format, as described in the following section. To do so:
1. Choose File> Open As.
The Open As window displays, as shown in Figure 13-3, with the current
folder location and document file type.
Image Tool
399
o-!l=a
Image Tool: Open As
Type in the path to the folder and press Return.
~.---------------------Current Folder:
/h ig hti de/egret/F is h
Select a file or folder and click Open.
't ".Go up one folder".
[jcod
[jEel
I[j itfl i p.rs
[jSalmon
OSeafood
[j Swordfis h
[jTuna
~--------------------~=
File Format:
ISun Raster
TIFF
TrueV is ion Targa
Usenix FaceSaver
~
____________________
T
~
~D
l
J
Figure 13-3 The Open As Window
2. Select a file type from File Format.
Table 13-1 on page 398 shows the possible file extensions and list of file
formats Image Tool can open.
3. Select a file from the scrolling list.
4. Click Open.
Your file or document is opened in the View Window. The palette is
automatically displayed when your file is opened. If you do not want to
automatically display the palette, refer to "Setting Image Tool Properties" on
page 415.
400
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Getting Information About Your Image
Image Tool provides the following information about the currently opened file:
height, width, colors, or size. To view this information:
• Select View> Image Info.
The Image Information window displays as shown in Figure 13-4.
~
Image Tool: Image Information
Height: 1.6 in /4.2 em /136 pix
Width: 3.5 in /8.8 em /287 pix
Number of colors (depth)
'--
Number of bytes required
to store the image
Gives the height and width of
the image in inches, centimeters, and pixels
When viewing a multiple page
document, this is the height
and width of the document's
page
Colors: N/A
____ File Size: 3.7 KBytes
File Format: Sun Raster
File type of the image
Figure 13-4 Image Information Window
Saving Image Files and Documents
Saving an Image
There are several options for saving files, but normally only one or two choices
are available. For complete information on standard file saving methods, refer
to Chapter I, "Introduction to the Solaris User Environment."
• To save a raster image or multiple page document and keep the current
file name, directory, and attributes, choose Save from the File menu.
• To save an image (whole or in part) and change the file name directory, or
attributes, choose one of the Save As command items:
• Save As applies to the entire image
Image Tool
401
• Save Selection As applies to a region that you defined using the Selector
tool.
• Save Page As Image applies only to a single page of a multiple page
document.
If the file format for the opened file is not supported, the Save button is
dimmed and unavailable. Figure 13-5, shows the Image Tool Save As window.
Image Tool: Save As
Ty pe in the path to the fol der an d press Return.
(GOTO: ~) __________________________
Current Folder:
/h ig hti de/egret/F is h
Se lect a fi Ie or fol der an d cl ick 0 pe n Fol der.
It . . Go up one folder...
Cj C)d
L)E:(.)i
iJ~ Save As.
2. Type a new name and extension for the file, if necessary.
3. Select a new file format.
Image Tool can save files in the following formats:
•
•
•
•
•
•
PostScript
EPSF
GIF
JFIF OPEG)
Sun Raster
TIFF
4. Select a Compression method, if applicable.
The following compression methods are available:
Image Tool
403
=13
• None
• UNIX -Standard UNIX file compression utility, available for (ESPF),
PostScript, Sun Raster, and TIFF formats
• Encoded run length-Available for Sun Raster
• LZW-Available for TIFF files
• JPEG-Available for JFIF files
Available compression methods depend upon selected format. Compression
saves disk space.
5. Select a color attribute, if applicable.
Available color attributes are: Black and White, 256, Millions.
6. Select Save.
Save Selection As
Save Selection As is available once you have defined an area with the Selector
tool on the palette. For information on using the palette, refer to "Using the
Image Tool Palette" on page 407. To save a portion of the image:
1. Open the image.
For information on opening an image, refer to "Opening Image Files and
Documents" on page 397.
2. Select a portion of the irnage to be saved.
For information on using the selector tool to select a portion of the image,
refer to "Selecting An Area to Be Saved" on page 408.
3. Select File ~ Save Selection As.
Saving a selection is the same as using Save as. Refer to "Save As" on
page 403 for complete information.
Save Page As Image
You may want to save a single page from a multiple page document. To do this
you need to:
1. Open the multiple page document.
Refer to "Opening Image Files and Documents" on page 397, for complete
information. Save Page as Image is only used for multiple page documents.
404
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
2. Navigate to the page to be saved.
For information on selecting a page, refer to "Viewing Multiple Page
Documents" on page 412.
3. Select File > Save Page As Image.
Saving a single page of a multiple page document is exactly like any other
type of save. Refer to "Save As" on page 403 for complete information.
Printing Images
You can print your image without verifying the print settings or you can check
or change settings before printing. Previewing images before printing them
saves paper and trips to the printer. Especially if you have scaled an image to a
larger size.
Printing with Current Settings
• Select File > Print One from the current file menu.
Image Tool uses Print Window settings to print one copy.
Previewing Before Printing
1. Choose Print Preview from the File menu.
The Print Preview window displays a reduced image with dotted lines
representing page boundaries. The page boundaries are determined by the
Page Size setting in the Printer window.
2. Click SELECT on Cancel or Print.
Cancel dismisses the window, and Print displays the Print window.
Printing after Checking or Changing Settings
You can verify printer settings and start the printing job from the Print
window.
1. Choose Print from the File menu, or click SELECT on Print in the Print
Preview window.
The Print window, shown in Figure 13-6, is displayed.
Image Tool
405
513
Image Tool: Print
Enter the number of copies
to be printed - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
Copies:
~EE)
Header Page:
Printer:
Choose the printer name
from the scrolling lis,-'--_ _ _+-_ _ _ _ _ _-+
Print·--~hoose
iii
wheither or not a header
page should be printed
m~i.:..:..:m.:....eo:......-____----.J
L..;.I
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Page Size:
Choose a page size thaL-_--+-_ _ _ _ __
your printer can
accomodate
18.5 x 11
8.5 x 14
11 x 17
I
in (Letter)
in (Legal)
in (Ledger)
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _
I I I I
I
Ranges for multiple page
documents only
I I I
25
Print image vertically (portrait)
or horizontally (landscape)
~
~~
Scale the size of the image
by typing the percentag=---_-----+___--=..:lm.:.:.:a~gt.:::.e...:::S..:..::iz:.:::.e::......:...:10:...:::0_ ~ %
number or using the slider
--'l
ili'-i I I I
~
~~
Image Orientation:
I Portrait I Landscape I
Image Position:
ICentered I Margins: I
I
400 %
Center the image or specify
the page margin
Figure 13-6 Print Window
2. Change settings, if desired.
If you change Page Size, Image Size, Image Orientation, or Image Position,
you may want to preview the image before printing.
3. Choose Print to start printing or Cancel to dismiss the window.
A very large raster image may be larger than a single sheet of paper. If so,
the entire image is printed on multiple pages.
Note - PostScript pages are printed as bitmapped images (if printed on single
pages).
406
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
135
Using the Image Tool Palette
Image Tool's Palette, shown in Figure 13-7, is useful for simple changes to an
image.
Use Pan to move the contents
~'
I mage Too I: Palette
of the View window with the
hand __________________~~==lr:::::::::_----------II
[~
Use Selector to save an area
of the View window as a new - - I t - I
image
:...... ~
I<~> li:~> I ~
I
I
I
I
I
IQ I
o
II:"
",.
Flips the image left to right
.l~
or top to bottom - - - - - - - - I I f - - I . - - - I
I
I
Rotates an image right or left
by degrees
1"1"1 0
I
II
180
0
Zoom reduces or enlarges the
Q
image by value entered in %
~ ~ 1·1 .. 1% ----tt--.:ield
~I
I I I I I I I I I II
25
400 %
( Revert)
Cancels any unsaved changes
and reverts to the last saved
_ _ _ _ _ _-t--.....:v.:e=.:rsion
Figure 13-7 Image Tool Palette
1. Choose Palette from the Edit menu.
2. Modify the image.
You can modify the image by panning; using the selector; or by flipping,
rotating or zooming it. Refer to "Panning an Image" on page 407; "Selecting
An Area to Be Saved" on page 408; "Flipping an Image" on page 409;
"Rotating an Image" on page 410; or "Zooming an Image" on page 411.
Panning an Image
To move the image within the View window, choose the Pan tool. The pointer
changes to a hand until you choose another action. Figure 13-7 on page 407
shows the pan icon as a hand.
Image Tool
407
Selecting An Area to Be Saved
To select an area of an image to be saved:
1. Choose the Selector tool.
2. Outline the new view by pressing SELECT in one corner of the new view
and dragging to the opposite corner.
3. Release SELECT.
You can save the selected view as a new image. Figure 13-8 shows the
selector icon and selection made from the View window. For information on
saving your file, refer to "Save As" on page 403.
,------,,
,
,,
@)
Image Tool File: Fish
,,
L. ____ ~
~,
........ }
..... --
I ----------------------------------------------
leo
DGIEJ
0
SELECT region.
Figure 13-8 Selector icon and selected item
408
~,
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Flipping an Image
To display a mirror image, use the Flip tools. You can flip horizontally and
vertically. Figure 13-9 shows the Flip icon and the result of flipping the image
upside down.
I mage Too I Fi Ie: Fis h
~''' ..•... }
t ........... ,=
I!: O=I.=I=1=q=================================~O=
Figure 13-9 Flip Icon and Flipped Image
Image Tool
409
Rotating an Image
• To rotate the image with the Rotate tool, first enter the number of degrees
to be applied in the text field next to the buttons.
You can type the value, use the abbreviated menu buttons, or use the sliders.
Figure 13-10 on page 410, shows the rotate icon and an image that has been
rotated 90 degrees.
Image Tool File: Fish
, ........
~~
, ........
~~
L.~. . J l,. ~.'. J
I
o
I
I
I
I
IQ I
I
I
I
II
180
0
Figure 13-10 Rotate Icon and Rotated Image
410
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
~
§=-
Zooming an Image
• To change the size of the image with the Zoom tool, first enter a value in
the text field next to the buttons.
You can type the value, use the abbreviated menu buttons, or use the sliders.
Figure 13-11 on page 411 shows the Zoom icon and an image that has been
enlarged by 25%.
~IIIIIIIIIII
25
400 %
i
Figure 13-11 Zoom Icon and Enlarged Image
• To cancel unsatisfactory changes:
• For the most recent single change (panning, flipping, rotating, or
zooming), choose Undo from the Edit menu.
• For multiple changes, click SELECT on Revert. This restores the last saved
version of the image.
Image Tool
411
Viewing Multiple Page Documents
When you open a multiple page document (such as a PostScript file), Image
Tool offers several options to help you navigate the document. For example,
once a multiple page document has been opened for viewing, the Page Up and
Page Down buttons are enabled and you can use them to move through the
document page by page.
Page Overview
Use Page Overview to display a window with a scrollable list of thumbnail
renderings of each page and controls for viewing specific pages. To open:
• Select View ~ Page Overview.
Figure 13-12 on page 413 shows the Page Overview window.
412
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
~I
Image Tool: Page Overview
Page 1
r------,-------,-------,------,
~
Thumbnail of up to 16
r----jt-f-"'--f4-_pages of the document
Double-click on a thumbnail
to go directly to a page
Page 14
r type the number of the
Go To Page: ~ 1.lw~------.--;page to be displayed in the
Go To Page field and Select
the Display Page button
(Display Page)
(Cancel)
Figure 13-12 Page Overview Window
Page Viewing Controls
• Choose View> Page Viewing Controls.
Use Page Viewing Controls to set the viewing orientation to portrait
(vertical) or landscape (horizontal); page display order (first page first or
last page first); and page size of a multiple page document.
Image Tool
413
The page size options are:
8.5xll(Letter)
8.5x14 (Legal)
11x14 (Ledger)
29.7x42cm (A3)
21x29.7cm (A4)
17.6x25cm (B5)
Figure 13-13 on page 414 shows the Page Viewing Controls.
o-Q;:o
Image Tool: Page Viewing Controls
Orientation:
Order:
Size:
I Portrait I Landscape I
I
First Page First
I
I
Last Page First
II
Q r::; v 1 1 ; " (I ~++~~\
1'-..1'-....1 ..... I I I I I ... '-c ...... t:;qJ
8.5 x 14 in (Legal)
11 x 14 in (Ledger)
,II~
I
g
I
c:::::J
((Apply)
(cancel)
Figure 13-13 Page Viewing Controls
414
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Setting Image Tool Properties
The Properties window lets you choose your preferences for display
characteristics. Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display, the
properties window may have different choices under View Image In.
1. Choose Properties from the Edit menu.
The Properties window, shown in Figure 13-14, is displayed.
Image Tool: Properties
These are devi
Can set the view for an image
dependent
Gray Scale
. l - - - - - - J l l l n i gray scale or color
r - - - - -____-I-~Select the number of colors
used for rendering images
Display Palette:
!if
On Opening Documen
Selecting this automatically
displays the palette when
an image is opened in the
View window
Figure 13-14 Image Tool Properties Window
2. Change the settings, as desired.
The View Image In and Colors settings work together to produce an optimal
display of color and color depth, based on your monitor's color capabilities.
3. Choose Apply to implement the new settings or Reset to discard the
changes.
These changes take effect the next time Image Tool is started.
Image Tool
415
Status Messages, Error Messages and Help
The footer of the Image Tool base window displays two kinds of messages:
• Status messages (on the right) describe multiple pages. For example, page 1
of 5.
• Error messages (on the left). (Conditions that require decisions on your part
are displayed in pop-up notices.)
• You can get information on how to use Help from Chapter I, "Introduction
to the Solaris User Environment." Magnify Help and the Help Button are
also available to you.
Dragging and Dropping
You can drag files from the following tools and drop them onto Image Tool's
drag and drop target:
• File Manager
• Mail Tool
• Snapshot
If Image Tool is already open, dragging and dropping replaces any images
already displayed. You can drag images from Image Tool and drop them onto
the following tools:
• File Manager
• Mail Tool
• Print Tool
For information on how to drag and drop, see Chapter I, "Introduction to the
Solaris User Environment."
416
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Image Tool Controls and Menus
The Image Tool control area has three menu buttons (File, View, and Edit) and a
Help button. The Help button opens the On-Line Help Handbook for Image Tool.
The File, View, and Edit menus are described in the following sections.
File Menu
The File menu contains items for opening, saving, and printing images. Image
Tool conforms to standard file choosing methods. All items on the File menu,
except Save and Print One, display pinnable pop-up windows. The choices you
can make depend on the type of file you are working with-multiple page or
single page images.
The functions of each item are:
• Open displays a window from which you choose the file for the image you
want to open.
• Open As displays a window from which you choose the file and file format
for the image you want to open.
• Save displays a window from which you can save the currently displayed
image to a file.
• Save As displays a window from which you choose the type, format, folder,
and name of a file for saving the currently displayed image. Use this option
when you want to convert an image to a different file format and file type.
• Save Selection As saves the selected area to a new image file. This option is
active when an area of the View window has been selected with the Selector
tool from the palette.
• Save Page As Image displays a window from which you can save the
currently displayed page of a multiple page document as a new image file.
• Print One uses the current settings of the Print window to print a single
copy of the currently displayed image or page.
• Print Preview displays the Print Preview window that shows how the
contents of the View window will appear when printed. The Print Preview
window uses dotted lines to depict the boundaries of the printed page. You
can control which area of the image gets printed by dragging the image
within the dotted lines.
Image Tool
417
=13
• Print displays the Print window that contains these options for controlling
how the contents of the View window are printed:
• Copies (number of)
• Header Page (whether one should be printed)
• Printer (which device)
• Page Size (Letter, Legal, Ledger, A3, A4, B5)
• Page Range (for multiple page documents)
• Image Size (scaling)
• Image Orientation (Portrait or Landscape)
• Image Position (centered or specify margins)
View Menu
The View menu contains image information, page overview and multiple page
options.
The functions of each item are:
• Image Info displays a window that contains the following information about
the currently displayed image or page:
• Height and Width
• Number of colors (depth)
• File size
• File Forrnat
• Page Overview Available only for multiple page documents, this option
displays a window with a scrollable list of thumbnail renderings of each
page and controls for viewing specific pages.
• Page Viewing Controls sets these viewing controls for multiple page
documents:
• Page orientation
• Page display Order
• Page size
Note - The page size setting affects only the view, not printing.
418
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
13
--
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following items:
• Undo undoes the last usage of these tools from the palette-Flip, Rotate,
Pan, or Zoom.
• Palette contains the Pan, Rotate, Selector, Flip, and Zoom.
• Properties displays the Properties window where you can set• If images are viewed in color or gray scale.
• The number of colors used for rendering images.
• If the palette is automatically displayed when an image is opened.
Some Standard Operations
The following chart summarizes standard Image Tool operations.
To:
Do this:
Open Image Tool from the
workspace
Choose Workspace
Open Image Tool from its icon
Double-click SELECT on the Image Tool icon.
~
Programs
~
Image Tool.
Display an image
Choose Open from the File menu.
Save a raster image
Choose Save from the File menu.
Close the Image Tool window
Click SELECT on the window menu button in the
upper left corner.
Quit from the Image Tool icon
Press MENU on the icon, then choose Exit from
the menu.
Quit from the Image Tool
window
Press MENU on the window menu button in the
upper left corner, then choose Exit from the menu.
Image Tool
419
-- 13
420
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Snapshot
The Snapshot application allows you to take black-and-white (or grayscale)
and color snapshots of regions, windows, or the entire computer screen. These
pictures are called raster images and can be stored as raster files, with a . rs
file extension. These pictures are called raster images because they are taken
from the screen, which is defined by a grid called a raster.
When you use Snapshot on a black-and-white monitor, the snapshots created
are always black and white. When you take snapshots on a color monitor, the
snapshots are usually in color. On some color monitors you can run
OpenWindows and the DeskSet in black-and-white, in which case the
snapshots created are black-and-white.
Snapshot works together with Image Tool to allow you to view and manipulate
your raster images. For complete information, refer to Chapter 13, "Image
Tool."
You can take pictures of the entire screen, of any rectangular region of the
screen you define, or of any window or window pane on the screen.
• To open the Snapshot application, choose Workspace
Snapshot.
>- Programs >-
421
Snapshot Icon and Base Window
The Snapshot icon is an image of a camera, as shown in Figure 14-1.
Figure 14-1 Snapshot Icon
The Snapshot base window, shown in Figure 14-2, contains all the controls you
need to take snapshots.
Snap a single
window, a
chosen region, or
entire screen
r"@)
C§g
Snapshot
~ (Print
Snap Type:
I Window I Region
Snap immediately
~ Delay:
or after a delay .:.-----
10
If checked,
Snapshot window
D
:_ -.1:--:-
_-I
\1)
I Screen I
D__
Drag and drop
target
1214 Is 116 I seconds
Beep during countdown
works when Snap Delay
D Bee p D Uri ng COU ntdow n----t- is set
"
,
,
Hide Window DUring Capture
-I .... : ___
jl--- snap
Displays the
by starting Image
UI:)IIII:)S~U UU~IIIY
S
~' _ _ _ _ _
nap
~
snap
I:)
Tool
Snaps picture
Figure 14-2 Snapshot Base Window
Snapshot Controls
Snap Types
Snapshot provides you with three options for creating snapshots:
• Use the Snap Type: Window setting to snap an entire window.
• Use the Snap Type: Region setting to snap a region you define.
• Use the Snap Type: Screen setting to snap the entire screen.
422
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Note - Snapshot does not capture the screen pointer.
Snap Delay
Snapshot has a timer that you can use to set the number of seconds between
the time you initiate the snapshot and the time it is taken. This delay setting is
especially useful if you are taking snapshots of a menu that you must display
after you start taking a snap. Once a number of seconds is selected, the Beep
During Countdown option becomes available. Selecting this option turns on a
beep countdown timer that sounds until the snap is taken.
Hiding the Snapshot Window During Capture
Sometimes you may want to take a snapshot of a large portion of the screen or
of the entire workspace without showing the Snapshot window. In such cases,
click SELECT on the Hide Window During Capture setting to remove the
Snapshot window from the screen while the snapshot is in progress.
When the Hide Window During Capture setting is on, Snapshot automatically
adjusts the Snap Delay setting to eight seconds. This is to guarantee that there
will be enough time to remove the Snapshot window before the snapshot is
taken. Remember to reset the Snap Delay setting after you turn off the Hide
Snapshot During Capture setting.
Creating a Snapshot
This section describes how to create a snapshot of a window, region, or screen.
Remember to save your snapshot afterwards.
Snapping a Window
You can take snapshots of windows and icons following these steps:
1. Make sure the window or icon you want to snap is completely visible.
If the window or icon to be snapped is partially obscured by overlapping
windows, the overlapping windows are included in the snapshot.
2. Click SELECT on the Snap Type Window setting.
Snapshot
423
3. Set the Snap Delay and Beep During Countdown settings if you want to
use them.
4. If you want to hide Snapshot during the capture operation, click SELECT
on the Hide Window During Capture setting.
5. Click SELECT on the Snap button.
The Snap button displays the standard busy pattern and a message is
displayed in the footer.
6. Move the pointer into the header of the window you want to snap and
click SELECT to start the snapshot.
To cancel the operation, click either the ADJUST or MENU mouse buttons.
When the pointer is in the header of the window, the entire window is
snapped, including the header and footer. When the pointer is in a pane of a
window, only that pane is snapped.
When the snapshot is complete, a message is displayed in the footer of the
Snapshot window telling you that the Snap succeeded. You can now save or
view your snapshot. For information on saving your snapshot, refer to
Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Solaris User Environment. For information on
viewing your image with Image Tool, refer to Chapter 13, "Image Tool."
Snapping a Region
You can take snapshots of any rectangular area that you specify using the
Snap Region setting. The following example shows how to take a snapshot of a
region.
1. Set up the region on your screen that you want to snap.
For example, to take a snapshot of the menu for the Command Tool pane,
open a Command Tool window. Make sure the Command Tool pane is not
obscured by overlapping windows. Decide where in the Command Tool
window you want to put the menu, then display the menu to determine
what size region you need to define. This is also helpful if you need to show
a submenu.
2. Click SELECT on the Snap Type Region setting.
424
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
3. If necessary, set the Snap Delay timer and turn on the Beep During
Countdown setting.
This is necessary if you want to change something about the region after
you initiate the snapshot. For example, if you want to snap a pop-up menu,
you need to set the timer in order to have time to display the menu or
submenu.
4. Click SELECT on the Snap button.
The Snap button displays the standard busy pattern and a message is
displayed in the footer. (You may not be able to see the entire message. The
message informs you to use SELECT to position the rectangle, ADJUST to
snap the image, and MENU to cancel the snapshot.)
5. Move the pointer to one corner of the region and click SELECT to define
that corner. Move the pointer and click SELECT again on the opposite
corner to define a rectangular region.
Alternatively, you can press SELECT to define the first corner, drag the
pointer to the second corner, then release SELECT to define region.
A bounding box is displayed. You can adjust the size of the bounding box
by moving the pointer and clicking SELECT at a different place.
6. When the region is defined, click ADJUST to take the snapshot or start the
timer.
If you are using the Snap Delay timer to take a snapshot of a pop-up menu,
move the pointer into the defined region and press MENU to display the
pop-up menu while the timer is beeping. Leave the menu up until the
snapshot is complete. When the timer beeper stops, and the message is
displayed, the snapshot is complete.
For information on saving your snapshot, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction
to the Solaris User Environment." For information on viewing your image
with Image Tool, refer to Chapter 13, "Image Tool."
Snapping the Screen
You can take snapshots of the entire screen following these steps:
1. Make sure the screen is set up in the configuration you want.
2. Click SELECT on the Snap Type Screen setting.
Snapshot
425
3. Click SELECT on Hide Window During Capture unless you want the
Snapshot window as part of the screen shot.
4. Set the Snap Delay and Beep During Countdown if you want to use them.
5. Click SELECT on the Snap button.
If you set the Hide Window During Capture setting, the Snapshot window
is removed from the display and is redisplayed when the snapshot is
complete.
For information on saving your snapshot, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction
to the Solaris User Environment." For information on viewing your image
with Image Tool, refer to Chapter 13, "Image Tool."
Viewing a Snapshot
To view a snapshot:
• Click SELECT on the View button.
A status message:
Starting Image Tool
is displayed in the lower left corner of the window. This launches Image
Tool. Image Tool can provide more functionality for working with your
image. For complete information on Image Tool, refer to Chapter 13, "Image
Tool." If you want to look at another snapshot, it is displayed in place of the
previous one in Image Tool.
Loading a Snapshot
Use one of these methods to load a raster file or GIF image file:
• Click SELECT on the Load button.
You see the Open window. For complete information on loading a file, refer
to Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Solaris User Environment."
or
• Drag and drop a file onto the Snapshot drop target.
If the image file is compressed, Snapshot automatically uncompresses it for
you.
426
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Saving a Snapshot
Use one of these methods to save a snapshot:
• Click SELECT on Save.
You see the Save window, and the Save window shows the default file named
snapshot. rs. For complete information on saving a file, refer to Chapter I,
"Introduction to the Solaris User Environment." You can override the defaults
by starting Snapshot in a Command Tool or Shell Tool and using command line
options described in the snapshot manual page.
or
• Drag and drop a snapshot into a File Manager folder, and assign it a
meaningful name.
If the drag and drop target in the Snapshot window is filled with gray, a
snapshot ready to be dragged. The snapshot is saved in the File Manager as
a file called raster.
For both methods, snapshots are always saved as raster files. It is a good idea
to use . r s or some other common suffix for raster file names to make it easier
to remember the file type and to manage them as a group.
Note - If you save your snapshot from Snapshot, your image is saved in raster
format (in black-and-white or color format, depending how you ran Snapshot).
If you save your snapshot in Image Tool, you can use any of the six formats
available. For complete information on Image Tool, refer to Chapter 13, "Image
Tool."
Printing a Snapshot
To print a snapshot:
• Choose Print Snap from the Print menu.
You see the printing. .. status message displayed in the lower left corner
of the window. Once the snapshot has printed you see Print Complete.
Snapshot
427
514
Note - You can also use Image Tool to print your snapshot. For complete
information on Image Tool refer to Chapter 13, "Image Tool."
428
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Icon Editor
The Icon Editor allows you to create your own black-and-white or color icon
images. You can display your icon images in the File Manager by binding them
to applications and data files using the Binder. Programmers can use the Icon
Editor to create application cursors, glyphs, and icons, and save them in a
format for inclusion into a C program.
• To open Icon Editor, choose Workspace
>
Programs
>
Icon Editor.
Icon Editor Icon and Base Window
The Icon Editor icon is shown in Figure 15-1.
Icon Editor
Figure 15-1 The Icon Editor Icon
When you start the Icon Editor, the base window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 15-2.
429
Control Area
Icon Editor
~ ~ ~ ( Properties '\J)
( Palette". )
Drawing controls
Preview area
Arrows for moving
image on canvas
Displays image
in icon size
Canvas
64 X 64, 0 undos, 0 redos available
Figure 15-2 Icon Editor Base Window
The Icon Editor controls are described in the following sections.
430
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Icon Editor Drawing Controls
The controls that you use to draw an image in the canvas appear to the left of
the preview area, and are shown in Figure 15-3
•
"
0
0
0
m
ab<
t7
[".........'.1 .::<:.::.::< ........
~
--
I I
Color
B&W
(B~ff)(±)@(!!)@~
.....................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 15-3
Icon Editor Drawing Controls
This section describes the Icon Editor drawing control menus and buttons.
Drawing Mode Choices
To draw an icon, choose a drawing mode from the choices in Figure 15-4.
Square _ _ _ _ _--,
, -_ _ _ _ Ellipse
Point
Region
Line
Erase
Circle
Text
Figure 15-4 Drawing Mode Choices
The Mode choice items function as follows:
• Choose Point to insert one black pixel at a time in the canvas. To draw a
point, move the pointer to the desired position in the canvas and click
SELECT. You can continuously hold down SELECT and move the pointer to
create a freehand drawing. When you lift your finger from the mouse
button, you end one drawing segment. When you continue this process, you
begin a new drawing segment. Undo here only removes the last drawing
segment. You can also point to a black or color pixel and click ADJUST to
turn the pixel from black to white.
Icon Editor
431
• Choose Line to draw a line that is I-pixel wide. To draw a line, position the
pointer at one end of the line, press SELECT, drag the pointer to the other
end of the line, and release SELECT.
• Choose Square to draw open or filled squares or rectangles using any of the
fill patterns described in the section "Fill Choices" on page 439. (The fill
patterns are active only when the Draw option is a fillable shape, such as a
square, circle, or ellipse.) Position the pointer at one corner of the square,
press SELECT, drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the square or
rectangle, and release SELECT.
• Choose Circle to draw open or filled circles using any of the fill patterns.
Position the pointer at the center of the circle and press SELECT, drag the
pointer to any point to the outside radius of the circle, and release SELECT.
• Choose Ellipse to draw open or filled ellipses. Position the pointer at the
center of the ellipse and press SELECT, drag the pointer to the outside
radius of the ellipse, and release SELECT. If you define a horizontal or
vertical line, the ellipse is interpreted as a straight line.
• Choosing Text (abc) displays a pop-up window, shown in Figure 15-5, that
allows you to type text that is associated with the icon.
Type text to be
added to icon here
Icon Editor: Text
--Text: ....
_ - - -_ _
Font: @) avantgarde
We ig ht:
@) book
Style: @) oblique
Size: @) default
Figure 15-5
432
Text Pop-up Window
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Adding Text to the Canvas
To add text to the canvas, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the Text drawing mode option.
This displays the Text pop-up window.
2. Choose the font you want to use from the Font menu.
3. Choose the text weight, style, and size from the relevant menus.
The items on the Weight, Style, and Size menus depend on the font that you
have chosen. For example, some fonts may have many available choices for
size, while others only have one default choice.
4. Type the text you want in the Text field.
5. When you have typed the text in the text field, insert it in the icon by
moving the pointer onto the desired spot on the canvas and pressing
SELECT.
A rectangle is displayed that shows you the size of the text to be inserted, as
shown in the example in Figure 15-6. You can move the rectangle anywhere
within the canvas to position it as long as you continue to press SELECT.
Icon Editor
433
Text: ,cali"
Font: ~ lucida
medium
Figure 15-6
Style:
@) regular
Size:
@) default
Adding Text to Your Icon
6. Drag the pointer to position the rectangle, and when it is positioned
correctly, release SELECT.
The text is added to the canvas, as shown in the example in Figure 15-7.
434
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Icon Editor
IBlack I White I
~ ~ ~ (Properties 'il)
I
Color
B&W
j
I>
cat
....••
...
...
.
•
•
···.... ..
......
. ....
.....
•
64 X 64, 3 undos, 0 redos available
Figure 15-7 Text Added to an Icon
Once you have added text to the canvas, you can edit it as you would any
other part of the image:
• Choose Region (the rectangle within a rectangle) to define a rectangular
region on the canvas and move, flip, or rotate it by clicking SELECT on any
of the Move buttons.
• Choose Erase to erase any pixels on the canvas by moving the cursor onto
the canvas, clicking SELECT, and dragging the eraser cursor over the areas
you want to erase. Only the pixel under the front tip of the eraser is actually
erased.
Icon Editor
435
515
Editing Images
At any time, you can:
• Undo the last change or addition you made by choosing Edit> Undo
from the control area.
The remaining editing commands in the Edit menu behave the same as
those in a Text Editor window.
Cutting a Portion of an Image
To cut a portion of the drawing, create a rectangular outline around the area to
be cut. To do this:
1. Click SELECT on the rectangular icon next to the oval in the control area.
This enables you to define a region to cut.
Icon Ed itor [None] (Edited)
ISlack I White I
Choose the
Region selection
rectangle
Figure 15-8 Region Selection Rectangle
2. Position the pointer on the canvas window at one corner of the portion to
cut, press SELECT and drag the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner,
then release the mouse button.
Figure 15-9 shows how the area to be cut is surrounded by a rectangular
region.
436
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Outlined region
•••••• •••
•••••••••• ••••••
•••••••••••• ••
••
•••• •••• ••
•• ••
•• ••••••••
•• ••
•
•• •••••
• ••••••••••••••
•••• •• ••••••
••
Figure 15-9 Selecting a Portion of an Icon Image to Cut
3. Choose Edit> Cut.
This cuts the outlined portion of the image and places it in a system
clipboard. You can then paste it elsewhere, if needed. Figure 15-10 shows the
icon image with the portion cut away.
Icon Editor
437
•••••• •••
•••••••••• ••••••
•••••••••••• ••
••
•••• •••• ••
• ••
• ••••••••••
•• ••
•
•
•• •••••
• •••••••••••••
•••• •• ••••••
••
Figure 15-10 Icon Image with a Portion Cut Away
Erase
The small rectangular object next to the abc button on the Icon Editor control
area is an eraser. The icon for the eraser is shown in Figure 15-11.
Figure 15-11 Icon for the Eraser
To erase a portion of an image:
1. Click SELECT on the eraser icon.
2. Move the pointer to the area in the canvas window that you want to erase.
438
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
3. Press SELECT and drag the pointer over the area you want to erase.
If you lift your finger from the mouse button frequently to end the current
input segment, you can undo the last segment at any time without losing all
of the changes you've made. You can undo the last input (erase) you made
at any time by choosing Undo from the Edit menu, or from the pop-up
menu in the Icon Editor window pane (canvas).
Fill Choices
The Fill choices, shown in Figure 15-12, allow you to choose an outline or one
of 10 fill patterns for drawing squares, circles, or ellipses. This menu is only
active when the current mode is a fillable shape (square, circle, or ellipse).
D
:~: : ~: ?: : ~~~H~~
}~~}t~ ~~~r~~~
II II
II II
Figure 15-12 The Icon Editor Fill Choices
The first fill choice, an open square, draws an outline of the chosen shape,
using a I-pixel wide black pattern. The other fill choices represent patterns,
from white to black, that you can use to fill the square, circle, or ellipse modes.
Icon Editor Color Controls
You can create color or black-and-white icons by choosing Color or B&W, as
shown in Figure 15-13. Color is not available if your workstation is
black-and-white.
I I
Color
B&W
Figure 15-13 Icon Editor Color Choice
When the Color choice is selected, you can draw using black, white, or any of
the colors provided on the Color Chooser window. You display the Color
Chooser with the Palette button on the Icon Editor header. When you select a
Icon Editor
439
color from the Color Chooser, the cursor changes to that color as a reminder of
your current color choice. See the section "Icon Editor Color Chooser Palette"
on page 448 for information about using color.
When the B&W choice is selected, only the colors black-and-white are
available. The Palette button on the Icon Editor header changes to a Black or
White choice setting. When Black is selected, your icon is drawn with a black
pen. When White is selected, your icon is drawn with a white pen.
If the icon you are creating is currently in color when you select B&W, the icon
becomes black-and-white.
Caution - If you change your icon from color to black-and-white, the colors
will not be restored when you switch back to color. If you inadvertently switch
from color to black-and-white, use the Undo item on the Edit menu to restore
the color.
Move Buttons
Use the move buttons (the arrows shown in Figure 15-14) to adjust the position
of the drawing on the canvas, or to move a region within the canvas. To move
a selected region, click SELECT on one of the left, right, up, or down arrow
buttons to move the region one pixel in the designated direction. If no region is
selected, the entire drawing is moved.
Figure 15-14 Icon Editor Move Buttons
Note - If you move or rotate part of the image off the canvas, the pixels are
cropped from the image and are not restored when you move the image in the
opposite direction. Use the Undo item on the Edit menu to restore the image.
440
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
To move a region:
1. Choose Region from the Mode choices.
Region is the last item on the top row of the Mode choices.
2. Move the pointer to the corner of the region you want to move and press
SELECT.
3. Drag the pointer to define the region and release SELECT.
4. Click SELECT on one of the arrow buttons to move the region one pixel in
the designated direction.
You can repeat this operation as often as you like.
The fifth and sixth buttons shown in Figure 15-14 flip the selected region from
left to right or top to bottom. If no region is selected, the entire image on the
canvas is flipped. The right two buttons shown in Figure 15-14 rotate the
region or the image 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow.
Filing Options
You use the File menu to load, save, and print icons.
Loading and Saving a File
For information on loading and saving files, refer to Chapter I, "Introduction
to the Solaris User Environment."
Saving a New Icon
If you have drawn a new icon image, you can save it to a new file as follows:
1. Choose File >- Save As.
You see the Save As window.
2. Save the file.
For complete information on saving a file, refer to Chapter I, "Introduction
to the Solaris User Environment."
Icon Editor
441
515
Saving a Modified Icon
If you have modified an existing icon image, you can save it to a new file,
which preserves the original image, or save it to the same file. For complete
information on saving files, refer to Chapter 1, "Introduction to the Solaris User
Environment. "
The formats available for saving an icon are the following:
• If your icon is in color, it will be saved as a color X pixmap image. This type
of icon might be used for some XView applications.
• If your icon is black-and-white, you can use the Save menu to choose among
saving the icon as a regular Xview icon, as an X bitmap, or as a
Monochrome X pixmap image. Save the icon as an Xview icon if you want
to display your icon in the File Manager by binding it to an application or
data file using the Binder. See Chapter 3, "Binder" for more information.
Save the icon as an X bitmap if you want to include it in a C program.
If a file of the same name already exists, a Notice is displayed asking you
whether you want to overwrite the existing file or cancel the operation.
Clearing the Canvas
• To clear the canvas for another drawing, choose Edit Clear.
Printing an Icon
Use the Print window, shown in Figure 15-15, to print icon files. This window
displays when you choose Print from the File menu.
442
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
0-0:0
Iconedit: Print
Desti natio n:
Printer:
I Pri nter I File I
AOIL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Options: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Width: 1,00
Position: 1,00
1,00
Copies: _1_ _
Height:
~
Inches from left
Inches from bottom
a;;"!
Figure 15-15 Icon Editor Print Pop-up Window
You can specify the following options from the Icon Editor Print window:
• Destination of the printed output (Printer or File)
• Printer name and printer options, or file destination and file name
If the Destination is Printer, as in Figure 15-15, a field called Options is
displayed. You can type in UNIX commands in this field to customize your
printer option defaults.
• Width and height of the printed image
• Left and bottom margins of the printed image
• Number of copies to print
When you've chosen your Printer Settings, click SELECT on the Print button to
print the icon.
View Menu
The View menu provides the option to display a Grid on the canvas.
Icon Editor
443
-- 15
Grid Display
Choose Grid On (or just click SELECT on the View button) to display a 4-pixel
grid for the canvas. The grid is useful for aligning and centering all or parts of
the icon.
When the grid is turned on, the View menu item changes to Grid Off.
Therefore, you can toggle the grid on and off by clicking SELECT on the View
button.
Figure 15-16 shows an example with the grid turned on.
Icon Editor cat.icon (Edited)
~ (View
\7) ~
(Properties
\7)
'~I~I~I~I
(B~~(±)@[!!)@@
Black
White
I>
cat
64 X 64, 3 undos, 0 redos available
Figure 15-16 Grid Turned On
444
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
15=
Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides standard editing options, as described in the
following sections. The items on the Edit menu are also available on the popup menu in the Icon Editor canvas pane.
Undo and Redo
You can undo up to seven of your last actions by choosing Undo from the Edit
menu. After choosing Undo, you can then choose Redo to repeat the original
action, which restores the canvas to its condition before you chose Undo. You
never need to worry about what an action will do to your icon because of this
feature. If you don't like the results, simply use Undo and Redo to restore the
icon to the way you like it best.
Each time you Undo an action, that action becomes available to you as a Redo
action (up to a maximum of seven actions). Each Redo performs the most
recent Undo action. The number of Undo actions and Redo actions that are
available to you at any time is displayed in the Icon Editor footer.
Clear
You can clear the canvas by choosing Clear from the Edit menu. No warning
notice is displayed. If you change your mind, choose Undo from the Edit
menu.
Cut, Copy, and Paste
You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste items to move and copy regions of your
icon, or the entire icon.
When you choose Cut on the Edit menu, the current region is removed from
the icon and put on the clipboard. If you don't have a region currently defined,
the entire icon is deleted and put on the clipboard.
To define a region, choose the Region drawing mode, move the pointer to the
canvas where you want to start the region, press SELECT, drag the pointer to
the opposite corner of the desired region, and release SELECT. The region is
displayed by a dashed-line border. The lines of the border appear to be
blinking, like the lighted sign of a theater marquee.
Icon Editor
445
When you choose Copy on the Edit menu, the current region is copied to the
clipboard but is not removed from the icon. If you don't have a region
currently defined, the entire icon is copied to the clipboard.
Before choosing Paste on the Edit menu, define the region where you want to
paste the contents of the clipboard. When you choose Paste on the Edit menu,
the contents of the clipboard are copied to the icon, placed so that the upper
left corner of the clipboard contents matches the upper left corner of the
current region.
If you choose Paste from the keyboard (depending on your keyboard type), the
contents of the clipboard are placed so that the upper left corner of the image
goes to the position of the mouse.
Invert
Choose the Invert item on the Edit menu when you have a black-and-white
icon to change black pixels to white, and vice-versa, in your current region. If
you do not have a region selected, Invert works on the entire icon. If your icon
is color, the Invert item is dimmed and unavailable.
Properties Menu
The Properties menu provides options to change the icon format and size.
Icon Format
Use the Format item to specify the default format for the icon to be saved in.
After you select a format, that format will be used when you choose Save on
the File menu. That format also becomes the default item of the Save menu on
the File pop-up window. See "Loading and Saving a File" on page 441 for more
information.
The following icon formats are available:
• If your icon is in color, it can be saved as a color X pixmap image. This type
of icon might be used for some XView applications.
• If your icon is black-and-white, it can be saved as a regular Xview icon, as
an X bitmap, or as a Monochrome X pixmap image. Save the icon as an
Xview icon if you want to display your icon in the File Manager by binding
446
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
it to an application or data file using the Binder. See "Binder" on page 451
for more information. Save the icon as an X bitmap if you want to include it
in a C program. A monochrome X pixmap image might be used for some
XViewapplications.
Icon Size
The Size item provides five standard icon image sizes:
•
•
•
•
•
16 by 16 pixels (typical cursor size)
32 by 32 pixels (the required size for File Manager data file icons)
48 by 48 pixels
64 by 64 pixels (typical application icon size)
128 by 128 pixels
If you change the size of the canvas when an icon file is loaded, the file is read
from the upper left corner. Larger images are cropped to fit the existing size of
the canvas. In the example shown in Figure 15-17, the canvas with the
cat. icon file has been resized to 32 by 32 (XView format) pixels.
Icon Editor
447
Icon Editor
cat.icon (Edited)
IBlack I White I
1~lgl~I~1
(B~(!)[±)@@~~
32 X 32, 4 undos, 0 redos available
Figure 15-17 Changing the Size of an Existing Icon
Icon Editor Color Chooser Palette
You can create a multi color icon if you have a color workstation. You can save
the color icon as a color X Pixmap file to be used with your own X applications.
If you are using the Icon Editor to create new icons for File Manager, you
should create black-and-white icons. You can use the Binder to specify
foreground and background colors for your File Manager icons.
If you want to create a color icon, select the Color choice in the Icon Editor
drawing controls area, as described in the section "Icon Editor Color Controls"
on page 439. When you are creating a color icon, the rightmost button in the
Icon Editor header is labeled Palette. (When you are creating a black-and-white
icon, this button is replaced with a Black or White choice setting.) Click
SELECT on the Palette button to display the Color Chooser, shown in
Figure 15-18, which you can use to specify the color to draw with.
448
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Co lor Chooser
II III III 1m II II II
III II mII III 1m II
II II II II II IJ II
.. ..
II II II II II ~
... II ~ III
II II 0 []
fI] mII 0... II II II
~ II II ffi] II II
.
0... II II mJ
II II
•
~~~
.,"'.."'0,;
"
"
.•
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II II
II II
III 0
Ii II
II
II
III
II
(APply)
Choosing Color for Iconedit
Figure 15-18 Color Chooser for Icon Editor
The current color that the Icon Editor will use for drawing is displayed in the
upper left corner of the palette shown in Figure 15-18.
To use any of the colors displayed in the Color Chooser palette for the Icon
Editor:
1. Click SELECT on the desired color in the Color Chooser palette.
The selected color is highlighted and displayed in the Color Chooser
preview area. The preview area is the large square at the left of the palette.
2. Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the color change.
The square in the top left corner of the palette changes to the selected color.
3. Move the pointer back to the Icon Editor to draw your icon with the
chosen color.
.
The color of the pointer changes to the selected color you are drawing with.
Icon Editor
449
450
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Binder
The Binder application allows you to bind icons, colors, applications, open
methods and print methods to files. A binding is a connection between file
types and elements such as applications to be started when a file is opened,
print scripts, or icons that the File Manager, Print Tool, Mail Tool, and other
DeskSet applications use to display and operate on files. Audio Tool sound
files are also bound.
Because the DeskSet applications come with a default set of bindings, most
DeskSet users will not need to use the Binder application. You may want to use
the Binder, however, to customize your DeskSet applications. For example, you
use the Binder if you want to change the way particular files are displayed in
the File Manager or other DeskSet applications, or if you want to change the
application used to open or print a file.
Programmers who want to integrate applications into the DeskSet should see
the Solaris 2.2 Desktop Integration Guide for programmer information about the
Binder database.
If you are not a programmer working on the integration of applications into
the DeskSet, this chapter provides all the information you need to know about
the Binder and the underlying Binder database.
• To open the Binder application, choose Workspace» Programs» Binder.
451
=16
Binder Icon and Window
The Binder icon and base window are shown in Figure 16-1.
ill
Binder
~ ( V iew
'V) r'··i>;·;j".")) (props IJ)
Binder Entries
c::::::J
I~ GUIDE-file
~ IslandDraw-document
I
~
~ Is Ian dDraw-prog
~
[;I!J
Is Ian d Pai nt-Tiff-docu me nt
Is Ian d Pai nt-prog
c::::::J
( New ) ( D u p I ica te ) C"C·~:;T~·;·t·~.;·' )
l
Read-~nIy Entry
J
Figure 16-1 Binder Icon and Base Window
Binder Control Area
Use the buttons in the Binder control area as follows:
• Save saves your changes to the Binder database. Save replaces the standard
File menu button because it is the only file operation used by the Binder.
• View determines which Binder entries you want to display. See the
following section, "Binder Databases" on page 453 for more information.
452
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Undo undoes the last operation. The operations that are undoable are the
buttons at the bottom of the base window: New, Duplicate, and Delete. If no
editing operations have been made since the Binder was started or since the
last Save, the Undo button is dimmed and unavailable. Undo replaces the
standard Edit menu button because it is the only Edit function used by the
Binder.
• Props displays the properties of a Binder entry. There are two components
for each Binder entry: the Icon properties that determine how a file is
displayed and operated on by the DeskSet applications, and the File Type
properties that determine which files are bound to the Icon properties. See
the section "Binder Properties" on page 456 for more information.
Binder Databases
The scrolling list in the Binder base window displays the bindings stored in
three different databases: a network database, a system database, and a private
user database. These are the Binder databases used by all applications in the
DeskSet environment to determine how to display, print, and open any file.
The network database consists of the Binder entries shared by many
workstations across a network. The system database consists of the Binder
entries shared by multiple users on one workstation. Your private database
consists of the Binder entries that apply only to you.
Updating and Viewing Private Binder Entries
If you start Binder from the Workspace menu, or from the command line
without any command-line options, you can save only the changes to your
private user database. Most users will run the Binder application this way.
The first time you run the Binder application, all your bindings will be system
or network entries. If you want to customize a system or network entry, you
can copy it to your user database, and then modify the user entry. When you
add a new binding, it will be added as a private entry.
A message in the footer of the Binder window tells you whether the currently
selected entry is a Read-Only Entry. These are the system and network entries
that you normally cannot modify. These entries can be duplicated into your
private database and then modified. Refer to "Updating and Viewing System
and Network Binder Entries" on page 454 for more information.
Binder
453
Use the items on the View menu to determine the Binder entries displayed in
the base window scrolling list, as follows:
• Choose All Entries to display a merged list of all the private, system, and
network entries. If you copy a system or network entry to your private user
database, only your private version of the entry is displayed in the merged
list.
• Choose Shared Entries to display all the system and network entries.
• Choose Personal Entries to display only your private user entries.
Updating and Viewing System and Network Binder Entries
If you want to modify your system bindings, you must become root and start
Binder by typing binder -system in a Shell Tool or Command Tool.
In order to modify the network bindings, you need to have root access on your
OpenWindows server workstation, and you need to start Binder by typing
binder -network in a Shell Tool or Command Tool.
If you cannot start the Binder as root, you probably need to restart
OpenWindows with the noauth option. To do this, exit the window system
and type openwin -noauth at the console.
The entries on the View menu have a different meaning if you are running the
Binder with the command-line options listed previously.
If you run the Binder with the -system option, all new entries are added to
your system database. In this case you use the View menu as follows:
• Choose All Entries to display a merged list of all the system and network
entries. If you copy a network entry to the system database, only the system
version of the entry is displayed in the merged list.
• Choose Shared Entries to display only the network entries.
• Choose Local Entries to display only the system entries.
If you run the Binder with the -network option, all new entries are added to
the network database. In this case the View menu is dimmed and unavailable.
Only the network entries are displayed.
454
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
To modify entries for local use on your machine, you need to copy them from
the system and network databases into your private database. To copy an entry
to your database, first scroll through the list of Binder entries in the Binder
base window until you see the one you want to modify.
1. Click SELECT on the Binder entry you want to modify.
A rectangle appears around the chosen entry. The example in Figure 16-2 is
the icon for the Mail Tool application.
Binder
~ ~
(,ooJ;:;o;T» ( Props 'V)
Binder Entries
~ lotus-spreadsheet
~mail-file
1M!
~
mail-message
------,I ~I
'::=----,--mailto_ol-prO_g
(i)
mb-prog
~----------------------~~
~ ( 0 u p I kate)
CC::;oio;o;OtO;o)
Read-Only Entry
Figure 16-2 Choosing the Mail Tool Icon Entry
2. Click SELECT on the Duplicate button.
The entry is copied into your private database.
3. Choose View ~ Personal Entries.
The view changes to your personal database, listing the newly copied entry
and any others that you may have. The copied entry has the temporary
name unnarned_l.
Figure 16-3 shows a private Binder database with the newly copied entry.
Binder
455
-- 16
Binder - edited
~~~(proPs<;J)
Binder Entries - Perso nal
~~_!~~~_c_a_lc_to_o_I-_p_r_og__________~1 ~
.J
cat-prog
~ unnamed_1
~----------------------~~
~(Duplicate)~
.-J
Figure 16-3 Private Binder Database
Note - If you run Binder as root without the -system or -network commandline options listed above! you will only be able to modify the personal Binder
entries for user "root." Make sure to use the command-line options if you want
to modify the system or network entries.
Binder Properties
When you want to modify or add new bindings, use the Props menu or the
Props keyboard key to display the Properties window. You fill in or change the
information on these properties windows to specify your bindings.
There are two categories of Binder properties: Icon properties and File Type
properties. These categories are described in the following sections.
456
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
The Apply and Reset buttons at the bottom of the Properties window apply or
reset the changes made to both categories, Icon and File Type, at the same time.
If you want to make both Icon and File Type changes, you only need to click
SELECT on Apply once, after you have finished making both sets of changes.
Ican Properties
The Icon Properties window displays all the information used by DeskSet
applications to display and operate on files. The icon properties determine how
files of a particular type are displayed by DeskSet applications (such as File
Manager), and what happens when files of that type are opened or printed.
You display the Icon Properties window by selecting an entry in the base
window scrolling list and choosing Icon from the Props menu. The default Icon
Properties window shows only the information needed to display a type of
files, as shown in Figure 16-4.
\9
Binder: Properties
Category:
I I
Icon
Icon:
File Ty pes
~
I
GUIDE-fil~
Image File: fillLfile glyph,icon
Mask File: file_glyph_maskicon
Foregr Co lor:. 0 0 0
Backgr Co lor:. 229 137 206
G!£!D~
G
G
0
Figure 16-4 Default Icon Properties Window
You can click SELECT on the plus sign (+) button at the lower right of the
window to expand the window to display the full set of properties, including
information needed to open and print a class of files, as shown in Figure 16-5.
Binder
457
!:9
Binder: Pro perties
Category:
I I
Icon
File Types
~
Icon:
I
Application:
GUIDE-fil~
m $FILE done ***"; echo
Print Method: cat $FILE I mp -10 I Ipr-h
Image File: [!I ILfile glyph.icon
Mask File: [!Ie_glyph maskicon
Foregr color:. 000
Backgr Color:. 229137206
~~
0
0
C0 G
Figure 16-5 Expanded Icon Properties Window
You can shrink the window back down to the smaller size by clicking SELECT
on the minus sign (-) button at the bottom of the expanded window.
This section describes the fields in the expanded Icon Properties window.
Icon and Binder Entry Name
The Icon field shows the current icon and Binder database entry name. Use the
text field to modify the entry name, and use the following fields to modify the
appearance of the icon. Double-click SELECT on the temporary unique name to
the right of the icon to modify the icon.
Image File
The Image File text field displays the path of the 32 by 32 pixel (XView format)
icon that is bound to the current Binder entry. The icon is displayed in the base
window scrolling list and the Icon field. This is the same icon displayed by the
File Manager, Mail Tool, and other applications in the DeskSet environment.
458
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mask File
The Mask File text field displays the path of an icon color mask. A color mask
defines the region of the icon to which the background color is applied. You
can think of this as a stencil cut out overlaid on top of your icon before the
background color is applied to the icon. If no icon mask file is specified, the
entire icon is colored with the background color.
The icon mask does not have to be a 32 by 32 (XView format) pixel icon. If it is
larger, only the first 32 by 32 (XView format) pixels in the top left corner of the
icon are used.
For example, Figure 16-6 shows the icon and the icon mask for the
printtool-prog Binder entry. The image on the left is the icon image, and
determines what is outlined in the foreground color. The image on the right is
the icon mask, and determines the area of the icon colored with the
background color.
Figure 16-6 The printtool-prog Icon and printtool-prog Icon Mask
Image File and Mask File Line
These text lines specify the path (directory location) to the icon and the icon's
mask-a stencil of the image that determines the area of the icon colored with
the background color. To modify the current icon in its appearance on the
workspace, do not modify these paths.
Foregr (Foreground) Color
The foreground color is the color that the icon itself is drawn (icon outline)
within the File Manager and other DeskSet applications. If no value is given
for this field, the foreground color is black.
Binder
459
If you want to pick a new foreground color, click SELECT on the window
button to the right of the Foregr Color text field to invoke the Color Chooser
application. See "Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder" on page 473 for
more information.
Alternatively, you can type three numbers in the Foregr Color text field to
indicate the amount each of red, green, and blue in the foreground color. Color
saturation values range from a through 255. For example, 255 a a represents a
bright, solid red color.
Backgr (Background) Color
The background color is the color the icon is colored within (the lines of the
icon) the File Manager and other DeskSet applications. If no value is given for
this field, the background color is white.
If you want to pick a new background color, click SELECT on the button to the
right of the Backgr Color text field to invoke the Color Chooser. See the section
"Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder" on page 473 for more
information.
Alternatively, you can type three numbers in the Backgr Color text field to
indicate the amount of red, green, and blue, respectively, of the background
color. Color saturation values range from a through 255. For example, a 255 a
represents a bright, solid green color.
Application
The Application text field defines the application that is invoked whenever any
file defined by the current binding is opened in File Manager or other
applications in the DeskSet environment. This text field is on the expanded
portion of the Icon Properties window.
Note - If there is a ToolTalk™ method available, applications do not use this
field. Refer to the Solaris 2.2 Desktop Integration Guide.
460
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Print Method
The Print Method defines how a file is printed in the DeskSet environment. If
no Print Method is specified, the default print method of the application the
file is being printed from is used. This field is on the expanded portion of the
Icon Properties window.
File Type Properties
You use the File Type Properties window to define the set of files that are
bound to the icon, colors, and applications defined in the Icon Properties
window.
You display the File Type properties by choosing File Types from the Props
menu or the Category choice on the Properties window. The default File Type
Properties window is shown in Figure 16-7.
Binder: Properties
Category:
I Icon I File Types I
*,G
'-----------=
Pattern:
$'1'--_ _ _ _ __
Figure 16-7 Default File Type Properties window
You can click SELECT on the plus sign (+) button to expand the window to
display the full set of properties, including information needed to identify a
class of files, as shown in Figure 16-8.
Binder
461
Binder: Properties
Category:
I Icon I File Types I
Identify:
*,G
I by Name I by Content I
T<~{! G ns~~t: .'}.............. f!E)
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Pattern:
=
r<~{! Va! !!~~:
.............................................................................. ..
r<~{! !\:l<~s Ie ................................................................................
<1>-$_ _ _ _ _ __
Figure 16-8 Expanded File Type Properties window
You can shrink the window back down to the smaller size by clicking SELECT
on the minus sign (-) button at the bottom of the expanded window.
This section describes the fields in the File Type Properties window.
File Type Scrolling List
Each entry in the File Type scrolling list defines how a file, or a group of files,
is recognized by DeskSet applications. You can think of each entry in the File
Type scrolling list as a class of files, which may consist of one file or many files.
Each class of files in this scrolling list (each File Type entry) is bound to the
Icon properties of the current Binder entry.
Note - If you have two identical File Type entries in your Binder database,
only the first one that the Binder reads is used. The first Binder entry to use the
File Type entry is not necessarily the first Binder entry in the Binder base
window scrolling list.
462
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
16=
Pattern Text Field
Use the Pattern text field beneath the scrolling list to modify the name of a File
Type entry. If the files are to be identified by a pattern, this pattern must be the
name of the Binding entry. If the currently selected File Type is identified by
Content, the Pattern text field is dimmed and unavailable.
When there are no items selected on the scrolling list, you can type a pattern
into the Pattern text field and press Return to create a new File Type entry.
File Type Properties Window Buttons
You SELECT the buttons to the right of the File Type scrolling list to create and
delete File Type entries, and to move them to and from a clipboard, as follows:
• New creates a new File Type entry. The name of the first new entry is
unnamed_l. If you create another new entry without renaming the first, it is
called unnamed_2, etc.
To change the name of a File Type entry, type a new name in the Pattern text
field and press Return. If you want to identify a set of files by a pattern, you
must type the actual pattern in the Pattern text field. If you want to identify
a set of files by content, the name of the File Type entry can be anything.
• Cut removes the currently selected File Type entry from the current Binder
entry (the entry selected in the base window scrolling list), and to move it to
the clipboard. If the current Binder entry is a read-only entry, the Cut button
is inactive.
• Copy copies the currently selected File Type entry to the clipboard.
• Paste adds the File Type entry that is on the clipboard to the current Binder
entry. The Paste button is inactive if there is nothing on the clipboard.
• Delete removes the File Type entry from the current Binder entry. The Delete
button is inactive if the current Binder entry is a read-only entry. Note that
deleting a Binder entry does not delete its File Type entry.
You use the Apply and Reset buttons at the bottom of the File Type Properties
window to apply your File Type and Icon Properties changes to the current
Binder entry, or to reset all the changes you've made since the last Apply.
Binder
463
Identify Choice Item
The Identify choice item determines how the current class of files (the selected
File Type entry) is recognized by DeskSet applications, such as the File
Manager. A class of files is recognized either by Name or by Content, as
defined in the following sections:
Identify By Name
If the Identify choice is by Name, files are recognized by the pattern in the
Pattern text field. In this case, the Pattern is often the name of an application.
For example, Figure 16-9 shows the clock File Type entry that is bound to the
clock-prog Binder entry. Any file called clock will be displayed by the File
Manager with the clock icon and colors displayed in the base window scrolling
list. (The icon and colors are defined by the clock-prog Icon properties.)
@)
Binder
Binder: Properties
Category:
I Icon I File Types I
Binder Entries
C9
l~c_loc_k____________~1 ~
clock-prog
I"!'!f'\ cm-prog
L!!d
!lID
I
cm dtool-prog
~
<8>
I
colorchooser
~ com pose-prog
~
Identify:
(,·C:> ..·...···)
Tan Ofb;:pt;
I by Name I by Content I
0) ...........
i!l:!}
@ED
('·"i.;~:;·:;·i::~····)
(·-c;::;·i·i.;t·ii-:;
'-----------=
~---------~=
Pattern:
=cI..:....:oc;.:@Ih~_______
~ (Duplicate) ("c;;~·i·;;t·i.;')
Read-Only Entry
Read-Only Entry
Figure 16-9 Clock File Type Entry
When the Identify choice is "by Name" and the Pattern text field contains an
asterisk (*), the asterisk in the Pattern means "match any file name here." For
example, the File Type Entry *.ps, shown in Figure 16-10, matches all files that
end with. ps. These files are PostScript files, and are displayed in the DeskSet
with the postscript-file icon displayed in the Binder base window
scrolling list.
464
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Binder: Pro perties
Category:
Binder Entries
=
~ perfmeter-prog
I~ postscript-file
I Icon I File Types I
~1*~,p_s____________~1 ~
t=:I
Content
Identify:
I by Name I by Content I
Tq! Offs:d: ) ...........
f3iJ
~ pri nttool-prog
~
I
~ readme-file
{f) shell-script
~------------------~=
~ (Duplicate)
"----------=
Pattern:
s,.,IIL-_______
....:.*,!:..3
P
(T';;;:'j'(.j'!';.)
Read-Only Entry
GG
Read-O n Iy Entry
Figure 16-10 The * .ps File Type Entry
An exception to the rule about matching the pattern with the file name occurs
with the Binder entries defaul t-app, defaul t-dir, and defaul t-doc. The
File Manager application uses these entries to determine the bindings for its
default application files, directories (folders), and documents. The File Type
patterns for these bindings are defaul t lapp, defaul t I dir, and
defaul t I doc. You will never, however, actually find a file called
defaul t lapp, defaul t I dir, or defaul t I doc. See "Changing a Binding" on
page 471 for information about how to change these default File Manager
bindings.
Identify by Content
If the Identify choice is by Content, files are recognized by matching file
contents instead of the file name. When you choose by Content, the four fields
underneath the Identify setting become active. These fields define what the file
contents should be to define files of the current File Type, as follows:
• Tag Offset determines the starting position in the file (counting from 0)
where the contents should be matched. The default value is 0, meaning
"match the contents starting at the very first character of the file." A Byte
Offset of 1 would start matching the contents at the second character of the
file, and so on.
Binder
465
-- 16
• Tag Type determines the type of value that is to be matched in the file
contents: Byte, Short, Long, or String. Most files are ASCII files consisting of
the String data type (that is, words and characters that you can type). A Byte
type is a one-byte numerical value, a Short is a two-byte numerical value,
and a Long is a four-byte numerical value.
• Tag Value determines what to look for in the file contents. This value must
be of the type defined in the Tag Type setting.
• Tag Mask is an optional field that you can use to define a mask value for
Byte, Short, or Long data types. If a mask value is defined, a logical AND
operation is performed on the Tag Value and the Tag Mask to determine the
match value (the contents to be matched). This field is primarily intended
for programmers developing applications to be integrated into the DeskSet
environment.
See the magic manual page for advanced information about the Tag Type, Tag
Mask, and Tag Value fields.
Figure 16-11 shows that PostScript files can be recognized by the string "%!" at
the beginning of the file (Tag Offset = 0, Tag Type = String, Tag Value =%!).
Note that PostScript files can also be recognized by files ending with. ps, as
described previously in the section "Identify By Name."
r~
Bi~~_
__~=~==~~____Bi_n_h_r_:p_ro_p_e_rt_~~s
11_~
.
~~( Ur"j·»( Props 'J)
Binder Entries
~
postscri pt-fi Ie
=
I
~
~
(·T·;>··· ..· .. )
@£D
pri nttool-prog
~
I
=
readme-file
shell-script
~ ( D u plicate)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I File Types I
*.ps
IContent
=
[i]
I Icon
=
~ perfmeter-prog
I~
Category:
Identify:
\
Tag Offset:
Tag Type:
=
PatH~fn;
_0_1B2J
l Byte 1Short I
I Long
(·"i.;·;;·;~·i:;:;··")
(·-c;;:;·i·i.j·tf;')
I by Name I by Content I
Tag Value: %!
Tag Mask:
.....................................
(T";;:;Ti.j·t·i.j)
GG
Read-Only Entry
Figure 16-11 The postscript-file Content File Type Entry
466
Lstring I
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Read-Only Entry
16=
Figure 16-12 shows the sun-raster File Type entry. This class of files is
defined as all files starting with the Long value Ox59a66a95.
~
~
Binder
~~("'Jr;';T;')~
Binder Entries
II
IContent
rjI snapshot-prog
sun-executable
[!J
sun-icon-image
I~
sun-raster
IIcon IFile Types I
=
she Iitool-prog
~
•
Binder: Properties
Category:
I
~
I=I
~ (Duplicate)
=
~
Iby Name Iby Conte nt I
~
Ide ntify:
('.(;) ........ )
Tag Offset: _0_
~
Tag Type:
~
I Byte I Short I
I Long I String I
Tag Value: Ox59a66a95
=
PaHpfn:
Tag Mask:
............................................
@£B (§I)
C0 G
Read-O n Iy Entry
Read-O n Iy Entry
Figure 16-12 The sun-raster File Type Entry
Creating a New Binding
The following steps explain how to create a new binding. The example binds
the cat icon described in Chapter 15, "Icon Editor" to the cat program file in
your Ibin directory.
1. If an icon does not exist for the new binding, use the Icon Editor to create
a 32 by 32 (XView format) pixel icon.
See Chapter 15, "Icon Editor" for instructions.
The icon for the binding is the icon displayed by the File Manager, Mail
Tool, and other applications in the DeskSet environment
If you want to color only part of the icon when it is displayed in the File
Manager or other DeskSet applications, use the Icon Editor to create a 32 by
32 (XView format) pixel icon mask, which defines the area of the icon to be
colored. See "Mask File" on page 459 for information about icon masks.
Binder
467
-- 16
2. Click SELECT on the New button at the bottom of the base window.
A new entry is automatically created called unnamed_l, and the Binder
Properties window is displayed showing the Icon category, as shown in
Figure 16-13. If an entry called unnamed_l already exists, the new entry is
called unnamed_2, and so forth.
@)
!:9
Binder - edited
Q§~~~
Binder Entries
II
=
text
~ textedit-prog
<8>
[I
ILJ
Binder: Properties
Category:
IIcon I File Types I
D
Icon:
unnamed-:k
Application: textedit
Image File: [!JcDoc glyph,icon
Print Method:
Mask File: [!Jglyph maskicon
window-prog
xpm-file
I =~
unnamed_1
~(Duplicate)~
Foregr Color: •
000
Backgr Color: •
22991 193
~~
0
0
,2)
0
Figure 16-13 A New Binder Entry
3. Replace the name in the Icon text field of the Properties window with the
name you want for the new Binder entry.
In this example, type catJ)rog in the Icon text field.
4. Type the path and file name of a 32 by 32 (XView format) pixel icon in the
Image File text field.
In this example, type the path and name of the cat icon created in Step 1.
5. If you want to specify a color mask for the icon, type the path and file
name of the icon mask in the Mask File text field.
An icon mask defines the area of the icon to be colored when the icon is
displayed in the File Manager or other DeskSet applications. See the section
"Mask File" on page 459 for more information.
If you don't specify an icon mask file, the entire icon image will be colored
with the background color.
468
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
6. Specify the foreground and background colors for the icon by typing RGB
(red/green/blue) values in the text fields, or by using the Color Chooser.
The foreground color is the color the icon is drawn with when it is
displayed by the File Manager or other DeskSet applications. See the section
"Foregr (Foreground) Color" on page 459 for more information.
The background color is the color the icon is filled with when it is displayed
by the File Manager or other DeskSet applications. If you have specified an
icon mask file, the background color is only filled in the mask area. See the
section "Backgr (Background) Color" on page 460 for more information.
You use the Color Chooser to specify colors by clicking SELECT on the
Foreground Color or Background Color menu buttons, located to the right
of the Foregr and Backgr text fields. See "Using the Color Chooser Palette
with Binder" on page 473 for information about using the Color Chooser.
7. If desired, type an Application or Print Method, or both, in the text fields
of the expanded Properties window.
If your Properties window is not expanded, click SELECT on the plus sign
(+) button at the bottom right corner of the Properties window to display
the Application and Print Method text fields.
The Application defines the application that is invoked whenever any file
bound to this set of properties is opened in File Manager, Mail Tool, or other
applications in the DeskSet environment. The default application is
textedit.
The Print Method defines how a file bound to this set of properties is
printed in the DeskSet environment. If you do not specify a Print Method,
the print method of the application the file is being printed from is used.
8. Choose File Types on the Properties window Category choice item to
display the File Type properties.
The File Type properties determine the set of files that are bound to the Icon
properties that you just specified.
Binder
469
9. Type the new File Type entry name in the Pattern text field and press
Return.
In this example, type cat in the Pattern text field.
If you are going to recognize files by Pattern, the Pattern text field must
contain the pattern to be matched, such as cat in this example. If you are
going to recognize files by Content, the Pattern text field can be anything
that distinguishes this type of file.
10. Move the pointer to the Identify choice item on the expanded properties
window, and dick SELECT on "by Name" or "by Content" to specify how
you want to recognize files.
In this example, click SELECT on "by Name" to match the file named cat.
If you select "by Content," the last four Type Information fields become
active. You then need to specify the Tag Offset, Tag Type, and Tag Value to
be used to recognize files by content. You can also specify a Tag Mask, if
desired. See the section "Identify by Content" on page 465 for more
information about the Content fields.
11. If you want to specify more files to be bound to the Icon properties, repeat
steps 9 and 10.
12. Click SELECT on the Apply button to apply the Icon and File Type
properties to your new Binder entry.
13. CUck SELECT on the Save button at the top of the Binder base window to
save the new Binder entry in your personal database.
If you are running the Binder as root with the special options to update the
system or network entries, the new entry is added to the appropriate
database. See the section "Binder Databases" on page 453 for information
about the three different Binder databases.
Note - The DeskSet applications will not recognize the new binding until you
have saved it by clicking SELECT on the Save button. You must also restart the
application.
Figure 16-14 shows the new bound image after quitting File Manager and
starting it again.
470
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
. . 12)
File Manager: lusr Ibin
~(View 'i1)~(props 'i1)(Goto:
'i1)1'<
~
•• • •• ••
bounce demo
capitalize
cal
f4.
cat
calendar
canvas_demo
cb
cc
=
I
~
j
Figure 16-14 The New Image in the File Manager
Deleting a Binder Entry
To delete a Binder entry, select the entry in the Binder base window scrolling
list, and click SELECT on the Delete button. Then click SELECT on the Save
button. The Delete button is dimmed and inactive if the currently selected
entry is a read-only entry.
Note - When you delete a Binder entry, the File Type entry associated with it is
not deleted. If you want to delete the File Type entry, make sure to delete it
from the File Type scrolling list before you delete the Binder entry.
To delete the File Type entry, select the Binder entry in the base window
scrolling list, display the File Type Properties window, select the File Type in
the File Types scrolling list, and click SELECT on the Properties window Delete
button.
Changing a Binding
To change a binding:
1. Select the entry in the Binder base window scrolling list.
2. Modify the Icon and File Type properties fields that you want to change.
Make sure to click SELECT on the Apply and Save buttons to apply your
Properties changes and then save them to the Binder database.
Binder
471
-- 16
If the binding that you want to change is a read-only entry, you can select the
entry and then click SELECT on the Duplicate button to make a private copy of
the entry. You can then modify your private copy of the Binder entry.
For example, suppose you want to change the color that File Manager uses to
display folders. Follow these steps:
1. Select the entry defaul t-dir in the Binder base window scrolling list.
The footer message in the bottom right corner of the Binder indicates that
this is a read-only entry.
2. Click SELECT on the Duplicate button to copy the entry to your user
database.
A new Binder entry is created called unnamed_I, with all the same Icon
properties as the original default-dir Binder entry. You can modify this
new user entry.
3. Rename the new Binder entry default-dir.
This will put an entry called default-dir in your personal user Binder
database. This personal entry will override the System or Network entry of
the same name.
Note - If you later create a second user entry called defaul t-dir, only the
entry created first will be recognized.
4. Change the background color to the new desired color.
You can either type in new RCB (red/green/blue) values in the Backgr
Color text field, or click SELECT on the Backgr Color window button to
display the Color Chooser. See the sections "Backgr (Background) Color" on
page 460 and "Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder" on page 473 for
more information.
5. Click SELECT on the Apply button.
This updates the Icon name and color in the new Binder entry.
6. Click SELECT on the Save button.
This updates your database to include the new Binder entry.
Now when you view the merged Binder databases (the All option of the
View menu), your user entry will replace the System or Network entry of
the same name. If you want to use the System or Network entry again,
472
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
simply delete the User entry. The next time you start a new File Manager
application, the color specified in your new user Entry will be used to
display folders.
Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder
You can use the Color Chooser with the Binder to specify foreground and
background colors for the icons displayed by the File Manager or other
DeskSet applications.
To use the Color Chooser to select Foreground or Background icon colors, click
SELECT on the Foregr Color or Backgr Color menu button. (These are the
buttons to the right of the text fields.) The Color Chooser is then displayed, as
shown in Figure 16-15.
Color Chooser
•• me
.
II
II
II II
II
II II
mII
[i] II
0 II
•
"'......'"
II
II
II
II II
0 0...
...
II []
111 Gill
:.. ..
II Gill
.........
."
~~
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II II
1m II
mII
II fiill. ..
~ III
II
II II
II II
.
~~~~~
~~~
II II II
II II II
II 0
II ill II
0... Ij
III II
II II
1m II
•
(APply)
C hoos i ng Foregrou n d Color for Bin der
Figure 16-15 Color Chooser for Binder's Foreground Color
The icon image with the current Foreground and Background colors is
displayed in the upper left corner of the palette shown in Figure 16-15 above.
To use a color displayed in the Color Chooser palette:
Binder
473
1. Click SELECT on the desired color in the Color Chooser palette.
The selected color is highlighted and displayed in the Color Chooser
preview area. The preview area is the large square at the left of the palette.
2. Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the color change.
The square in the top left corner of the palette changes to the newly selected
color.
474
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Customizing the Solaris
Environment
You can customize many aspects of the Workspace environment to suit your
needs. For instance, you can use the Workspace Properties window to change
the colors of the Workspace and windows, and modify the location of the
window scrollbars and how the mouse buttons and pointer behave. This
chapter discusses these and other methods of customizing your OpenWindows
environment.
Viewing Information About Your Workstation
As things change within your operating environment, or if changes are made
to your system, you may be asked for certain basic information about your
system. This information can also be helpful to a system administrator if you
are having system problems.
Some basic information about your workstation can be found on the
Workstation Information window, shown in Figure 17-1.
• To open the Workspace Information window, choose
Workspace~ Workstation Info.
475
=17
~'
Workstation Information
Workstation Name: river
Workstation Type: Sun 4/50 (SPA RCstation IPX)
Host 10: 57211 b35
Internet Address: 129.144.152.246
Network Domain: DGDO.Eng.Sun.COM
Phys i cal Memory (RA M): 32 Meg abytes
Vi rtual Memory (Swap): 143 Megabytes
Vi rtual Memory In Us e: (jl" I
I I I I I I I I)
o
perce nt
100
Operating System: SunOS Release 5.1
Window System: OpenWindows Version 3.2
Figure 17-1 Workstation Information Window
Basic information available to you from the Workstation Information window
is as follows:
Your Workstation Information
The following information tells you the name and type of workstation you
have or are using.
Workstation Name
This is also known as the machine name or host name. It is the unique name you
or your system administrator gave to the machine you are using. This is
usually not the same name as your user name or login name. This is the
machine name that other users see over the network, such as from electronic
mail.
476
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Workstation Type
This is usually the product name (or type) for your workstation. It may reflect
the model number of the workstation.
Networking Information
These three items provide some networking information.
HostID
A unique CPU number assigned to your machine. This is sometimes used for
licensing software.
Internet Address
Your unique machine address that allows other machines to talk to your
machine over the network.
Network Domain
Name of the (NIS) domain to which your machine belongs. Contains password
information and other network machine addresses.
System Memory Information
These three items provide some simple information on how the system is using
memory.
Physical Memory (RAM)
This tells you how much Random Access Memory (RAM) is installed.
Virtual Memory (Swap)
The amount of swap space on the hard disk.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
477
Virtual Memory In Use
If the number on the slide bar gets close to 100%, contact a System
Administrator for adjustment.
Solaris 2.2 Information
These two items tell you version and release numbers with the Solaris 2.2
release.
Operating System
The version and release number of the operating system your workstation is
running.
Window System
The name and version number of the window system that your workstation is
running.
Using the Workspace Properties Window
Here is an overview of the Workspace Properties window categories. They are
discussed in detail in this chapter. Depending on the hardware capabilities of
your display, the Workspace Properties window categories may have different
choices available to you.
• Color allows you to change the foreground and background color of
windows, data areas, and the Workspace.
• Font allows you to choose the style and scale (size) of text in window titles,
menus, buttons, and other system elements.
• Keyboard allows you to turn on or off the clicking of keys, repetition of a
character when its key remains pressed, and keyboard equivalents of mouse
actions.
• Mouse allows you to control mouse behavior in relation to pointer speed,
movement, and placement; multiple click intervals; and button order for
right- and left-handed users.
478
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Menu allows you to specify how quickly a submenu is displayed based on
how far the mouse is dragged to the right. Some menu characteristics are
determined by mouse actions. You can also choose whether to display the
default item when you click SELECT on a menu button or to carry out the
default command without displaying the menu.
• Programs menu allows you to rearrange items on the Programs menu
(displayed by choosing Programs from the Workspace menu). You can also
add and delete items.
• Miscellaneous category has several settings:
• Screen saver protects your screen life when the computer is not in use. You
can turn it on or off, and set the timeout.
• Beeping alerts you to various conditions. You can turn it on or off, or turn
it on for notices only.
• Set Active window selection allows you to activate a window either by
moving the pointer into the window or by clicking in the desired window.
Only one window can be active at a time.
• Icon and scrollbar allow you to choose where to place icons and scrollbars.
• Locale allows you to select settings appropriate for your language and
cultural notation.
All of these items can be set through the Workspace Properties window.
1. To open the Workspace Properties window, choose Workspace
Properties.
~
Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display, the Workspace
Properties window categories may have different choices available to you. You
choose the category you want to change from the Category menu.
2. To view the Category menu, position the pointer on the Category menu
button and press MENU.
Figure 17-2 shows the Category menu.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
479
Works pace Pro perties
CReset To Standard)
Category:
WINDOWS
Mouse
Menus
Programs Menu
DATA AREA
•
D
Miscellaneous
Background:
WORKSPACE
Foreg round:
Pattern:
@).
Backg round:
Figure 17-2 Category Menu
Change Bars
As you change settings, a vertical change bar is displayed to the left of the
setting you have altered since the last time changes were implemented. This
visual cue helps you track your changes.
480
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Workspace Properties Window Buttons
The Workspace Properties window has three buttons:
• Reset to Standard displays (but does not implement) the system default
settings-that is, the settings determined by your system administrator.
Change bars mark your previously-applied nonstandard settings.
• Reset ignores any changes and immediately reverts to previously-applied
settings.
• Apply implements changes. Most changes take place immediately, while
others do not take place until you open a new application or restart the
OpenWindows software.
Note - To change settings in more than one category, be sure to select Apply
before continuing to the next category. Unlike previous versions, this version of
OpenWindows software treats changes to each category separately.
Setting Colors
Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display, the Workspace
Properties window categories may have different choices available to you.
When you open the Workspace Properties window, color appears as the first
property you can customize. Figure 17-3 shows the Color category in the
Workspace Properties window.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
481
s
Category: @J
Color
( Reset To Stan dard )
Background:
Gil
00
III III III III II II
III III
111 111 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
II
DATA AREAS
Foreground:
Backg round:
Window Foreground Color
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
••••••• •
WINDOWS
Foreg round:
~
Gil
00
Custom
WORKSPACE
Foreground:
Backg round:
011
00
Pattern:
@J
Figure 17-3 Workspace Color Category
To modify colors:
1. Click SELECT on the button for the item you want to change.
Each button (Windows Foreground, Windows Background, Data Areas
Foreground, and so on) has a corresponding pop-up window that displays a
color palette for that item. Figure 17-3 shows a color palette. (Note that for
the purpose of this document, the color choices have been replaced with
patterns.)
2. Point to a new color on the palette and click SELECT.
The preview area at the bottom of the Workspace Properties window, as
shown in Figure 17-4, shows a sample of your color choices.
482
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
r-m-----~'
Control Area
Data Area
Figure 17-4 Color Preview Area
3. If you are not satisfied with the new color, select another color from the
palette, or create a custom color.
To create a custom color:
a. Click SELECT on Custom on the palette.
The palette is replaced with sliders for Hue, Saturation, and Brightness,
as shown in Figure 17-5. (Note that for the purpose of this document, the
color choices have been replaced with patterns.)
Customizing the Solaris Environment
483
Works pace Pro petties
Category:
@)
Co lor
( Reset To Stan dard )
1:9
Hue:
OF=======>
Saturation:
OF=======>
Brightness:
f: :. :·.\·.:·.::·.:·~i;i:i:~*'MhJi
OF=======>
WINDOWS
Foreground:
Background:
8
8
DATA AREAS
811
80
Foreg round:
Backg round:
Window Foreground Color
Palette
C usto m
WORKSPACE
Foreground:
Background:
8
8
Pattern:
@)
Figure 17-5 Using the Custom Color Palette
b. Move the sliders as you watch the preview area.
The sliders let you control three characteristics:
• Hue is a color from a range of colors-red, orange, yellow, green, blue,
indigo, violet and magenta.
• Saturation is the deepness, or richness, of a color.
• Brightness is the amount of light that is filtered into a color.
4. To change additional foreground or background colors, repeat the
previous three steps.
A palette for each foreground and background color is pinned to the
Workspace.
484
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
5. When the colors suit you, click SELECT on Apply.
The changes take place immediately on the Workspace, in the Workspace
menu, and in the window frames of any applications that are already open
on the Workspace. Depending upon your system configuration, application
control areas in open windows remain the previous color until you quit and
restart the application(s).
Customizing Fonts
OpenWindows DeskSet applications are set up with default fonts that appear
on all items, such as icons, menus, and windows. Normally, you do not need to
customize the style or point size of these fonts. However, if you would like to
increase or decrease the size of the default, or if you are partial to a particular
font, it is possible to change the default font style and size for the system font
from the Fonts category.
The following sections on fonts describe two methods of customizing fonts: a
basic method of changing the scale of the font (which also affects the window
scale), and a method of changing the font style, The first method simply
increases or decreases the font size (to small, large, or extra large) and its
window size, while the second provides greater flexibility in defining the style.
Choosing a Font Scale
The scale allows you to choose from four font sizes for windows. You can
change the default so that all applications subsequently open in the size you
specify. Note that when you scale the font, the window scales with it.
You can choose from these four sizes:
•
•
•
•
small
medium (the default)
large
extra large
Note - Not all fonts styles and sizes appear on the screen satisfactorily. If the
size is too large, some items, such as menu buttons, may be obscured.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
485
Specifying the Font Style
Default fonts include:
• Windows: Lucida Sans in 12 point (medium)
• Window headers: Lucida Sans Bold
• Text subwindows: Lucida Sans Typewriter
If you prefer, you can specify another font style and size.
To select a different typeface:
1. Select a typeface from the scrolling list.
A sample of the typeface is displayed in the preview area. If you are not
satisfied, select another typeface.
2. Click SELECT on Apply.
Listing the Available Fonts
When the Standard selection is chosen, you can scroll through all of the
typefaces installed with OPEN LOOK style, the Custom Selection refers to all
fonts available on your system.
Note - The list generated from xlsfonts is very long; there are over 400 fonts
available. If the listing on your screen does not contain the expected number of
fonts, check with your system administrator. It is possible that a subset of the
available fonts was installed.
Previewing Selected Font Settings
You can look at the selected typeface and scale settings in the Preview box.
This shows you how text appears in:
• Control settings-places like buttons and text fields (scrolling lists) in your
window system.
• Control labels-places like captions.
• Data areas-places like text in the Text Editor window.
486
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Keyboard Menu Equivalents
You can turn on or turn off the keyboard accelerator keys. This means that the
keyboard character of the acceleration shows up in the following:
• Application + Window-means in all applications that use them and in
Open Windows menus
• Application Only-means only OPEN LOOK applications that use them
• None-means will not show up in any OPEN LOOK application
This is a standard set of tasks (within a DeskSet application) that can be
"accelerated" from the keyboard by using keyboard shortcuts. These will be
visible from the pull-down menus, and can be configured on or off from the
Workspace Properties menu. Keyboard accelerators are active for only the
windows that are active. If you need to turn these off, you can select None
from Keyboard Menu Equivalents from the Keyboard Properties. The
following table outlines the keyboard shortcuts and their functions.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
487
Table Legend
FM = File Manager eM = Calendar Manager
MT = Mail Tool
TE = Text Editor
SS = Snapshot
IE = Icon Editor
B = Binder
PT = Print Tool
AT = Audio Tool
IT = Image Tool
x
= Accelerated Menu Item
- = no relevant menu item
btn = relevant item is a button
(no accelerator)
meta = use the meta
or similar symbol on your keyboard
Accel = Keys to press in this order to invoke the accelerator
«»
Keyboard Equivalent Menu Items
488
Accel
FM
eM
MT
TE
SS
IE
B
PT
IT
AT
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
New
meta+N
X
-
Open
meta + 0
X
X
X
X
btn
Save
meta + S
-
-
X
X
btn
X
btn
-
Print
meta + P
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
Find
meta + F
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
SeLAH
meta + A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Undo
meta + Z
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
Redo
shift meta
+Z
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
Cut
meta + X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
Copy
meta + C
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
Paste
meta+ V
X
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
Props
meta + I
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Typeface
meta + T
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Normal
shift meta
+N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Keyboard Equivalent Menu Items
Accel
FM
eM
MT
TE
SS
IE
B
PT
IT
AT
Bold
shift meta
+B
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Italic
shift meta
+1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Other Keyboard Options
A couple of other keyboard options you can control are:
• Key Click sounds a click with each depression of a key.
• Key Repeat means when a key is depressed and held, the key will type
multiple characters until released. With this setting turned on, a single
character is typed, when it is off, multiple characters are displayed.
Modified Use of the Keyboard and Mouse
This section lists accelerator key commands that you can substitute for mouse
and menu operations. Accelerator keys help you use the interface efficiently by
performing operations that normally require several mouse actions. This is
especially useful to those who prefer the use of the keyboard over the use of
the mouse, but can be helpful to anyone who wants to increase efficiency
through fewer hand movements away from the keyboard.
Keyboard Accelerators
The following sections describe basic editing operations, navigating your way
through files and windows, and opening menus without using the mouse
buttons.
Note - The commands for navigating in text files pertain to the Text Editor
application window.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
489
Erase Functions
Table 17-1 Commands that Erase Characters, Words, or Lines
Sequence
Action
Backspace
Erases character to the left of the insert point
Shift-Backspace
Erases character to the right of the insert point
Control-w
Erases word to the left of the insert point
Control-Shift-w
Erases word to the right of the insert point
Control-u
Erases to the beginning of the line
Control-Shift-u
Erases to the end of the line
Move Caret Functions
Table 17-2 Commands that Move the Caret Within Text
Sequence
490
Action
Control-b or Left Arrow
Moves the caret one character to the left
Control-f or Right Arrow
Moves the caret one character to the right
Control-Shift-b
Moves the caret one word to the right
Control-,
Moves the caret one word to the left
Control-.
Moves the caret to the end of the word
Control-a
Moves the caret to the start of
Control-e
Moves the caret to the end of the line
Control-p or Up Arrow
Moves the caret up one line, maintaining
column position
Control-n or Down Arrow
Moves the caret down one line, maintaining
column position
Control-Return, End
Moves the caret to the end of text
Control-Shift-Return or Home
Moves the caret to beginning of text
Page Up
Moves caret up one pane
Page Down
Moves caret down one pane
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
line~
Function Keys
The following commands use the keys on the panel to the left of the keyboard,
and are specific to the Type-4 and Type-5 keyboards.
Table 17-3 Function Keys and Their Actions
Sequence
Action
Stop, Esc
Stops the current operation
Again or Meta-a
Repeats the previous operation
Props
Displays the property window for the application at
the pointer location
Undo or Meta-u
Undoes previous operation
Front
Brings the window at the pointer location to the front
of the screen. When the window is already at the
front, moves it to the back of the screen
Copy or Meta-c
Copies selection to the clipboard
Open
Opens the icon at the pointer location or closes the
window at the pointer location
Paste
Copies clipboard selection to the insert point
Find or Meta-f
Finds selection to the right of the caret
Shift-Find
Finds selection to the left of the caret
Cut or Meta-x
Cuts selection and puts it on the clipboard
Help
Displays a help window with context-sensitive help
for the object at the pointer location
Keyboard Mouse Equivalents
The following keyboard accelerators require that you use mouseless mode. You
can set this from the Properties menu:
1. Select either Basic or All Functions from the Keyboard Mouse Equivalent.
2. Press SELECT on Apply.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
491
Global Navigation Functions
Table 17-4 Commands for Navigating About the Workspace
Sequence
Action
Alt-w
Moves focus to the next window within the current
application
Shift-Alt-w
Moves focus to the previous window within the
current application
Alt-n
Moves focus to the next application
Shift-Alt-n
Moves focus to the previous application
Shift-Alt-m
Displays Workspace menu
Local Navigation Commands
Table 17-5 Commands that Manipulate Base Windows or Pop-Up Windows
Sequence
Action
Alt-m
Displays window menu
Alt-F5
Moves window to back
Alt-F6
Enables you to move window with arrow keys
Alt-F7
Enables you to resize window with arrow keys
.LL\...lt-F8
Table 17-6 Commands that Manipulate Base Windows Only
Sequence
Action
Alt-F2
Opens the icon at the pointer location or closes the
window at the pointer location
Alt-F3
Resizes window to full size or reduces it to default
size
Alt-F9
Quits application
Table 17-7 Commands that Manipulate Pop-Up Window Menus
Sequence
492
Action
Alt-F2
Dismisses or cancels pop-up menu
Alt-FIO
Indicates owner of pop-up menu
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Mouse
You may want to change the way your mouse behaves within the Workspace.
~
Workspace Properties
Category:
@)
Mouse
( Reset To Standard)
Mouse Acceleration:
";'Q
I
I
I I
I
I
Mouse Threshold:
~
I
I
I
I
~II
I
0.1
Mo use B utto n Order:
Pointer Jumping:
I
pixels
I
50
1
M u Iti-CI ick Interval:
I
Hig h
None
I
I
I
seconds
1.0
I
SELECT -ADJUST -MENU
I
I
MEN U-A DJ UST-SE LECT
I
!if
Scro II bars
!if
Pop-Up Windows
~ ~
Figure 17-6 Mouse Properties
You can change the following settings from the Mouse Properties:
• Mouse Acceleration is the speed at which the mouse moves.
• Mouse Threshold defines how far (measured in pixels) does the mouse
move before acceleration begins.
• Multi-Click Interval specifies the time, in tenths of a second, that
differentiates a double-click from two single clicks.
• Mouse Button Order changes the order of the mouse button functions.
• Pointer Jumping defines a specific way in which the pointer can move in
relation to scrolling window or a pop-up menu.
a
Customizing the Solaris Environment
493
Multi-Click Interval
Use the Multi-click Interval setting to specify how many tenths of a second can
elapse between successive clicks on a mouse button before the first click is
ignored. This affects how quickly you must double-click the SELECT button,
for instance, when you want to open an application window from an icon.
To set the multi-click interval, drag the slider with the pointer. After you make
your changes in the mouse settings window, click SELECT on the Apply button
to store the new settings.
Depending upon your system configuration, changes to the Scrollbar Pointer
Jumping and Pop-up Pointer Jumping options do not take place in existing
application windows, but in those that you open from the Workspace menu
after the change was applied. The Multi-Click Interval option takes effect
immediately in all applications.
Mouse Button Order
The default positions of the SELECT, ADJUST, and MENU buttons on your
mouse are labeled from left to right. Frequently, a left-handed user prefers to
move SELECT to the third position and move MENU to first position.
Figure 17-7 shows the default functions of the mouse buttons SELECTADJUST-MENU.
SELECT
ADJUST
MENU
Figure 17-7 Functions of the Mouse Buttons for Right-hand Use
Figure 17-8 shows the functions of the mouse buttons after changing the order
to MENU-ADJUST-SELECT.
494
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
MENU
ADJUST
SELECT
Figure 17-8 Functions of the Mouse Buttons for Left-hand Use
Now when the right mouse button is pressed, SELECT is activated, and when
the left button is pressed, MENU is activated. Figure 17-8 shows the functions
of the mouse buttons after the remapping. After you make your changes in the
mouse settings window, click SELECT on the Apply button to store the new
settings.
Mouse Pointer Jumping
The Mouse Property contains Pointer Jumping controls for scrollbars and popup windows. Each of these defines a specific way in which the pointer can
move in relation to scrolling in a window or a pop-up menu.
Customizing Scrollbar Pointer Jumping
Use the Pointer Jumping Scrollbar check box to specify whether or not you
want the pointer to move along with the scrollbar elevator during scrolling
actions. When the box is checked, as in Figure 17-6 on page 493, pointer
jumping is enabled.
When the box is not checked, pointer jumping is disabled, and the pointer
remains in a fixed position as the scrollbar elevator moves. Note that if you
position the pointer above or below the elevator and click SELECT several
times, the elevator catches up with the pointer, and you must move the pointer
to continue scrolling in the same direction.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
495
Customizing Pop-up Pointer Jumping
Use the Pointer Jumping Pop-up check box to specify whether or not you want
the pointer to jump into a pop-up window automatically when it comes up.
If this setting is checked, when a pop-up window with a notice is displayed,
the pointer jumps to the default button (that is, your anticipated choice). For
example, when you choose Exit from the Workspace menu, a notice asks your
to confirm that you want to leave the window system. The notice has two
buttons: Exit and Cancel. The pointer jumps to Cancel when the notice window
is displayed. (The pointer "jumps" so quickly that you see no movement.) In
Figure 17-6 on page 493, this option is on.
When the box is not checked, the pointer does not jump to the default button
in the pop-up window but remains where it was when the pop-up window
appeared. Move the pointer onto the appropriate button and click SELECT.
To turn off the pop-up pointer jumping, click SELECT on the check mark. The
check mark disappears and the option is turned off.
Menu
Setting the Drag-Right Distance ofMenus
The;; drag-right distance;; is the distance that you must move the pointer to the
right before a menu is displayed. This distance is measured on the screen in
pixels, or "picture elements," whose number corresponds to the resolution of
the monitor. To modify the drag-right distance, follow these steps:
1. In the Workspace Properties window, press MENU on the Category menu
button and choose Menus.
Figure 17-9 shows the Menus category defaults.
496
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
!:9
Works pace Pro perties
Category:
[II
Menus
Orag- Ri ght Oi stance:
( Reset To stan dard )
~
0
Left Mouse Press:
I Displays Menu
I Selects Default Item
pixels
150
I
I
~ ~
Figure 17-9 Menus Category
2. Move the slider to the desired distance.
The distance from the left of the slider is the actual drag-right distance that
will take effect on your screen.
3. Click SELECT on Apply to make the change take effect.
Customizing Menu Operation
The Menus category of the Workspace Properties window also allows you to
change how you operate menus. It determines whether the default menu item
is chosen automatically when you click SELECT on a menu button or the menu
is presented for you to make a choice. With the default setting, Selects Default,
the default menu item is automatically chosen when you click SELECT on the
menu.
The alternate choice, Displays Menu, sets the SELECT button just to display
the menu. You then need to click the SELECT button again to choose a menu
item.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
497
Programs Menu
You can add items to your Programs menu, remove items, or change their
order. Follow these steps:
1. SELECT an item in the list that is adjacent to desired location of the new
item.
This highlights the approximate location of the new item.
2. Type a name for the item in the Label: field.
3. Type the full path name to the command or program to be executed in the
Command: field.
4. SELECT Paste Before or Paste After.
• Paste Before places the new item above the highlighted item.
• Paste After places the new item below the highlighted item.
• If no item is highlighted, the new item is added at the top or bottom of the
list.
5. SELECT Apply.
The new label for the command is now displayed in the list.
The button functionality is as follows:
• Change allows you to change the command or label to associate with label
shown.
• Add allows you to add new label! command.
• Cut/Copy allows you to cut or copy an item.
• Paste Before/Paste After allows you to paste a label! command before or
after a selected label.
• Delete allows you to delete label! command.
• Make Default allows you to make currently selected item the default item
on the Programs menu.
Miscellaneous
The following Workspace items can be customized from Miscellaneous:
• Screensaver on/ off
498
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screensaver timeout
When to beep
Beep duration
Focus policy
Icon location
Scrollbar placement
To customize these settings, choose the Miscellaneous category from the
Workspace Properties menu. Figure 17-10 shows the Miscellaneous category.
~
Workspace Properties
Category: @)
Miscellaneous
Screen Saver:
Beep:
Beep Du rati on:
I Off I
I
Always
-rQ.
0
Set Active Window:
I
Icon location:
I
I
Scrollbar Placement:
( Reset To Standard)
• •
Auto
.~
r(: 1r::i l>:,:~
(:
I Notices Only I
• • • • 1000
• •
I
I Bottom I
Left
I
Click Mouse
Top
I
Never
Move Pointer
Left
I
milliseconds
I
Rig ht
Rig ht
I
I
I
~ C!§D
Figure 17-10 Miscellaneous Category of Workspace Properties
Setting the Screensaver Feature
The screensaver feature makes the screen go blank after a period of no use. This
option is turned off by default, but you can enable it.
To turn on the screensaver:
1. Press SELECT on Auto.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
499
2. Type the number of minutes before it is enabled. The default is five
minutes.
3. Press SELECT on Apply.
Your changes now apply.
Returning to the Desktop
If you have set the screensaver option and your screen turns blank, you can
restore your desktop by moving the mouse in any direction. Although input
from any keyboard key or mouse button will restore your screen, it is advised
that you move the mouse instead. This is because pressing a key creates system
input. This means, as an example, that if the pointer is positioned in a text file,
you may insert a character in the text.
Setting the System Beep
Use the Beep setting to specify whether your system beeps for all applicationgenerated beep actions (errors, messages in your Console, and so on), only
when a notice is displayed, or never. Figure 17-10 on page 499 shows the beep
settings. To customize the system beeps, click SELECT on the chosen beep
setting in the Miscellaneous category of the Workspace Properties.
You can move the slider from Beep Duration to increase the length of time the
system beeps.
Setting the Active Window
Use the Set Active Window setting to specify whether you must click SELECT
on the window to change input focus, or whether you simply move the pointer
into the window to specify that window as the active input area. The active
input area is where you enter text, whether in a text pane of a base window or
a text field of a window control area. The two choices, Click Mouse and Move
Pointer, are also called Click-to-Type and Focus-Follow-Pointer. In Figure 17-10
on page 499, the Click Mouse choice is selected.
The default is Click Mouse. The Click Mouse option requires that when you
move the pointer from one window to another, you must click SELECT before
you can type any text into the window.
500
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
If you choose the Move Pointer option, you don't need to click in the window
to make it active and ready for input. The presence of the pointer within the
boundaries of the window tells the current window that now it is the focus of
the user's attention.
To change the setting, click SELECT on the setting you prefer.
Setting the Default Locations for Icons
You can change the default location where icons appear in the Workspace
when they are closed from windows. The OpenWindows default location for
icons is on the bottom edge of the Workspace.
To change the default locations of icons:
1. In the Workspace Properties window, press MENU on the Category menu
button and choose Miscellaneous.
2. Click Select on the appropriate button.
You can specify any of the four edges of the Workspace as the default
location for icons.
3. Click SELECT on Apply.
Changes to the Icons setting take effect immediately. That is, icons for any
applications that are subsequently opened are located in the newly specified
location. Icons for applications already on the Workspace remain in their
current locations.
Changing Scrollbar Placement
Use the Scrollbar Placement setting to specify whether scrollbars are displayed
at the right or the left side of the pane. This setting applies to all scrollable
application windows on the Workspace. In Figure 17-10 on page 499 the
default option, Right, is selected.
To set the location of the scrollbars on the left side, click SELECT on the Left
button.
Note - Scrollbar changes do not affect applications that are already on the
Workspace.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
501
After you make your choices for system beep, input area, and scrollbar
placement, click SELECT on Apply to store the changes. Changes made to the
Miscellaneous category take place immediately after you apply them.
Locale
The Locale category of the Workspace Properties window provides users with
a mechanism for specifying an input language and display language, as well as
time, date, and numeric formats for a specific locale. Figure 17-11 shows the
Locale category in the Workspace Properties window.
Workspace Properties
!P
Category:
@) Locale
( Reset To Stan dard )
Basic Locale:
@)
U,S,A,
Display Locale:
@)
Eng lish
Input Local e:
@)
English
Ti me Format:
@)
12/31/8921 :30:30
Numeri c Format:
@)
10,000,0
~ ~
Figure 17-11 Locale Category in the Workspace Properties Window
If your system has a Solaris localization installed, such as Japanese Soiaris,
German Solaris, or French Solaris, you have access to locales in addition to the
basic U.S.A. locale. If you do not have a Solaris localization installed, U.S.A.
(English) is the only available locale. The following is a description of each of
the choices in the Properties window:
502
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
• Basic Locale is the name of the country or native language of the user
interface. Specific setting choices vary depending on the basic locale setting.
• The following settings help define characteristics of a particular locale or
cultural area.
• Display Locale specifies the language in which messages, menu labels,
button labels, help files, and so forth are displayed.
• Input Locale specifies the language to be input.
• Time Format specifies the format for the time and date.
• Numeric Format defines the numeric format or placement of the comma
or decimal point.
Note - For those systems that allow locale specifications, changes apply when
you start a new application. The changes do not affect applications already
running.
Customizing the Solaris Environment
503
504
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Utilities
18=
In addition to the applications under Programs, the Workspace menu has
several important utilities. This chapter discusses each of the utilities in the
order they appear in the menu.
• To use a utility, choose Workspace
~
Utilities and select a submenu.
Refresh
Sometimes an application prints characters outside of a particular window, or
leaves artifacts-lines or other remnants from the window-when it is cleared
from the Workspace. This is sometimes called "window damage." To clear
these artifacts, you refresh the Workspace. This causes the entire screen, and all
your applications and icons to be repainted.
• To refresh the Workspace, choose Workspace> Utilities ~ Refresh.
After a few moments, the artifacts are cleared from the Workspace.
Reset Input
If you are running several types of applications at once (particularly if you are
using Sun View applications simultaneously with OpenWindows applications),
you may occasionally find that characters you type in a window are garbled.
This is because of an inherent incompatibility between the way the applications
handle the keyboard.
505
The Reset Input utility corrects the problem. If the problem occurs, choose
Workspace» Utilities» Reset Input.
Function Keys
This utility was implemented in compliance with OPEN LOOK functional
specifications, and is provided for use by application developers and for users
to program their function keys. It is not supported by the default DeskSet
applications at this time.
The OpenWindows Function Keys utility is a dynamic on-screen version of the
function keys on the keyboard. (Note that this feature is currently supported
on Type-4 keyboards only.) The function keys on the on-screen utility display
the functions of the current application, providing that application has function
keys support. Otherwise the keys are blank. The key labels are automatically
updated when the pointer is moved to another application.
Because the Function Keys panel is equivalent to the function keys on your
keyboard, you can choose items from the on-screen function keys (by clicking
SELECT on the appropriate key) or from the keyboard itself.
• To display the Function Keys utility window, choose Workspace »
Utilities » Function Keys.
When you release the mouse button, the Function Keys pop-up window is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Note - You must have the Click Select (or "click-to-type") option set for the
Function Keys utility to work properly. See Section, "Setting the Active
Window," on page 500 in Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment"
for information regarding this option.
Figure 18-1 shows the Function Keys window. In this example, the function
keys have been programmed to modify colors on the workspace.
~
Fl
( Brick
Function Keys
F2
F3
)(r::cBl'-ue-~)( Maroon
F4
)( Orchid
FS
)( Violet
F6
)( Black
F7
)( Green
Figure 18-1 Function Keys Window
506
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
F8
)( Magenta
F;.-::-9-;--~ flO
)( Red
F;.:..:l1________
)( Clear)(
----Fr"12,---~
)(
International Keyboard Support
A range of international keyboards are available through the Function Keys
utility's multiple language support feature. This feature displays an on-screen
keyboard with keys that correspond to those on the physical keyboard. When
you display one of the international keyboards through a DeskSet or other
XView application, the keys you type on your physical keyboard remap to the
international characters, and those characters appear in the text region of the
XView application window.
To display the keyboard of your choice:
1. Choose Workspace
~
Utilities
~
Function Keys.
2. Pin the Function Keys window to the workspace.
3. Click SELECT in an XView application window, such as a Command Tool,
in which you would like to use a set of international characters.
4. Press the Language key on your keyboard, and continue to press it until
instructed to release it.
This key is labeled PrSC, or Print Screen, and is located in the upper right
corner of the keyboard.
Each of the function keys labels displays one of the international languages
that the virtual keyboard supports, as shown in Figure 18-2.
Function Keys
Fl
F2
F3
( US Engilsh»( UK English)( French
F4
)( Canadian
F5
)( German
F6
)( Italian
F7
)( Dutch
F8
F9
)( Portugese )( Spanish
Fr=10,..----___ F'711~_----, rF12=---_~
)( SholY
)( Set
)( More
Figure 18-2 Function Keys Mapped with the Supported Languages
5. Click SELECT on More to cycle through the available character sets.
6. Click SELECT on the button for the language you would like to use.
7. Click SELECT on the Show button.
The virtual keyboard for that language appears on the workspace. The
French keyboard is shown in Figure 18-3.
Utilities
507
French Virtual Keyboard
Figure 18-3 French Virtual Keyboard
8. Pin the keyboard window.
9. Click SELECT on the Set button in the Function Keys window.
10. Release the language button.
11. Begin typing in the XView application window from which you opened
the keyboard.
The characters you type appear in the chosen character set.
Switching Between Virtual Keyboards
You can access a few characters or symbols from another language or alternate
character sets interactively, and then return to typing with your usual character
set. For example, you might want to type a few Greek characters inside a
document that is in English. To change to a different character set and back
again:
1. Open the document and enter the text in your local language.
2. When you want to switch languages, press and hold the R2 key.
3. In the Function Keys window, click SELECT on the button for the
language to which you want to change temporarily.
Continue to press the R2 key.
4. Type in the characters you want to add.
These characters appear in the document in the language you have chosen.
5. Release the R2 key.
Anything you type now appears in your local language.
508
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
18=
Window Controls
The Window Controls menu items cover basic window operations, such as
opening, closing, and resizing windows behind other windows. This utility is
especially useful for performing operations on multiple windows or icons
simul taneousl y.
• To open Window Controls, choose Workspace >- Utilities
Controls.
Figure 18-4 shows the Window Controls utility.
l:9
>- Window
Workspace
Programs
[>,.----...L- _ _ _ _ _----,
Uti I ities
c:'
Properties ...
Help ...
Desktop Intro...
Exit...
Refresh
Reset Input
Function Keys
Save Workspace
Full/Restore Size
Lock Screen
Back
Console...
Quit
Figure 18-4 Window Controls Submenu
Since Window Controls is a submenu. To make use of this utility, it is usually
best pinning the workspace.
Using Window Controls
The items in the Window Controls submenu correspond to items in the base
Window menu that you pull down from the header of an application window.
Any choice you make in the Window Controls submenu-such as Quit-affects
the currently selected window or windows.
The following examples illustrate the use of window controls on a group of
selected windows or icons. To select multiple windows, either click SELECT on
one window and ADJUST on additional windows (or icons), or position the
pointer on the workspace near the applications you want to group, press
Utilities
509
SELECT, and drag the pointer diagonally across the workspace to create a
rectangle around the series of windows. Any windows or icons completely
inside the rectangle formed by the dragging motion are included in the group.
Opening a Group of Applications from Icons
To open a number of applications at once, select the group of icons (using one
of the methods described above) and then choose Open/Close from the
Window Controls menu. Similarly, you can close a group of applications to
their icon form without having to close each one individually.
Resizing a Group of Applications or Icons
To increase the size of several applications on the workspace, select the group
of windows and choose Full/Restore Size from the Window Controls
submenu. This operation increases the size of the selected application windows
to the full height of the screen.
Choosing Full/Restore Size in the Window Controls submenu a second time
(without deselecting any of the windows) decreases the size of each of the
windows in the group to its former size.
Moving a Group of Applications to the Back
Selecting a group of windows quickly and moving them behind another
window. To do this, select the group you want to move to the back and choose
Back from the Window Controls submenu.
Quitting a Group of Windows
You can quit a number of applications at once by selecting the group of
windows or icons and choosing Quit from the Window Controls submenu.
510
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
18=
Save Workspace
When you have applications you want to display on the workspace on a
regular basis, you may want to save the workspace layout. This means
applications will display when you exit the Solaris environment and enter
again. You can save the workspace as often as you like-whenever you
develop a new arrangement.
To save the Workspace, first arrange your icons and windows in the locations
you want them to remain, and close any windows that you want to be closed
to icons whenever you start the OpenWindows software. Now choose
Workspace ~ Utilities ~ Save Workspace.
In a few moments, a notice informs you that the Workspace layout has been
saved. You must click SELECT on the OK button to continue.
Lock Screen
The Lock Screen utility covers the Workspace and the objects in it with a
moving pattern. This provides a certain amount of security for your system
when you are away from your desk. Additionally, it prevents the electron beam
inside the monitor from burning an image into the internal phosphorescent
coating. This can happen if the beam is allowed to fire at one location for an
extended period of time. For information on setting the screens aver feature
refer to Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment."
When your screen is locked, the OpenWindows software continues running
even though the workspace cannot be viewed. Applications that were running
continue running, and any processes currently underway continue. When you
unlock your screen, the workspace is exactly as it was when you locked it.
• To engage the Lock Screen utility, choose Workspace
Screen.
~
Utilities
~
Lock
In a moment, a moving pattern appears on a black background over the
workspace. To unlock your screen again, press any key on your keyboard, or
any button on your mouse. Type your password and press Return to display
the workspace.
Utilities
511
Console
The Console is the small window that normally appears in the upper left
corner of the workspace when you start up the OpenWindows software. Its
primary use is to display messages from your system and server. You can only
have one Console running, and you should keep it open at all times for
important messages. Figure 18-5 shows the Console window.
cmdtool (CONSOLE) -/bin/csh
example% ..
Figure 18-5 Console Window
• If you do not have a Console, you can open one by choosing Workspace ~
Utilities ~ Console.
When the Console appears, resize it so that it is just large enough to print
about four or five message lines, and move it to one corner of your screen.
You can scroll up and down through the messages that appear in your Console
by placing the pointer on one of the scrollbar arrows (up or down) and clicking
SELECT.
512
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Using AnswerBooks
The AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer are a pair of windows for browsing,
searching, bookmarking, and printing on-line document collections, also
known as AnswerBooks.
To start the AnswerBook Navigator to see AnswerBooks that may be available
to you:
• Choose Workspace> Programs> AnswerBook.
Note - AnswerBooks are available to you if your system or site administrator
has installed them and configured them for your use. See the Solaris 2.2
AnswerBook Administration Guide, or ask your administrator for more
information.
The Contents of Your On-Line Library
When the AnswerBook Navigator opens, it displays the contents of your online Library. Your on-line Library may contain the Solaris 2.2 User's
AnswerBook, a collection of basic manuals to help get you started using your
Sun system. Your library may also contain other AnswerBooks, provided that:
• Your system/ site administrator has installed them and configured them for
your use, and
• You or your administrator has included them in your Library (see
"Modifying Your Library").
513
-- 19
AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer
Together the AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer give you access to your
Library. You locate what you want to read in the Navigator, and then read it in
the Viewer, where it appears page for page as it would in a printed book.
AnswerBook Viewer
@)
'---
AnswerEook Viewer
AnswerBook Navigator
""
('·(::·:)"i~:·:.l(:·i~) ~ ~
\7) ~
( View
@)
A nswerBoo k Nav igator
,~
'sGuide
( Mod ify Li brary,,,) ( New Bookmark".)
IContents I Search I Bookmarks I
Location:
CJ
Arrow indicates "where
you are" in the Library
(which document is
open)
~
Library
Solaris User's AnswerBook
Solaris User's Guide (Book)
~
,
~
CJ
Contents of Solaris User's Guide:
CJ
/'
Cover
Credits
Contents
,...../f
s/
The expanded content
of the document or top ic",,-
..
~~
I
Preface
1. Starting up the Solaris User Environment
2. I ntrod uctio n
3. Des kto p Manage me nt Too Is
4. Productivity Tools
5. Med ia Too Is
6. Custo m iz i ng Too Is
7. Uti I ities
CJ
Figure 19-1 Documentation in the Navigator and Viewer
514
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
The AnswerBook Navigator acts as a kind of remote control for the Viewer.
Using the controls in the Navigator, you locate the information you want and
then display it in the Viewer.
The Navigator provides three ways of finding on-line information:
• In Contents mode you can select an AnswerBook, and then browse through
it, opening and closing books, chapters, and sections, as needed.
• In Search mode you can enter a search phrase describing what you're
looking for, and the Navigator displays a list of documents found, ranked
by relevance.
• In Bookmarks mode, you can go directly to pages where you previously
created electronic bookmarks and edit them.
@)
~
AnswerBoo k Nav igator
( Mod ify Li brary ... )
The three Navigator modes
I
• Contents
location:
• Search
Conte nts
I
Search
I
( New Bookmark. .. )
Bookmarks
I
c::::J
mt library
~
• Bookmarks
Click SELECT on a mode to
change the functioning of
the window.
c::::J
Co nte nts 0 f li b rary:
c::::J
Solaris User AnswerBook
1.1
...
I
~
c::::J
Figure 19-2 AnswerBook Navigator in Contents Mode
Using AnswerBooks
515
--- 19
Use the AnswerBook Navigator window to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To open a selected
document (or doubleclick SELECT on its
bold title)
Search for topics of interest
Modify your Library (by adding or removing available AnswerBooks)
Select and open an Answer Book
Select topics for display in the Viewer
Browse through tables of contents
Leave bookmarks and comments on pages within a Library
To add or remove
AnswerBooks to/from
the Library
To create a bookmark for
the current Viewer page
To change to Book.--_ _--..----r-------,~=====---------I-marks mode
'---------------------1- To change to Search
~
Library
So laris User's A nswerBoo k
Solaris User's Guide (Book)
Shows contents and
lets you browse
I
I!
L - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Contents of Solaris User's Guide:
'------c-o-v-:e-:-r_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~:
~
1
Credits
Contents
~
Preface
1. Starti ng up the So laris User Env iro n me nt
2. I ntrod uctio n
3. Des 1«0 p Manage me nt Too Is
4. Prod uctiv ity Too Is
5. Med ia Too Is
6. Customizing Tools
7. Utilities
~-----------------------~~
Figure 19-3 AnswerBaok Navigator Functions
516
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
mode
19
--
Use the AnswerBook Viewer to read the documents you select in the Navigator
and to print them. You can read pages sequentially or follow hypertext crossreference links from topic to topic.
Look up page info and
Select printing options
modify/adjust the display
Page-turning buttons
AnswerBook Viewer
ere, you return
the Viewer to the
last successive
page you viewed
Current page in
the Viewer
Introduction to the User Environm£nt
*_________
Cross-reference
hypertext link to ___
another section
This chapter provides an intro:l.uc tion to tre OpenWird ow"s environment and
the DeskSet applications, which are a set of default programs-such as an
electronic miil application and a text editor-that are included in the
OpenWindOW"s software package. The first rna pr section I
Of
Peenwh1dOW"s Enm.ronmentldescrires the elerrents of youroesktoE
Q#lVlew ire I
-&eEro~i~rorure~~nt~a~nd~hOW"~~to~u=s~e~thern~i·1jThedescribes
second Imjor section,,,,p~n~tro;.,jai-U~ct~lon"""""l"to-.!I
hOW" to croose the right
•
.»
application for tre task yoo need to accomplish
This introductory- inforrra tion is also av-ailable as on-lire help, d escri bed at the
erd of this chapter. Yoo can choose the method of learning that is m:Jst
comfortable foryoo.
Those who have had previoos experience with the OpenWird ow"s erwirorurent
miy want to skip this introdu ctory- chapter and rrmre on to Chapters 3 thrrugh
7 fur m:Jre detailed discussions of the OpenWindOW"s DeskSet tools.
Overview of the Environmen t
Wren you start the OpenWindows software, you see the Workspace hac kgmlnd
on your screen, as well as the DeskTop Intro, described later in this chapter.
The Wltace2 is) tre display area for obj3cts such as windows, icon.s, and
menus.
re - shows a portion of the Workspace with several open
application windows. Notice that the windows can ~erlap each other.
17
U~er's
G u i de at 115%
Figure 19-4 AnswerBook Viewer Functions
Using AnswerBooks
517
Closing or Quitting the AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer
You can close the Navigator and Viewer windows separately. The closed
Navigator and Viewer windows are represented by the icons in Figure 19-5.
,~.""".~
..""."
~
~: ...pq
;.o!i .,.
~i
Nav igator
~--.-
0::-:...•·
1~~
Viewer
Figure 19-5 AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer Icons
Close each window by choosing Close from its window menu or by pressing
the Open key on your keyboard (which toggles Open/Close).
You can quit each window, or its icon, by choosing Quit from its window
menu. When you quit the Navigator, you quit both the Navigator and the
Viewer; quitting the Viewer quits only the Viewer.
You can also use the keyboard equivalents that apply to all DeskSet
applications to close or quit the Navigator and Viewer. For more information,
see Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment."
The default mode in the AnswerBook Navigator is Contents. In Contents
mode, the Navigator has two panes: Location and Contents. Initially, the
Location pane lists your Library, and the lower Contents pane lists the
Answer Books in the Library.
Opening an AnswerBook
To see more of the contents of an AnswerBook:
• In the lower Contents pane, double-click SELECT on a bold AnswerBook
title.
The title expands to show more contents.
518
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
19
"(2)
'l.
AnswerBook Navigator
~
--
( Modify Library .. ,) (New Bookmark.. .)
I
Contents
I
Search
I
Bookmarks
I
location:
c:::J
*
~V
library
Solaris User's AnswerBook
~,/
Co nte nts of So laris User's A nswerBoo ~ :
l
Double-click SELECT to open
(expand) the book's contents
Solaris Prod uct Notes
Solaris User's Guide . /
Reference Guide
/
/
/
c:::J
I~
(2)
AnswerBoo k Nav igator
~
I
( Modify Library".) ( New Bookmark.. .)
Conte nts
I
Search
I
Bookmarks
I
location:
c:::J
~
V
library
So laris User's A nswerBoo k
Solaris User's Guide (Bool<)
,;'
./
c:::J
Contents of Solaris User's Guide:
Expanded book contents /
appear here
c:::J
~
I. I
...
'~
Cover
Credits
Contents
I
~
Preface
1. Starting up the Solaris User Environment
2. Introduction
3. Desktop Management Tools
4. Productivity Tools
5. Media Tools
6. Customizing Tools
7. Uti lities
c:::J
Figure 19-6 Opening (Expanding) a Title in the Navigator
Using AnswerBooks
519
Navigating Through Sets and Books in an AnswerBook
With the AnswerBook contents expanded, you can browse its sets and books.
Some books appear in more than one set.
To expand any boldface listing, double-click SELECT on it. When you do so,
the listing expands to show more of its contents.
@)
~
I
A nswerBoo k Nav igator
( Mod ify Li brary",) ( New Bookmark", )
Conte nts
I
Search
I
Bookmarks
G
I
Location:
r@)
~
I
A nswerBoo k Nav igator
( Mod ify Li brary",) ( New Bookmark", )
Conte nts
I
Search
I
Bookmarks
I
Location:
c:::J
Library
Solaris User's AnswerBook
Solaris User's Guide (Book)
~
~--Contents of solarisMer's Guide:
co:i
\\
Contents of
Cre 'ts
...
Preface
1. Starti ng up the User Env iro n me nt
2. I ntrod uctio n
3. Des kto p Manage me nt Too Is
4. Prod uctiv ity Too Is
5. Med ia Too Is
6. Customizing Tools
7. Uti lities
c:::J
prefac~\
I
Con ents
~
Li bt'ary
So laris User's A nswerBoo k
So laris User's Guide (Boo k)
Preface
~
•
\
i"--
'----
'"
How ~is Manual)is Organized
conven~~1
Resources adS u p port
c:::J
I
~
I
c:::J
J
Figure 19-7 Expanding the Contents of a Book in the AnswerBook Navigator
With each expansion, the Contents list grows to reflect deeper levels of the
documentation-sets, books, chapters, and headings. For example, if you
double-click on a set title, the title moves up into the Location pane, and the list
of books contained in that set is displayed in the Contents pane below.
520
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
When you double-click SELECT on any listing at or below the book level, the
first page of that topic or document opens in the AnswerBook Viewer.
To display entries that have scrolled out of sight, use the scrollbar or Scrolling
List menu (displayed by pressing MENU) in either pane to locate it, as shown
in Figure 19-8.
Sun User's Set Scrolling List
Sun Administr4 (
h
_Locate C olce_
S un D eve I oper
Sun Hard ware s~e~tllllllllllllllllllmmll!lIIIIIIIIlIIIIIIIIlIII!IIII
0
)
Figure 19-8 Scrolling in the Location or Contents Pane
Viewing a Book
In the AnswerBook Viewer, you can turn the pages of a book, chapter, or
section almost as if you were reading a printed book. You can also follow
hypertext cross-reference links between sections, chapters, and books.
Turning Pages
To turn pages, click SELECT on the page-turning buttons at the top of the
AnswerBook Viewer, or click SELECT on the Go Back button to retrace your
steps successively, page by page. See Figure 19-4.
Keyboard Shortcuts
You can use keyboard shortcuts for the paging commands.
•
•
•
•
PgUp works like the previous-page button.
PgDn works like the next-page button.
Undo works like the Go Back button.
Home displays the first page of the chapter you're in. If you're already at
the first page of a chapter, Home displays the first page of the previous
chapter.
• End displays the first page of the next chapter.
Using AnswerBooks
521
Checking Your Location in the AnswerBook
Choose Page Info from the View button menu in the Viewer to look up the
origin of the page currently on display. The Page Info window, shown in
Figure 19-9, is displayed.
Page Info
The curre nt page is:
User's Guide (Book)
Preface
How this Manual is Organized (Section)
Figure 19-9 Page Info Window
Each time you choose the Page Info option, you see an update of the
information for the current page.
Following Hypertext Cross-Reference Links
Hypertext cross-reference links appear as text boxed with a thin outline.
For inform ation abOll t booting or halting a wor k st ation over a network see
?,ystem and Ntiwork Adminisualionl.
I
Figure 19-10 Hypertext Link in Text
You can follow hypertext cross-reference links within or between books. The
quickest way to follow a cross-reference link is to double-click SELECT on the
boxed link. Or, you can click SELECT on the hypertext link, then press MENU
on the View button and choose Follow Link, as shown in Figure 19-11.
522
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
~-
.---------. ( Go
Back)
~ ~
F()II("'i'/ Li n k
Page Info ".
Partial Page
,,
The AudioTool icon is shown inllE!Dl!lJ.
Stan dard Mag n ification
Custom Magnification ".
Figure 2- 2
Au dio To 0 lIo:m
Figure 19-11 Following a Link
Note - If, when you attempt to follow a link, you see the message, "Can't
follow hypertext link" at the bottom of the Viewer window, the link may point
to a document that is not among the AnswerBooks in the Library.
Searching with the Navigator
In Search mode, the Navigator can match your requests by searching through
the text and titles of all documents you have included in your Library. You can
enter search phrases in your own words, and enhance your searches (see
"Advanced Search Techniques" on page 527).
To change to Search mode, click SELECT on the Search setting in the control
area. The Navigator in Search mode is shown in Figure 19-12.
Using AnswerBooks
523
-- 19
~12J
.-
Put Navigato r in
search mode
~
L
AnswerBook Navigator
( Modify Library ... ) ( New Bookmark.. .)
Conte nts ISearch
~
JBookmarks I
Search Li brary For:
Type search
phrase
elvi~
CJ
~
CJ
( Start search)
( Previous searches ... ) (Search Setti ngs ... )
Documents Found:
CJ
~
CJ
Figure 19-12 AnswerBook Navigator in Search Mode
To search for a topic of interest:
1. Begin a search by typing a search phrase-a word, phrase, or sentence-in
the pane marked "Search Library For."
Type any text up to 1024 characters including spaces and punctuation. Edit
the search phrase as you would in any text window.
2. To start the search, press Return at the end of the search phrase.
Or, you can click SELECT on the Start Search button.
When the search is complete, relevant topics are listed in the Documents
Found pane. The topics are coded with squares, starting with black (most
relevant) to white (least relevant), with shades of gray in between.
524
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Figure 19-13 shows the result of a search. Each item points to a location in the
Library where a document that matches your request was found.
@)
A nswerBoo k Nav igator
~
( Modify Library ... ) ( New Bookmark .. .)
I Conte nts I Search
... I Bookmarks I
I
Search Li brary For:
I~
elvi,.
( Start search)
( Prev ious Searches ... )
(Search Setti ngs ... )
Documents Found:
c:J
Black indicates most
document or topic
relevan t
•
D
D
D
5.3 The ping Command (~dministering TCP!IP)
grep as a Filter (User's G u ide)
Determining If a Machine Is Alive on the Network Using ping
Displaying Routing Table Status (Administering TCP
The Name-to-Address Mapping Libraries ( Network
9.1 The ping Command { Adm i n isteri ng Security.
I
~
c:J
Figure 19-13 Documents Found in a Search
To see a topic found in the search:
3. Double-click SELECT on an item in the Documents Found pane.
That page is then displayed in the Viewer.
Scroll the list in the Documents Found pane of the Navigator to see more
items in the list.
Using AnswerBooks
525
Reusing and Changing Search Phrases
Your search phrases dating from the last time you started the Navigator are
saved so you can reuse them. You can reuse a search phrase as is, or you can
edit it before starting a new search. Click SELECT on the Previous Searches
button. The Previous Searches window is displayed.
0::0;0
AnswerBool( Navigator: PrevIous SearcFies
c::J
I
grep
c++
~
new~
I'::=',
Figure 19-14 Previous Searches Window
Your search phrases are listed with the most recent at bottom. You can copy
and paste a phrase from the Previous Searches window into the Search For
pane. Press Return or click SELECT on the Start Search button.
Customizing Searches
To change search settings: click SELECT on the Search Settings button. In the
Search Settings window you can specify various options to control the results
of your searches.
~
19
AnswerBook Navigator: Search Settings
IText and Titles I Titles Only I
Sort fi nd i ngs by: I Re levance 0 nIy I Re levance an d Book I
Search Library by:
Limit findings to: ~
E8
Figure 19-15 Search Settings Window
526
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Search Library by: Text and Titles searches all text included in your Library,
while Titles Only searches only book and chapter titles, and section and
subsection headings.
Sort Findings by: Relevance Only simply lists all documents found in order of
relevance, regardless of the books they appear in. Relevance and Book means
the documents found will be listed grouped by book, with topics within a
given book listed by relevance.
Limit Findings to: Click SELECT to increase or decrease the default number of
30 findings per search.
Click SELECT on Apply to preserve your settings, or click SELECT on Reset to
undo your choices and restore the previous ones.
Advanced Search Techniques
To make your searches more precise and more productive, you can:
• Restrict (modify) the contents of your Library to constrain the scope of the
search.
• Choose the search setting "Titles Only" to search through book, chapter, and
section titles rather than searching through the full text of documents.
• Use special characters to mark your search phrases for literal, suffixexpansion, and "nearness" matching.
Scoping the Search by Modifying the Library Contents
By adding or removing AnswerBooks from your Library, you can widen or
narrow the scope of your search. See "Modifying Your Library" on page 533.
Titles Only Searches
The Titles Only option restricts searches to book titles and chapter and section
headings. This search method is useful if you already know terms used in the
titles or headings of documents you are looking for.
Using Answer Books
527
Using Special Characters in Search Phrases
By adding special characters-quotation marks, parentheses, and asterisks-to
your search phrases, you can make searching more precise. You can combine
the characters to further refine your search.
Quotation Marks: Searching for Literal Phrases
Place the search phrase between double quotation marks to find documents
that contain that literal phrase. For example, the search phrase "reading
mai 1" finds documents containing that phrase. On the other hand, if you type
reading mai 1, you will find documents containing one or both words.
Parentheses: Searching for Words in Proximity
Place words between parentheses to find documents with those words in
proximity to each other. For example, the search phrase (reading mai 1) will
find all documents that have "reading" and "mail" within a few lines of each
other, in either order.
Asterisks and Hyphens: Searching for Variations on a Word
Place an asterisk at the end of a word to match all possible endings of the
word. For example, the search phrase chang * will expand to "change,"
"changed," "changes," "changing," and so on.
If you do not know whether a term is one word, two words, or hyphenated in
the documentation, you can insert the hyphen to look for all three forms.
For example, to search for "mail tool," "mailtool," and "mail-tool," type
mail-tool in the Search For pane.
Connecting Punctuation
Words connected by punctuation other than a hyphen are treated character for
character as literal phrases, for example: lusr I local Ibin,
win_client_data, and in. rlogind.
528
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Combining Advanced Search Techniques
You can combine any or all of the above search techniques to further refine
your search. For example:
"chang* rnai l-tool" finds documents containing literal phrases such as
"change mailtool," "change mail tool," "change mail tool," "change mail-tool,"
"changing mailtool," "changing mail tool," "changing mail-tool," and so on.
"display button" viewer searches for "display button" and "viewer" in
proximity to each other.
Using Bookmarks Mode
Placing bookmarks helps you relocate pages of interest quickly. You can also
use bookmarks to annotate a page with your comments. Note that bookmarks
do not appear on the marked pages. When you put the Navigator in
Bookmarks mode, you'll see a list of all the bookmarks you've created to date.
You can create a bookmark in any Navigator mode, but you must change the
Navigator to Bookmarks mode if you want to read, edit, or delete bookmarks
or print or display bookmarked pages. See "Viewing and Editing Your
Bookmarks" on page 530.
Creating a New Bookmark
To create a new bookmark for the page currently displayed in the Viewer, click
SELECT on the New Bookmark button at the top of the Navigator.
A nswerBoo k Nav Igator: New Boo kmark
Boo kmark for: Re booti ng your syste m
Comment:
I~
1,----'_ _ _
Figure 19-16 New Bookmark Window
Using AnswerBooks
529
In the New Bookmark window, the text at the top specifies the current page.
You can edit the text in the "Bookmark for" field, which is used in the Existing
Bookmarks list when the Navigator is in Bookmarks mode. You can also type
an annotation in the Comment pane.
Click SELECT on the Create button to create the new bookmark. Or, if you
decide not to create a bookmark, dismiss the New Bookmark window.
Viewing and Editing Your Bookmarks
To see your list of bookmarks, click SELECT on Bookmarks.
"'(£1
~
I
,
A nswerBoo k Nav igator
(Modify Library".) ( New Bookmark. .. )
Contents
I
Search
I
Bookmarks
( comments, .. )
I
- Boo kmarks in Li brary:
Sookmarks-
c:::J
~
....... 1-- Solaris User's AnswerBook
AnswerS ooktitles
~
-
"Cover" in" User's Gu ide"
~r- Syste m Software A nswerBook
1-1- "Can't Remember Password" Subsection in "User's Guide"
-
Current
bookmark
"Network Access: Your NIS Password" SIJ. bsection in User's
~
I
c:::J
(Delete Bookmark)
Comment for:
Commen t for current
bookmark
('·.
Substitute your user name in place of . For example, type ls 1 sa /usr / spool/calendar / callog . egret. The permissions need to be
exactly: - r - - rw - - - -. Also, this file needs to be owned by the user and in the
daemon group.
Remote Access Problems
There are two basic symptoms of remote Calendar Manager access problems:
• You try to browse a remote calendar where you think you have Browse
access, and all you can see are appointment times.
• You try to insert, delete, or change an appointment on a remote calendar
where you think you have access, and Calendar Manager gives you an
Access Denied ... error message in the footer of the Appointment Editor.
There are three things you can check to try to fix these access problems:
542
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1. If you are using the NIS or DNS system, which uses the concept of mail
domains, make sure you are trying to browse a calendar in your domain or
that you have specified the domain in your browse list. For example, if you
are trying to browse the calendar of user Rob in your domain, you can
simply specify Rob@host. If you are in a domain called Eng, and Rob is in
a domain called Corp, you need to specify rob@host.Corp in your browse
list.
2. Make sure that the owner of the remote calendar has really given you
Browse, Insert, and/ or Delete access.
In order for the access to occur, make sure both of these conditions are met:
a. Names in the access list must take the form user@host or just user.
(Note that if the name in the access list is just user, access is given to
anyone on your network with that user name.) If you are using the NIS
or DNS system, make sure your name in the access list is not listed in the
form user@domain or user@name. domain.
b. The owner of the calendar must remember to click SELECT on the Apply
button on the Access List and Permissions Properties window.
Check the user ID and group ID on both your workstation and the
remote workstation. The user ID and group ID must be the same in both
locations.
3. Determine your user ID and group ID on each workstation as follows:
a. Look for your password entry in the file /etc/passwd.
If you have an entry in this file, the user ID is the third field (the number
between the second and third colons). The group ID is the fourth field
(the number between the third and fourth colons). For example, if the
entry for user Egret in the /etc/passwd file is:
egret:X4y8r2Bg:3286:10:& West:/home/egret/:/bin/csh
the user ID for user Egret is 3286, and the group ID is 10. The values of
the user ID and group ID should be between a and 32767.
Solaris Troubleshooting
543
b. If you are using the NIS system, and you do not have an entry in the file
/ etc/passwd and the last line of / etc /passwd starts with a '+', check
for an entry in the NIS passwd entries. To determine your NIS user entry,
type ypmatch username passwd in a Command Tool or Shell Tool.
For example, to find the NIS password entry for user Egret, type:
ypmatch egret passwd
If the system responds with a user entry, the user ID is the third field,
and the group ID is the fourth field.
Adding a Second Calendar on your Workstation
If you'd like to add a second calendar on your workstation, you need to create
a dummy user for that calendar. For example, you might want to add a second
calendar for appointments for your entire work group.
To create the dummy user and new calendar, use the following steps. These
steps assume a basic understanding of UNIX system administration, so you
may need to get some assistance. This assumes you are root.
1. Add a dummy entry in the /ete/passwd file of the workstation where
you want to create the second calendar.
You need to specify a name, a dummy user ID, and so forth.
2. Bring down the em and rpe . emsd processes.
3. Log in as the new dummy user, and start a new Calendar Manager.
4. Edit the access list and permissions for your group.
5. Add the calendar name to the browse list.
6. Log out, and log back in with your own login.
You can now browse the new calendar.
Sharing Calendars Across Workstations
If you move around from workstation to workstation, and you want to always
be able to access your real Calendar, you need to have Calendar Manager
running on each workstation. Use the following steps to set up access to your
calendar from multiple workstations:
544
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
1. On your primary workstation, give full access list permissions to your
calendars at the remote workstations.
For example, suppose user Egret has his real calendar on the workstation
named "work", and also accounts and calendars on remote workstations
named "sea" and "ocean". He would add egret@sea and egret@ocean to
his calendar access list, and give these users full Browse, Insert, and Delete
permissions. See the section Chapter 5, "Calendar Manager", for
instructions.
2. When you are logged in at the remote workstations, browse your real
calendar.
Since you have full access permissions, you can read all your appointments,
change your appointments, and so forth.
In the previous example, when Egret is logged in to "sea" or "ocean" he can
browse the calendar egret@work to access his real calendar.
Note - Do not mount the /usr/spool/calendar directory from a remote
disk. Doing so may result in loss of Calendar data.
Running Different Versions of Open Windows and Calendar
Manager
If you run an older version of OpenWindows after running the current version
of OpenWindows, the older version of Calendar Manager will not be able to
read your appointment data file. To avoid this problem, back up the following
file before starting the current version of Calendar Manager:
/usr/spool/calendar/callog.
Before you return to an older version of Calendar Manager, restore your old
file making sure you maintain the permissions on the directory and file. If you
browse a calendar that is running a different version from your own, it should
work.
Solaris Troubleshooting
545
Clock Troubleshooting.
Displaying seconds for the clock may have a negative effect on system
performance.
If your Workspace color is black, your clock is invisible when it is an icon on
the Workspace. See the man page for clock to learn how to have the clock icon
painted with the Window Background color instead of the Workspace color.
Drag and Drop Troubleshooting
The section describes some of the error messages you may get while
attempting a drag and drop from on deskset application to another.
Drag and Drop: Timed Out
This can occur if the server is unable to connect with the receiving application
within a certain time. The default timeout value for an XView application is
three seconds.
You can change this value by adding a line to your - / . Xdefaul ts file. If you
wanted to change this to five seconds, add the line:
Selection. Timeout 5
to -/ .Xdefaults file and then type xrdb -/ .Xdefaults from a command
line to setup the server with the new timeout value.
Drag and Drop: Illegal Target
The receiving application does not support drag and drop operations.
This message may also appear if the receiving application's drag and drop
targets are not responding to the sender. If this is the case, restarting the
receiving application may clear up the problem.
546
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Drag and Drop: Root Window
The dragged object was dropped onto the root window. Normally, this is
considered an error by the sending application, though File Manager assumes
in this case that the item is to be opened.
Drag and Drop: Failed
An unknown, internal error occurred while trying to establish a drag and drop
connection.
File Manager Troubleshooting
This section describes the solutions to common File Manager questions and
problems.
Cannot Format a Floppy Using the File Manager Format Option
If you try to format a floppy using Format from the File Manager File menu
and it does not work, your system may not be set up to run the format
program. Contact your system administrator for assistance.
Custom Icons Not Displayed
If you think you changed a file's icon with the Binder, but you do not see the
change in the File Manager, make sure that you restarted the File Manager after
you saved the Binder changes. If you have already restarted the File Manager,
recheck your changes with the Binder. Make sure the entry you changed was
saved to your user database with the Binder Save button. Also, make sure the
file displayed really falls into the class of files changed with the Binder.
If your File Manager displays only the three generic types of icons (folders,
applications, and documents), the File Manager was unable to connect with the
Binder database. Check your Console window for error messages indicating
where the problem occurred.
Solaris Troubleshooting
547
Deleting Floppy and CD Windows
If you delete a window for a floppy disk or CD, you can bring it back by
selecting them from the Go To menu button. They are always displayed within
the application specific section of the Go To menu. For information on using
the Go To menu refer to Chapter 2, "File Manager."
Drag and Drop Problems
If you use File Manager to drag and drop a file to another application, but you
get the error message drag and drop: illegal target in the File Manager
footer, the file was dropped in a place that does not recognize the file type or
that does not support drop operations.
File Manager Does Not Display Some or All of Your Files
If files you expect to see in the file pane are not being displayed, make sure you
have not specified a view filter pattern from the File Manager Properties
window which can suppress the display of those files. When a filter is
specified, it is always displayed in the header of the File Manager window. To
clear this up try selecting View ~ Icon by Name.
Remote File Copy Problems
If you have trouble transferring files between remote systems, you may not
have the correct permissions to access the file, directory, or system, or the
remote system may not be accessible through the network. Contact the person
who owns the files (or the person who asked you to transfer the files) to
change permissions so the transfer will work. To find out if the remote system
is available on your network, contact your system administrator.
View By Content Takes Too Much Time
When the File Manager is viewing files by content, it needs to read and
compress the first screen of files so they can be displayed. For Sun icons,
X Bitmap, and X Pixmap files, this should work fairly quickly. However,
compressing large Sun raster images can take some time. Therefore, if you only
need to look at icon files, be sure to only have Monochrome Icons and Color
Icons set on the Properties: Current Folder or New Folder window for the Files
to View setting.
548
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Image Tool Troubleshooting
If you try to run Image Tool and you receive the following message:
ld.so.l:
imagetool:
can't find file libxil.so.l
Killed
You need to have the XIL packages installed. Contact your system
administrator for assistance.
Mail Tool Troubleshooting
If you run multiple versions of mail programs, Mail Tool may become confused
about the state of your In-Box. If Mail Tool takes a long time to open the
In-Box, it's possible that a Mail Tool lock file needs to be removed. If there is
not enough disk space for the Save Changes operation, you will need to
remove messages from the current mail file. This section describes how to
recognize and correct these problems. In addition, it describes where you can
find your Mail Tool In-Box and where you can find mail messages you were
composing that were cleared or lost during a Mail Tool or window system
crash.
Running Multiple Versions of Mail
If you run multiple versions of Mail Tool at the same time (or the Mail Tool
application and the Mail program), you may receive notices from your Mail
Tool application advising you to Save Changes or Quit one of the Mail Tool
applications. This is because both versions try to modify your In-Box. Follow
the instructions of the notices to avoid creating confusion about the state of
your In-Box.
If you did not choose Done or Save Changes in the Mail Tool application before
running another Mail Tool application or the Mail program, a notice instructs
you to quit your Mail Tool application. If you did save your changes, you will
be given a choice to either quit the Mail Tool application or Save Changes to
keep it in its original state.
You can avoid having to quit your Mail Tool application by getting into the
habit of choosing Done from the File menu at the end of each day, or when it is
likely that you will be logging into your machine and reading mail from a
remote location.
Solaris Troubleshooting
549
If you forget to choose Done, and you remotely log into your machine to read
mail, you can tell Mail Tool to choose Done by following these steps:
1. From a Shell Tool prompt type ps -e I grep rnai 1 tool and press
Return.
The listing should look like the one shown in Figure A-2.
-~
I grep mailtool
1431 co IW
0:04 Ihome/owv3/bin/mailtool
1438 p1 S
0:00 grep mailtool
% ps
%.
Figure A-2
An example of a
ps
listing for mailtool
2. Look in the left-hand column of the listing for mailtool (not the listing for
grep mailtool) to find the process number (PID).
The process number is the first number on each line.
3. Type kill -USRl PID and press Return.
In the example above, the process number is 1431, so you would type:
kill -USRl1431
4. Read your mail as you usually do from the remote location.
The next time you open your Mail Tool, the changes you make to your
In-Box from the remote location are incorporated and recorded as part of the
~.1ail Tool.
Caution - The steps above only work with the DeskSet Mail Tool application.
U sing these steps for other versions of Mail Tool kills Mail Tool.
Mail Tool Lock File
The Mail utility uses a lock file to prevent two or more processes from altering
your mail spool file at the same time. If Mail Tool quits unexpectedly, the lock
file may be left behind.
If Mail Tool takes a long time to open the In-Box, either when you specifically
request it or when you open Mail Tool after you have chosen Done from the
File menu, check for a lock file. Look in the directory /var /mai 1 for a file
named username. lock, where username is your login name. To remove the
file, from a system prompt type:
550
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
rm /var /mai 1 /username. lock.
For example, if your username is "mary", you would type:
rm /var/mail/mary.lock
Alternatively, you can find the lock file in the File Manager, and drag it to the
Wastebasket to delete it.
Mail Tool In-Box Location
The default location for the Mail Tool In-Box is /var /mail/username. If the
environment variable $MAIL exists, Mail Tool uses its value as the In-Box
location.
Recovering Messages Being Composed
If you are in the middle of composing a mail message when your Mail Tool
application or your window system crashes, you can recover a copy of the
message from the file dead. letter in your home directory minus the last 80
edits, that is the application keeps track of the number of edits and files saves
every 80 edits. So the most edits lost would be the last 80.
Your message is also saved in the file dead. let ter whenever you click
SELECT on the Clear button in the Compose window or choose Clear message
from the Compose window's Deliver menu.
See the man page for mail for information about dead. letter and the save
variable.
"Save Changes" Runs Out afDisk Space
If you try to save changes, by selecting Save Changes or Done from the File
menu, or by switching mail folders, and Mail Tool warns that it has run out of
disk space, you must remove messages from the current mail file to make it
small enough to save.
You can remove messages by deleting or moving them. Removing larger
messages helps the most. You can find the largest messages by choosing Size
from the Sort By submenu of the View menu.
Solaris Troubleshooting
551
Files Too Large for the Mail Tool Attachment Window
Mail Tool may run out of swap space if you drag-and-drop a file that is too
large into MailTool Attachment window. You can remedy this by increasing
your swap space.
Print Tool Troubleshooting
If a file has an inappropriate print script in the binder database (this is not an
ASCII file and the possible location is $OPENWINHOME/lib/cetables), the
Print Tool may hang when you use it to print that file. The print script may be
missing the $FILE, $ PRINTER, or $COPIES variable. See Chapter 16, "Binder",
for information about how to change print scripts using the Binder.
If you print a file and the appropriate filter is not available on the printer, you
will receive an error message.
SnapShot Troubleshooting
A potential problem with Snapshot is creating a raster file that has the wrong
dimensions for use with another application. This is described in the following
section.
Using Snapshot Files with Other Applications
If you experience difficulty in using Snapshot files with other applications, it
may be because you are trying to incorporate a snapshot from a grayscale or
color monitor into an application that can only handle black-and-white images.
Raster files have three dimensions: height, width, and depth. Black-and-white
raster files are I-bit deep. Grayscale and color raster files are usually 8-bits
deep. True color raster files are 24-bits deep. If you take a snapshot on a 4-bit
screen, it is saved as an 8-bit raster file.
You can see the depth of a raster file by typing file rasterfilename in a
Shell Tool or Command Tool prompt, or by selecting the file from the File
Manager and displaying the Information window. In the example shown in
Figure A-3, the listing shows the file properties for all files ending in . rs. As
you can see from the listing, there is one 8-bit raster file (snapshot. rs) and
the rest are I-bit files.
552
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
A
[42]castle{winsor % file *.rs
cmdtoolmenu.rs: rasterfile, 461x236xl standard format image
samplesnap.rs: rasterfile, 114x285xl standard format image
snapshot.rs:
rasterfile, 250x287x8 standard format image
ssprintmenu.rs: rasterfile, 463x126xl standard format image
ssprintwindow.rs:
rasterfile, 293x322xl standard format image
sssnapmsg.rs:
rasterfile, 461x236xl standard format image
sswindow.rs:
rasterfile, 461x236xl standard format image
[43]cast 1e{wi nsor}% +
Figure A-3
-I
~
Example of a File Command Listing
The best way to convert an image to the same depth as your monitor is to use
Image Tool. You can take the snapshot, View it, and use Save as to select b&w
as the number of colors. Refer to Chapter 13, "Image Tool."
Tape Tool Troubleshooting
This section describes some common problems you may encounter with the
Tape Tool, and it offers possible solutions.
Checksum Errors
If you receive a checksum error when reading files from a tar tape, there may
be a mismatch between the block size on the tape and the block size you
specify.
To correct the block size, choose Block I/O from the Tape Tool Properties
window. In the text field that appears, type the correct block size (the one from
the tape).
Files Not Written to Specified Directory
If you retrieve files from a tape and they are not copied to the destination
directory you specify, list the contents of the tape to see if the file names are
preceded by an absolute path name. When you retrieve files that have an
absolute path name, that path is used as the destination directory.
Solaris Troubleshooting
553
Tape Drive Not Recognized
If you add a tape drive after the initial system installation, shut down your
system and at the OK prompt type:
boot -r
to reconfigure the system to include the tape device name.
In the past the tape device name / dey / r s t 8 existed in your system
configuration even if you did not have a tape drive hooked up. Now, tape
device names are not automatically included in your system configuration
unless a tape drive is hooked up at the time of installation.
Open Windows Troubleshooting
You may occasionally receive an error message or encounter some of the
following problems described here. This section offers some possible solutions
to these described problems.
1. OpenWindows startup fails, and you receive this error message:
$OPENWINHOME/bin/openwin command not found
If you receive this error inessage, you need to check to ITlake certain that
OPENWINHOME is properly set to point to the location in which the
OpenWindows software was installed. Refer to Chapter 17, "Customizing the
Solaris Environment" or the Solaris 2.2 Basic Installation Guide for assistance in
setting up your environment.
2. The OpenWindows software starts up but some or all of the applications are
not available.
If you experience this problem, you need to make certain that your path is set
such that $OPENWINHOME/bin precedes the rest of your path entry.
554
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
core Files
Occasionally, you may find that a process or application fails, leaving a file
named "core" in the directory from which you began the process. A core file
can take up a lot of disk space, so it is a good idea to provide information to
your system administrator regarding the failed program and the location of the
core file for analysis, and, once it is analyzed, delete it.
If you are not certain what process or application failed, open a shell window,
and do the following at your system prompt, substituting your directory name
for core.directory:
example% cd core. directory
example% file core
(Change directory to the location of the core file.)
You will receive a message in that shell that tells you the origin of the core
file. Provide this information to your system administrator.
Those with knowledge of the operating system software may want to analyze
the core file on their own. Information regarding two basic debugging tools is
available in the man pages for adb and dbx.
Blank Screen
If you have set the screensaver option (described in Chapter 17, "Customizing
the Solaris Environment") and your screen turns blank, you can restore your
desktop by moving the mouse in any direction. Although input from any
keyboard key or mouse button will restore your screen, it is advised that you
move the mouse instead. This is because pressing a key creates system input
which means, as an example, that if the pointer is positioned in a text file, you
may insert a character in the text.
Jumbled Text Characters
If you are running applications of several different types (SunView and
OpenWindows applications, for instance), the characters you type in a window
may occasionally appear jumbled.
To solve this problem, place the pointer in the workspace background, and
choose Workspace ~ Utilities ~ Reset Input.
Solaris Troubleshooting
555
Problems with. xini trc
If you have an . xini trc file in your home directory and you are seeing
problems with applications that rely on global OpenWindows resource
settings, one method of troubleshooting is to rename the file to
. xini trc. orig and restart OpenWindows.
If this solves your problem, you need to either merge changes between the
system version (located in /usr / openwin/ lib/xini trc) and your .xinitrc
or remove it if it is no longer needed.
Window Damage
Artifacts-or remnants of other windows-sometimes remain on a window
when overlapping windows are cleared away. This is known as window
damage. To redraw the screen, choose Workspace >- Utilities >- Refresh.
Momentarily, the artifacts will be cleared.
If the damage occurs to one application window only, you can refresh that
application window by choosing Refresh from the pop-up menu in that
window's header.
Window Frozen when Opening an Application
If you opened an application from the command line in a Shell Tool or
Command Tool window, as in the example below, you may find that your
window freezes up.
I
example% emdtool
The best way to open any DeskSet or other XView application on the command
line is to append the command with the ampersand (&). For example:
I example%
cmdtool &
This starts the application Ifin the background" so that the parent window from
which you started the application is free for further use.
556
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Window Does Not Accept Input
If you position your pointer in a text window (such as in Text Editor or the
Mail Tool Compose subwindow), and when you begin typing the text you type
does not appear in the window, it is likely that the window is inactive, and you
must click SELECT in the window to activate it.
Note that the insert point in a text window changes in appearance depending
upon whether that window is active or inactive. If the insert point is active it
looks like a triangle. If it is inactive, it looks like a dimmed diamond.
Figure 19-24 shows an insert point that is active, and one that is inactive.
Active
----.I..
+----
Inactive
Figure 19-24 Active and Inactive Insert Points
You can modify your Workspace Properties so that a window's input area
automatically becomes active when you move the pointer into it, enabling you
to bypass the step of clicking SELECT in the window. This works for the base
window-an application's main window-but in some cases, such as the Mail
Tool's Compose subwindow, you always need to click SELECT in the window
to activate it. See Chapter 17, "Customizing the Solaris Environment", for more
information.
Workspace Properties Troubleshooting
These are problems you can experience while using the Workspace Properties.
Property Settings Are Not Preserved Across Sessions
This is due to an obsolete. xini trc file. For more information, refer to
"Problems with .xinitrc" on page 556.
Colors Settings Are Not Taking Effect
If changes you made for the window foreground, data area foreground and
background, then it might mean that XView doesn't respond to these resources
yet.
Solaris Troubleshooting
557
5A
Thytos~window.color.foregroundandwindow.color.backgroundin
$HOME/ . Xdefaul ts
manually for XView applications.
Message Regarding Colormap Usage
From the Color Properties, if you receive a message about colormap usage and
the program can't continue, it might mean the colormap is full.
Try to exit the application(s) that make heavy use of colormap resources,
restart the Properties and try again.
F01Jts "f,xtend Beyond Button Boundaries, Layouts Appear
Mlsallgned
Some programs don't properly handle all font scales.
Icon Backgrounds Don't Match Workspace Pattern
XView applications control the icons, they don't use bitmaps.
Color Category Missing
Color settings availability is dependant on hardware.
558
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Glossary
Abbreviated menu button
A menu button that is displayed as a small square with a hollow triangle
inside the border. The triangle points downward when the menu is displayed
below the menu button, and to the right when the menu is displayed to the
right. Abbreviated menu buttons function just like menu buttons.
ADJUST mouse button
The middle mouse button on a three-button mouse, which is used to adjust
(extend or reduce) the selection.
Application
A tool, program, or window that provides the user with particular capabilities,
such as sending electronic mail, printing files, or interacting with the operating
system.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A standard data
transmission code used to achieve compatibility between data devices. ASCII
text is plain text that contains no formatting information (such as font style,
size, etc.).
Background
An underlying area on which objects, such as controls and windows, are
displayed.
559
Base window
®
The primary window for an application.
TableMaker - NewF11e
o
~~~~
Basic pointer
An arrow pointing northwest that shows the mouse position on the Workspace.
Border box
The outline of a window or icon that is displayed while you move windows
and icons by dragging.
Bounding box
A rectangle displayed on the screen to define a region for selection.
Buffer
An area of memory used for the temporary storage of data as it is being
transferred from one location to another.
Button
(Print)
A one-choice element of a control area or a menu. Buttons are used to execute
commands (command button), display pop-up windows (window button), and
display menus (menu button).
Button menu
A menu that is displayed when the pointer is on a menu button and you press
the MENU mouse button.
Copy
Paste
560
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Cable
r
A cable on the scrollbar that represents the total size of the data you can view
in the pane. The elevator moves up and down the cable to show the position
of the view into the data.
Cable anchor
The button at each end of the scrollbar cable.
JrL
Calendar Manager
A DeskSet application supplied with the OpenWindows software package.
The Calendar Manager enables you to schedule appointments and reminders
for any future date and time.
Caret
A marker that indicates the insert point in windows that accept keyboard
input. An active caret (ready for text input) is a solid triangle that may blink.
An inactive caret is a dimmed diamond.
Change bars
I
Parity:
I Odd I EVet"1'l~
Vertical lines on the left side of property window panes that show that a
setting has been modified but not applied.
Check boxes
A nonexclusive setting that shows a check mark in a square box when the
setting is chosen.
Click
To press a mouse button once and release it without moving the pointer.
Click-to-Type
Another term for the Click SELECT Input Area property (see Workspace
Properties window) that requires you to click the SELECT mouse button in a
window pane to activate that window's input area. Contrast with Move
Pointer, definition 2.
Glossary
561
Clipboard
A system buffer that provides the means for keeping track of data that is cut or
copied. The Paste key is used to insert information from the clipboard into a
pane. See also Buffer.
Clock
1. The central timing device in a computer. 2. A DeskSet application (which
can be opened from the Workspace Programs submenu) used to show local or
international time.
Color map
An index of colors, implemented by an application. When the application is
opened, its color map is loaded into the hardware, and for each color used an
index number tells the hardware what color to display.
Command button
A button that is used to execute application commands (see Button).
(Print)
Command Tool
A window tool that provides a shell environment within a window that scrolls
both forward and backward, with use of a scrollbar. See Shell Tool.
Command window
o-iJ:lj
Browse
~
A pop-up window that is used to execute application commands or set
parameters.
Completion message
A status message in the footer of a window.
Console
The controlling terminal of a computer system that displays system messages.
Control area
~
562
SilmpleTooi
An unbordered region of a window where controls such as buttons, settings,
and text fields are displayed.
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Controls
Objects in a control area, a pane, or on a menu that are used to perform an
action. Controls include buttons, items on menus, exclusive and nonexclusive
settings, sliders, gauges, text fields, and check boxes. See also Dimmed
controls.
Current item
An active item in a scrolling list.
I Courier
Cut
To remove a selected object (or objects) from a window and store it on the
clipboard.
Default
1. The specified choice in a menu that is activated if the user clicks SELECT on
the menu instead of choosing an item with the MENU mouse button.
2. A choice or set of choices in a program, provided automatically if no other
choices are specified by the user.
DeskSet
A default set of productivity applications supplied with the OpenWindows
software package. File Manager, Calendar Manager, and Mail Tool are
examples of DeskSet applications.
Dimmed controls
/.-
.. .....
:.:~
:.~.:.:
.... .......
., ... ~' "...
:
.........
)
A control that is inactive. Its representation on a control area or menu is
dimmed to show that it cannot accept input from the mouse or the keyboard.
Directory
A division or level in a hierarchical file storage system that contains files and,
optionally, other directories.
Double-click
Pressing a mouse button twice rapidly as an accelerator that performs a
specific function without using a menu.
Drag
To press and hold down any mouse button while moving the pointer-and the
object under the pointer-on the screen.
Glossary
563
Drag and drop
An operation with the mouse and pointer used to select data within one
application and copy or move it to another location in that or some other
application.
Drag area
The area in the middle of the scrollbar elevator or slider.
Dragging modifiers
Keys on the keyboard that modify dragging actions when they are pressed in
conjunction with a mouse button.
Electronic mail
A facility that enables the exchange of information addressed to a particular
individual, or a group, using computer communications facilities.
Elevator
The part of the scrollbar that has up and down arrows and a drag area. The
elevator rides the scrollbar cable and shows the position of the view in the
pane relative to the total data available.
End boxes
0--0:::::)0
SrrLall rectarLgular buttorLS ort a slider that are used to set t]IC m.inirrLunl or
maximum setting.
Exclusive setting
I Apples
IOranges I
A control that is used for mutually exclusive settings and is shown by touching
rectangles. The chosen setting is shown with a bold border around it.
File
A collection of data stored on a disk and assigned a name.
File Manager
A DeskSet application that provides access to the file system through graphical
icons that represent various file types. File Manager can be used to load, store,
and browse through files from the Workspace and from within an application.
564
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
File server
A sophisticated form of disk server that maintains a complete logical file
system. Networked computer you can independently access information on
the file server. Contrast this hardware term with the software term window
server.
File system
In the case of the SunOS system software, a tree-structured network of files and
directories through which you can move to access the various files.
Footer
The bottom area of a window. The footer is used by an application for
information and error messages.
Foreground
The controls and the pane of a window.
Full size
To increase the size of a window to its maximum as determined by the
application. Full Size is an item on the window menu that allows you to
perform that function. After you make a window full size, the label in the item
toggles to Restore Size.
Glyph
A picture or graphical representation of an object.
Grab handles
m
FlO"
o
I]
The graphical shapes marking the edges of a window. Using the mouse and
pointer, you can grab the grab handles of the window to stretch or reduce its
size.
Header
The band across the top of every window. Each header has a centered title.
Base windows have a Window menu button on the left; pop-up windows have
a pushpin on the left.
Glossary
565
Help
Application Help: Pushpin
Use the pushpin to keep a pop-up window pinned
to the workspace for continued access.
An OPEN LOOK VI implementation that provides on-screen help for each
element in a window. The application provides help for application functions
and elements. The Help function is available from the keyboard.
Highlighting
A visual indication that an object is in a special state. In monochrome
implementations the visual indication is reverse video (white type on black). In
color implementations, highlighting color is a slightly darker shade of the
window color.
Hypertext
The name given to the ability to programmatically link two separate text nodes
(locations). When positioned at a hypertext node, you can go to the other node
by clicking the SELECT mouse button.
Icon
A small pictorial representation of a base window. Displaying objects as icons
conserves screen real estate while keeping the window available for easy
access.
Input area
The place on the screen that accepts keyboard input In click-to-type rllode
click SELECT to set the insert point in the input area. In Move Pointer mode,
move the pointer into pane; the area is then ready for input.
j
Insert point
The specific location in the input area where keyboard input is entered. When
the user sets the insert point, an active caret is displayed.
Keyboard accelerator
A key or sequence of keys on the keyboard that quickly perform specific menu
or application functions without using a menu.
Locale
A set of conventions that are unique to a geographical area and/ or language.
566
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Localization
The process of establishing information within a computer system that is
specific to the operation of particular native languages, local customs, and
character sets.
man
page
Another word for a reference manual page, an on-line resource for information
about tools, programs, commands, and applications.
Menu
A rectangle containing a group of controls. Menus are displayed in two ways:
from a menu button with choices appropriate to the menu button label (button
menu) and from any place on the screen that is not a control (pop-up menu).
The pop-up menu displays choices appropriate to the pointer location.
Copy
Paste
Menu button
(Menu Button
\J)
A multiple-choice control. A menu button always has a menu mark and is used
to display a menu.
Menu item
Menu Item I>
An item on a menu with a menu mark pointing to the right that is used to
display a submenu.
Menu mark
A hollow triangle in the border of a button or following a menu item that has
a submenu attached to it. The triangle points to where the menu or submenu is
displayed.
MENU mouse button
The right mouse button that is used to display menus. (Unless you have
switched the order of the buttons with xmodmap, in which case MENU and
SELECT are swapped.)
Message
Information generated by an application that informs you about the status of a
process.
Glossary
567
Mouse
An electronic or mechanical device that is used to select and manipulate
information on a computer screen.
Move
To remove selected text or graphics from a window and put it on the clipboard.
Also, to change the location of selected windows, icons, text, or graphics by
dragging to a new location.
Network
A system of interconnected computer workstations and servers.
Nonexclusive setting
I Bold II
Italic
I
A list of nonexclusive choices indicated by separated rectangles. The chosen
settings are surrounded by a bold border.
Notice
Window that is displayed when an application generates warning and error
messages that require an action before you can proceed. A Notice blocks input
to the system until you click on one of its buttons.
You have unsaved edits.
00 you want to save them
before loading the new file?
~(Dl5card)
...
Numeric field
A text input field, with increment and decrement buttons, that is used for
numeric input.
OPEN LOOK
1. A registered trademark of AT&T.
2. The graphical user interface specification upon which the OpenWindows
design is based.
Palette
A set of coordinated colors provided for defining the color of the Workspace,
window background, selection, and caret.
568
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Pane
The quick brown fox jumped
over the lazy dog .•
~
__________________
~
A bordered rectangle in a window where the application displays its data.
~C
Paste
To insert data from the clipboard into a window. Selected data is placed on the
clipboard with the Copy or Cut key.
Path name
An identifier for the position of a file or directory within the file system. For
instance, if the location of OPENWINHOME is /usr / local/bin, then
/usr / local/bin is the path name.
Pinned menu
~
P05ition
CD
'0
,J.
C
+-
tt
A menu that has its pushpin pushed in. A pinned menu is a pop-up window
that remains on the Workspace until you dismiss it by clicking SELECT on the
pushpin.
+t
--+
~
Pixel
An abbreviation for "picture element," the smallest unit that can be displayed
on a computer screen.
Pointer
Any graphic representation of the location of the input focus on the screen.
Pointer jumping
When the pointer automatically moves to a specific location, such as to a popup window.
Pop-up menu
Text
~
Cut
A menu accessed by pressing the MENU mouse button on any area of the
Workspace that is not a control. The menu that is displayed depends on the
location of the mouse pointer.
Copy
Paste
Paginate
Glossary
569
Pop-up window
A window that is displayed to perform a specific function and is then
dismissed. Command windows, property windows, help windows and Notices
are all pop-up windows.
Pop-up window menu
Window
~
Back
The window menu that is displayed when you press the MENU mouse button
in a window.
Refresh
Owner?
PostScript
A programming language used to produce text and graphics on a printer or
display, originated by Adobe Systems.
Press
To push and hold a mouse button.
Prompt
The location at which you enter commands. This is often the machine's host
name, followed by a percent sign, such as:
example%
When you are in "superuser" mode, the percent sign changes to a pound sign:
example#
If the window server is not running, there is one prompt on the screen. If the
window server is running, you can access the prompt by opening any terminal
emulator window, such as a Shell Tool or Command Tool.
Properties
Characteristics of an object that you can customize, such as the color of a
window. The OpenWindows Properties Window is available from the
Workspace menu.
Property window
A pop-up window that is used to set properties associated with an object, an
application, or a window.
570
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Pushpin
Used to keep a menu, property window, or command window displayed on
the screen.
Raster file
A data file containing an image composed of an array of picture elements
(pixels) composed of consecutive lines, similar to the scans on a television
screen.
Reference manual page
See
man
page.
Refresh
The process of redisplaying the information on a display screen. Refresh, an
option on the Utilities submenu of the Workspace menu, should be used if
there are spurious characters or artifacts from dismissed windows on the
Workspace.
Release
To stop pressing a mouse button.
Resize corner
Areas that provide an unconstrained resizing of the boundaries of the window,
without changing the scale of the contents of the window. Only windows that
can be resized have resize corners. See grab handles.
Root window
The highest level window in the window system.
Screensaver
A utility that blanks the display screen after a predetermined length of time.
The screensaver feature reduces image burns on the display screen. You move
the mouse on its pad to clear the screens aver and return to the Workspace.
Scrollbar
CJ
A control that is used to move the view of the data displayed in the pane.
I
~I
I
CJ
Glossary
571
Scrollbar menu
A pop-up menu associated with each scrollbar that is used to reposition the
data in the pane.
Scrollbar
~ Here to Top)
'Top to Here
Previous
Split View
Join Views
Scrolling
Moving through data that cannot be viewed entirely in a pane.
Scrolling button
An abbreviated button, with a solid triangular arrowhead inside the border,
that is used for scrolling.
Scrolling list
Font:
Avante Garde
~
1,-,1~:-:-~t",--U~i=i;r_ _--,II ~
Helvetica
Modern
A pane containing a list of items. The list can be read-only or it can be edited.
I
I
' - -_ _ _...... 0
SELECT mouse button
The left mouse button which is used to choose objects, set the insert point,
manipulate controls, and drag objects. (Unless you have switched the order of
the buttons with xmodmap, in which case SELECT and MENU are swapped,)
Server
1. In a computer network, a unit that provides a specific service (such as data
storage and compute services) to network users.
2. A program that provides input and display services for window system
client applications. See File server and Window server.
Settings
I Draw I Paint
~ I Italic II Underscore
572
Controls for choosing predetermined values (see Exclusive setting and
Nonexclusive setting).
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Shell Tool
A window tool that provides a shell environment within a forward scrolling
window only. See Command Tool.
Shrink
To resize a window so that its area is reduced.
Slider
-0====
A control used to set a value and give a visual indication of the setting.
Magnify Help
Application Help: Pushpin
A brief message pertaining to the object under the pointer when the user
presses the Help key.
Use the pushpin to keep a pop-up window pinned
to the workspace for continued access.
Status message
Information generated by an application that informs you about the progress
of a process.
Submenu
A menu that displays additional choices under a menu item on a menu.
Text duplicate pointer
The pointer that is displayed when you duplicate text directly by dragging.
Text field
An area in a window into which you type text from the keyboard.
File Name:
-"D"'-o"-c.;;;..1"-,j,,___- - -
Text move pointer
The pointer that is displayed when you move text directly by dragging.
Text region
A multi-line area in a window into which you type text from the keyboard.
Glossary
573
Tool
An application or utility program used to enhance productivity on the Sun
Workstation.
Undo
To return an object to its state before you performed the last operation. The
number of levels of undo are determined by the application.
Wastebasket
A DeskSet tool that is bound to the File Manager application and is used as a
temporary repository for deleted files.
Window
A rectangle containing application elements. See also Base window and Pop-up
window.
Window border
The part of the window, including the header, footer, and sides of the window,
that you can use to select a window, set the input area, move by dragging, and
display the window menu.
Window button
A button that is used to display a window containing additional controls.
( Addressee", )
Window manager
The window manager is a special program that handles the arrangement of
windows on the screen. It allows you to open, close, move, and resize
windows. It also provides facilities, such as the Workspace menu, for starting
and stopping application programs.
Window menu
Window
~Clo5e
'Full Size
Properties ...
The menu that is accessed from the background of a window. Pop-up windows
have a window menu with slightly different choices than those of the base
Window menu.
Back
Refresh
Quit
574
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Window menu button
The abbreviated menu button that is always displayed at the left of the header
in each base window and can be used to execute the default setting on the
window menu (by clicking the SELECT mouse button) and to display the
window menu (by pressing the MENU mouse button).
Window server
The program that coordinates output from application programs and input you
provide through the mouse and the keyboard to display windows on your
screen. The window server in the OpenWindows software is called the
XlI/NeWS Server because you can run either Xll- or NeWS-based application
programs.
Workspace
The background screen area on which windows and icons are displayed.
Workspace menu
o
-():{I Workspace
The menu from which the DeskSet applications and utilities can be opened.
" Programs
I> )
Utilities
I>
Properties ...
Exit
Workspace Properties window
The Property window accessed from the Workspace menu through which you
customize the Workspace environment .
. Xdefaul ts file
An OpenWindows file in the your home directory that stores the current
properties of the Workspace. These properties include the color of the
Workspace and windows, the locations of icons, and so on. The. Xdefaul ts
file can be edited either with the Workspace Properties window available from
the Workspace menu, or directly edited using a text editor.
Glossary
575
576
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Index
Symbols
A
% Calculator key, 307
&16 Calculator key, 320
&32 Calculator key, 320
(Calculator key, 307
) Calculator key, 307
* , wildcard search, 88
+ / - Calculator key, 307
· ealetoolre file, 310
· desksetdefaul ts file, 322
· rna i 1 re file, 218
· text_extras_rnenu file, 145,146
· textswre file, 147
· wastebasket, 93
.Xdefaults file, 145,322
jete/aliases file, 215
/var / spool /rnai 1 file, 550
< Calculator key, 320
> Calculator key, 320
Abbreviated Header, Mail Tool, 158
Abs Calculator key, 307
absolute value, 307
Ace Calculator key, 308
accelerator keys, 489
Access List and Permissions
properties, 264
Accuracy (Ace key), Calculator, 308
Add Tree's Parent, File Manager, 64
adding and deleting text, 139
ADJUST, xxxi
ADJUST mouse button, 8
Again, Edit menu, 133
Alarm controls, Calendar Manager, 234,
237
alarm, Clock, 299
aliases
local, 217
private, 215
All Entries, Binder, 454
allnet, Mail Tool, 218
And Calculator key, 320
AND, logical, 320
AnswerBook
bookmarks, 529
Numerics
l/x Calculator key, 307
10l\x Calculator key, 321
577
searching, 523
application
default, 11
See also applications by their
respective names, 34
starting, 34
application icon, File Manager, 57
Application text field, Binder, 460
appointment
reminders, 240
scheduling, 235
appointment list
Calendar Manager, 229
appointments
Appointment Editor, 231
pop-up window, 232
deleting, 238
editing, 239
finding, 241
repeating, 236
scheduling, 231
Appt/ToDo, Calendar Manager, 233
arc cosine function, Calculator, 321
arc sine function, Calculator, 321
arc tangent function, Calculator, 321
arithmetic precedence, 307
Asc Calculator key, 307
ASCII, 307
ASCII text editor, 127
attached file
caution about executables, 176
attachments, Mail Tool, 151, 174
adding, 180
attachments pane, 162
deleting, 185
drag and drop, 196
moving, 183
opening, 175
printing, 164
renaming, 182
sending, 178
Audio Control
Auto-Adjust button, 381
578
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Play window, 378
Record window, 379
Audio Tool, 347 to 382
Auto play on load, 376
Auto play on selection, 376
Confirm on new /load, 376
converting audio files, 369
cursor location, 360
deleting, 355
drag and drop target, 361
drag and drop to Mail Tool, 358
Edit menu, 373
editing an audio file, 354
file conversion window, 369
File menu, 364
Fwd (fast forward) button, 363
inserting audio data, 372
loading a file, 367
loading an audio file, 350
Open window
illustration, 367
Play button, 362
play position pointer, 361
playing an audio file, 350
pointer location, 360
Rec (record/ stop) button, 363
recording sound with, 351
Rev (reverse) button, 362
saving an audio file, 353,369
sending voice mail, 356
Silence detection, 376
Silence threshold, 376
sound segments, 362
status information, 361
stop (Play) button, 362
stop (Rec) button, 363
Temp file directory, 376
Auto play on load, Audio Tool, 376
Auto play on selection, Audio Tool, 376
Auto-Adjust button, Audio Control, 381
Automatically Display Headers, 199
B
Background Color, Binder, 460
background color, Binder, 460
Backspace, Calculator, 308
base window, 29
Audio Tool, 349,359
Binder, 452
Calcula tor, 302
Clock, 292
Command Tool, 282
features, 15
File Manager, 56
Icon Editor, 429
Performance Meter, 330
Print Tool, 338
Shell Tool, 287
Snapshot, 422
Tape Tool, 384
Text Editor, 128
Bcc, Mail Tool, 161
Beep setting, Calendar Manager, 234,237
Begin Tree Here, File Manager, 64
Binder, 451
All Entries, 454
background color, 460
base window, 452
bindings, 451
changing, 471
creating, 467
deleting, 471
Color Chooser, 473
database, 453
entries
network, 454
private, 453
system, 454
Entry Types, 453
icon, 452
Icon field, 458
image file, 458
image mask, 459
Local Entries, 454
Mask File, 459
open application, 460
Pattern, 463
print method, 461
properties, 456
Index
File Type properties, 461
Icon properties, 457
Save button, 452
Shared Entries, 454
tag mask, 466
tag offset, 465
tag type, 466
tag value, 466
troub Ie shooting
can't start Binder as root, 454
View button, 452
binding, 451
blank screen, 555
Block 1/0, Tape Tool, 393
bookmark, creating, 529
Browse menu, 256
browse menu
deleting a user, 250
browser calendars
adding users, 248
adding users to the access list, 266
changing access list, 267
deleting users from access list, 267
browsing calendars, 243
browsing remote calendars, 256
Bsp Calculator key, 308
c
calctool man page, 322
. cal~toolrc file, 310
Calculator
.calctoolrc file, 310,301
accuracy
Acc key, 308
base window, 302
basic keys
%,307
+/-, 307
l/x, 307
Abs, 307
Acc, 308
Asc, 307
Base, 302 to 304
579
Bsp, 308
Clr, 308
Con, 309
Disp, 304
Exch, 309
Exp, 307
Frac, 307
Fun, 309
Int, 306
Keys, 308
Mem, 309
Mode, 305
parentheses, 307
Quit, 308
Rcl, 309
Sqrt, 307
Sto, 309
xJ\2, 307
financial keys
Ctrm, 313
Ddb, 314
Fv, 314
Pmt, 315
Pv, 316
Rate, 316
SIn, 317
Syd, 318
'T'~~~
~C;~~~L,
'210
J1-./
function keys, 322
functions
user defined, 309
icon, 302
keyboard equivalents, 311,322
keyboard mapping, 308
logical keys
&16, 320
&32, 320
«shift left), 320
> (shift right), 320
And, 320
Not, 320
Or, 320
Xnor, 320
Xor, 320
memory registers, 308
miscellaneous functions, 307
580
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
modes, 302
basic, 305
financial, 312
logical, 319
scientific, 320
performing calculations, 310
scientific keys
10J\x, 321
Cos, 321
eJ\x, 321
Hyp, 321
Inv, 321
Ln, 321
Log, 321
Rand,321
Sin, 321
Tan, 321
Trig, 320
x!,321
yJ\x, 321
specifying precedence, 310
troubleshooting, 540
user defined functions, 309
Calendar Manager, 221
introduction, 39
Alarm options, 237
Appointment Editor, 231
Alarm controls, 234
appointments scrolling list, 233
Appt/ToDo setting, 233
Date field, 232
My Eyes Only, 233
Repeat controls, 234
Start field, 232
What field, 233
appointments
appointment list, 229
appointment template, 277
deleting, 238
editing, 239
finding, 241
scheduling, 231
scheduling appointments for
multiple calendars, 251,
253
base window elements, 235
browse access list
adding calendars, 266
changing, 267
deleting calendars, 267
Browse menu, 256
adding a calendar, 248
deleting a calendar, 250
browsing remote calendars, 243,256
current day, 223
date formats, 269
day boundaries, 262
drag and drop, 242,276
icons, 222
Multi-Browser
Goto button, 245
Mail button, 245
multi calendar display, 246
Sched ule button, 245
scheduling appointments, 251
scrolling browse list, 245
selecting a week to browse, 250
navigation controls, 225
permissions, 265
printer settings, 268
properties, 259
Access List and Permissions
properties, 264
Category menu, 260
Date Format properties, 269
day boundaries, 262
Default View, 263
Display Settings properties, 262
Editor Defaults properties, 260,
261
hour display, 263
Printer Settings properties, 268
reminders
Beep, 234,237
Flash, 234, 237
Mail, 234,237
PopUp, 234,237
scheduling appointments, 235
time zone, 258
ToDo list, 229
views, 222
Index
appointment list view, 229
day view, 226
ToDo list view, 229
week view, 227
year view, 229
Calendar template, 169,214
Capitalize, Text Editor, 136
caret, 9
Cc, Mail Tool, 161
change arithmetic sign, 307
Change Line Wrap, 131
changing
appointments, 239
binding, 471
day boundaries, 262
changing default menu item, 14
characters, jumbled, 555
checksum, 394
checksum error, 553
Circle, Icon Editor, 432
Clear log, 283
Clear log, Command Tool, 283
Clear, Calculator, 308
Clear, Icon Editor, 445
Clear, Mail Tool, 161
Click ADJUST, definition, 8
Click SELECT, definition, 8
click, definition, 8
clicking mouse buttons, how to set timeout period, 494
Click-to-Type, 500
Clip Lines, Text Editor, 132
clipboard, 133
clipboard, File Manager, 78
Clock, 291
Alarm settings, 299
base window, 292
changing timezone, 296
customizing, 292
icon, 291
keyboard accelerators, 299
properties, 293
581
troubleshooting, 546
closing
Help Viewer, 53
Navigator, 518
Viewer, 518
window, 27
Clr Calculator key, 308
em_delete, 279
em_insert, 279
em_lookup, 279
Cmd Modes submenu, 284
collisions, 332
color
brightness, 484
hue, 484
in Workspace and windows, 481
saturation, 484
Color Chooser, Binder, 473
Color Chooser, Icon Editor, 448
color X pixmap image, 442, 446
command interpreter, 282
Command Tool, 282
Clear log, 283
editing command line, 285
File Editor menu, 284
History, 283
icon, 282
Mode Setting, 283
pop-up menu, 283
Scrolling menu, 284
Store log, 283
term pane menu, 283
troubleshooting, 290
Compose menu
Mail Tool, 155
composing email, 166, 167
compounding periods, 313
Con calculator key, 309
Confirm on new /load, Audio Tool, 376
Console, 290,512
constants, Calculator, 309
context switches, 332
control area, 15
582
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Copy, Edit menu, 133
copying
files, 62, 77
mail messagesMail Tool
messages
copying, 154
text, 140
your email messages, 207
copying files
cut and paste, 78
eore file, 555
Cos Calculator key, 321
COS, cosine function, Calculator, 321
ep i 0 command, 383
Create Folder, 60
creating
binding, 467
calculator functions, 312
links, 95
local aliases, 217
mail files, 189
mail messages, 155
new files, 76
snapshot, 423
templates, 169,213
text, 129
text file, 137
cropping an image
Image Tool, 408
cross-reference links, 522
Ctrm Calculator key, 313
current folder, File Manager, 69
Custom Buttons, Mail Tool, 199
Custom Commands, File Manager, 60,112
custom field, 206
customizing
Calculator, 326
Clock, 292
clock
time zone, 296
default menu item, 14
File Manager, 99
font scale, 485
fonts, 485
interval between mouse clicks, 494
Mail Tool, 197
mouse
click time-out, 494
press (whether menu selection is
automatic), 497
Performance Meter, 332
pointer jumping, 495
scrollbars, 501
Text Editor, 145
type styles, 485
Viewer, 535
Workspace, 478
customizing your Text Editor, 145
Cut, Edit menu, 133
Cut, File Manager, 62
cutting and pasting text, 141
D
data file, 57
Date field in Calendar Manager, 232
Date Format properties, 269
day boundaries, 262
day view, 226
printing, 271
day view, Calendar Manager, 226
Ddb Calculator key, 314
dead .let ter file, 551
default
how to change on a menu, 14
locations of icons, 501
menu choice, 14
how to change, 14
default ring on menus, xxxi
default view of Calendar Manager, 263
defaul t I app Binder entry, 465
defaul t I dir Binder entry, 465
defaul t I doc Binder entry, 465
Degrees, 320
delete
data, from sound file, 355
Index
drag and drop method, 22
file, in Text Editor, 139
text, in Text Editor, 139
Delete method, File Manager, 101
deleting
appointments, 238
binding, 471
files, 62,92
mail messages, 154
messages, 172
Deliver, Mail Tool, 161
depreciation allowance, 314
DeskSet applications
introduction, 34
starting, 35
. desksetdefaul ts file, 322
Destination field, Tape Tool, 385
Destination Machine, 86
Destination Path, 86
Device field, Tape Tool, 393
Disable Page Mode, 289
disk traffic, 332
Display Characters, Mail Tool, 199
Display Headers, Mail Tool, 199
Display Lines of Text, Mail Tool, 202
Display Settings, Calendar Manager
properties, 262
displaying files, File Manager, 63,110
Done, Mail Tool, 153, 185
Dot files, File Manager, 107
double-click, definition, 8
drag and drop, 17
Audio Tool, 361
Calendar Manager, 276
File Manager, 79,95
File Manager to Mail Tool, 178
File Manager to Print Tool, 86
File Manager to Tape Tool, 384
from Audio Tool to Mail Tool, 358
from File Manager to Print Tool
icon, 340
from File Manager to Tape Tool, 388
from Text Editor, 139
583
mail attachments, 178, 180, 183, 196
mail onto File Manager, 81
mail to Calendar Manager, 242
mail to Print Tool, 165
Mail Tool, 195,276
Print Tool, 337
problems, 548
Tape Tool, 384
target, 18
Text Editor, 143, 144
Text Editor to Mail Tool, 179
Text Editor to Print Tool, 141
drag area, on scrollbar, 16
drag, definition, 9
dragging and dropping
Image Tool, 416
drag-right distance, 496
E
el\x Calculator key, 321
Edit, 373
Edit menu
Audio Tool, 373
Binder, 453
File Manager, 62
Icon Editor, 445
Mail Tool, 154
Text Editor, 133
edit menu
Image Tool, 419
editing
appointments, 239
audio file, 354
command line in Command Tool, 285
list files, 385
Mail Tool properties, 208
text file, 139
Editor Defaults, Calendar Manager, 261,
269
editors
Text Editor, 37
vi, 37
Ellipse, Icon Editor, 432
584
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Empty Document, Text Editor, 130
Empty Wastebasket, 94
Enable Page Mode, 288
ENG (engineering display notation),
Calculator, 304
Enter Function, 311,312
Erase, Icon Editor, 435
Err Exit, Tape Tool, 394
error messages
Image Tool, 416
Error, calculator, 540
jete/aliases file, 215
Exch Calculator key, 309
Exclude, Tape Tool, 394
Exp Calculator key, 307
exponential calculator function, 321
exponents, 307
extracting files from tape, 390
Extras menu, 136
F
factorial calculator function, 321
File, 364
file
copying onto tape, 388
creating, in Text Editor, 137
editing, in Text Editor, 139
extracting from tape, 390
saving, in Text Editor, 138
viewing
in Text Editor, 138
saved mail messages, 205
file and folder properties, File Manager
group, 97
name, 97
ownership, 97
permissions, 97,99
File Editor menu, Command Tool, 284
File Manager, 55
introduction, 37
base window, 56
clipboard, 78
copying files, 62, 77
cut and paste, 78
creating folders, 60
creating new files, 76
current folder, 69
Custom Commands, 112
customizing, 99
Delete Method, 101
deleting files, 56,62,92,94
displaying files, 56,61,63,69,110
by Content, 109
double-click accelerators, 59
drag and drop, 79
Edit menu, 62
Empty Wastebasket, 94
File menu, 60
file pane, 56, 72
file properties
group, 97
name, 97
owner, 97
permissions, 97, 99
Find pop-up window, 89
finding files, 60,87,90
Hidden files, 107
icon, 55
icons, 57
applications, 57
data file, 57
folder, 57
linking files, 55,95
Longest File Name, 103
moving data files to workspace, 79
moving files, 77
cut and paste, 78
moving files to a folder, 79
moving files to another
application, 81
moving folder to workspace, 80
naming a document or folder, 77
opening files, 60,75
path display, 69
path pane, 56
path that is displayed, 70
printing files, 60,86
properties, 94,97,114,116
Index
changing file properties, 99
file, 97 to ??
file and folder properties, 97
File Properties window, 98
folder, 97
Tool Properties, 114 to 116
Tool Properties Window, 114
removing files, 56,92
renaming files, 77
Select All, 62
selecting files, 58
subfolders, 69
transfering files, 55
transferring files, 86
tree display, 63
troubleshooting, 547
copying files on remote
systems, 548
drag and drop error, 548
files not displayed, 548
icons not displayed, 547
view By Content takes too
long, 548
using Goto, 88
View Filter Pattern, 116
View menu, 61
Wastebasket, 92
File menu
Audio Tool, 364
Binder, 452
File Manager, 60
Icon Editor, 441
Mail Tool, 153
Text Editor, 129
file menu
Image Tool, 417
file pane, File Manager, 56, 72
File Properties window, 98
file properties, File Manager
date accessed, 97
date modified, 97
file type, 97
free space, 98
mount point, 98
mounted from, 98
585
open method, 97
print method, 97
file system, 37
File to Write button, Tape Tool, 385
File Type Properties, Binder, 461
files
deleting, 92
linking, 95
Fill menu, Icon Editor, 439
financial functions, 312
Find and Replace pop-up window, 133
Find Marked Text item, Text Editor, 135
Find menu, Text Editor, 133
Find pop-up window, 173
Find pop-up window, File Manager, 89
Find Selection, Text Editor, 134
Find, File Manager, 60
Find, mail messages, 154
finding
appointments, 241
files, 87, 90
mail messages, 154,173
FIX (fixed point display notation),
Calculator, 304
Flash setting, Calendar Manager, 234,237
flipping an image
Image Tool, 409
Focus-Follow-Pointer, 500
folder, 57
fonts
changing default, 486
customizing, 485
listing, 486
scale, 485
Foreground Color, Binder, 459
format lines of text, Text Editor, 136
Forward, Mail Tool, 155
Frac Calculator key, 307
Full Header, Mail Tool, 158
Fun calculator key, 309
function keys, 491
Function Keys utility, 506
586
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
functions
financial, 312
logical, 319
miscellaneous Calculator, 307
scientific, 320
user defined Calculator, 309
future value of investment, 314
Fv Calculator key, 314
Fwd (fast forward) button, Audio
Tool, 363
G
Goto text field, 88
Gradients, Calculator, 320
Grid Display, Icon Editor, 444
group
change file properties, File
Manager, 99
H
Header menu button, Mail Tool, 161
help
closing Help Viewer, 53
handbooks, 43
magnify, 43
paging through handbook, 50
using hypertext in handbooks, 52
Help button
Image Tool, 416
Hidden Files, File Manager, 107
Hide Snapshot During Capture, 423
Hide Subfolders, File Manager, 64
Hide, Mail Tool, 159,202
History, Command Tool, 283
$HOME variable, 208,210
Host Name, Tape Tool, 393
hot spot, 18
Hyp Calculator key, 321
hyperbolic cosine function,
Calculator, 321
hyperbolic function flag, Calculator, 321
hyperbolic sine function, Calculator, 321
hyperbolic tangent, 321
hypertext links, 522
I
icon
introduction, 6
default location, 501
application, 57
Binder, 452
Calculator, 302
Calendar Manager, 222
Clock, 291
Command Tool, 282
data file, 57
File Manager, 55
folder, 57
Icon Editor, 429
Mail Tool, 42
Mail Tool, Compose window, 160
Mail Tool, Header window, 150
moving, 25
Navigator, 518
Performance Meter, 329
Print Tool, 337
Shell Tool, 287
Snapshot, 422
Tape Tool, 383
Text Editor, 127
Viewer, 518
Icon Editor, 429
adding text to canvas, 433
base window, 430
canvas, 430
clearing the canvas, 445
Color Chooser, 448
color controls, 439
color X pixmap, 442
control area, 430
drawing controls, 430,431
drawing mode, 431
circle, 432
ellipse, 432
erase, 435
Index
line, 432
point, 431
region, 435
square, 432
text, 432
editing icon, 436
erasing in drawing canvas, 438
fill choices, 439
formats, 442,446
color X pixmap, 446
Monochrome X pixmap, 442,446
X bitmap, 442, 446
Xview icon, 442,446
grid, 444
icon, 429
icon size, 446,447
Invert, 446
menus
Edit menu, 445
Properties menu, 446
View menu, 443
move buttons, 440
preview area, 430
printing, 442
Image File, Binder, 458
Image Tool, 395
controls, 417
cropping, 408
dragging and dropping, 416
edit menu, 419
file menu, 417
flipping, 409
formats, 398
help button, 416
icon, 396
information, 401
multiple page documents, 412
open as, 400
opening an image, 397
palette, 407
panning, 407
printing, 405
properties, 415
rotating, 410
save as, 403
587
save page as Image, 404
save selection as, 404
saving an image, 401
standard operations, 419
view menu, 418
View window, 396
zooming, 411
image tool, 395
Include File, Text Editor, 129
Include, Mail Tool, 161
input area
click SELECT before typing, 500
definition, 9
Focus-Follow-Pointer, 500
Insert, 137
Insert Brackets, Text Editor, 137
insert point, 9
Int Calculator key, 306
integer, 306
international keyboard, 507
Introducing Your Sun Desktop tutorial, xxx
Inv Calculator key, 321
inverse function flag, 321
inverse hyperbolic cosine function,
Calculator, 321
inverse hyperbolic sine function,
Calculator, 321
inverse hyperbolic tangent, 321
Invert, Icon Editor, 446
J
jumbled characters, 555
K
keyboard
erase functions, 490
function keys, 491
international, 507
move caret functions, 490
navigation commands, 492
keyboard accelerators
588
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Clock, 299
Performance Meter, 336
keyboard equivalents
Calculator, 311,322
Keys, 308
keys
accelerator, 489
L
left-handed use
of mouse buttons, 494
Line, Icon Editor, 432
link, 95
creating, 95
removing, 96
linking files, File Manager, 55,95
links, 522
list files, Tape Tool, 384
Ln Calculator key, 321
In command, 95
Load In-Box, 153, 185
loading a file
Audio Tool, 367
Icon Editor, 441
loading a file, in Text Editor, 138
Local Entries
Binder, 454
localization, 502
Lock Screen utility, 511
Log Calculator key, 321
Log Samples, Performance Meter, 335
Log, Mail Tool, 161
logarithm
base 10, 321
natural, 321
logical functions, 312,319
logical mode, 319
logical shift left, 320
Longest File Name, File Manager, 103
M
Magnify button, 535
Magnify help, 43
Mail File Directory, 209
Mail File menu, 188
Mail File text field, 155
Mail Files menu item, 153
Mail setting, Calendar Manager, 234,237
Mail Tool, 149
introduction, 41
attachments, lSI, 174
adding, 180
attachments pane, 162
deleting, 185
drag and drop, 196
moving, 183
opening, 175
printing, 164
renaming, 182
sending, 178
Show Attachment List, 206
commiting changes, 185
composing messages, 166,167
custom buttons, 153, 155, 199
custom header fields, 206
customizing, 197
drag and drop, 165,178,183,195,196,
276
headers
Reply-To header, 206
Return-Receipt-To, 206
icons, ISO, 160
In-Box location, 551
loading In-Box, 195
lock file, 550
Mail File menu, 155
mail files, 186
adding messages to, 191
creating, 189
deleting, 193
emptying, 193
Mail File directory, 209
Mail File menu, 188
Mail File text field, 155
Index
Mail Files menu item, 153
Mail Files window, 186
renaming, 193
sorting, 193
viewing, 192
menus
Compose menu, 155
Copy menu, 188,210
Edit menu, 154
File menu, 153
Load menu, 188,210
Messages menu, 156
Move menu, 188,210
View menu, 154
message headers, lSI, 158
messages
creating, 155
deleting, 154, 172
finding, 173
forwarding, 155
organizing, 186
printing, 164
recovery, 551
replying, 155
undeleting, 154, 172
viewing, 156, 158, 159
Precedence junk headers, 206
printing messages, 164
properties, 197,208
Alias properties, 215
allnet, 218
Automatically Display
Headers, 199
Category menu, 197
Compose Window
properties, 203
Custom Buttons, 199
custom header fields, 206
delivery properties, 199
Display Characters, 199
Display Headers, 199
Display Lines of Text, 202
Expert properties, 217
Header Window, 198
Hide, 202
Ignore host name in address, 218
589
Include me when I "Reply to
All", 218
mail arrival properties, 198
Mail Filing properties, 208
Message Window
properties, 201
metoo, 218
Move, Copy, Load menus, 210
Print Script, 202
Retrieve Every, 198
Show "To recipient", 199
Show Attachment List, 206
Signal With, 198
template properties, 213
reading messages, 169
running multiple versions of Mail
Tool, 549
saving changes, 185
templates, 169
troubleshooting, 549
running out of disk space, 551
Vacation, 155
vacation notifier, 170
viewing saved messages, 205
Voice button, 161
windows
Compose window, 159
menu
introduction, 10
button, 13
changing default choice, 14
default choice, 14
Programs, 11
secondary, 11
window, 12
Workspace, 10
customizing, 14
MENU mouse button, 8
menu, Workspace, 35
menus, xxx
message header, 158
selecting, 152
Messages, 154
metoo, Mail Tool, 218
miscellaneousCalculator functions, 307
Mod Time, Tape Tool, 394
Mode setting, Command Tool, 283
Mode, on History menu, 283
modifying OpenWindows defaults, 478
Monitor settings, Performance Meter, 333
Monochrome X pixmap image, 442, 446
month view
printing, 274
Find window, 173
Mail File windows, 192
Mail Files window, 187, 189, 191
Properties window, 197
Vacation Setup window, 170
View Message window, 156
Mail Tool, templates, 213
man page
adb(I), 555
date(I), 291
dbx(I), 555
Mask File, Binder, 459
Mem Calculator key, 309
memory registers, Calculator, 308
Memory, Calculator, 309
MENU, xxxi
590
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
more command, 288
mouse, xxx
introduction, 7
buttons
SELECT, ADJUST, MENU, 8
customizing click time-out, 494
customizing press (whether menu
selection is automatic), 497
how to use, 8
keyboard substitution, 489
remapping for left-handed users, 494
move buttons, Icon Editor, 440
move, definition, 9
moving
data files to workspace, File
Manager, 79
files, 77
files to a folder, File Manager, 79
files to another application, File
Manager, 81
folder to workspace, File Manager, 80
moving files
cut and paste, 78
moving icons, 25
moving windows, 23
multi-click timeout, 494
My Eyes Only, Calendar Manager, 233
N
Name, calculator function, 311
naming document or folder, File
Manager, 77
natural logarithm calculator function, 321
Navigator
closing, 518
icon, 518
modes
Bookmarks, 529
Search, 523
quitting, 518
New, Mail Tool, 155
NewDocument, File Manager, 76
New Folder, File Manager, 76
Next, Mail Tool, 154
No Check, Tape Tool, 394
No SCCS+, Tape Tool, 393
No SCCS, Tape Tool, 393
noauth OpenWindows option, 454
Not Calculator key, 320
NOT, logical, 320
number bases, 302
Binary, 303
Decimal, 303
Hexadecimal, 303
Octal, 303
o
octal (base number mode), Calculator, 303
Index
on-line help, 43
open
icon into a window, 7
text file, 138
OPEN LOOK, xxix
Open window, Audio Tool, 367
opening
files, 60
folders, 60
Image Tool files, 397
opening files, File Manager, 75
OpenWindows
overview of features, 5
reducing use of mouse, 489
$OPENWINHOME
error message, 554
Or Calculator key, 320
OR, logical, 320
organizing mail messages, 186
Orig Mode, Tape Tool, 394
owner
change file properties, File
Manager, 99
p
page overview
Image Tool, 412
page viewing controls
Image Tool, 413
Palette
Image Tool, 407
pane
terminal emulator, 288
text editing, 156
panes, splitting, 142
Panning
Image Tool, 407
parent directory, 63
parentheses, Calculator, 307
password, 3
Paste, Edit menu, 133
Paste, File Manager, 62
591
Path Commands menu, File Manager, 70
path pane, File Manager, 56, 69
path, File Manager, 69
Pattern, Binder, 463
pattern-matching, 88
percentage, 307
perfmeter man page, 539
Performance Meter, 329
customizing, 332
displays, 334
dial, 330
icon, 329
keyboard accelerators, 336
Log Samples, 335
monitoring remote machine, 334
monitors, 333
needles, 330
Properties window, 332
Sample Time, 335
Show collisions, 332
Show context, 332
Show cpu, 331
Show disk, 332
Show errors, 332
Show interrupts, 332
Show load, 332
Show packets, 331
Show page, 331
Show swap, 331
performing calculations, Calculator, 310
periodic interest rate, 316
periodic payment calculation, 315
permissions
files and folders, 97, 99
group, 99
owner, 99
world, 99
Play button, Audio Tool, 362
Play window, Audio Control, 378
playing sound, with Audio Tool, 350
+ / - Calculator key, 307
Pmt Calculator key, 315
Point, Icon Editor, 431
592
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
pointer
introduction, 7
and input area, 500
drag distance,. 496
jumping, 9
list of types, 7
movement on scrollbar, 495
on pop-up windows, 496
pop-up menu, 283
PopUp setting, Calendar Manager, 234,
237
pop-up window menu, 12
Precedence junk header, Mail Tool, 206
present value calculations, 316
Press MENU, definition, 8
Pretty-print C code, 137
Previous, Mail Tool, 154
Print Method, Binder, 461
Print Script, Mail Tool, 202
Print Tool, 337
introduction, 40
base window, 338
drag and drop, 337,341
features, 41
how to stop a print job, 343
icon, 337
printer
choosing, 341
default, 346
queue status, 342
status messages, 339
troubleshooting, 552
Printer Settings, Calendar Manager, 268
printing, 86
day view, 271
drag and drop, 165,337
File Manager, 60,86
icons, 442
mail messages, 153,164
mail messages with Print Tool, 341
month view, 274
queue status, 342
Text Editor files, 141
week view, 273
year view, 275
Printing Images, 405
program names, 35
Programs menu, 11
Programs submenu, 35
programs, See application
prompt, 16
properties
Binder, 453,456
Calculator, 326
Calendar Manager, 259
changing file properties, File
Manager, 99
day boundaries, 262
default view, 263
file and folder, File Manager, 97
for the Workspace, 478
Icon Editor, 446
Image Tool, 415
Mail Tool, 154, 197
Performance Meter, 332
Tape Tool, 385
template, 213
pushpin, 12
Pv Calculator key, 316
Q
Quit Calculator key, 308
quitting
Help Viewer, 53
Navigator, 518
Viewer, 518
window, 27
R
Radians, Calculator, 320
Rand Calculator key, 321
random number calculator function, 321
Rate Calculator key, 316
Rcl Calculator key, 309
Read Entire List, Tape Tool, 387
Read Entire Tape, Tape Tool, 388
Index
read files from tape, 387
read files, Tape Tool, 384
Read Selected, Tape Tool, 387
Read settings, Tape Tool, 394
reading email, 169
Rec (record/stop) button, Audio Tool, 363
Recall, Calculator, 309
Record window, Audio Control, 379
recording sound, with Audio Tool, 351
Refresh utility, 505
Region, Icon Editor, 435
Register Exchange, Calculator, 309
registers, Calculator memory, 308
release (mouse button), definition, 9
remainder, 307
Remote Copy pop-up window, 85
Remote Copy, File Manager, 60
Remove, 137
Remove Brackets, Text Editor, 137
removing links, 96
renaming files, File Manager, 77
repeat appointments, 236
Repeat field, Calendar Manager, 234
Replace text, Text Editor, 135
Reply, Mail Tool, 155
Reply-To header, Mail Tool, 206
resizing windows manually, 26
Retrieve Every, Mail Tool, 198
Return-Receipt-To header, Mail Tool, 206
Rev (reverse) button, Audio Tool, 362
Root, 63
rotating an image
Image Tool, 410
s
Sample Time, Performance Meter, 335
Save Changes, 153
Save Changes, Mail Tool, 185
Save Workspace utility, 511
saving
593
Audio Tool files, 353,369
Image Tool files, 401
Mail Tool changes, 185
text file, 138
SCI (scientific display notation),
Calculator, 304
scientific functions, 320
screen
blank, 555
how to lock, 511
how to unlock, 511
scrollbar
and pointer movement, 495
elements of, 16
modifying location, 501
Scrolling submenu, Command Tool, 284
searching
in the Navigator, 523
SELECT, xxxi
Select All, File Manager files, 62
Select Line at Number, Text Editor, 130
SELECT mouse button, 8
selecting
message header, 152
Sending Messages, 186
Shared Entries, Binder, 454
Shell Tool, 287
base window, 287
Disable Page Mode, 289
Enable Page Mode, 288
icon, 287
stop sign pointer, 289
term pane menu, 288
Shift Lines, Text Editor, 137
shift right, 320
Show "To recipient", Mail Tool, 199
Show All Subfolders, File Manager, 64
Show Attachment List, 206
Show Attachment List, Mail Tool, 206
Show Caret at Top, Text Editor, 130
Show collisions, Performance Meter, 332
Show context, Performance Meter, 332
594
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
Show cpu, Performance Meter, 331
Show disk, Performance Meter, 332
Show errors, Performance Meter, 332
Show Errs, Tape Tool, 393
Show interrupts, Performance Meter, 332
Show load, Performance Meter, 332
Show packets, Performance Meter, 331
Show page, Performance Meter, 331
Show swap, Performance Meter, 331
Signal With, Mail Tool, 198
Silence detection, Audio Tool, 376
Silence threshold, Audio Tool, 376
Sin Calculator key, 321
SIN, sine function, Calculator, 321
size of windows, modifying, 26
SIn Calculator key, 317
Snap Type, 422
Snapshot, 422
base window, 422
capturing screen pointer, 423
creating a snapshot, 423
Hide Window During Capture, 423
icon, 422
Snap Delay, 423
snapping a region, 424
snapping the screen, 425
snapping window, 423
timer, 423
troubleshooting, 552
types, 422
viewing, 426
Sort By, Mail Tool, 154
sorting
mail files, 193
splitting panes, 142
splitting text panes, 142
Sqrt Calculator key, 307
square root, 307
Square, Icon Editor, 432
* , wildcard search, 88
Start field, Calendar Manager, 232
starting
an application, 11, 34
starting applications, 35
starting the vacation notifier, 171
status messages
Image Tool, 416
status, print queue, 342
Sto Calculator key, 309
stop (Play) button, Audio Tool, 362
stop (Rec) button, Audio Tool, 363
stop sign pointer, Shell Tool, 289
stopping the vacation notifier, 171
stopwatch, 298
Store log as new file, 283
Store log, Command Tool, 283
Store, Calculator, 309
straight-line depreciation, 317
Strip Path, Tape Tool, 385,394
sub folders, File Manager, 69
Subject field of mail header, 161
submenu, 11
sum-of-the-years' -digits depreciation, 318
Suppress, Tape Tool, 394
Syd Calculator key, 318
Sym Links, Tape Tool, 393
symbolic links, Tape Tool, 393
T
Tag Mask, 466
Tag Offset, 465
Tag Type, 466
Tag Value, 466
Tan Calculator key, 321
TAN, tangent function, Calculator, 321
Tape Tool
introduction, 383
adding a file to write, 385
base window, 384
copying files onto tape, 388
destination, 385
drag and drop, 384
Index
drag and drop from File
Manager, 388
extracting files from tape, 390
File to Write button, 385
Host Name, 393
icon, 383
list files, 384
editing, 385
properties, 385,392
read files, 384, 387
Read menu, 387
reading files from tape, 387
Strip Path option, 385
tape device, 393
troubleshooting, 553
Write settings, 393
writing files to tape, 384,388
tar command, 383
teletype (tty) interface, 287
Temp file directory, Audio Tool, 376
templates, 169
Calendar template, 277
creating, 169,213
properties, 213
using, 169,213
Templates submenu, Mail Tool, 169
lQ1'x Calculator key, 321
Term Calculator key, 319
terminal emulator pane, 288
Text
Find and Replace, 133
text
adding and deleting, 139
copying, 140
cutting and pasting, 141
text editing panes, 156
Text Editor, 127
introduction, 36
base window, 128
Change Line Wrap, 131
Clip Lines, 132
control area, 128
creating a text file, 137
customizing, 145
595
drag and drop, 141,143
editing a text file, 139
emptying document, 130
File menu, 129
Find and Replace window, 133
Find Marked Text, 135
Find Selection, 134
icon, 127
Include File menu item, 129
loading a text file, 138
menus
Edit menu, 133
Extras menu, 136
Find menu, 133
View menu, 130
printing files, 141
Select Line at Number, 130
shifting lines, 137
Show Caret at Top, 130
splitting panes, 142
text
capitalizing, 136
creating, 129
finding, 135
format, 136
inserting brackets, 137
removing brackets, 137
replacing, 135
text pane, 128
What Line Number?, 130
text pane, 128
Text, creating in Icon Editor, 432
text/ terminal emulator pane, 282
, 146
. text_extras_menu file, 145
. textswrc file, 147
time zone
Calendar Manager, 258
timezone, on clock display, 296
To field in mail header, 161
ToDo list
Calendar Manager, 229
transfer files, File Manager, 86
transferring files, File Manager, 55
596
Salaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
tree, File Manager, 69
Trig Calculator key, 320
trigonometric base, 320
trigonometric functions, 320
troub Ie shooting
Calculator, 540
Clock, 546
Command Tool, 290
File Manager, 547
Mail Tool, 549
Print Tool, 552
Snapshot, 552
Tape Tool, 553
truncate calculations, 320
tty interface, 287
type styles, customizing, 485
u
umask, Tape Tool, 394
undeleting
messages, 154,172
Undo
Icon Editor, 445
Undo, Edit menu, 133
unlocking your screen, 511
user defined functions, Calculator, 309
user name, 2
username.lock, 550
using
local aliases, 217
templates, 169,213
v
vacation notifier, 170
starting, 171
stopping, 171
Vacation, Mail Tool, 155
Value, calculator function, 312
/var / spool/mail file, 550
vi editor, 37
View Filter Pattern, File Manager, 116
View menu
Binder, 454
File Manager, 61
Icon Editor, 443
Mail Tool, 154
Text Editor, 130
view menu
Image Tool, 418
View Message window, Mail Tool, 158
Viewer
closing, 518
customizing, 535
functions, 517
icon, 518
links, 522
Magnify button, 535
printing a document, 536
quitting, 518
viewing
mail, 156
snapshots, 426
viewing mail
multiple messages, 159
next message, 158
previous message, 158
with full header, 158
Voice button, Mail Tool, 161
voice mail
listening to, 358
sending, 356
w
Wastebasket, 22, 92
creating new, 94
. wastebasket, 93
week view
printing, 273
week view, Calendar Manager, 227
What field in Calendar Manager, 233
What Line Number?, Text Editor, 130
wildcard search, 88
window, 6
introduction, 5
Index
base, 29
buttons, 17
click SELECT before typing (click-totype mode), 500
closing and quitting, 27
fixing display, 556
menu, 12
move pointer to type, 500
moving front or back, 24
pane, 13
prompt, 16
repositioning, 23
resizing manually, 26
snapshots, 423
window controls, 15
Window Controls utility, 509
windows, xxx
Workspace
definition, 5
how to save setup, 511
menu
how to display, 10
Properties, 478
icon locations, 501
menu drag distance, 496
Workspace menu, 35
world
change file permissions, File
Manager, 99
world Calendar Manager
permissions, 265
wrap
change line wrap, 131
character, 131
clip lines, 132
word, 132
Write settings, Tape Tool, 393
writing files to tape, 384, 388
x
X bitmap, 442,446
x! Calculator key, 321
x/\2 Calculator key, 307
597
· Xdefaul ts file, 145,322
Xnor Calculator key, 320
XNOR, logical, 320
Xor Calculator key, 320
XOR, logical, 320
Xview icon, 442, 446
y
y"x Calculator key, 321
year view
printing, 275
year view, Calendar Manager, 229
z
zooming an image
Image Tool, 411
598
Solaris 2.2 User's Guide-May 1993
801-3659-10
Re\;sion Aof May 1993
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2015:09:18 11:27:25-08:00 Modify Date : 2015:09:18 11:10:54-07:00 Metadata Date : 2015:09:18 11:10:54-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:8bb8499a-b502-e747-b335-49d901828956 Instance ID : uuid:faa841eb-f6ac-3e41-ae5c-81d6ef445c76 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 632EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools